401 610 055v1

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Release 25.
0 Input Messages Volume 1 ABTHELP
401-610-055 Issue 28 August 2005 Lucent TechnologiesProprietary This document contains proprietary information of Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements. Copyright 2005 Lucent Technologies Unpublished and Not for Publication All Rights Reserved
Copyright 2005 Lucent Technologies

This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the express written consent of Lucent Technologies and the business management owner of the material.
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Mandatory Customer Information

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.
Security Statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecomunications network through the use of remote access features. In such events, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for trafc. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowence or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Trademarks
All trademarks and service marks specified herein are owned by their respective companies.
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary See notice on rst page
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005
401-610-055 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ID ............. TABLE-OF-CONTENTS TYPE .......... Input
Table of Contents
1. About This Document 1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................... 1 1.2 Prerequisite Skills ............................................................................ 1 1.3 Documentation on the Web ........................................................... 1 1.4 To obtain documentation, training, and technical support or submit feedback ......................................................... 2 1.5 Technical Support ........................................................................... 2 1.6 Reason for Reissue .......................................................................... 2 1.7 Description of Table Information ................................................. 2 1.7.1 Feature ID Column ........................................................... 2 1.7.2 Feature Name Column ..................................................... 3 1.7.3 Message ID Column ......................................................... 3 1.7.4 Format Impact Column .................................................... 3 1.8 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature ......... 5 1.9 Index by Message ID of changes for Current Generic ............... 11 1.10 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature ....... 15 1.11 ECP 23.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature ....... 21 2. Getting Started 2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................... 1 2.2 Message Purpose ............................................................................. 1 2.3 Message Organization .................................................................... 2 2.4 Message Format .............................................................................. 2 2.5 Message Syntax ............................................................................... 3 2.5.1 Input Message Fields ........................................................ 5 2.5.2 Keywords ........................................................................... 5 2.5.3 Pathnames .......................................................................... 6 2.5.4 Format Notation ................................................................ 6 2.5.5 Format Examples .............................................................. 7 2.5.6 Use of Spaces ..................................................................... 8 2.5.7 Rules for Keying in Messages ......................................... 10
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 TABLE-OF-CONTENTS-1
401-610-055 TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.6 System Acknowledgements .......................................................... 10 2.7 List of Acronyms ............................................................................. 13 3. Input Indexes 3.1 Input Messages Index ..................................................................... 1 3.2 Functional Index.............................................................................. 31 Input Message Descriptions
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE TABLE-OF-CONTENTS-ii Issue 28
401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
CONTENTS 1.1 1.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 11 15 21
Prerequisite Skills .
1.3 Documentation on the Web . 1.4 1.5 1.6
To obtain documentation, training, and technical support or submit feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For technical support . Reason For Reissue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 Description of Table Information 1.7.1 Feature ID Column . . 1.7.2 Feature Name Column . 1.7.3 Message ID Column . . 1.7.4 Format Impact Column .
1.8 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature 1.9 Index by Message ID of changes for Current Generic
1.10 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature 1.11 ECP 23.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-i
This page intentionally left blank.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-ii Issue 28
ID ............. ABOUT-THISDOCUMENT TYPE .......... Input
Chapter 1 About This Document
1.1 Introduction The Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks Input Messages document describes the input messages available for use on the Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks systems. The messages included in this document represent complete documentation for the current issue. Only certain "recent change" messages associated with updating the generic program are not included. This document is organized into three major tab-divided sections:
Overview contains three chapters: "About This Document," "Getting Started," and "Input Indexes." "About This Document" describes the purpose, prerequisite skills, error reporting procedures, and related documents that pertain to this document. "Getting Started" describes the purpose, organization, and format for the input messages. Also, a list of Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks acronyms is included. "Input Indexes" contains two indexes. The rst one is an alphabetical list of all the input messages. The second list groups the input messages by unit and/or function. Flexent Input Message Descriptions contains the message documentation presented in alphabetical order by message name for all Flexent- specic input messages. Each message begins on a right-hand page with the individual descriptions grouped according to the message name prex. Input Message Descriptions contains the message documentation presented in alphabetical order by message name. Each message begins on a right-hand page with the individual descriptions grouped according to the message name prex.
1.2 Prerequisite Skills To derive maximum benet from the information presented in this document, you should be familiar with the Flexent /AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks systems. 1.3 Documentation on the Web The current release of the Flexent /AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks documentation is provided on the Lucent Technologies Wireless Networks customer technical support web site to all customers, free of charge. To access the site, please visit: http://wireless.support.lucent.com To provide the most current, complete, and technically accurate documentation to customers as quickly as possible, revisions and updates of information products on the current release of the 401-010-001 Flexent /AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks Electronic Documentation CD-ROM are SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-1

also provided on the site for all customers, free of charge. In some cases, new information products, or preliminary drafts of new information products are also posted on the site prior to release on the CD-ROM. For information on how to access the documentation on the web, see "Accessing documentation on the web" on the current CD-ROM. 1.4 To obtain documentation, training, and technical support or submit feedback The 401-010-001 Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks Documentation CD-ROM and web site provide a "To obtain documentation, training, and technical support, or send feedback" document. That document explains how to:

obtain technical support register as an authorized user of the Lucent Technologies customer technical support web site access the most current AMPS/PCS and related 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) documentation on the site order system and product documentation order training products or register for classroom training courses submit comments and feedback about documentation and training.
1.5 For technical support Lucent Technologies customer technical support provides technical support for all Flexent /AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks systems and products. For technical support, please call the following numbers: From the USA: 1-866-LUCENT8 (1-866-582-3688) From all other countries: 1-630-224-4672 Please be prepared to describe the specic problem in your Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks systems. An operator will either transfer your call directly to a customer technical support representative or forward your request to a representative, who will return your call as soon as possible. Service-affecting situations are always handled immediately. 1.6 Reason For Reissue Table 1-1 provides the reason for reissue for each new or changed input message by feature. 1.7 Description of Table Information 1.7.1 Feature ID Column Lists the feature numbers responsible for changes to the message listed. Also to save space, this column indicates if the message is NEW, DELETE or RENAME.

NEW MESSAGE means that this is a new message. DELETE MESSAGE means that this message has been either deleted from the manual entirely or has been renamed, and that the old Message ID is no longer being used and has been deleted.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-2 Issue 28
RENAME MESSAGE means that a Message ID was changed to a new Message ID. To do this the old ID is deleted, and a new ID is created. The message is marked RENAME to minimize the impact on customers. This way the user knows that the message itself has NOT changed, but the manual page name has changed. If the message has changed the information in the other columns will indicate this. Changed messages with no Message ID change have no entry in this column.
1.7.2 Feature Name Column Lists the features associated with changes to the message. 1.7.3 Message ID Column The Message ID is a unique identier that can be found in the key block in the upper right corner of the rst page of every message. Messages are alphabetized in the document according to the Message ID. 1.7.4 Format Impact Column Lists a "Y" if the changes have impacted the format. A "Y" in this column indicates that either the Format section itself has changed or one of the variables listed in the Format section has had additional parameters added or deleted. Sample table: Table x-x ECP xx.x New and Changed Input Messages by Feature _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _____________________________________________________________________________________ xxxx.x Feature Name AUD:TCS-NAME Y (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-ALARM Y (DELETE MESSAGE) TEST:BTS-RNC Y (RENAME MESSAGE) TST:BTS-RNC Y _____________________________________________________________________________________
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-3
1.8 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature Table 1-1 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 4263.0 Migrating DLN/SS7 Ring Nodes to the AP Platform MON:APSLK Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 4566.1 AMA Migration to AP Stage 2 COPY:AMATAPE Y (RENAME MESSAGE) COPY:AMATAPE-ECP Y LABEL:AMATAPE Y (RENAME MESSAGE) LABEL:AMATAPE-ECP Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:AMA-METADATA Y OP:AMA-SESSION Y (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-SESSION-ECP Y OP:AMA-TELEPRO Y (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-TELEPRO-ECP Y VER:AMATAPE Y (RENAME MESSAGE) VER:AMATAPE-ECP Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 4566.2 AMA Migration - Stage 3 (NEW MESSAGE) RMV:AP-AMA Y (NEW MESSAGE) RMV:AP-AMATPS Y (NEW MESSAGE) RST:AP-AMA Y (NEW MESSAGE) RST:AP-AMATPS Y (NEW MESSAGE) SWITCHOVER:AMA Y (NEW MESSAGE) SWITCHOVER:AMATPS Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 4566.3 AMA Migration - Stage 4 ABT:AMATAPE Y (RENAME MESSAGE) ABT:AMATAPE-ECP Y (DELETE MESSAGE) ALW:AMA-AUTOST Y (RENAME MESSAGE) ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP Y (DELETE MESSAGE) ALW:AMA-SESSION Y (RENAME MESSAGE) ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP Y BKUP:DATABASE Y COPY:AMATAPE (DELETE MESSAGE) INH:AMA-AUTOST Y (RENAME MESSAGE) INH:AMA-AUTOST-ECP Y (DELETE MESSAGE) INH:AMA-SESSION Y (RENAME MESSAGE) INH:AMA-SESSION-ECP Y _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-1 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ __________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 4566.3 INIT:AMA-DW Y INIT:AMA-DW-ECP Y LABEL:AMATAPE Y (RENAME MESSAGE) LABEL:AMATAPE-ECP (DELETE MESSAGE) OP:AMA-CONFIG Y (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-CONFIG-ECP Y (DELETE MESSAGE) OP:AMA-CONTROL Y (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-CONTROL-ECP Y (DELETE MESSAGE) OP:AMA-DISK Y (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-DISK-ECP Y (DELETE MESSAGE) OP:AMA-MAPS Y (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-MAPS-ECP Y OP:AMA-SESSION (DELETE MESSAGE) SET:AMA-CONFIG Y (DELETE MESSAGE) SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN Y (RENAME MESSAGE) SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN-ECP Y (RENAME MESSAGE) SET:AMA-CONFIG-ECP Y (DELETE MESSAGE) SET:AMA-CONTROL Y (RENAME MESSAGE) SET:AMA-CONTROL-ECP Y STOP:AMATAPE Y (RENAME MESSAGE) STOP:AMATAPE-ECP Y VER:AMATAPE (DELETE MESSAGE) WRITE:AMA-DATA Y (RENAME MESSAGE) WRITE:AMA-DATA-ECP Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 6015.13 Support of 1.2M Subscribers on a Flexent/AUTOPLEX System COPY:DB OP:ECP-AUD ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 8002.6 RNC Release 23 OAM Software feature. TST:PSU-RNC ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 8002.7 RNC Release 24 OAM Software feature COPY:RNCDB Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ AMA Migration - Stage 4 (DELETE MESSAGE) (RENAME MESSAGE)
Table 1-1 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ __________________________________________________________________________________________ 8168.1 Abutting Switch List (ASL) Alternative for Expanded Maximum SHO Universe on the 1X RNC ABT:ECP-AUD Y ALW:ECP-AUD Y AUD:ECP-NAME Y INH:ECP-AUD Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9021.0 TI Support for OMC-RAN ALW:RCMS INH:RCMS ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9054.1 Optional EIN R23 Phase (NEW MESSAGE) OP:EIN-ROUTEPOOL Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9054.3 AP EINE as Optional Equipage for RCS-APs and DNFS Hosts (NEW MESSAGE) OP:EIN-ROUTEPOOL Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.21 CDMA Unknown Feature OP:CTRC Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.24 Network Unknown Feature ALW:CELL Y AUD:CELL Y INH:CELL Y (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-SESSION-ECP OP:AMA-TELEPRO (RENAME MESSAGE) OP:AMA-TELEPRO-ECP ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.33 IMOM Cleanup ALW:CELL Y AUD:CELL Y EXC:CELL-RTDIAG Y INH:CELL Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.8 1XEV DO Feature Unknown RST:BTS-TFU ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.99 Verication FID with No Associated Feature INIT:CDN-DB OP:DCS-MRAQ ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-1 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10444.7 RNC Integrity Monitor (RIM) Phase 2 (NEW MESSAGE) ALW:RNC-ABREVC Y (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-ABREVC Y (NEW MESSAGE) INH:RNC-ABREVC Y (NEW MESSAGE) SWITCH:RNC Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10615.0 Automatic Protection Switching on the RNC (NEW MESSAGE) CLEAR:RNC-GICC Y (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-GICC Y (NEW MESSAGE) LOCKOUT:RNC-GICC Y (NEW MESSAGE) SWITCH:TOMATE-RNC-TPU Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10666.1 IP Backhaul for CDMA (Modcells 1, 2, 3 and 4) ABT:VCA-AUD Y (NEW MESSAGE) ALW:CELL-MLG Y ALW:VCA-AUD Y AUD:VCA-NAME Y CREATE:RCS DELETE:RCS (NEW MESSAGE) DUMP:CELL-AUTH-FAIL Y (NEW MESSAGE) INH:CELL-MLG Y INH:VCA-AUD Y INIT:VCA Y LABEL:AMATAPE Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:AP-IPBHINFO Y (Modcells 1, 2, 3 and 4) (NEW MESSAGE) OP:BHS-CELL Y OP:CELL Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:CELL-CSB Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:DCS-BHSSTAT Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:RNC-BHSSTAT Y RESTART:RCS SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU UNLOCK:RNC-TPU (NEW MESSAGE) UPDATE:AP-BPSN Y (NEW MESSAGE) UPDATE:CELL-BPSN Y VER:AMATAPE Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-1 ECP 25.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10674.2 IP Back Haul on the CDMA RNC GET:RNC-ABREVC Y GET:RNC-TPU-STATE Y LOCK:RNC-TPU Y SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU Y UNLOCK:RNC-TPU Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 11003.1 EV-DO Cell OA&M Convergence for Mixed Networks (NEW MESSAGE) CFR:CELL Y (NEW MESSAGE) FLUS:CELL Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:CELL-FLUS Y (NEW MESSAGE) STOP:FLUS-CELL Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 12064.0 Adaptive Paging BKUP:DATABASE Y COPY:DB Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 12084.0 1xEV-DO KTF RDAF 706301 Session Status Command (NEW MESSAGE) OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 12618.0 Idle Mobile Subscriber Location Trace (NEW MESSAGE) ALW:LSLTRC Y (NEW MESSAGE) INH:LSLTRC Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:LTRC Y ___________________________________________________________________________________________
1.9 Index by Message ID of changes for Current Generic Table 1-2 Index by Message ID of changes for Current Generic _ _______________________________________________________________________________________ Message ID Changes Description _ _______________________________________________________________________________________ ABT:AMATAPE Notes in PURPOSE section updated. Variable a now MT0 and MT1 instead of ST1 and ST2. System Response section redone. RENAMED - ECP version of ABT:AMATAPE-ECP Added to the Audit name list "RUESID2P". BHMDB added to variable a. DELETED - Renamed ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP RENAMED from ALW:AMA-AUTOST DELETED - Renamed ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP RENAMED from ALW:AMA-SESSION Values in the audit name table changed for: ARDCCH, CPAVAIL, CSCP, CSDL, FLCA, INTRPROC, OCQMICRO, OCQCCC, TURCUD, TUTRANS, TUUNEQ. NEW Added to the Audit name list "RUESID2P". NEW Added RL to System Response section. NEW BHMDB added to variable a. Values in the audit name table changed for: ARDCCH, CPAVAIL, CSCP, CSDL, FLCA, INTRPROC, OCQMICRO, OCQCCC, TURCUD, TUTRANS, TUUNEQ. Added to the Audit name list "RUESID2P". BHMDB added to variable a. New value for variable a "ADAPTPGDB", delete AMAMDDB. NEW NEW Message totally redone, consider NEW. RENAMED - ECP version of COPY:AMATAPE New value for variable a "ADAPTPGDB". Warning section almost completely redone, second paragraph in the Purpose section also rewritten. In Warning section changed the a/b/c list. Also added OP:ECD-AUD to the Input Message References section. RNC number or ALL added to the format. Purpose section redone. Last paragraph in Purpose section added. Last paragraph in Purpose section added. NEW Variable b listing redone for different cell types. NEW NEW
ABT:AMATAPE-ECP ABT:ECP-AUD ABT:VCA-AUD ALW:AMA-AUTOST ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP ALW:AMA-SESSION ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP ALW:CELL
ALW:CELL-MLG ALW:ECP-AUD ALW:LSLTRC ALW:RCMS ALW:RNC-ABREVC ALW:VCA-AUD AUD:CELL
AUD:ECP-NAME AUD:VCA-NAME BKUP:DATABASE CFR:CELL CLEAR:RNC-GICC COPY:AMATAPE COPY:AMATAPE-ECP COPY:DB
COPY:RNCDB CREATE:RCS DELETE:RCS DUMP:CELL-AUTH-FAIL EXC:CELL-RTDIAG FLUS:CELL GET:RNC-ABREVC
Table 1-2 Index by Message ID of changes for Current Generic (continued) _ _________________________________________________________________________________________ Message ID Changes Description _ _________________________________________________________________________________________ GET:RNC-GICC GET:RNC-TPU-STATE INH:AMA-AUTOST INH:AMA-AUTOST-ECP INH:AMA-SESSION INH:AMA-SESSION-ECP INH:CELL NEW Format 9 new. DELETED - Renamed INH:AMA-AUTOST-ECP RENAMED from INH:AMA-AUTOST DELETED - Renamed INH:AMA-SESSION-ECP RENAMED from INH:AMA-SESSION Values in the audit name table changed for: ARDCCH, CPAVAIL, CSCP, CSDL, FLCA, INTRPROC, OCQMICRO, OCQCCC, TURCUD, TUTRANS, TUUNEQ. NEW Added to the Audit name list "RUESID2P". NEW Added RL to System Response section. NEW BHMDB added to variable a. DELETED - Renamed INIT:AMA-DW-ECP RENAMED from INIT:AMA-DW Added additional information under descriptions for PRTLTDB and VLRCSTDB values. For variable a "bhm" value and description added to the list. Message totally redone, consider NEW. RENAMED - ECP version of LABEL:AMATAPE Variable d - DAT value added. Format 5 new. NEW Remove square brackets in format 1 Replace square brackets with curly brackets in format 4. DELETED - Renamed OP:AMA-CONFIG-ECP RENAMED from OP:AMA-CONFIG DELETED - Renamed OP:AMA-CONTROL-ECP RENAMED from OP:AMA-CONTROL DELETED - Renamed OP:AMA-DISK-ECP RENAMED from OP:AMA-DISK DELETED - Renamed OP:AMA-MAPS-ECP RENAMED from OP:AMA-MAPS NEW Message totally redone, consider NEW. RENAMED - ECP version of OP:AMA-SESSION Reference to the REPT-AMA-X25-DCI output message changed to the new REPT-AMA-TELE-SUM-ECP output message.
INH:CELL-MLG INH:ECP-AUD INH:LSLTRC INH:RCMS INH:RNC-ABREVC INH:VCA-AUD INIT:AMA-DW INIT:AMA-DW-ECP INIT:CDN-DB INIT:VCA LABEL:AMATAPE LABEL:AMATAPE-ECP LOCK:RNC-TPU LOCKOUT:RNC-GICC MON:APSLK OP:AMA-CONFIG OP:AMA-CONFIG-ECP OP:AMA-CONTROL OP:AMA-CONTROL-ECP OP:AMA-DISK OP:AMA-DISK-ECP OP:AMA-MAPS OP:AMA-MAPS-ECP OP:AMA-METADATA OP:AMA-SESSION OP:AMA-SESSION-ECP
Table 1-2 Index by Message ID of changes for Current Generic (continued) _ _________________________________________________________________________________________ Message ID Changes Description _ _________________________________________________________________________________________ OP:AMA-TELEPRO Message totally redone, consider NEW Change wording in the purpose to clarify that the summary is for the current day. RENAMED - ECP version of OP:AMA-TELEPRO Reference to the REPT-AMA-X25-DCI output message changed to the new REPT-AMA-TELE-SUM-ECP output message Change wording in the purpose to clarify that the summary is for the current day. NEW NEW NEW New value added to variable c - MLG. Minor descriptive text change. NEW NEW Remove format 6 and affected variables. NEW Changes the information found under the OK System Response. Added a Note to the EXPLANATION section and added COPY:DB to the Input Message Reference on the page. NEW NEW NEW Formatting problem in Warning xed. NEW NEW NEW NEW Remove lines in Note about if GPS and 1xEV-DO only used from APCLI, not true in 25.0. DELETED - Renamed SET:AMA-CONFIG-ECP DELETED - Renamed SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN-ECP RENAMED from SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN RENAMED from SET:AMA-CONFIG DELETED - Renamed SET:AMA-CONTROL-ECP RENAMED from SET:AMA-CONTROL Format 5 new. Notes in PURPOSE section updated Variable a now MT0 and MT1 instead of ST1 and ST2. System Response section redone. RENAMED - ECP version of STOP:AMATAPE NEW NEW
OP:AMA-TELEPRO-ECP
OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS OP:AP-IPBHINFO OP:BHS-CELL OP:CELL OP:CELL-CSB OP:CELL-FLUS OP:CTRC OP:DCS-BHSSTAT OP:DCS-MRAQ OP:ECP-AUD OP:EIN-ROUTEPOOL OP:LTRC OP:RNC-BHSSTAT RESTART:RCS RMV:AP-AMA RMV:AP-AMATPS RST:AP-AMA RST:AP-AMATPS RST:BTS-TFU SET:AMA-CONFIG SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN-ECP SET:AMA-CONFIG-ECP SET:AMA-CONTROL SET:AMA-CONTROL-ECP SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU STOP:AMATAPE STOP:AMATAPE-ECP STOP:FLUS-CELL SWITCH:RNC
Table 1-2 Index by Message ID of changes for Current Generic (continued) _ _________________________________________________________________________________________ Message ID Changes Description _ _________________________________________________________________________________________ SWITCH:TOMATE-RNC-TPU NEW SWITCHOVER:AMA NEW SWITCHOVER:AMATPS NEW TST:PSU-RNC Additional paragraph added to the Purpose section. UNLOCK:RNC-TPU Format 5 new. UPDATE:AP-BPSN NEW UPDATE:CELL-BPSN NEW VER:AMATAPE Message totally redone, consider NEW. VER:AMATAPE-ECP RENAMED - ECP version of VER:AMATAPE WRITE:AMA-DATA DELETED - Renamed WRITE:AMA-DATA-ECP WRITE:AMA-DATA-ECP RENAMED from WRITE:AMA-DATA _ _________________________________________________________________________________________
Tables 1-3 through 1-4 provide the reasons for reissue for earlier generics. These tables are for historical reference only. 1.10 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature Table 1-3 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _____________________________________________________________________________________ 3756.1 3G Operational Fault Detection (OFD) for Basic Access Overhead Channels ALW:CELL Y (NEW MESSAGE) CLR:CELL-OFD Y CLR:CELL-OFD Y INH:CELL Y INIT:CDN-DB OP:CELL-OFD Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 4566.2 AMA Migration - Stage 3 SET:AMA-CONFIG SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN _____________________________________________________________________________________ 6015.5 HVLR-AP Master DBs Conversion to ALX, Stage 2 ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD AUD:MSCDBMS INH:MSCDBMS-AUD _____________________________________________________________________________________ 8002.6 RNC Release 23 OAM Software feature (NEW MESSAGE) EXPORT:RNC-CONFIG Y (NEW MESSAGE) IMPORT:RNC-CONFIG Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 8002.7 RNC Release 24 OAM Software feature ALW:RNC-TPU-DGN Y (NEW MESSAGE) BKUP:RNCDB Y (NEW MESSAGE) COPY:RNCDB Y (NEW MESSAGE) DELBKUP:RNCDB Y GET:RNC-INSTALL (RENAMED MESSAGE) GET:RNC-PDSNLIST Y (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-PSPCF Y GET:RNC-TPU-DGNRES Y GET:RNC-TPU-INFO (DELETE MESSAGE) GET:RNC-TPU-PDSNLIST Y GET:RNC-TPU-STATE Y GET:RNC-TPU-VER-CON Y GET:RNC-TPU-VERSION Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-3 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 8002.7 RNC Release 24 OAM Software feature HALT:RNC-TPU INH:RNC-TPU-DGN Y INSTALL:RNC-TPU LOCK:RNC-TPU Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:RNCDB Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:TCS-AUD Y RESET:RNC-TPU Y SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU Y UNLOCK:RNC-TPU Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 8880.5 MCR - Phase 2 Deliveries OP:CELL Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9021.0 TI Support for OMC-RAN ALW:AP-HVLR ALW:AP-MMA ALW:CELL-DL ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD ALW:MSCDBMS-RCV AUD:MSCDBMS CFR:AP-DS1 CFR:AP-SS7 CFR:SS7 COMMIT:AP CREATE:MMA CREATE:RCS DELETE:MMA DELETE:RCS DGN:AP-DS1 DGN:SS7 INH:AP-HVLR INH:AP-MMA INH:CELL-DL INH:MSCDBMS-AUD INH:MSCDBMS-RCV INIT:AMA-DW INIT:AP OCNS:CELL Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-3 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9021.0 TI Support for OMC-RAN OP:AP-ALARM OP:AP-CMDS OP:AP-DS1-STAT OP:AP-DS1x-STAT OP:AP-INFO OP:AP-MMA-STAT OP:AP-MMAx-STAT OP:AP-RCS-STAT OP:AP-RCSx-STAT OP:AP-STATUS OP:AP-VERSION OP:CELL-DL Y OP:SS7x-STAT RESTART:MMA RESTART:RCS RMV:AP RMV:AP-DS1 RMV:AP-HVLR RMV:AP-HVLRIM RMV:AP-MMA RMV:AP-MSCDBMS RMV:AP-OAMPROXY RMV:AP-RNCDBMS RMV:AP-RNCM RMV:AP-ROP RMV:AP-SP RMV:AP-SS7MM RMV:AP-TCS RMV:AP-TPUGUI RMV:AP-VCA RMV:RCS RMV:SS7 RST:AP RST:AP-DS1 RST:AP-HVLR RST:AP-HVLRIM RST:AP-MMA RST:AP-MSCDBMS RST:AP-OAMPROXY RST:AP-RNCDBMS _ _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-3 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9021.0 TI Support for OMC-RAN RST:AP-RNCM RST:AP-ROP RST:AP-SP RST:AP-SS7MM RST:AP-TCS RST:AP-TPUGUI RST:AP-VCA RST:CELL RST:RCS RST:SS7 SELECT:AP STOP:MSCDBMS STOP:SS7 SWITCHBACK:FROMAP SWITCHOVER:AP SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY SWITCHOVER:RCS SWITCHOVER:RNCDBMS SWITCHOVER:RNCM SWITCHOVER:ROP SWITCHOVER:SP SWITCHOVER:TCS SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI SWITCHOVER:VCA _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9216.0 Tone/Announcement Expansion BKUP:DATABASE Y COPY:DB Y INIT:CDN-DB Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-3 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.33 IMOM Cleanup ABT:ECP-AUD Y ALW:CELL Y ALW:ECP-AUD Y AUD:ECP-NAME Y AUD:MSCDBMS CLR:CELL-OFD Y INH:CELL Y INH:ECP-AUD Y MON:AP-SLK SET:AMA-CONTROL _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.8 1XEV DO Feature Unknown INIT:BTS RST:BTS-TFU Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10394.2 FMM AP Support for Satellite CPU OP:AP-INFO Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:AP-INV Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10444.1 RNC Integrity Monitor (RIM) - Phase 1 (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-STATUS Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10621.0 OAM&P to support CDMA Packet Core Blade PCF TST:PSU-RNC Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10870.0 Remote T1 Monitoring EXC:CELL-CDM-DS1 (NEW MESSAGE) EXC:CELL-CDM-DS1 Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10880.0 Network Integration Testing for ECP Migration AUD:ECP-NAME _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 12048.2 Optical GIGE interface on the GICC for the 1x RNC application GET:RNC-INSTALL GET:RNC-TPU-FAILEDPVC Y GET:RNC-TPU-STATE Y LOCK:RNC-TPU Y SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU Y TST:BTS-RNC Y TST:PSU-RNC Y UNLOCK:RNC-TPU Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-3 ECP 24.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 12157.0 MSC to pass on display text to MS when received from ANSI41 messages ABT:CDN-AUD Y ALW:CDN-AUD Y AUD:CDN-NAME Y INH:CDN-AUD Y _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ RTR Real Time Reliable message changes CLR:PTN-MHD Y COPY:BKDISK Y (NEW MESSAGE) COPY:BKTAPE Y COPY:TAPE-TOP DUMP:BKTAPE Y OP:DFC-INFO Y OP:MHD-INFO Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:MSGCLS Y OP:MT-INFO Y VFY:FILE _ _____________________________________________________________________________________
1.11 ECP 23.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature Table 1-4 ECP 23.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _____________________________________________________________________________________ 4263.12 SS7-AP BERT test DGN:SS7 _____________________________________________________________________________________ 4263.17 SS7-AP Performance/ Capacity/Reliability Improvements - phase 2 CLR:SS7SRST Y OP:SS7APNET Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 5088.2 SDB Transport over Special Bearer Path (Base Station only) OP:CELL Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 6020.2 HVLR Enhancements (NEW MESSAGE) ALW:AP-HVLR Y (NEW MESSAGE) INH:AP-HVLR Y OP:AP-STATUS (DELETE MESSAGE) RESTART:AP-HVLRIM Y (NEW MESSAGE) RMV:AP-HVLRIM Y (NEW MESSAGE) RST:AP-HVLRIM Y (NEW MESSAGE) SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 8002.6 RNC Release 23 OAM Software feature. ALW:RNC-TPU-DGN Y ALW:TCS-AUD Y GET:RNC-ALARM GET:RNC-INVENTORY GET:RNC-TPU-DGNRES Y (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-TPU-FAILEDPVC Y GET:RNC-TPU-INVENT GET:RNC-VERSION (NEW MESSAGE) HALT:RNC-TPU Y INH:RNC-TPU-DGN Y INH:TCS-AUD Y TST:BTS-RNC TST:PSU-RNC _____________________________________________________________________________________ 8124.2 1xEV-DO OA&M Enhancements OP:BTS _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-4 ECP 23.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ 9054.1 Optional EIN - R23 Phase INIT:ECP Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9103.1 Integration of AP Commands with TI Stage 2 (NEW MESSAGE) HELP Y RST:CDN Y SELECT:AP Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9137.0 Base Conguration Required (mandatory migration features) for Retrot to ECP R23.0. RST:CDN Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.24 Network Unknown Feature DGN:AP-DS1 Y RMV:AP-DS1 Y RST:AP-DS1 Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.33 IMOM Cleanup ABT:CDN-AUD Y ALW:CDN-AUD Y AUD:CDN-NAME Y INH:CDN-AUD Y SELECT:AP Y SET:DB-SU Y SW:CELL _____________________________________________________________________________________ 9999.99 Verication FID with No Associated Feature DGN:SS7 Y EXC:CELL-RTDIAG Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10221.3 IOS BSC: Support for A3/A7 BKUP:DATABASE Y COPY:DB Y INIT:ECP-DB Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10621.0 OAM&P to support CDMA Packet Core Blade PCF GET:RNC-INSTALL Y (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-TPU-INFO Y (NEW MESSAGE) GET:RNC-TPU-PDSNLIST Y GET:RNC-TPU-STATE Y _____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-4 ECP 23.0 New and Changed Input Messages by Feature (Continued) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Feature Feature Name Message ID Format ID Impact _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ 10621.0 OAM&P to support CDMA Packet Core Blade PCF GET:RNC-TPU-VER-CON Y GET:RNC-TPU-VERSION Y INSTALL:RNC-TPU Y LOCK:RNC-TPU Y RESET:RNC-TPU Y SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU Y UNLOCK:RNC-TPU Y _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10680.0 Enhancements to failover and failback Capabilities (NEW MESSAGE) ALW:TP-AUD Y (NEW MESSAGE) INH:TP-AUD Y (NEW MESSAGE) OP:AP-PROCCFG Y (NEW MESSAGE) SWITCHBACK:AP Y SWITCHOVER:AP Y _____________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 GETTING STARTED
CONTENTS 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 2 3 5 5 6 6 7 8 10 10 13
2.2 Message Purpose
2.3 Message Organization . 2.4 Message Format . . .
2.5 Message Syntax . . . . . . 2.5.1 Input Message Fields . . 2.5.2 Keywords . . . . . . 2.5.3 Pathnames . . . . . . 2.5.4 Format Notation . . . . 2.5.5 Format Examples . . . 2.5.6 Use of Spaces . . . . . 2.5.7 Rules for Keying In Messages 2.6 System Acknowledgements 2.7 List of Acronyms . . . . . . .
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GETTING-STARTED-i
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GETTING-STARTED-ii Issue 28
ID ............. GETTING-STARTED TYPE .......... Input
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2.1 Introduction This chapter describes the input messages available for the Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks. The messages included in this document represent complete documentation for the current generic issue. Only certain "recent change" messages associated with updating the generic program are not included. This section is divided into the following major sections: Section 2.2 discusses the purpose of the input messages. Section 2.3 discusses the organization of the input messages within the document. Section 2.4 discusses the format of the input messages. Section 2.5 discusses the syntax of the input messages. Section 2.6 explains the system acknowledgements to the input messages. Section 2.7 contains a list of acronyms and their meanings. 2.2 Message Purpose The Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks input messages documented here control, maintain, and administer the switching and control systems. They provide variable data type inputs for functions that require a series of actions to be performed or reported. Examples of functions the system is requested to perform by input messages are:

Executing diagnostic and exercise programs, and reporting the results. Performing tests and reporting the results. Reporting the status of various subsystems. Reporting trafc information. Entering translation information into memory. Restoring units to service, or removing units from service.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GETTING-STARTED-1
Because several variables or options are inherent in these functions, many of the input messages are complex and have several valid forms or executable paths. Some messages can affect service; these should be used only during periods of light trafc.
2.3 Message Organization The messages are arranged alphabetically by message ID. The message ID appears on the bottom of each page with the page number. The message ID and message name are closely related, but the message ID is unique to that message. Many messages start with the same or similar message names. The message name appears in the upper right hand corner of the page. The message name consists of the action eld ( a verb such as COPY, LOAD, or INH) and an identication eld (such as CELL, AMA, or STATUS). These elds are discussed in section 2.5.1. 2.4 Message Format The descriptive material is presented under these headings:
Key Block Block of text in the upper right-hand corner on the rst page of every message description, below the message name. Message ID Unique ID for the message. Closely follows the message name, but limited in characters and MUST be unique to that message. The message ID also appears on the bottom of each page with the page number. Release Generic release the message is associated with. Type Species that this is an Input message.
Service-Affecting Messages - Input messages that may be service-affecting are agged with a caution statement adjacent to the key block on the rst page. An explanation of the conditions under which the message may be service-affecting is included. Purpose Gives a complete statement of the message purpose. Format Presents the message format. See Table 2-1 for a summary of rules. Explanation of Message Denes the variables used in the message. It may also dene keywords. It includes any additional notes or tables needed to clarify message use. System Response Explains the system response to each input message. This section of the message documentation describes responses that are not self-explanatory. Typical system acknowledgments are shown in Table 2-4. Acknowledgments may be followed by text explaining any special conditions or errors encountered while interpreting the message.
References Gives references to other input messages, output messages, or related documents.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GETTING-STARTED-2 Issue 28
2.5 Message Syntax Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks messages follow a specic syntax. These conventions are used throughout this document:
Constant width typeface is used for: system generated responses output messages/reports literals in text including path and lenames.
Constant width bold type face is used for keyboard input, (that is, input message format). Italic typeface is used for: place holders for user specied input; for example, OP:AMA;SESSION; a titles of other documents
Roman typeface is used for punctuation that is for documentation purposes only; for example, the brackets shown at [;UCL].
Input messages are structured as described in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Summary of Input Message Format _ _______________________________________________________________________________________ Term or Item Denition _ _______________________________________________________________________________________ _ _______________________________________________________________________________________ Field Basic structural unit of a message. Contains no more than three elds of variable length, separated by colons. Action eld is required rst. Identication eld is required second; it contains keyword unit(s). Data eld is optional; it contains keyword unit(s). Subeld Optional breakdown of identication eld. No more than three subelds, separated by semicolons; contains keyword unit(s). Keyword Mnemonic identier of a unit, function, or condition. Input as given. May have argument(s) associated with it. Shown in constant width bold for input. Argument Variable information supplied by user. Input as a single entry, a list of up to 15 entries in the form (a,b,c...), or a range in the form x-y. Shown in italics. Keyword unit Keyword and its associated argument(s), if any. Two or more keyword units are separated by commas. Message length Up to 255 characters, including spaces. Lowercase entry Variable (argument). Replace with user-supplied information. Shown in italics. Space Optional throughout message; required between keyword and its argument. Not permitted within keyword. See Section 2.5.6, "Use of Spaces." [ ] Brackets Optional entries. Not input. Shown in roman. { } Braces Two or more entries for which the user must input one. Not input. OR bar Separates entries within braces or brackets. Not input. " Quotation Mark Part of pathname of a le, directory, or device, and shown in constant width bold. Input as given. All other punctuation _ _______________________________________________________________________________________ Part of message. Input as given.
2.5.1 Input Message Fields Input messages consist of either two or three elds, separated by colons, and terminated by an exclamation mark as shown below: Action Field (verb): Identication Field: Data Field! The action and identication elds are required for all input messages. Use of the data eld depends on the structure of each input message. The identication eld may be divided into two or three subelds, separated by semicolons. For example: STOP:AMATAPE! OP:CELL;GENERIC! DUMP:CELL a:MRAQ! CFR:CELL a,b;c d:CHANL e! 2 elds, no subelds 2 elds, 2 subelds 3 elds, no subelds 3 elds, 2 subelds
The action eld is a keyword that identies a function. It is a verb, such as COPY, LOAD, STOP, or a verb abbreviation, such as ALW (allow), DGN (diagnose), or INH (inhibit). The identication eld (or subelds), and the data eld consist of one or more keyword units, separated by commas. Currently most input commands have an option to specify CLASS at the end of each command. This CLASS option is only valid for input commands entered from CRAFT platforms (Example: Executive Cellular Processor Command Line Interface [ECP-CLI]). The CLASS option is not valid for input commands entered on migrated Technician Interface Command Line Interface (TICLI) platforms (Example: Operations Maintenance Platform [OMP] or Application Processor [AP]). TICLI supports both Technician Interface (TI) and AP commands. TI commands that were supported from the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Craft Shell and AP commands that were supported from the Application Processor Command Line Interface (APCLI) or from the Element Management System Command Line Interface (EMSCLI) are supported from TICLI if the TI Migration feature is enabled. See document 401-710-210 Flexent Mobility Manager Technician Interface Implementation Guide for more information. 2.5.2 Keywords A keyword, shown in constant width bold type in the input message documentation, is a mnemonic identier of a unit, function, or condition. It is constant information, and is input exactly as given.
A keyword unit consists of a keyword with or without one or more variables, called arguments. Arguments, shown in italics print, represent variable information that must be supplied. Certain arguments are shown in boldface type. They are to be entered exactly as shown. The following are examples of keyword units. DUMP:CELL a, ADRS b! INH:AMA;AUTOST! is a message with two keyword units in the identication eld. is a message with one keyword unit in the rst identication subeld and one keyword unit in the second identication subeld.
LOAD:CELL a,ADRS b:DATA c! is a message with two keyword units in the identication eld, and one keyword unit in the data eld. A keyword unit may have a single argument, a list, or a range of arguments. Arguments in a list are separated by commas, and enclosed in parentheses. A list can contain up to 15 arguments. The two arguments showing a range are separated by a hyphen. For example: DUMP:CELL a:MRAQ! DUMP:CELL 6:MRAQ! 2.5.3 Pathnames When referring to specic les, directories, and devices, such as tape drives, Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks requires a special identier, called a pathname. Files are stored in a hierarchical manner; therefore, a device or lename is preceded by one or more directory names. For example, DISK /dev/vtoc, TAPE /dev/mt08 indicates that the DISK name is /vtoc and that it is located in the /dev directory. The TAPE drive named /mt08 is also located in the /dev directory. Again, to illustrate the hierarchical arrangement, FN /user/a8/smo/test shows the full pathname for the test le located in the /smo directory. /smo is a subdirectory of /a8, and /a8 is a subdirectory of /user. Pathnames are used in many messages. 2.5.4 Format Notation The input message formats shown in this document include, where necessary, three types of notation that are not part of the message itself. The purpose of this notation is to show the choices available in constructing the message. The notation is for purposes of documentation only; it is not input. (This notation is shown in roman font to indicate that it should not be input.) [ ] Brackets enclose optional entries, that is, entries that may be included or omitted in the message. a represents the cell number. Species cell 6.
{ } Braces enclose two or more entries where one, and only one, must be included in the message. OR bars separate entries within braces and brackets. The following is an example of using brackets, braces, and OR bars: [ENTRY a][ENTRY b] {ENTRY a ENTRY b} [ENTRY a ENTRY b] None, one or both entries may be included in the message. One of ENTRY a or ENTRY b, must be included in the message. Neither entry, or just one entry, may be included in the message.
Note that the OR bars in the second and third examples must not be entered; they indicate the format options available. 2.5.5 Format Examples The following examples show the difference between the input message as it is documented, and as it is input. Entries Within Braces Message format: Valid forms: ALW:SCSD {a,b c,d,e}! ALW:SCSD 1,38! ALW:SCSD PTSWMCR, 1,12!
Braced Entries With and Without A Bracketed Entry Message format: Valid forms: DUMP:CELL a; ADRS b [,L c][,{ONLOFL}]! DUMP:CELL 3; ADRS 64! DUMP:CELL 7,8; ADRS X7FF,L20,OFL! DUMP:CELL(10-20); ADRS 03777, ONL!
Entries Within Brackets Message format: Valid forms: EXC:CELL a, RTDIAG [b][;RAW]! EXC:CELL 12, RTDIAG! EXC:CELL 12, RTDIAG 3;RAW! EXC:CELL 12, RTDIAG 3-20!
Braced and Bracketed Entries Message format: Valid forms: OP:STATUS:PROCESS,{ALLTERMSALLKERNSALL}[,OPL a]! OP:STATUS:PROCESS,ALLTERMS! OP:STATUS:PROCESS,ALLTERMS,OPL 112! SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GETTING-STARTED-7
OP:STATUS:PROCESS,ALLKERNS! OP:STATUS:PROCESS,ALLKERNS,OPL 800! OP:STATUS:PROCESS,ALL! OP:STATUS:PROCESS,ALL,OPL 57!
Bracketed Entries Within Brackets Message format: Valid forms: RST:MTC a[;UCL[:CONT]:TLP[,CONT]:CONT]! RST:MTC RST:MTC RST:MTC RST:MTC RST:MTC RST:MTC 4! 2:UCL! 7:UCL:CONT! 10:TLP! 1:TLP,CONT! 3:CONT!
2.5.6 Use of Spaces 2.5.6.1 Rules for use of spaces Use spaces in your APX input command as follows:

to separate a keyword from its variable to separate one keyword from another keyword
Do not use spaces
within a keyword
You may enter extra spaces

anywhere a single space is allowed, as long as you do not exceed 255 characters per input command before or after punctuation, such as a colon, semicolon, comma, parenthesis, or exclamation mark
2.5.6.2 Use of spaces in conjunction with PDS input eld delimiters If a PDS input eld delimiter appears between two parts of a format, a space is not required. For example, in input format CHG:GEN!, a space is not required before or after the colon (but may legally be included). PDS input eld separators are listed in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 PDS Input Field Separators _ _________________________________________________________________________ Separator Name _ _________________________________________________________________________ _ _________________________________________________________________________ Exclamation mark. Used to end an input command. Optional ! when keyed in from a terminal; required when input command is used in a script. _ _________________________________________________________________________ Comma. , _ _________________________________________________________________________ : _ _________________________________________________________________________ Colon. Semi-colon. ; _ _________________________________________________________________________ Quotation marks. Used to pass a le name to the switch. For " example: EXC:ENVIR:UPROC,FN="/updtmp/site/vfytools" _ _________________________________________________________________________ ( Left parenthesis. _ _________________________________________________________________________ ) _ _________________________________________________________________________ Right parenthesis. NOTE: You may not use a PDS input eld separator between a keyword and its variable. In that particular case, a space is required. Use of a PDS input eld separator between a keyword and its variable would cause the input command to fail. 2.5.6.3 Generalization The following generalization may help. Use a space (if a PDS input eld separator is not present) to set apart distinct pieces of information to be passed separately to the software. 2.5.6.4 Examples The following examples (Table 2-3) show these rules:
Table 2-3 Usage Examples ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Right Usage Wrong Usage Extra Spacing (permitted but not required) ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EX;PAUSE;HSDC! EX;PA USE;HSDC! EX;PAUSE; HSDC! ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ DGN:DCS a,TRKGRP b! DGN:DCSa,TRKGRPb! DGN: DCS a, TRKGRP b! ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ CHG:GEN! C HG:GEN! CHG: GEN! ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ DGN:DCS a,DL b;c,[,d] DGN:DCSa,DL b;c,[,d] DGN:DCS a,DL b;c ,[,d] [,RPT e][,UCL][ CLASS f]! [,RPT e][,UCL][ CLASS f]! [,RPT e] [,UCL] [ CLASS f] ! ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EXC:ENVIR:UPROC, EXC:ENVIR:UPROC, EXC:ENVIR:UPROC, FN="/updtmp/site/vfytools" F N="/updtmp/site/vfytools" FN= "/updtmp/site/vfytools" ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ALW:SCSD;UNIT a:PT(b,b,b)! ALW:SC SD;UNITa:PT(b,b,b)! ALW:SCSD; UNIT a: PT (b, b, b)! ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.7 Rules for Keying In Messages When keying in messages, observe the following rules:

A message may consist of up to 255 characters (including spaces) and may extend over several lines. The nal character of a message is an exclamation mark (!) as shown in the message description. The 255-character limit includes this nal character. Messages typed at a terminal may be terminated with a carriage return (<return>) rather than an exclamation mark (!). One or more spaces may be used to separate an argument from its keyword. One exception is a list of arguments within parentheses; the left parenthesis serves as a separator, and no space is required. Except for values within double quotes (such as lenames), a message may be entered in upper or lower case.
2.6 System Acknowledgements The system responds to each input message with an acknowledgment, and possibly one or more output messages. For detailed information on acknowledgments for a particular message, see section 4 of that message. The acknowledgment is always printed immediately. Output messages may occur following the output of other messages and data. The format of all acknowledgments is: aa[t[CODExxx]] where aa = Two characters indicating status of requested input message. Table 2-4 lists possible characters and their denitions. t = Explanatory text for two character status (9 characters or less). Section 4 of the input message description lists denitions of explanatory text. xxx = Decimal number (001-999) representing specic reason for two-character status. Section 4 of the message description lists denitions of all applicable numbers.
Table 2-4 Input Message Acknowledgments __________________________________________________________________________________________ Acknowledgment Meaning __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ ?A Action eld contains an error. The verb may have been typed incorrectly or a eld delimiter may have been omitted. Data eld contains an error. An item may have been incorrectly typed; ?D improper data may have been entered; or a keyword or execute symbol may have been omitted. Error exists in the message but cannot be resolved to the proper eld. ?E ?I Identication eld contains an error. An item may have been incorrectly typed; an out-of-range number may have been used; or a required keyword may have been omitted. Time-out has occurred on the channel. Input has not been received ?T within the allotted time, and processing of the message has been aborted. In Progress. Request received and initiated. Further output will follow. IP No Acknowledgment. Normally, the system acknowledges an input NA request within two seconds. If control of the message processing has been lost, NA is output to indicate an acknowledgment failure. No Good. The message was received; the appropriate process was NG initiated; but the request conicts with the current system or equipment status. For example, action was requested for a unit that is being diagnosed. Good. The message was received; the appropriate process was initiated; OK and work was completed. PF Printout Follows. The request was received, and action will be taken. A printout will follow sometime later to explain, in detail, the results of the work initiated by the input message. This printout will be a termination report that may include the result of the work initiated by the input message. Retry Later. Request cannot be executed now because of unavailable RL system resources, such as system overload, excessive queue lengths, or the requested process is busy. __________________________________________________________________________________________
2.7 List of Acronyms 2G 3G 3G-1X 5EGW A AAA AB ABD AC AC ACB ACC ACDN ACK ACL ACNR ACS ACS ACT ACTRC ACU ACU ADF ADP AENC AERM AFAC AGC AHVLR AIM AIS AM AMA AMATPS AMI AMI AML AMP AMPS AMSS AN ANI ANT AOADR Second Generation Third Generation Code Division Multiple Access Third Generation Single Carrier 5ESS Gateway Access Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting After Boot Alternate Boot Disk Alarm Card Authentication Center Alarm Control Board Analog Control Channel Administrative Call Processing/Database Node Acknowledgment Audit Control Library Application Critical Node Recovery Alarm Card Slot Alarm Control Shelf Active Automatic Call Trace Alarm Control Unit Analog Conversion Unit Alarm Denition File Automatic Diagnostic Process Asynchronous Event Notication Capability Alignment Error Rate Monitor AUTOPLEX Facility Automatic Gain Control Administrative Home Visitor Location Register Application Integrity Monitor Alarm Indication Signal Administrative Module Automatic Message Accounting Automatic Message Accounting Teleprocessing System Advanced Mobile Phone System Miscellaneous Information Alternate Mark Inversion Automatic Maintenance Limit Amplier Advanced Mobile Phone System AUTOPLEX Message Storage System Authentication Automatic Number Identication Antenna Answer Only Automatic Message Accounting Dump for Roamers
AP AP AP APC APCC APCLI APN APS AR ARCNET ARG ARGR ARR ARR ARREGTRACE AS ASC ASCII ASCQ ASIC ASP ASW AT ATB ATCC ATM ATMOC3 ATMS ATP ATT AV AV-DRM AVL AWS AWTC B8ZS BBA BBU BC BCCH BCR BDU BEC BER BERT BFM
Application Processor Argument Pointer Attached Processor Application Processor Cluster Application Processor Cluster Controller Application Processor Command Line Interface Application Processor Node Automatic Protection Switching Autonomous Registration Attached Resource Computer Network Automatic Roamer Greeting Autonomous Registration Glare Reporting Automatic Radio Reconguration Automatic Ring Recovery Autonomous Registration Glare Reporting Alarm Scanning Additional Sense Code American Standard Code for Information Interchange Additional Sense Code Qualier Application Specic Integrated Circuit Alarm Summary Print All Seems Well Access Terminal Address Translation Buffer Auto-Tuned Cavity Combiner Asynchronous Transfer Mode Asynchronous Transfer Mode Optical Carrier Level 3 Automatic Transmission Measurement System All Tests Passed Application Task Tripper Analog Voice Analog Voice Digital Radio Module Available Administrative Work Station Area Wide Test Channel Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution Bus Interface Unit [BIU]-Baseband Combiner/Radio [BCR]Analog Conversion Unit [ACU] Baseband Unit Beacon Broadcast Control Channel Baseband Combiner/Radio Bus Display Unit Basic Error Correction Bit Error Rate Bit Error Rate Test Blocking From Mobile Switching Center
BGMS BGR BHCA BHCS BHM BHS BIC BID BISO BIU BKPRT BLK BLOCK-AID BLST BOLO BPCF BPH BPI BPSN BSC BSN BTL BTS BTS BTS-FMS BUD BWM C/D CA CALGC CAP CAS CAT CATP CBA CBR CC CC CCC CCC-2G CCC-3G CCF CCF CCIO CCIS CCO CCS
Back Ground Music Service Bi-directional Gating Register Busy Hour Call Attempts Backhaul Connection Server Backhaul Manager Backhaul Server Bus Interface Controller Billing Identication Beginning of Isolation Bus Interface Unit Backup Partition Blocked Blocked Trunk Identication Board Level Self Test Back Out Last Ofcial Blade Packet Control Function Beginning Phase Bytes Per Inch Back Plane Serial Number Base Station Controller Block Sequence Number Bell Telephone Laboratories Base Transceiver Station Base Transceiver System Base Transceiver System - Flexent Mobility Server Backlog Update Database Broadcast Warning Message Control/Display Community Address Calibration and Gain Control Capacity Channel Associated Signaling Clock and Tone Conditional All Tests Passed Changeback Acknowledgement Code Division Multiple Access Baseband Radio Central Control Channel Condition Code Division Multiple Access Cluster Controller Code Division Multiple Access Cluster Controller Second Generation Code Division Multiple Access Cluster Controller Third Generation Conditional Call Forwarding Custom Calling Feature Central Control Input/Output Common Channel Interofce Signaling Customer Controlled Operation Common Channel Signaling
CCS CCS6 CCS7 CCU CCU CCU-2G CCU-32 CCU-3G CDB CDBS CDM CDMA CDN CDN-II CDN3 CDNI CDPD CDR CE CE CEM CEPT CF CFR CFT CGSA CH CHN CHPAM CI CIA CIC CICC CIM CIN CIP CLAC CLAN CLEI CLGC CLI CLLI CLP CLSI CM CMDPSG CMLT
Common Command Set Common Channel Signaling System 6 Common Channel Signaling System 7 Code Division Multiple Access Channel Unit Channel Control Unit Code Division Multiple Access Channel Unit Second Generation Enhanced Code Division Multiple Access Channel Unit Code Division Multiple Access Channel Unit Third Generation Command Descriptor Block Code Division Multiple Access Distributed Base Station Code Division Multiple Access Digital Module Code Division Multiple Access Call Processing/Database Node Call Processing/Database Node II Ring Call Processing/Database Node Call Processing/Database Node Integrity Cellular Digital Packet Data Channel Data Register Channel Element Critical Event Channel Element Modem Conference on European Postal and Telecommunications Administrations Call Forwarding Congure Flexible Rating Craft Cellular Geographic Service Area Channel Channel Cellular High Power Amplier Module Control Interface Critical Indicator Administrator Circuit Identication Code Common Intelligent Carrier Card Channel Initialization and Monitor Circuit Identication Number Command In Progress Code Division Multiple Access Linear Amplier Circuit Cluster Local Area Network Common Language Equipment Identier Closed Loop Gain Control Command Line Interface Common Language Location Identier Cluster Processor Cell Site Integrity Communication Module Command Programmable Serial Gateway Code Division Multiple Access Mobile Loopback Test
CMMCEQP CMRFTG CMSCT CN CNAM CNAT CNC CNCE CNI CNID CNR COACC COB COMB COMGR CONDITIONAL CONF CONFIG CONT COO CORBA COT CP CP CP CP CPB CPC CPC CPI CPI CPM CPN CPREGTRACE CPSECOND CPSG CPU CQT CRC CRC CRT CRTU CS CSB CSC CSC0
Code Division Multiple Access Flexent Code Division Multiple Access Distributed Base Station Equipage Connection Manager Reference Frequency Timing Generator Connection Manager Synchronous Clock and Tone Cellular Networking Calling Party Name Changeable No Answer Timer Central Node Control Common Channel Signaling Network Critical Event Common Network Interface Control Network Identication Critical Node Recovery Code Division Multiple Access mobile originated Short Message Service Over Access Channel Call Observation Combined Command Group Conditional Conference Conguration Controller Change-Over Order Common Object Request Broker Architecture Continuity Call Processing Central Processor Command Present Communications Processor Call Processing Burst Common Power Converter Concerned Point Code Central Processor Intervention Communications Processor Interface Call Processing Main Calling Party Number Call Processing Registration Glare for Active Call Reporting Call Processing Second Page Response Reporting Flag Call Processing Setup Glare Reporting Central Processor Unit Circuit Query Test Code Division Multiple Access Radio Controller Cyclic Redundancy Check Cathode Ray Terminal Code Division Multiple Access Radio Test Unit Cell Site Carrier Service Option Class [SOC] Backhaul Server [BHS] Cell Site Controller Cell Site Controller 0
CSC1 CSCANS CSDIP CSN CSNE CSOP CSP CSPC CSU CTRC CTRM CTU CTU CU CUMEM CURSTRMV CUSTAT CVT CW DA DACS DAP DAT DAT DB DBDM DBMS DBS DC DCCH DCF DCHN DCI DCIS DCIU DCS DCSID DCT DCTE DCTEXT DDSBS DEX DFC DFI DFSA DFU DGN
Cell Site Controller 1 Customer Service Computer Access Network Standards Character Special Device Interface Process Cell Site Node Cell Site Node Enhanced Coordinator of Spooler Output Processes Cell Site Processor Cell Site Processor Controller Cache Store Unit Call Trace Code Division Multiple Access Test Radio Module Code Division Multiple Access Transmit Unit Clock and Timing Unit Control Unit Control Unit Memory Control Unit Restore or Remove Control Unit Hardware Status Circuit Validation Test Call Waiting Dynamic Assignment Digital Access and Cross-Connect System Display Administration Process Digital Audio Tape Disconnect Acknowledgement Timer Database Database Download Mechanism Database Management System Duplex Bus Selector Digital Control Channel Digital Control Channel Defensive Check Failure D-Channel Node Dual Serial Channel/Computer Interconnect Direct Signaling Messages Dual Serial Channel Computer Interconnect Unit Digital Cellular Switch Digital Cellular Switch Identication Dispatch Control Table Dispatch Control Table Entry Dispatch Control Table Extended Duplex Dual Serial Bus Selector Demand Exercise Disk File Controller Digital Facility Interface Data File System Access Digital Facility Unit Diagnose
DGTSEND DHCP DIA DIAGC DIAMON DICLA DIO DIOP DIVBRIND DKDRV DL DLGSHL DLI DLN DM DMA DMAC DMEMBER DMH DMQ DN DNFS DNMOD DOCR DPC DPD DPT DRC DRM DRS DRU DS0 DS0-A DS0s DS1 DSC DSCH DSM DSN DTR DUI DUIC DV DV-DRM DVCC
Digit Sender Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol Direct Internet Access Diagnostic Control Program Diagnostic Monitor Dual-Individual Carrier Linear Amplier Direct Input/Output Disk Independent Operation Diversity Imbalance Error Disk Driver Data Link Dialogue Shell Data Link Interface Direct Link Node Disconnected Mode Direct Memory Access Direct Memory Access Controller Dynamic Member Data Message Handler Deferred Maintenance Queue Directory Number Dedicated Network File Service Directory Number Modication Dynamic Outgoing Call Restriction Destination Point Code Digital Pre-Distortion Diagnostic Phase Table Data Rate Channel Digital Radio Module Data Replication Service Digital Radio Unit Digital Signal Level 0 Digital Signal Level 0 A Digital Signal Level 0 Digital Signal Level 1 Dedicated Switch Connection Dual Serial Channel Disk Suite Mirroring Digital Switch Node Data Terminal Ready Direct User Interface Direct User Interface Controller Digital Voice Digital Voice Digital Radio Module Digital Verication Color Code
EAI EAIINT EAR ECD ECDA ECDLIB ECDMAN ECI ECID ECMA ECP ECP-AMA ECPC ECPID ECU ECU-32 EDI EDPD EDRU EESN EGRASP EGSF EIH EIN EINE EINLINK EIR EISO EKCC EKILLCALL EMDN EMM EMS EMSCLI EOF EOH EOM EOP EOP/M EPCF EPH EQL ER ERRINT ESC ESD ESID ESN
Emergency Action Interface Emergency Action Interface Error Interrupt Error Analysis and Recovery Equipment Conguration Database Equipment Conguration Database Access Equipment Conguration Database Library Equipment Conguration Database Manager Equipment Catalog Index Executive Cellular Processor Call Identication European Computer Manufacturers Executive Cellular Processor Executive Cellular Processor - Automatic Message Accounting Executive Cellular Processor Complex Executive Cellular Processor Identication Enhanced Channel Unit Enhanced Code Division Multiple Access Channel Unit Engineering Design Information Enhanced Digital Pre-Distortion Enhanced Digital Radio Unit Easy Electronic Serial Number Enhanced Generic Access Package Expanded General System Failure Error Interrupt Handler Ethernet Interface Node Application Processor Ethernet Interface Node - Enhanced Ethernet Interface Node Link Enhanced Information Report End of Isolation Enhanced Kill Call Capability Enhanced Kill Call Capability Empty Mobile Directory Number Expanded Main Memory Element Management System Element Management System Command Line Interface End Of File End Of Header End Of Medium End Of Partition End Of Partition/Medium Ethernet Packet Control Function Ending Phase Equipment Location Error Register Error Interrupt Ethernet Switch Card Extended Sense Data Extended System/Switch Identication Electronic Serial Number
ET ETNN ETOM EVC EVM EVOL EXIT-R EXP EXT EXT FACIL FAF FANALM FAP FARCA FBO FBS FCCCH FCI FDBMS FEPC FESS FFER FFS FIFO FITS FLCA FLM FLOW FLUS FM FMGR FMM FMM-AMA FMMTR FMP FMS FOM FOMP FP FP FPCR FPGA FPI FPO FPS
Electronic Transfer Expanded Trunk Network Number Enhanced Time Division Multiple Access Oscillator Module 1xEV-DO Controller 1xEV-DO Modem Evolution Extended Information Product Tandem Signaling for Non-Home Subscriber Expansion Extended External Test Facility Access Type Feature Activation File Fan Alarm Feature Activation Process Far End Community Address First Block Offset First Block Sequence Fundamental Common Control Channel Forward Call Indicator Flexent Database Management System Far End Point Code Far End Signaling Server Forward Frame Error Rate Flash File System First-In, First-Out Factory Installation Test System Flexible Channel Allocation Forward Link Module Flow Analysis Module Forward Link User Simulation Filemark File Manager Flexent Mobility Manager Flexent Mobility Manager - Automatic Message Accounting Flexent Mobility Manager Translations Fraudulent Mobile Print Flexent Mobility Server Fiber Optic Module Fiber Optic Module Port Filter Panel Frame Pointer Full Point Code Routing Field Programmable Gate Array Full Process Initialization First Primary Offset First Primary Sequence
FRBC FRBCD FREQ FRMR FRSVCD FS FSC FSNAME FSO FSRM FSS FSU FT FT FT-LAN FTAP FTC FTM FTP FTS FUDBERRNO FX G3 G4 G5 GCSL GDF GI GICC GLS GOOS GPS GRASP GRE GSF GT GTT GUI GW HA HCPU HDB3 HDR HEH HEHMSG HFDT
Frame Relay Bearer Channel Frame Relay Bearer Channel Daemon Frequency Frame Reject Response Frame Relay Switched Virtual Circuit Daemon Frame Selector Forward Setup Channel File System Name First Secondary Offset Frame Selector Resource Monitor First Secondary Sequence Forward Setup Fault Tolerant Functional Test Fault Tolerant Local Area Network Forward Test Access Protocol Forward Trafc Channel Front Transition Module File Transfer Protocol Field Test Set Field Update Database Errors Flexent Growth Frame 3 Growth Frame 4 Growth Frame 5 Global Call Status List Generic Description File Group Interface Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card Global Location Service Go Out Of Service Global Positioning System Generic Access Package Generic Routing Encapsulation Generic Specication File Global Title Global Title Translation Graphical User Interface Gateway Host Adapter High Capacity Core Processing Unit High Density Bipolar Header Hardware Error Handler Hardware Error Handler Reports History File Table
HLR HOBIT HOC HP-UX HPCA HROC HSD HSDC HSL HSR HTTP HV HVLR HVLR-IM HW I I/O IBLM ICF ICMP ICOS ICRT ICTRC ID IDENT IFB IHLR ILCD ILI IM IM IM IM IMDCA IMS IMSDRV IMSI IMSLT INIT INLA IODRV IOP IOS IOU IP IP
Home Location Register Hand-off Based on Interference Host Collector Hewlett Packard UNIX High Power Personal Communication Service Code Division Multiple Access Amplier High Data Rate Reverse Overload Control High-Speed Synchronous Data Link High-Speed Synchronous Data Link Controller High Speed Signaling System 7 Link Hardware Status Register Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Hardware Version Home Visitor Location Register Home Visitor Location Register Integrity Manager Hardware Index Input/Output Inter-Band Load Management Immediate Call Forwarding Internet Control Message Protocol Increased Court-Ordered Surveillance Incoming Call Response Timer Immediate Call Trace Identication Identity Interframe Buffer Integrated Home Location Register Immediate Long Call Detection Incorrect Length Indicator Input Message Integrity Manager Integrity Monitor Interrupt Mask Mobile Switching Center Dynamic Channel Allocation Interprocessor Message Switch Interprocessor Message Switch Driver International Mobile Station Identity Idle Mobile Subscriber Location Trace Initialization Interference Look Ahead Input/Output Processor Driver Input/Output Processor Inter-Operability Specication Input/Output Unit Information Product Internet Protocol
IP-RCS IPBH IPBTSGW IPGW IPL IRN IRN2 IS IS IS41 ISC ISC ISDN ISO ISPage ISR ISR ISUP ITU IUN IVT IWF IWFA IWFACCT IWFAUTH IWFCC IWFDIA IWFL2TP IWFMAINT IWFMBI IWFPE JIP KOP KTF KW L L-DRM L-DRU L-RCU L2TP LAC LAC LACID LAES LAF
Internet Protocol - Radio Cluster Server Internet Protocol Backhaul Internet Protocol Base Transceiver Station Gateway Internet Protocol Gateway Interrupt Priority Level Integrated Ring Node Integrated Ring Node 2 In Service Interrupt Source Interim Standard 41 Initialization Sequence Control Intelligent Serial Controller Integrated Services Digital Network International Standards Organization Inter-System Page Integrated Services Digital Network User Part Register Interprocessor Message Switch User Node Soak Restore Integrated Services Digital Network User Part International Telecommunication Union Interprocessor Message Switch User Node Intervendor Trunk Interworking Function Interworking Function Application Interworking Function Accounting Interworking Function Authentication Interworking Function Call Control Interworking Function Direct Internet Access Interworking Function Level 2 Tunneling Protocol Interworking Function Maintenance Interworking Function Modem Bank Interface Interworking Function Protocol Engine Jurisdiction Information Parameter Kernel Overwrite Process Korea Telecom Freetel Keyword Locate Locate Digital Radio Module Locate Digital Radio Unit Locate Radio Channel Unit Level 2 Tunneling Protocol Linear Amplier Circuit Location Area Cluster Logical Link Identication Lawfully Authorized Electronic Surveillance Linear Amplier Frame
LAF LAG LAN LAPD LAUN LBC LBO LBS LC LCD LCP LCSL LDFT LDI LFS LI LI LI4 LIB LID0 LIMA LIU LLC LLI LMT LN LNA LPG LPO LPS LRN LS LSA LSB LSCMLT LSL LSO LSS LSS LSSU LTI LU MAC MAEC MAN MAS MAS
Logical Antenna Face Link Aggregation Group Local Area Network Link Access Procedure D-Channel Linear Amplier Unit Number Loopback Clear Last Block Offset Last Block Sequence Locate Channel Long Call Detection Lost Call Call Processing Local Call Status List Load Disk From Tape Laboratory Design Issue Link Fault Sectionalization Length Indicator Link Interface Link Interface Library Link Interface Digital Signal Level 0 Location Independent Message Addressing Line Interface Unit Link Layer Connection Linked List Indexed Lightguide Microcell/Modular Cell Transceiver Link Node Low Noise Receive Amplier Logical Processor Group Last Primary Offset Last Primary Sequence Location Routing Number Link Set Limited Service Area Error value Last Seen Cell Mobile Location Trace Low Speed Signaling System 7 Link Last Secondary Offset Last Secondary Sequence Lucent Soft Switch Link Status Signal Unit Lucent Technologies Infrastructure Logical Unit Media Access Control Media Access Error Counter Manual Main Store Mobile Activity Supervision
MASA MASC MAX MB MBD MC MC MCA MCAT MCB MCC MCCPE MCH MCO MCR MCR MCRT MCS MCT MDCT MDN MF MFC MFFU MFGR MHD MHD0 MHD1 MIN MIRA MLAC MLG MLTS MM MM MM-AP MM-APC MM-DLN MM-HVLR MM-RCS MM-ROP MM-SS7 MM-VCA MMA MMSA MO MOC
Main Store Array Main Store Controller Medium Access Layer Modem Bank Message Buffer Dump Main Controller Microcode Multi-Carrier Amplier Manual and Cell Conguration and Cell Test Message Control Block Maintenance Control Center Multiple Units with the Same Directory Number Customer Changeable Primary Electronic Serial Number Maintenance Channel Manual Change Over Mobile Call Register Multiple Carrier Radio Maintenance Console Request Terminal Message Communication Subsystem Malicious Call Trace Minor Device Chain Table Mobile Directory Number Multi-Frequency Multi-Frequency Compelled Modular Fuse / Filter Unit Manufacturer Moving Head Disk Moving Head Disk 0 Moving Head Disk 1 Mobile Identication Number Maintenance Input Request Administrator Multiple Linear Amplier Circuit Multi-Link Group Micro Level Test Set Measurement Module Mobility Manager Mobility Manager Application Processor Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Mobility Manager Direct Link Node Mobility Manager Home Visitor Location Register Mobility Manager Radio Cluster Server Mobility Manager Read Only Printer Mobility Manager Signaling System 7 Mobility Manager Voice Channel Administration Message Mapping Application Multiple Microcell Shared Antenna Managed Object Measurement Output Control
MOCT MOH MOOS MOP MOST MPC MPSC MRA MRAQ MRF MRS MRS MRS MRVA MRVR MRVT MS MS MS MSC MSCDBMS MSCID MSGBUF MSID MSO MSRE MSU MT MT0 MT1 MTC MTCE MTM MTP MTSO MTTY MTTYC MULTI MUSDN MV MV MWI Mb N/A NA NA NAK
Measurement Output Control Table Managed Object Handle Manual Out Of Service Mount Off Line Partition Mobile Station Test Mobile Positioning Center Managed Purchased System Capacity Maintenance Request Administrator Maintenance Request Administrator Queue Maintenance Reset Function Message Recording Service Message Recording/Retrieval Service Message Retrieval Service Message Transfer Part Routing Verication Acknowledgement Message Routing Verication Result Message Routing Verication Test Message Segmenter Mobile Subscriber Multi-Sector Mobile Switching Center Mobile Switching Center Database Management System Mobile Switching Center Identication Message Buffer Mobile Station Identication Multiple Size Option Mobile Status Report Enhancement Message Signal Unit Magnetic Tape Magnetic Tape 0 Magnetic Tape 1 Magnetic Tape Controller Maintenance Master Timing Module Message Transfer Part Mobile Telephone Switching Ofce Maintenance Teletypewriter Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller Multiple Congurations Multiple Units with the Same Directory Number Maintenance Value Model Version Message Waiting Indicator Megabytes Not Available Not Applicable Not Available Negative Acknowledgment
NAT NAUD NCC NCI NCID ND NE NE NEARCA NEWSFX NFS NGN NGN-AP NI NIASRT NIC NID NIP NM NNBRDB NODEST NON-ATCC NO_RTE NP NP NP-LI NP-SCP NPA NSD NSN NSNL NTB NTP NTWK NTWK_O NVM OA&M OAI OAI-AP OAMPROXY OBGC OC OC OC3 OCNS ODD ODIN
Network Access Identier Node Audit Network Cross Connect Network Control Interface Network Connection Identier Non-Volatile Memory Driver Network Elements Not Equipped Near End Community Address New Sufx Network File System Next Generation Network Next Generation Network - Application Processor Node Integrity Node Integrity Assert Network Interface Card Network Identier Network Interface Point Network Management Network Neighbor Node State Non-Auto-Tune Cavity Combiner No Route Node Processor Number Portability Node Processor Link Interface Number Portability Service Control Point Numbering Plan Area Network Services Division National Signicant Number Network Serial Number List Network Test Beacon Network Time Protocol Network Network Only Non-Volatile Memory Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Open Air Interface Open Air Interface Application Processor Operations, Administration and Maintenance Proxy On Board Gain Control Overhead Channel Overload Control Optical Carrier Level 3 Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator Ofce Dependent Data On Line Data Integrity
ODPC ODPCD OFC OFD OFD-A OFD-ACCESS OFD-CAP OFD-MS OFD-PG OFL OFLBOOT OFLDISK OHM OIF OKP OLDSFX OLGC OLMP OM OM RAN OMC-RAN OMDB OMP OMP-FX OOF OOS OOS-M OOSL OPC ORCA OS OSDS OST OTA OTL OTU OVRWT PA PA PAC PACA PAF PAS PAS PASA
On-Demand Pilot Strength Measurement Message Collection On-Demand Pilot Strength Measurement Message Collection Daemon Ofcial Operational Fault Detection Operational Fault Detection Access Operational Fault Detection ACCESS Operational Fault Detection Capacity Operational Fault Detection Multi-Sector Operational Fault Detection Paging Off Line Off Line Boot Off Line Disk Over Head Manager Optical Interface Frame Operational Kernel Process Old Sufx Open Loop Gain Control On Line Mount Point Oscillator Module Output Message Operations and Maintenance Center Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio Access Network Output Message Database Operations Maintenance Platform Operations Maintenance Platform for Flexent Out Of Frame Out Of Service Out Of Service Manual Out Of Service Limit Origination Point Code Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio Access Network Common Object Request Broker Architecture Agent Operating System Operating System for Distributed Switching Operating System Trap Over-The-Air Activation Originating Test Line Optical Transceiver Unit Overwrite Page/Access Program Address Peripheral Alarm Card Priority Access and Channel Assignment Physical Antenna Face Project Accounting Service Protected Application Segment Project Accounting Service Authorization
PASV PAUTH PBI PC PC PCA PCB PCBR PCF PCFCC PCFMAINT PCGRP PCPAUD PCPEIH PCPMD PCR PCRID PCS PCS PCSD PCT PCU PDC PDSN PDT PDT PE PG PGT PH PHGRP PHPAM PIC PIC PICB PICL PID PIN PIO PIO PIO PL PLIB PLM PMCR PMDB PMGR
Project Accounting Service Validation Personal Authority Peripheral Bus Interface Peripheral Control Point Code Personal Communication Service Code Division Multiple Access Amplier Process Control Block Pre-Distortion Code Division Multiple Access Baseband Radio Packet Control Function Packet Control Function Call Control Packet Control Function Maintenance Person Command Group Processor Control Process Audit Processor Control Process Error Interrupt Handler Processor Control Process Maintenance Driver Preventative Cyclic Redundancy Error Correction Processor Identication Packet Core Switch Personal Communication Service Peripheral Control Subdevice Processor Conguration Table Power Converter Unit Periodic Data Collection Period Packet Data Serving Node Page Descriptor Table Physical Disk-to-Tape Protocol Engine Paging Page Table Protocol Handler Protocol Handler Group Personal Communication Service High Power Amplier Module Peripheral Interface Controller Primary Interexchange Carrier Peripheral Interface Control Bus Platform Information and Control Library Process Identication Personal Identication Number Peripheral Input/Output Processor Input/Output Programmed Input/Output Pilot Level Public Library Power Level Measurement Plant Measurement Common Report Process Message Data Block Process Manager
PMS PMUX PO PO POPCLU POST PP PPM PPP PPS PPS PPU PR PRI PRM PROFL PS PSA PSAX PSBR PSC PSLT PSM PSMM PSSWDPFX PSSWDSFX PSTN PSU PSW PTR PVC PVSI PZID QBC QFAF QFE R-P R-P RA RAC RADIUS RAID RAM RAN RAO RAP
Plant Measurements System Point-to-Point Protocol Multiplexor Percent Occupancy Processor Occupancy Populated Cluster Power On Self Test Packet Pipe Parts Per Million Point-to-Point Protocol Packets Per Second Pulse Per Second Partial Parameter Update Periodic Reset Primary Rate Interface Processor Recovery Message Prole Pilot/Sync Pilot/Sync/Access PacketStar Access Gateway Primary Segment Base Register Processor Signaling Congestion Periodic Signaling Link Test Power Switch Monitor Pilot Strength Measurement Message Password Prex Password Sufx Public Switched Telephone Network Packet Switching Unit Program Status Word Programmable Treatment Routing Permanent Virtual Circuit Positive Verication System Interface Packet Zone Identier QUICC Bus Clear Feature Activation File with Qualication Quad Fast Ethernet Radio Packet Radio Protocol Radio Ring Access Circuit Remote Authentication Dial In User Service Redundant Array of Independent Disks Random Access Memory Radio Access Network Regional Accounting Ofce Ring Application Processor
RATI RC/V RCC RCC-OA&M RCG RCMS RCS RCS-IP RCT RCU RDBU RDI REACH REGCANC REGNOT REJ REMACS REX RF RFER RFS RFTG RFU RG RG RGDB RGRASP RI0 RI1 RID RIM RIMAST RLM RLOOK RLP RM RMB RMF RMS RN RNA RNC RNC-AP RNCDB RNCDBMS RNCM RNR ROM
Random Access Terminal Identier Recent Change / Verify Radio Control Complex Radio Control Complex/Operations, Administration and Maintenance Reference Calibration Generator Read Only Printer Client Message Service Radio Cluster Server Radio Cluster Server - Internet Protocol Route Set Congestion Test Radio Channel Unit Ring Database Update Remote Defect Indication Reverse Enhanced Access Channel Registration Cancellation Registration Notication Reject Remote Access System Routine Exercise Radio Frequency Reverse Frame Error Rate Recent Change / Verify Form Security Reference Frequency Timing Generator Radio Frequency Unit Reference Generator Roamer Greeting Roamer Greeting Database Ring Generic Access Package Ring Interface 0 Ring Interface 1 Record Identication Radio Network Controller Integrity Monitor Radio Network Controller Integrity Monitor Assert Brevity Reverse Link Module Receiver Look-Up Radio Link Protocol Ring Monitor Removable Medium Recovery Message Formatter Routine Maintenance Scheduler Ring Node Ring Node Address Radio Network Controller Radio Network Controller Application Processor Radio Network Controller Database Radio Network Controller Database Update Manager Radio Network Controller Manager Receive Not Ready Read Only Memory
ROP ROS RPC RPCD RPCN RPI RPI RSP RSPFAIL RSSI RSU RSUFIRST RTAP RTC RTR RTS RTU RTX RU RUBRIM RXAMP RXAUD RXBER RXGAIN RXPWR RelAdr S S S-DRM S-RCU S7 SAAL SABM SADC SAR SAT SAT SBP SBR0 SBR1 SBR2 SBR3 SBR4 SBR5 SBR6 SBR7 SBSP
Read Only Printer Request Out Of Service Ring Peripheral Controller Ring Peripheral Controller Device Ring Peripheral Controller Node Return to the Point of Interrupt Routing Priority Index Radio Test Unit Switch Panel Radio Test Unit Switch Panel Comm Failure Received Signal Strength Indicator Reverse Setup Reverse Setup FIRST Error Reverse Test Access Protocol Real Time Clock Real Time Reliable Real Time Status Radio Test Unit Real Time Executive Receiver Unit Ring Database Update Bridge Process Monitor Receive Amplier Receive Audio Receive Bit Error Rate Receive Gain Receive Power Relative Addressing Setup Statement Setup Digital Radio Module Setup Radio Channel Unit System 7 Signaling Asynchronous Transfer Mode Adaptation Layer Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Special Access Data Channel Store Address Register Store Address Translator Supervisory Audio Tone Special Bearer Path Segment Base Register 0 Segment Base Register 1 Segment Base Register 2 Segment Base Register 3 Segment Base Register 4 Segment Base Register 5 Segment Base Register 6 Segment Base Register 7 Simple Base Transceiver System Startup Protocol
SBUS SC SC SC-GICC SCANS SCANS-2 SCB SCC SCC SCCP SCHD SCID SCM SCMG SCN SCOC SCP SCR SCS SCSD SCSDA SCSDC SCSDH SCSI SCSM SCT SDC SDCA SDD SDE SDL SDLC SDLRTC SDLRTN SDP SDP SDR SDS SDT SFAP SFM SFW SG SG SGEN SH SHLR
Small Computer System Interface Bus Shelf Controller Stable Clear Shelf Controller Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card Software Change Administration and Notication System Software Change Administration and Notication System System Controller Board Switching Control Center Synchronous Communications Controller Signaling Connection Control Part Schedule Switch Call Identication Station Class Mark Signaling Connection Control Part Management Special Cellular Networking Signal Connection Control Point Oriented Control Service Control Point Store Control Register Sound Call Service Scanner Signal Distributor Scanner Signal Distributor Administrator Scanner Signal Distributor Controller Scanner Signal Distributor Handler Small Computer System Interface Selectable Cell Site Messaging Synchronous Clock and Tone Store Data Control Short Distance Charging Area Subscriber Dialed Digits Segment Descriptor Entrie Synchronous Data Link Synchronous Data Link Controller Synchronous Data Link Restore Tool Communications Protocol Handler Synchronous Data Link Restore Tool Network Protocol Handler Software Demand Paging Status Display Page Store Data Register Shared Data Segment Segment Descriptor Table Subscriber Form Activity Print Selector Function Main Software Server Group System Generation System Generation Speech Handler Standalone Home Location Register
SI SIB SID SIE SII SII-CS SIM SIMCNTL SIN SIO SIO SIOF SIOS SIP SJB SJR SLC SLK SLM SLMK SLPO SLS SLT SM SM SMD SMEMBER SMM SMP SMPA SMS SMTC SMV SN SNAT SNMP SOF SOP SOPC SP SP SP SPC SPI SPINA SPINI SPINNIPIN
System Integrity Status Indicator Busy System Identication Status Indication Emergency Series II Series II Cell Site System Integrity Monitor System Integrity Monitor Control Status Indication Normal Status of Out-of-Alignment System Integrity Output System Integrity Output Formatter Status Indication Out-of-Service Simple-Internet Protocol Small Computer System Interface Job Block Small Computer System Interface Job Response Signaling Link Code Signaling Link Signaling Link Management Signaling Link Maintenance Kernel Signal Link Processor Occupancy Signaling Link Selection Signaling Link Test Service Measurements Switching Module Storage Module Device Static Member Standard Main Memory Sub-Mobile Switching Center Paging Sub-Mobile Switching Center Paging Area Short Message Service Serving Mobile Switching Center Lucent Selectable Mode Vocoder Serial Number Current Network Administration Time Simple Network Management Protocol Spooler Output Function Spooler Output Process Source Origination Point Code Signaling Processor Stack Pointer Status Display Process Small Computer System Interface Protocol Controller Security Parameter Index Subscriber Personal Identication Number Access Subscriber Personal Identication Number Intercept Subscriber Personal Identication Number Intercept Personal Identication Number
SPINNITRIGGERS SPM SPP SRAM SRCU SRST SRV SRVA SRVR SRVT SS7 SS7-LINK SS7HSL SS7LSL SS7MM SS7MMA SSBR SSD SSDW SSN SSR ST ST1 ST2 STBY STF STOP STP SU SU SUERM SUGR SVC SWI SWNO SYSGEN SaR T1FA TA TAR0 TAR1 TAUTH TC TCAP TCGRP
Subscriber Personal Identication Number Intercept Trigger Signal Processing Module Single Process Purge Static Random Access Memory Setup Radio Channel Unit Signaling Route Set Test Server Signaling Connection Control Part Routing Verication Acknowledgement Signaling Connection Control Part Routing Verication Result Signaling Connection Control Part Routing Verication Test Signaling System 7 Signaling System 7 Link Signaling System 7 High Speed Link Signaling System 7 Low Speed Link Signaling System 7 Message Manager Signaling System 7 Message Manager Application Secondary Segment Base Register Shared Secret Data Second Start Dial Wink Subsystem Number System Status Register Signaling Tone Stream 1 Stream 2 Standby Some Tests Failed Stopped Signal Transfer Point Setup Software Update Signal Unit Error Rate Monitor Software Update Generic Retrot Switched Virtual Circuit Switch Integrity Switch Number System Generation Segmentation and Reassembly T1 Facility Access Test Application Trapped Address Register 0 Trapped Address Register 1 Terminal Authority Transient Clear Transaction Capabilities Application Part Terminal Command Group
TCN TCP TCRI TCS TCU TD TDM TDMA TDU TE TELEPRO1 TELEPRO2 TEMP TERM TFA TFU TG TGL TI TIA TICC TICLI TID TIOP TISSUE TLDB TLDN TLP TM TM TM TMP TMR TOD TOP TP TPC TPS TPU TPU TPUCLI TPUGUI TPUL TRBL TRC TRKGRP TRN TRSP
T1 Facility Access Control Node Transmission Control Protocol Task Control Register Index Trafc Control Server Thirteen-Kilo-bit Code Division Multiple Access Channel Unit Time Division Multiplex Driver Time Division Multiplex Time Division Multiple Access Test and Diagnostic Unit Trafc Engineering Teleprocessing Process 1 Teleprocessing Process 2 Temporary Terminal Transfer Allowed Time Frequency Unit Trunk Group Trunk Group List Technician Interface Telecommunications Industry Association Trafc Intelligent Carrier Card Technician Interface Command Line Interface Transaction Identication Technician Interface Output Processor Technician Interface Shell Security User Enhancement Trouble Location Database Temporary Local Directory Number Trouble Locating Procedure Timer Trunk Group Member Trunk Maintenance Temporary Timer Register Time of Day Task Oriented Practice Trafc Processor Translation Point Code Teleprocessing System Trafc Processing Unit Transaction Processing Unit Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface Trafc Processing Unit Graphical User Interface Trafc Processing Unit Logger Trouble Time Division Multiple Access Radio Controller Trunk Group Temporary Reference Number Test Radio Switch Panel
TRTU TSP TSS TT TT TTL TTLNA TTY TTYC TWC TX TXAMP TXOUTLOCK TXPORT TXWATTS TrmIOP UA UART UARTFAIL UATI UC UC UC UCB UCL UCS UDA UDP UDPC UER UID UID UID ULAM ULARP UNA UNAV UPOPCLU UPS URC URC2 UTMOST UUCP UVDT UX UZ
Time Division Multiple Access Radio Test Unit Translation Signaling Point Time Stamp Service Trafc Type Translation Type Terminating Test Line Tower Top Low Noise Amplier Teletypewriter Teletypewriter Controller Three Way Calling Transmit Transmit Amplier Transceiver Out of Lock Transmit Port Transmit Wattage Terminate Input/Output Process Unconditional Acknowledgement Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter self-test Failure Universal Access Terminal Identier Unique Challenge User Channel Utility Circuit Unit Control Block Unconditional User Control String User Dened Cell Site Alarms User Datagram Protocol Unknown Destination Point Code Microinterrupt Error Register Unit Identication User Identication Utility Identication Ultralinear Amplier Module UNIX Level Automatic Restart Process Unavailable Unavailable Unpopulated Cluster Uninterrupted Power Supply Universal Radio Controller Universal Radio Controller 2 User Talk Most UNIX to UNIX Copy Program User View Descriptor Table UNIX User Zone
V V-DRU V-RCU VC VC VC VCA VCAap VCC VCI VCI VCSA VCVM VDRU VFL VFLA VFLAG VHA VIC VIOP VIS VL VLMM VLR VM VMS VMSS VOLT VP VPC VPI VPN VRAL VRCU VTOC VTTY VTTYC VTTYDRV WAP WER WFI WIN WNP WNPWLINE WRONGCLK WTIME
Voice Voice Digital Radio Unit Voice Radio Channel Unit Virtual Channel Virtual Cluster Voice Channel Voice Channel Administration Voice Channel Administration on the Application Processor Virtual Channel Connection Verify Charge Indicator Virtual Channel Identier Voice Channel Selection Activity Virtual Cluster Virtual Machine Voice Digital Radio Unit Voice Frequency Link Voice Frequency Link Access Video Flag Virtual Home Agent Vocoder is In the Cell Virtual Input/Output Processor Vocoder is In the Switch Virtual Link Very Large Main Memory Visitor Location Register Virtual Machine Voice Mail System Vendor Message Storage System Voltage Virtual Path Virtual Path Connection Virtual Path Identier Virtual Private Network Voice Radio Attenuation Level Voice Radio Channel Unit Volume Table Of Contents Virtual Teletypewriter Virtual Teletypewriter Controller Virtual Teletypewriter Driver Wireless Application Protocol Write Enable Ring Wait For Idle Wireless Intelligent Network Wireless Number Portability Wireless Number Portability Wireline Wrong Decoder Clock Wait Time
XID XLA XML XTA ZCS ZOT
Exchange Identier Translation Extended Markup Language X-Band Tracking Antenna Zero Code Suppression Zone Ofce Trunk
401-610-055 IM INDEX
CONTENTS 3.1 INPUT MESSAGES INDEX 0.2 FUNCTIONAL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 31
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 IM:INDEX-1
401-610-055 IM INDEX
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE IM:INDEX-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 IM INDEX
ID ............. IM:INDEX TYPE .......... Input
CHAPTER 3 INPUT MESSAGE INDEXES
3.1 INPUT MESSAGES INDEX Table 1 lists the input messages alphabetically by message name. This index also gives the message ID and release information. Table 2 groups the input messages by related unit or function. A list of the units and functions by which messages are indexed is listed at the beginning of Table 2.
401-610-055 IM INDEX
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 1X RNC INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ALW:RNC TPU DGN ALW:RNC ABREVC BKUP:RNCDB CLEAR:RNC GICC COPY:RNCDB RNC DELBKUP:RNCDB RNC EXPORT:RNC CONFIG GET:RNC ABREVC GET:RNC ALARM GET:RNC GICC GET:RNC INSTALL GET:RNC INVENTORY GET:RNC PDSNLIST GET:RNC PSPCF GET:RNC STATUS GET:RNC TPU DGNRESULT GET:RNC TPU FAILEDPVC GET:RNC TPU INFO GET:RNC TPU INVENTORY GET:RNC TPU STATE GET:RNC TPU VER CON GET:RNC TPU VERSION GET:RNC VERSION HALT:RNC TPU IMPORT:RNC CONFIG INH:RNC ABREVC INH:RNC TPU DGN INSTALL:RNC TPU LOCK:RNC TPU ALW:RNC-TPU-DGN ALW:RNC-ABREVC BKUP:RNCDB CLEAR:RNC-GICC COPY:RNCDB DELBKUP:RNCDB EXPORT:RNC-CONFIG GET:RNC-ABREVC GET:RNC-ALARM GET:RNC-GICC GET:RNC-INSTALL GET:RNC-INVENTORY GET:RNC-PDSNLIST GET:RNC-PSPCF GET:RNC-STATUS GET:RNC-TPU-DGNRES GET:RNC-TPU-FAILEDPVC GET:RNC-TPU-INFO GET:RNC-TPU-INVENT GET:RNC-TPU-STATE GET:RNC-TPU-VER-CON GET:RNC-TPU-VERSION GET:RNC-VERSION HALT:RNC-TPU IMPORT:RNC-CONFIG INH:RNC-ABREVC INH:RNC-TPU-DGN INSTALL:RNC-TPU LOCK:RNC-TPU 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 23.0 and later 25.0 and later 22.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 23.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 23.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 1X RNC INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ LOCKOUT:RNC GICC OP RNC OP:RNCDB RNC OP RNC TRKGRP RESET:RNC TPU RMV:AP-RNCDBMS RMV:AP-RNCM RMV RNC TRKGRP RST AP-RNCDBMS RST AP-RNCM RST RNC TRKGRP SHUTDOWN:RNC TPU SWITCH:RNC SWITCH:TOMATE RNC TPU SWITCHOVER RNCDBMS SWITCHOVER RNCM TST:BTS RNC TST:PSU RNC LOCKOUT:RNC-GICC OP:RNC OP:RNCDB OP:RNC-TRKGRP RESET:RNC-TPU RMV:AP-RNCDBMS RMV:AP-RNCM RMV:RNC-TRKGRP RST:AP-RNCDBMS RST:AP-RNCM RST:RNC-TRKGRP SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU SWITCH:RNC SWITCH:TOMATE-RNC-TPU SWITCHOVER:RNCDBMS SWITCHOVER:RNCM TST:BTS-RNC TST:PSU-RNC 25.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 23.0 and later
UNLOCK:RNC TPU UNLOCK:RNC-TPU 24.0 and later _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) 1xEV-DO INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ALW BTS AUD ALW TP AUD COMMIT AP DEL BTS GENERIC DGN:BTS ASMB TXAMP DGN BTS CDM DGN BTS-TFU EXC:BTS FLUS FLUS CELL INH BTS AUD INH TP AUD INIT AP INIT BTS INIT TP OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS OP AP OOS OP AP-PROCCFG OP AP-VERSION OP BTS OP BTS ALARM OP:BTS AMP OP:BTS ASMB TXAMP OP BTS CDM OP BTS CDM INVENTORY OP BTS FLUS OP BTS GENERIC OP:BTS OOS OP BTS-TDU OP BTS-TFU OP CELL FLUS OP OOS OP TP-ALARM ALW:BTS-AUD ALW:TP-AUD COMMIT:AP DEL:BTS-GENERIC DGN:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP DGN:BTS-CDM DGN:BTS-TFU EXC:BTS-FLUS FLUS:CELL INH:BTS-AUD INH:TP-AUD INIT:AP INIT:BTS INIT:TP OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS OP:AP-OOS OP:AP-PROCCFG OP:AP-VERSION OP:BTS OP:BTS-ALARM OP:BTS-AMP OP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP OP:BTS-CDM OP:BTS-CDM-INVENT OP:BTS-FLUS OP:BTS-GENERIC OP:BTS-OOS OP:BTS-TDU OP:BTS-TFU OP:CELL-FLUS OP:OOS OP:TP-ALARM 22.0 and later 23.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 25.0 and later 22.0 and later 23.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 20.0 and later 24.0 and later 21.0 and later 23.0 and later 24.0 and later 23.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 21.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 25.0 and later 21.0 and later 20.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) 1xEV-DO INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ OP TP OOS OP TP-STATUS OP TP-VERSION OP:TP-OOS OP:TP-STATUS OP:TP-VERSION 21.0 and later 20.0 and later 20.0 and later
RMV AP RMV:BTS ASMB TXAMP RMV BTS CDM RMV BTS-TDU RMV BTS-TFU RMV TP RST AP RST:BTS ASMB TXAMP RST BTS CDM RST BTS-TDU RST BTS-TFU RST TP SELECT AP SEND BTS GENERIC START TAA UATI START TAF UATI START TAR UATI STOP:BTS ASMB TXAMP STOP BTS CDM STOP BTS-TDU STOP BTS-TFU STOP:EXC BTS FLUS STOP FLUS CELL STOP SEND BTS GENERIC STOP:TAx UATI SWITCHBACK AP
RMV:AP RMV:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP RMV:BTS-CDM RMV:BTS-TDU RMV:BTS-TFU RMV:TP RST:AP RST:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP RST:BTS-CDM RST:BTS-TDU RST:BTS-TFU RST:TP SELECT:AP SEND:BTS-GENERIC START:TAA-UATI START:TAF-UATI START:TAR-UATI STOP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP STOP:BTS-CDM STOP:BTS-TDU STOP:BTS-TFU STOP:EXC-BTS-FLUS STOP:FLUS-CELL STOP:SEND-BTS-GENERIC STOP:TAx-UATI SWITCHBACK:AP
24.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 20.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 24.0 and later 20.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 21.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 25.0 and later 22.0 and later 20.1 and later 23.0 and later
SWITCHOVER AP SWITCHOVER:AP 24.0 and later _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) FLEXENT/EMS INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ALW AP HVLR ALW AP-MMA ALW CELL-DL ALW MSCDBMS-AUD ALW MSCDBMS-RCV AUD MSCDBMS BKUP:RNCDB CFR AP-DS1 CFR:AP-SS7 CFR SS7 COMMIT AP COPY:RNCDB RNC CREATE MMA CREATE RCS DELBKUP:RNCDB RNC DELETE MMA DELETE RCS DGN AP-DS1 DGN SS7 INH AP HVLR INH AP-MMA INH CELL-DL INH MSCDBMS-AUD INH MSCDBMS-RCV INIT AP OP ALARM OP AP-ALARM OP AP-CMDS ALW:AP-HVLR ALW:AP-MMA ALW:CELL-DL ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD ALW:MSCDBMS-RCV AUD:MSCDBMS BKUP:RNCDB CFR:AP-DS1 CFR:AP-SS7 CFR:SS7 COMMIT:AP COPY:RNCDB CREATE:MMA CREATE:RCS DELBKUP:RNCDB DELETE:MMA DELETE:RCS DGN:AP-DS1 DGN:SS7 INH:AP-HVLR INH:AP-MMA INH:CELL-DL INH:MSCDBMS-AUD INH:MSCDBMS-RCV INIT:AP OP:ALARM-EMS OP:AP-ALARM OP:AP-CMDS 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 14.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) FLEXENT/EMS INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ OP AP-DS1-STATUS OP AP-DS1x-STATUS OP AP-INFO OP AP-INV OP AP-IPBHINFO OP AP-MMA-STATUS OP AP-MMAx-STATUS OP AP-RCS-STATUS OP AP-RCSx-STATUS OP AP-STATUS OP AP-VERSION OP:RNCDB RNC OP SS7APNET OP SS7x-STATUS RESTART MMA RESTART RCS RMV AP RMV:AP-AMA RMV:AP-AMATPS RMV AP-DS1 RMV:AP-HVLR RMV:AP-HVLRIM RMV AP-MMA RMV AP-MSCDBMS RMV:AP-OAMPROXY RMV:AP-SP RMV AP SS7MM RMV:AP-TCS RMV:AP-TPUGUI RMV:AP-VCA RMV RCS RMV SS7 RST AP RST:AP-AMA RST:AP-AMATPS RST AP-DS1 RST:AP-HVLR OP:AP-DS1-STAT OP:AP-DS1x-STAT OP:AP-INFO OP:AP-INV OP:AP-IPBHINFO OP:AP-MMA-STAT OP:AP-MMAx-STAT OP:AP-RCS-STAT OP:AP-RCSx-STAT OP:AP-STATUS OP:AP-VERSION OP:RNCDB OP:SS7APNET OP:SS7x-STAT RESTART:MMA RESTART:RCS RMV:AP RMV:AP-AMA RMV:AP-AMATPS RMV:AP-DS1 RMV:AP-HVLR RMV:AP-HVLRIM RMV:AP-MMA RMV:AP-MSCDBMS RMV:AP-OAMPROXY RMV:AP-SP RMV:AP-SS7MM RMV:AP-TCS RMV:AP-TPUGUI RMV:AP-VCA RMV:RCS RMV:SS7 RST:AP RST:AP-AMA RST:AP-AMATPS RST:AP-DS1 RST:AP-HVLR 24.0 and later 15.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 15.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 23.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 14.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) FLEXENT/EMS INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ RST:AP-HVLRIM RST AP-MMA RST AP-MSCDBMS RST AP-OAMPROXY RST:AP-SP RST AP-SS7MM RST AP-TCS RST AP-TPUGUI RST:AP-VCA RST RCS RST SS7 SELECT AP STOP MSCDBMS STOP SS7 SWITCHBACK FROMAP RST:AP-HVLRIM RST:AP-MMA RST:AP-MSCDBMS RST:AP-OAMPROXY RST:AP-SP RST:AP-SS7MM RST:AP-TCS RST:AP-TPUGUI RST:AP-VCA RST:RCS RST:SS7 SELECT:AP STOP:MSCDBMS STOP:SS7 SWITCHBACK:FROMAP 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 24.0 and later 13.0 and later
SWITCHOVER:AMA SWITCHOVER:AMA 25.0 and later SWITCHOVER:AMATPS SWITCHOVER:AMATPS 25.0 and later SWITCHOVER AP SWITCHOVER:AP 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER MSCDBMS SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER RCS SWITCHOVER:RCS 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER:SP SWITCHOVER:SP 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER TCS SWITCHOVER:TCS 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI 24.0 and later SWITCHOVER:VCA SWITCHOVER:VCA 24.0 and later _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ABT AMATAPE ABT AMATAPE ECP ABT CDN AUD ABT DLN AUD ABT ECP AUD ABT VCA AUD ACTV OMDB ADD PAUTH ADD PCGRP ADD PROFL ADD TAUTH ADD TCGRP ALW ABREVC ALW AMA AUTOST ECP ALW AMADUMP ALW AMA SESSION ECP ALW ARGR ALW ARREGTRACE ALW ARUNSET ALW AUD ALW CDN AUD ALW CDN CP ALW CDN PRINT AUD ALW CELL ALW CELL CP FAIL ALW CELL EXTERN FLASH ALW CELL MLG ALW CONFLOG ALW CPREGTRACE ALW CPSECOND ALW CPSG ALW DLN AUD ALW DLN PRINT AUD ALW DMQ ALW DMQ ALW EAIINT ALW ECP AUD ABT:AMATAPE ABT:AMATAPE-ECP ABT:CDN-AUD ABT:DLN-AUD ABT:ECP-AUD ABT:VCA-AUD ACTV:OMDB ADD:PAUTH ADD:PCGRP ADD:PROFL ADD:TAUTH ADD:TCGRP ALW:ABREVC ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP ALW:AMADUMP ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP ALW:ARGR ALW:ARREGTRACE ALW:ARUNSET ALW:AUD ALW:CDN-AUD ALW:CDN-CP ALW:CDN-PRINT-AUD ALW:CELL ALW:CELL-CP-FAIL ALW:CELL-EXTERN ALW:CELL-MLG ALW:CONFLOG ALW:CPREGTRACE ALW:CPSECOND ALW:CPSG ALW:DLN-AUD ALW:DLN-PRINT-AU ALW:DMQ ALW:DMQ-RTR ALW:EAIINT ALW:ECP-AUD 25.0 and later 6.1 and later 23.0 and later 6.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 6.1 and later 17.0 and later 6.1 and later 6.1 and later 8.0 and later 6.1 and later 8.0 and later 23.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 25.0 and later 7.0 and later 20.0 and later 25.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.1 and later 7.0 and later 6.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ALW ECP PRINT AUD ALW EGSF ALW ERRCHK ALW ERRINT ALW ERRSRC ALW FILESYS ACCESS ALW FILESYS MOUNT ALW FILESYS OWNER ALW FMP ALW HDWCHK ALW LCP ALW LSLTRC ALW RCMS ALW REX ALW REX RPCD ALW REX RPCN ALW RUTIL ALW RUTILFLAG ALW SCSD ALW SFTCHK ALW TCS AUD ALW TRACE ALW TRAP ALW UMEM ALW UTIL ALW UTILFLAG ALW VCA AUD ALW VCA PRINT AUD APPLY OMDB AUD CDN NAME AUD CELL AUD CNC AUD CUMEM AUD CUSTAT AUD DLN NAME AUD ECD AUD ECDOWN AUD ECP NAME ALW:ECP-PRINT ALW:EGSF ALW:ERRCHK ALW:ERRINT ALW:ERRSRC ALW:FILESYS-ACCES ALW:FILESYS-MOUNT ALW:FILESYS-OWNER ALW:FMP ALW:HDWCHK ALW:LCP ALW:LSLTRC ALW:RCMS ALW:REX ALW:REX-RPCD ALW:REX-RPCN ALW:RUTIL ALW:RUTILFLAG ALW:SCSD ALW:SFTCHK ALW:TCS-AUD ALW:TRACE ALW:TRAP ALW:UMEM ALW:UTIL ALW:UTILFLAG ALW:VCA-AUD ALW:VCA-PRINT APPLY:OMDB AUD:CDN-NAME AUD:CELL AUD:CNC AUD:CUMEM AUD:CUSTAT AUD:DLN-NAME AUD:ECD AUD:ECDOWN AUD:ECP-NAME 19.0 and later 6.1 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 2.0 and later 8.0 and later 2.2 and later 25.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 23.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 19.0 and later 8.0 and later 23.0 and later 25.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ AUD FMGR AUD FSBLK AUD FSCMPT AUD FSLINK AUD MMGR AUD MSGBUF AUD NIDATA AUD NMDATA AUD NODEST AUD PMS AUD PROAD AUD REMACS AUD TCS NAME AUD VCA NAME BKUP DATABASE DB CFR CELL CFR RING CHG GEN CHG MRVT CHG PAUTH CHG PROFL CHG SLK CHG SRVT CLR ACKDB CLR APPSLT CLR CELL CLR DB DNLD CLR DB SU CLR EMERDMP CLR FANALM CLR FILESYS DIR CLR FILESYS FILE CLR IMCAT CLR IODRV CLR MHD MAEC CLR PTN MHD AUD:FMGR AUD:FSBLK AUD:FSCMPT AUD:FSLINK AUD:MMGR AUD:MSGBUF AUD:NIDATA AUD:NMDATA AUD:NODEST AUD:PMS AUD:PROAD AUD:REMACS AUD:TCS-NAME AUD:VCA-NAME BKUP:DATABASE CFR:CELL CFR:RING CHG:GEN CHG:MRVT CHG:PAUTH CHG:PROFL CHG:SLK CHG:SRVT CLR:ACKDB CLR:APPSLT CLR:CELL-SYNC CLR:DB-DNLD CLR:DB-SU CLR:EMERDMP CLR:FANALM CLR:FILESYS-DIR CLR:FILESYS-FILE CLR:IMCAT CLR:IODRV CLR:MHD-MAEC CLR:PTN-MHD 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 20.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 20.0 and later 22.0 and later 19.0 and later 17.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ CLR RUTIL CLR RUTILFLAG CLR SRST CLR SS7SRST CLR UMEM CLR UTIL CLR UTILFLAG CMPR DISK CORE CMPR MHD COPY ACTDISK COPY ADDR COPY AMATAPE COPY AMATAPE ECP COPY BKDISK COPY BKTAPE COPY CELL COPY DB COPY DIFF SRC MHD COPY OOSDISK COPY PID COPY PTN ALL COPY REG COPY SPDISK COPY TAPE EMERDMP COPY TAPE IN COPY TAPE OUT COPY TAPE TEST COPY TAPE TOP COPY UID COPY UVAR DEL CELL GENERIC DEL LOG DEL PAUTH DEL PCGRP DEL PROFL CLR:RUTIL CLR:RUTILFLAG CLR:SRST CLR:SS7SRST CLR:UMEM CLR:UTIL CLR:UTILFLAG CMPR:DISK-CORE CMPR:MHD COPY:ACTDISK COPY:ADDR COPY:AMATAPE COPY:AMATAPE-ECP COPY:BKDISK COPY:BKTAPE COPY:CELL COPY:DB COPY:DIFF-SRC-MHD COPY:OOSDISK COPY:PID COPY:PTN-ALL COPY:REG COPY:SPDISK COPY:TAPE-EMERDMP COPY:TAPE-IN COPY:TAPE-OUT COPY:TAPE-TEST COPY:TAPE-TOP COPY:UID COPY:UVAR DEL:CELL-GENERIC DEL:LOG DEL:PAUTH DEL:PCGRP DEL:PROFL 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 23.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 14.0 and later 23.0 and later 20.0 and later 22.0 and later 25.0 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 23.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ DEL TAUTH DEL TCGRP DEL:VLR:DCS DGN CELL DGN CELL DL DGN CELL SG DGN CU DGN DCI DGN DCS DL DGN DCS TRKGRP DGN DFC DGN DUIC DGN ECP DL DGN HSDC DGN IOP DGN LN DGN MHD DGN MT DGN MTC DGN MTTYC DGN RPCN DGN SCSDC DGN SDLC DGN TTYC DNLD CELL DNLD CELL DLOPTS DUMP ADDR DUMP BKTAPE DUMP CACHE DUMP CELL DUMP CELL AUTH FAIL DUMP CELL MRA DUMP CELL MRAQ DUMP CELL PLM DUMP CELL SG DUMP FILE ALL DUMP FILE DATA DEL:TAUTH DEL:TCGRP DEL:VLR-DCS DGN:CELL DGN:CELL-DL DGN:CELL-SG DGN:CU DGN:DCI DGN:DCS-DL DGN:DCS-TRKGRP DGN:DFC DGN:DUIC DGN:ECP-DL DGN:HSDC DGN:IOP DGN:LN DGN:MHD DGN:MT DGN:MTC DGN:MTTYC DGN:RPCN DGN:SCSDC DGN:SDLC DGN:TTYC DNLD:CELL DNLD:CELL-DLOPTS DUMP:ADDR DUMP:BKTAPE DUMP:CACHE DUMP:CELL DUMP:CELL-AUTH-FAIL DUMP:CELL-MRA DUMP:CELL-MRAQ DUMP:CELL-PLM DUMP:CELL-SG DUMP:FILE-ALL DUMP:FILE-DATA 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.0 and later 17.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 2.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 23.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 25.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ DUMP FILE FORMAT DUMP FILE PARTL DUMP ISR DUMP KERN DUMP MCR DUMP MHD BLOCK DUMP MHD DEFECT DUMP MHD VTOC DUMP PID DUMP PMEM DUMP REG DUMP RUTIL DUMP SMEAS DUMP TRK DATA DUMP UID DUMP UVAR END WHEN EX CU EX DCI EX DFC EX DUIC EX HSDC EX IOP EX LDPARM EX LN EX LOOP EX MHD EX MT EX MTC EX MTTYC EX PAUSE EX RPCN EX SCSDC EX SDLC EX STEP EX STOP EX TTYC DUMP:FILE-FORMAT DUMP:FILE-PARTL DUMP:ISR DUMP:KERN DUMP:MCR DUMP:MHD-BLOCK DUMP:MHD-DEFECT DUMP:MHD-VTOC DUMP:PID DUMP:PMEM DUMP:REG DUMP:RUTIL DUMP:SMEAS DUMP:TRK-DATA DUMP:UID DUMP:UVAR END:WHEN EX:CU EX:DCI EX:DFC EX:DUIC EX:HSDC EX:IOP EX:LDPARM EX:LN EX:LOOP EX:MHD EX:MT EX:MTC EX:MTTYC EX:PAUSE EX:RPCN EX:SCSDC EX:SDLC EX:STEP EX:STOP EX:TTYC 8.0 and later 13.0 and later 17.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 8.0 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 15.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 1 (Continued) ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ EXC CELL CDM DS1 EXC CELL FT EXC CELL ODPC EXC CELL RTDIAG EXC CELL TRKGRP LPBK EXC ENVIR PROC EXC ENVIR UPROC EXC KILLCALL EXC LAESREQ EXC MRVT EXC OFLBOOT EXC SRVT EXC SSDUPD EXC UCHALL EXC UCL FRCHO CELL RA FRCHO DCS TRKGRP FRMV LN EXC:CELL-CDM-DS1 EXC:CELL-FT EXC:CELL-ODPC EXC:CELL-RTDIAG EXC:CELL-TRKGRP-LPBK EXC:ENVIR-PROC EXC:ENVIR-UPROC EXC:KILLCALL EXC:LAESREQ EXC:MRVT EXC:OFLBOOT EXC:SRVT EXC:SSDUPD EXC:UCHALL EXC:UCL FRCHO:CELL-RA FRCHO:DCS-TRKGRP FRMV:LN 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 14.0 and later 13.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 14.0 and later 14.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 14.0 and later 8.0 and later
HELP HELP 23.0 and later _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 ECP INPUT MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ IN DTIME IN FILE APND IN FILE DEL IN FILE REPL IN FILESYS DIR IN REMOTE REPT IN REMOTE START IN REMOTE STOP IN XFER INH ABREVC INH AMA AUTOST ECP INH AMADUMP INH AMA SESSION ECP INH ARGR INH ARREGTRACE INH ARUNSET INH AUD INH CDN AUD INH CDN CP INH CDN PRINT AUD INH CELL INH CELL CP FAIL INH CELL EXTERN FLASH INH CELL MLG INH CONFLOG INH CPREGTRACE INH CPSECOND INH CPSG INH DLN AUD INH DLN PRINT AUD INH DMQ INH DMQ INH EAIINT INH ECP AUDIT INH ECP PRINT AUDIT INH EGSF INH ERRCHK INH ERRINT INH ERRSRC IN:DTIME IN:FILE-APND IN:FILE-DEL IN:FILE-REPL IN:FILESYS-DIR IN:REMOTE-REPT IN:REMOTE-START IN:REMOTE-STOP IN:XFER INH:ABREVC INH:AMA-AUTOST-ECP INH:AMADUMP INH:AMA-SESSION-ECP INH:ARGR INH:ARREGTRACE INH:ARUNSET INH:AUD INH:CDN-AUD INH:CDN-CP INH:CDN-PRINT INH:CELL INH:CELL-CP-FAIL INH:CELL-EXTERN INH:CELL-MLG INH:CONFLOG INH:CPREGTRACE INH:CPSECOND INH:CPSG INH:DLN-AUD INH:DLN-PRINT INH:DMQ INH:DMQ-RTR INH:EAIINT INH:ECP-AUD INH:ECP-PRINT INH:EGSF INH:ERRCHK INH:ERRINT INH:ERRSRC 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 6.1 and later 17.0 and later 6.1 and later 6.1 and later 8.0 and later 6.1 and later 8.0 and later 23.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 25.0 and later 7.0 and later 20.0 and later 25.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.1 and later 7.0 and later 6.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 19.0 and later 6.1 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ INH FILESYS UMOUNT INH FMP INH HDWCHK INH IMSMEAS INH LCP INH LSLTRC INH PSLT INH RCMS INH REPORT INH REX INH REX RPCD INH REX RPCN INH RMV INH RUTIL INH RUTILFLAG INH SCSD INH SFTCHK INH SLK INH TCS AUD INH TRACE INH TRAP INH UMEM INH UTIL INH UTILFLAG INH VCA AUD INH VCA PRINT AUDIT INIT AMA DW ECP INIT CDN INIT CDN DB INIT CELL INIT CNI INIT DLN SPP INIT ECP INIT ECP DB INIT ISR CDN INIT MCR CDN INIT MHD INIT UC INH:FILESYS-UMOUN INH:FMP INH:HDWCHK INH:IMSMEAS INH:LCP INH:LSLTRC INH:PSLT INH:RCMS INH:REPORT INH:REX INH:REX-RPCD INH:REX-RPCN INH:RMV INH:RUTIL INH:RUTILFLAG INH:SCSD INH:SFTCHK INH:SLK INH:TCS-AUD INH:TRACE INH:TRAP INH:UMEM INH:UTIL INH:UTILFLAG INH:VCA-AUD INH:VCA-PRINT INIT:AMA-DW-ECP INIT:CDN INIT:CDN-DB INIT:CELL INIT:CNI INIT:DLN-SPP INIT:ECP INIT:ECP-DB INIT:ISR-CDN INIT:MCR-CDN INIT:MHD INIT:UC 8.0 and later 2.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 2.2 and later 25.0 and later 7.0 and later 22.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 23.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 19.0 and later 6.1 and later 22.0 and later 25.0 and later 22.0 and later 5.1 and later 4.1 and later 23.0 and later 21.0 and later 6.1 and later 3.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ INIT ULARP INIT UMEM INIT VCA LABEL AMATAPE LABEL AMATAPE ECP LOAD ADDR LOAD CELL LOAD DFC PUMP LOAD DFC RAM LOAD MHD DEFECT LOAD MHD FIRMWARE LOAD PMEM LOAD REG LOAD RUTIL LOAD UVAR LOGN SHL MEAS CELL MON APSLK MON SLK MOVE CELL MOVE CELL OC MOVE DN CELL MOVE IMSI CELL MOVE MIN CELL OCNS CELL OP ABREVC OP ACT OP ALARM OP AMA CONFIG ECP OP AMA CONTROLFILE ECP OP AMA DISK ECP OP AMADUMP OP AMA MAPS ECP INIT:ULARP INIT:UMEM INIT:VCA LABEL:AMATAPE LABEL:AMATAPE-ECP LOAD:ADDR LOAD:CELL LOAD:DFC-PUMP LOAD:DFC-RAM LOAD:MHD-DEFECT LOAD:MHD-FIRMWARE LOAD:PMEM LOAD:REG LOAD:RUTIL LOAD:UVAR LOGN:SHL MEAS:CELL MON:APSLK MON:SLK MOVE:CELL MOVE:CELL-OC MOVE:DN-CELL MOVE:IMSI-CELL MOVE:MIN-CELL OCNS:CELL OP:ABREVC OP:ACT OP:ALARM OP:AMA-CONFIG-ECP OP:AMA-CONTROL-ECP OP:AMA-DISK-ECP OP:AMADUMP OP:AMA-MAPS-ECP 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 14.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 14.0 and later 21.0 and later 20.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 5.1 and later 6.1 and later 6.1 and later 6.1 and later 17.0 and later 6.1 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ OP AMA METADATA OP AMA SESSION OP AMA SESSION ECP OP AMA TELEPROCESSING OP AMA TELEPROCESSING ECP OP APPSLT OP AUD OP AUDERR OP BHS CELL OP C7NET OP CDN OP CDN AUD OP CDN CP OP CDN OVLD OP CELL OP CELL CDM PPSUM OP CELL CENB OP CELL CSB OP CELL DL OP CELL DLOPTS OP CELL EXTERN OP CELL GENERIC OP CELL INVENT OP CELL OVLD OP CELL SCSM OP CELL SG OP CELL TXWATTS OP CELL VERSION OP CELL VOC OP CFGSTAT OP CLK OP COB CTRC OP CTRC OP DCS OP DCS BHSSTAT OP DCS DL OP DCS DS1 OP DCS MRAQ OP DCS TRKALM OP DCS TRKGRP OP DFCELOG OP:AMA-METADATA OP:AMA-SESSION OP:AMA-SESSION-ECP OP:AMA-TELEPRO OP:AMA-TELEPRO-ECP OP:APPSLT OP:AUD OP:AUDERR OP:BHS-CELL OP:C7NET OP:CDN OP:CDN-AUD OP:CDN-CP OP:CDN-OVLD OP:CELL OP:CELL-CDM-PPSUM OP:CELL-CENB OP:CELL-CSB OP:CELL-DL OP:CELL-DLOPTS OP:CELL-EXTERN OP:CELL-GENERIC OP:CELL-INVENT OP:CELL-OVLD OP:CELL-SCSM OP:CELLSG OP:CELL-TXWATTS OP:CELL-VERS OP:CELL-VOC OP:CFGSTAT OP:CLK OP:COB-CTRC OP:CTRC OP:DCS OP:DCS-BHSSTAT OP:DCS-DL OP:DCS-DS1 OP:DCS-MRAQ OP:DCS-TRKALM OP:DCS-TRKGRP OP:DFCELOG 25.0 and later 25.0 and later 6.1 and later 25.0 and later 6.1 and later 20.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 3.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 21.0 and later 25.0 and later 24.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 5.1 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 12.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 25.0 and later 3.0 and later 25.0 and later 6.0 and later 16.0 and later 12.0 and later 5.1 and later 9.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ OP DFC INFO OP DL OP DLN OP DLN AUD OP DMQ OP DN OP ECP OP ECP AUD OP ECP CENB OP ECP DL OP ECP OVLD OP EIN ROUTEPOOL OP EMERSTAT OP ERRCHK OP FNAME OP GEN READLOG OP GROW OP HSDC INFO OP HSD INFO OP IMSI OP INFO EESN OP INFO NPACOUNT OP INIT OP IODRV OP ISR CDN OP LN DL OP LNSTAT OP LOG OP LTRC OP MCR CDN OP MEMERRS OP MHD INFO OP MIN OP MSGCLS OP MSG CTRC OP MT INFO OP MTTYC INFO OP MTTY INFO OP NPMEM OP OC CELL OP ODPC OP:DFC-INFO OP:DL OP:DLN OP:DLN-AUD OP:DMQ OP:DN OP:ECP OP:ECP-AUD OP:ECP-CENB OP:ECP-DL OP:ECP-OVLD OP:EIN-ROUTEPOOL OP:EMERSTAT OP:ERRCHK OP:FNAME OP:GEN-READLOG OP:GROW OP:HSDC-INFO OP:HSD-INFO OP:IMSI OP:INFO-EESN OP:INFO-NPACOUNT OP:INIT OP:IODRV OP:ISR-CDN OP:LN-DL OP:LNSTAT OP:LOG OP:LTRC OP:MCR-CDN OP:MEMERRS OP:MHD-INFO OP:MIN OP:MSGCLS OP:MSG-CTRC OP:MT-INFO OP:MTTYC-INFO OP:MTTY-INFO OP:NPMEM OP:OC-CELL OP:ODPC 24.0 and later 2.0 and later 4.1 and later 6.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 6.1 and later 25.0 and later 21.0 and later 2.0 and later 2.0 and later 25.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 6.1 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.1 and later 2.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 3.0 and later 8.0 and later 24.0 and later 17.0 and later 20.0 and later 17.0 and later 24.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 19.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ OP OFFICE AL OP OFL OP OMDB OP OOS OP OUTCLS OP PERMS OP PM CELL OP PMCR OP REXINH OP RING OP RNC BHSSTAT OP ROP INFO OP RUTIL OP RUTILFLAG OP SCC INFO OP SCHD OP SCSD OP SDLC INFO OP SDL INFO OP:SESSIONS OP SLK OP SMR OP SNAT OP SPECTRUM OP STBY OP STATUS DISKUSE OP STATUS FILESYS OP STATUS FREEDISK OP STATUS LISTDIR OP STATUS PORTS OP STATUS PROCESS OP STATUS SUM OP SUAUDIOPDFC OP:TCS AUD OP TPC OP TRACE OP TRAP OP TTYC INFO OP TTY INFO OP ULARP COMMAND OP ULARP EXECSEQ OP:OFFICE-AL OP:OFL OP:OMDB OP:OOS-RTR OP:OUTCLS OP:PERMS OP:PM-CELL OP:PMCR OP:REXINH OP:RING OP:RNC-BHSSTAT OP:ROP-INFO OP:RUTIL OP:RUTILFLAG OP:SCC-INFO OP:SCHD OP:SCSD OP:SDLC-INFO OP:SDL-INFO OP:SESSIONS OP:SLK OP:SMR OP:SNAT OP:SPECTRUM OP:STBY OP:ST-DISKUSE OP:ST-FILESYS OP:ST-FREEDISK OP:ST-LISTDIR OP:ST-PORTS OP:ST-PROCESS OP:ST-SUM OP:SUAUDIOPDFC OP:TCS-AUD OP:TPC OP:TRACE OP:TRAP OP:TTYC-INFO OP:TTY-INFO OP:ULARP-COMMAND OP:ULARP-EXECSEQ 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 20.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 25.0 and later 17.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 17.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 23.0 and later 24.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 7.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ OP ULARP PROCESS OP UMEM OP UNAV OP UNEQIP OP UTIL OP VCA AUD ORD SCSD RCV DMTECD RC RCV DMTECD VFY RCV DMTSG RC RCV DMTSG VFY RCV MENU BROWSE RCV MENU COMPAREDB RCV MENU CREATEECD RCV MENU CREATESG RCV MENU EVOL RCV MENU FDIFF RCV MENU KEYCMP RCV MENU KEYCOMM RCV MENU KEYS RCV MENU LOADF3B RCV MENU NEWDB RCV MENU PRINTDB RCV MENU PRINTFRM RCV MENU RCVECD RCV MENU RCVSG RCV MENU TRANSGEN RCV MENU TREEBLD RCV MENU VFYDFLT REPT SLK RESET CELL RFT ABORT RFT BEGINPOST RFT FDUMP RFT PRINT OP:ULARP-PROCESS OP:UMEM OP:UNAV OP:UNEQIP OP:UTIL OP:VCA-AUD ORD:SCSD RCV:DMTECD-RC RCV:DMTECD-VFY RCV:DMTSG-RC RCV:DMTSG-VFY RCV:M-BROWSE RCV:M-COMPAREDB RCV:M-CREATEECD RCV:M-CREATESG RCV:M-EVOL RCV:M-FDIFF RCV:M-KEYCMP RCV:M-KEYCOMM RCV:M-KEYS RCV:M-LOADF3B RCV:M-NEWDB RCV:M-PRINTDB RCV:M-PRINTFRM RCV:M-RCVECD RCV:M-RCVSG RCV:M-TRANSGEN RCV:M-TREEBLD RCV:M-VFYDFLT REPT:SLK RESET:CELL RFT:ABORT RFT:BEGINPOST RFT:FDUMP RFT:PRINT 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 19.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ RMV AP ROP RMV CDN RMV CELL RMV CELL SG RMV CU RMV DCI RMV DCS DL RMV DCS TRKGRP RMV DFC RMV DUI RMV DUIC RMV ECP DL RMV HSD RMV HSDC RMV IOP RMV LN RMV LN DL RMV LN UCL RMV MHD RMV MT RMV MTC RMV MTTY RMV MTTYC RMV ROP RMV RPCN RMV SBUS RMV SCC RMV SCSDC RMV SDL RMV SDLC RMV TTY RMV TTYC RMV VIOP RMV VTTY RMV VTTYC RNM PSSWD RST AP ROP RST CDN RST CELL RMV:AP-ROP RMV:CDN RMV:CELL RMV:CELL-SG RMV:CU RMV:DCI RMV:DCS-DL RMV:DCS-TRKGRP RMV:DFC RMV:DUI RMV:DUIC RMV:ECP-DL RMV:HSD RMV:HSDC RMV:IOP RMV:LN RMV:LN-DL RMV:LN-UCL RMV:MHD RMV:MT RMV:MTC RMV:MTTY RMV:MTTYC RMV:ROP RMV:RPCN RMV:SBUS RMV:SCC RMV:SCSDC RMV:SDL RMV:SDLC RMV:TTY RMV:TTYC RMV:VIOP RMV:VTTY RMV:VTTYC RNM:PSSWD RST:AP-ROP RST:CDN RST:CELL 24.0 and later 20.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.0 and later 20.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 2.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 2.2 and later 3.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 9.0 and later 9.0 and later 9.0 and later 8.0 and later 24.0 and later 23.0 and later 22.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ RST CELL SG RST CU RST DCI RST DCS DL RST DCS TRKGRP RST DFC RST DUI RST DUIC RST ECP DL RST HSD RST HSDC RST IOP RST LN RST LN DL RST MHD RST MT RST MTC RST MTTY RST MTTYC RST ROP RST RPCN RST SBUS RST SCC RST SCSDC RST SDL RST SDLC RST TTY RST TTYC RST VIOP RST VTTY RST VTTYC SCHED VCSA SEND CELL GENERIC SET AMA CONFIG ECP SET AMA CONFIG BSN ECP SET AMA CONTROL ECP SET APPSLT SET CLK RST:CELL-SG RST:CU RST:DCI RST:DCS-DL RST:DCS-TRKGRP RST:DFC RST:DUI RST:DUIC RST:ECP-DL RST:HSD RST:HSDC RST:IOP RST:LN RST:LN-DL RST:MHD RST:MT RST:MTC RST:MTTY RST:MTTYC RST:ROP RST:RPCN RST:SBUS RST:SCC RST:SCSDC RST:SDL RST:SDLC RST:TTY RST:TTYC RST:VIOP RST:VTTY RST:VTTYC SCHED:VCSA SEND:CELL-GENERIC SET:AMA-CONFIG-ECP SET:AMA-CONFIG-BSN-ECP SET:AMA-CONTROL-ECP SET:APPSLT SET:CLK 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.0 and later 9.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 2.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 2.2 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 9.0 and later 9.0 and later 9.0 and later 17.0 and later 22.0 and later 19.0 and later 19.0 and later 14.0 and later 20.0 and later 15.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ SET CLK SET CP SET DB DNLD SET DB SU SET IODRV SET TRACE SET TRAP STOP AMATAPE STOP AMATAPE ECP STOP AUD STOP BKDISK STOP CELL STOP CFR CELL STOP CMPR MHD STOP COPY DIFF STOP DCI STOP DCS MRAQ STOP DGN CELL STOP DGN CELL DL STOP DGN CELL SG STOP DGN DCS DL STOP DGN DCS TRK STOP DGN ECP DL STOP DMQ STOP DNLD STOP EXC ANY STOP EXC FT STOP EXC CELL RTDIAG STOP EXC ODPC STOP EXC USER STOP GEN STOP MEAS CELL STOP MOVE CELL STOP OCNS CELL STOP OFLBOOT STOP OP CELL INVENT STOP OP COB CTRC STOP OP MSG CTRC SET:CLK-RTR SET:CP SET:DB-DNLD SET:DB-SU SET:IODRV SET:TRACE SET:TRAP STOP:AMATAPE STOP:AMATAPE-ECP STOP:AUD STOP:BKDISK STOP:CELL STOP:CFR-CELL STOP:CMPR-MHD STOP:COPY-DIFF STOP:DCI STOP:DCS-MRAQ STOP:DGN-CELL STOP:DGN-CELL-DL STOP:DGN-CELL-SG STOP:DGN-DCS-DL STOP:DGN-DCS-TRK STOP:DGN-ECP-DL STOP:DMQ STOP:DNLD STOP:EXC-ANY STOP:EXC-CELL-FT STOP:EXC-CELL-RTDIAG STOP:EXC-ODPC STOP:EXC-USER STOP:GEN STOP:MEAS-CELL STOP:MOVE-CELL STOP:OCNS-CELL STOP:OFLBOOT STOP:OP-CELL-INVENT STOP:OP-COB-CTRC STOP:OP-MSG-CTRC 15.0 and later 16.0 and later 19.0 and later 17.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 8.0 and later 25.0 and later 6.1 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 3.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 6.0 and later 9.0 and later 2.0 and later 8.0 and later 4.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 19.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 22.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 22.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ STOP SEND CELL GENERIC STOP TRAP STOP VCSA SW ACDN SW CELL SW CLOCK SW CU SW DLN SW OFLBOOT SW PORTSW SW SPECTRUM SWITCHOVER ROP UPD APPLY BYTER UPD APPLY FILER UPD APPLY FUNCR UPD APPLY UNIXCMD UPD AUTO UPD AUTOCHK UPD AUTOPROFILE UPD AUTOSCHED UPD BKOUT UPD BLDBOOT UPD BLOCK UPD BOLO UPD CELL GENERIC ABT UPD CELL GENERIC ADD UPD CELL GENERIC DLT UPD CHG APPLY UPD CHG BKOUT UPD CHG INST UPD CHG SKTM UPD CLR UPD CLRBWM UPD CSCANS REPORT UPD CSCANS STOP UPD DISPLAY UPD DISPLYUPD UPD EXALL STOP:SEND-CELL-GENERIC STOP:TRAP STOP:VCSA SW:ACDN SW:CELL SW:CLOCK SW:CU SW:DLN SW:OFLBOOT SW:PORTSW SW:SPECTRUM SWITCHOVER:ROP UPD:APPLY-BYTER UPD:APPLY-FILER UPD:APPLY-FUNCR UPD:APPLY-UNIXCMD UPD:AUTO UPD:AUTOCHK UPD:AUTOPROFILE UPD:AUTOSCHED UPD:BKOUT UPD:BLDBOOT UPD:BLOCK UPD:BOLO UPD:CELL-ABT UPD:CELL-ADD UPD:CELL-DLT UPD:CHG-APPLY UPD:CHG-BKOUT UPD:CHG-INST UPD:CHG-SKTM UPD:CLR UPD:CLRBWM UPD:CSCANS-REPORT UPD:CSCANS-STOP UPD:DISPLAY UPD:DISPLYUPD UPD:EXALL 22.0 and later 7.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 22.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 4.1 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 7.0 and later 24.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 1.0 and later 5.0 and later 2.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ UPD EXNXT UPD EXPAND UPD FLASH UPD FLASH DFC UPD FTRC UPD GEN APPLPROC UPD GEN BACKOUT UPD GEN COMMIT UPD GEN CONTINUE UPD GEN ENTER UPD GENP UPD GEN PROCEED UPD GEN RESTORE UPD INITPW UPD NXTWNDW UPD OFC UPD OMDB UPD PRINT UPD PRINT BWMFILE UPD PRINT SKTM UPD PRVWNDW UPD RCVRY UPD REBOOT UPD RECOVERY UPD REDUCE UPD RESET UPD START EASYBWM UPD STOP EXC UPD STOP SOAK UPD UPDCON UPD UPDDSPLY UPD UPNAME UPD VERSION UPD VFY UPD VFYBWM UPD VFYCON UPD VLR QUALREQ UPD VLR REGNOT UPDATE AP BPSN UPDATE CELL BPSN UPD:EXNXT UPD:EXPAND UPD:FLASH UPD:FLASH-DFC UPD:FTRC UPD:GEN-APPLPROC UPD:GEN-BACKOUT UPD:GEN-COMMIT UPD:GEN-CONTINUE UPD:GEN-ENTER UPD:GENP UPD:GEN-PROCEED UPD:GEN-RESTORE UPD:INITPW UPD:NXTWNDW UPD:OFC UPD:OMDB UPD:PRINT UPD:PRINT-BWMFILE UPD:PRINT-SKTM UPD:PRVWNDW UPD:RCVRY UPD:REBOOT UPD:RECOVERY UPD:REDUCE UPD:RESET UPD:START-EASYBWM UPD:STOP-EXC UPD:STOP-SOAK UPD:UPDCON UPD:UPDDSPLY UPD:UPNAME UPD:VERSION UPD:VFY UPD:VFYBWM UPD:VFYCON UPD:VLR-QUALREQ UPD:VLR-REGNOT UPDATE:AP-BPSN UPDATE:CELL-BPSN 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 17.0 and later 17.0 and later 25.0 and later 25.0 and later
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 1 Alphabetical Index of Input Messages Volume 2 (Continued) _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Message Name Message ID Release _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ VER AMATAPE VER AMATAPE ECP VER PLM VER VCSA VFY FILE VFY MHD VFY PAUTH VFY PCGRP VFY PROFL VFY TAPE VFY TAUTH VFY TCGRP WHEN COND WHEN PID WHEN RUTIL WHEN UID WRITE AMA DATA ECP VER:AMATAPE VER:AMATAPE-ECP VER:PLM VER:VCSA VFY:FILE VFY:MHD VFY:PAUTH VFY:PCGRP VFY:PROFL VFY:TAPE VFY:TAUTH VFY:TCGRP WHEN:COND WHEN:PID WHEN:RUTIL WHEN:UID WRITE:AMA-DATA-ECP 25.0 and later 14.0 and later 22.0 and later 17.0 and later 20.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 13.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 8.0 and later 6.1 and later
APPENDIX AUDIT APP:AUD 8.0 and later APPENDIX MEMBER NUMBERS B APP:MEM-NUM-B 8.0 and later APPENDIX MEMBER NUMBERS C APP:MEM-NUM-C 8.0 and later APPENDIX MEMBER NUMBERS D APP:MEM-NUM-D 8.0 and later _ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 IM INDEX
401-610-055 IM INDEX
0.2 FUNCTIONAL INDEX The following is a list of the units and functions by which the messages are indexed. Alarms Authentication Audits Authority Relations Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) Breakpoints Call Processing Database Node (CDN) Cell Hardware Cell Software Generics Clock (CLK) Control Unit (CU) Database (DB) Diagnostics Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) Disk File System (DFS) Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Expanded General System Failure (EGSF) Field Update (FU) System File System Maintenance Generic Access Package (GRASP) Generic Update Inhibits Initialization Input/Output Devices and Logs Input/Output Processor (IOP) Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) Interrupts Line Units Maintenance Control (MC) Overload Control Plant Measurements System (PMS) Power Level Measurements (PLM) Process Control Processor Initialization and Recovery Recent Change (RC) Retrot Process Ring Units Scan and Signal Distributor (SC/SD) Points Signaling Link (SLK) Tape Manipulation Trunk Units User Level Automatic Restart Voice Channel Selection Activities (VCSA) The messages in Table 2 are presented in alphabetical order within each unit or function.
401-610-055 IM INDEX
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ ALARMS Performs a remote reset of the 3B21D Computer fan alarm. Request a list of all alarmed ECP, CDN, cell, and DCS equipment. Request a report of all trunk groups in alarm for a DCS. Request a survey of all off normal scan points. CLR:FANALM
OP:ALARM
OP:DCS-TRKALM
OP:ECP-AL
AUDITS
Terminates a CDN OSDS audit. Terminates an ECP OSDS audit. Allows the routine running of one or more audits by the System Integrity Monitor. Allows the routine execution of one or all CDN OSDS audits. Allows the printing of CDN OSDS audit results. Allows the routine execution of one or all ECP OSDS audits. Allows the printing of ECP OSDS audit results. Requests a CDN OSDS audit. Requests an audit in one or more cell sites. Initiates the Central Node Control (CNC) audit. Runs the memory audit in the standby CU. Runs the CU hardware status audit in the manual mode. Audits the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD).
ABT:CDN-AUD ABT:ECP-AUD ALW:AUD
ALW:CDN-AUD
ALW:CDN-PRINT-AUD ALW:ECP-AUD
ALW:ECP-PRINT AUD:CDN-NAME AUD:CELL AUD:CNC AUD:CUMEM AUD:CUSTAT
AUD:ECD
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ AUDITS Runs the Equipment Conguration Database Manager (ECDMAN) audit of record ownership. Requests an ECP OSDS audit. Audits the File Managers (FMGR) resources. Runs the le system block audit. Runs the le system compaction audit. Runs the le system link audit. Runs the link and band status audit. Runs the memory manager audit. Audits the message buffer resources. Runs the network data audit. Runs the network management audit. Initiates ring node state audits. Runs the Equipment Conguration Database Manager (ECDMAN) audit of record ownership. Audits the DCT Extended (DCTEXT), searching for suspended process creations (including forks) and terminations. Audits the remote access system. Inhibits the routine running of one or more audits. Inhibits the routine execution of one or all CDN OSDS audits. Inhibits the printing of CDN OSDS audit results. AUD:ECDOWN
AUD:ECP-NAME AUD:FMGR AUD:FSBLK AUD:FSCMPT AUD:FSLINK AUD:LKBDST AUD:MMGR AUD:MSGBUF AUD:NIDATA AUD:NMDATA AUD:NODEST AUD:PMS
AUD:PROAD
AUD:REMACS INH:AUD
INH:CDN-AUD
INH:CDN-PRINT
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ AUDITS Inhibits the routine execution of one or all ECP OSDS audits. Inhibits the printing of ECP OSDS audit results. Reports the status of an audit or audits controlled by the System Integrity Monitor (SIM). Reports the error counts of one or more audits controlled by the SIM. Requests audit statistics and queuing data. Requests audit statistics and queuing data. Stops a currently active audit. INH:ECP-AUD
INH:ECP-PRINT OP:AUD
OP:AUDERR
OP:CDN-AUD OP:ECP-AUD STOP:AUD
AUTHENTICATION
Requests a Shared Secret Data (SSD) update of a particular mobile for the Authentication Capability. Requests a Unique Challenge of a particular mobile for the Authentication Capability.
EXC:SSDUPD
EXC:UCHALL
AUTHORITY RELATIONS
Allows the addition of a new password with its related identity to the Person Authority Relation (PAUTH). Allows the Command Groups (COMGR) to be associated with a Person Identity (IDENT), thus allowing a craftsperson to access only certain groups of commands. Adds a new prole to the list of user proles. Allows the addition of a new terminal to the Terminal Authority (TAUTH) relation.
ADD:PAUTH
ADD:PCGRP
ADD:PROFL ADD:TAUTH
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ AUTHORITY RELATIONS Allows the Command Groups (COMGR) to be associated with a Terminal (TERM) Identity, thus allowing a craftsperson to access only certain groups of commands from that terminal. Allows changes to the password prex and/or sufx. Add or remove a command group from a prole identity. Allows deletion of person authority. Delete a command group from a personal identity. Delete a prole from a list of user proles. Allows the deletion of a terminal identity from the Terminal Authority (TAUTH) relation. Allows a Command Group (COMGR) to be disassociated from a Terminal (TERM) Identity, thus preventing a craftsperson from accessing this group of commands from that terminal. Allows a user to change the password sufx. Allows verication of a person or group password prex and sufx. Allows the retrieval of entries from the Person Command Group (PCGRP) table. Verify prole names or command groups. Allows verication of all terminal identities in the Terminal Authority (TAUTH) relation. Allows the retrieval of entries from the Terminal Command Group (TCGRP) table. ADD:TCGRP
CHG:PAUTH
CHG:PROFL
DEL:PAUTH DEL:PCGRP
DEL:PROFL DEL:TAUTH
DEL:TCGRP
RNM:PSSWD VFY:PAUTH
VFY:PCGRP
VFY:PROFL VFY:TAUTH
VFY:TCGRP
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING (AMA) Aborts the current AMA tape writing session. ABT:AMATAPE
Allows auto-start of AMA tape writing. Stops manual blocking of AMA tape writing operations. Clears (initializes with zeroes) partitions on a specied disk. Writes primary or secondary AMA data onto tape. Blocks auto-start of AMA tape writing operations. Blocks all AMA tape writing sessions. Initialize the AMA disk writer. Writes header labels for an AMA tape. Provides status of the AMA conguration les. Obtains the current state of the AMA control le. Requests current AMA disk space occupancy data. Displays the disk maps and global maps for each AMA stream. Obtains the status of the current or most recent AMA tape or teleprocessing session. Obtains a summary of AMA teleprocessing.
ALW:AMA-AUTOST ALW:AMA-SESSION
CLR:PTN-MHD
COPY:AMATAPE
INH:AMA-AUTOST
INH:AMA-SESSION INIT:AMA-DW LABEL:AMATAPE OP:AMA-CONFIG OP:AMA-CONTROL
OP:AMA-DISK
OP:AMA-MAPS
OP:AMA-SESSION
OP:AMA-TELEPRO
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING (AMA) Equips or unequips an AMA partition for the data stream. Changes one or more of the AMA control le parameters. Stops the tape writing process manually. Veries a tape for AMA use. Causes all AMA data stored in main memory to be written to disk. SET:AMA-CONFIG
SET:AMA-CONTROL
STOP:AMATAPE VER:AMATAPE WRITE:AMA-DATA
BREAKPOINTS
Allows all RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node. Allows specic RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node. Enables all currently dened 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoints so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint conditions occur. Enables a specic 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoint so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint condition occurs. Clears all RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node. Clears specic RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node.
ALW:RUTIL
ALW:RUTILFLAG
ALW:UTIL
ALW:UTILFLAG
CLR:RUTIL
CLR:RUTILFLAG
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ BREAKPOINTS Removes all currently dened 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoints; clears denitions. Removes the specied 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoint and clears the denition. Dumps the contents of memory at the given node. Inhibits all RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node. Inhibits specic RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node. Disables (but leaves dened) all 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoints. Disables (but leaves dened) a specic 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoint. Load the contents of memory at the given node with the specied data. Request the current status of all RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node. Request the current status of specic RGRASP breakpoints in the specied node. Lists currently dened 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoints, their status and trace status. Sets an RGRASP breakpoint in the specied node. CLR:UTIL
CLR:UTILFLAG
DUMP:RUTIL
INH:RUTIL
INH:RUTILFLAG
INH:UTIL
INH:UTILFLAG
LOAD:RUTIL
OP:RUTIL
OP:RUTILFLAG
OP:UTIL
WHEN:RUTIL
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) ________________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID ________________________________________________________________________________________________ CALL PROCESSING DATABASE NODE (CDN) Terminates a CDN OSDS audit. ABT:CDN-AUD
Allows the routine execution of one or all CDN OSDS audits. Restores call processing to this CDN. Allows the printing of CDN OSDS audit results. Requests a CDN OSDS audit. Inhibits the routine execution of one or all CDN OSDS audits. Inhibits call processing from this CDN. Inhibits the printing of CDN OSDS audit results. Requests a CDN OSDS initialization phase. Causes an initialization of one or all data base members in a specied CDN. Reinitializes the Mobile Call Register (MCR) associated with an ECID that has been reported as being up for more than 24 hours. Requests the status of one or all CDNs. Requests audit statistics and queuing data. Requests the status of a camped-on CDN. Requests CDN overload status information. Reports the long duration call data for a MCR associated with an ECID that has been reported as being up for more than 24 hours.
ALW:CDN-AUD
ALW:CDN-CP ALW:CDN-PRINT-AUD AUD:CDN-NAME INH:CDN-AUD
INH:CDN-CP INH:CDN-PRINT INIT:CDN INIT:CDN-DB
INIT:MCR-CDN
OP:CDN OP:CDN-AUD OP:CDN-CP OP:CDN-OVLD OP:MCR-CDN
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ CALL PROCESSING DATABASE NODE (CDN) Requests that the Administrative CDN (ACDN) function be switched to another CDN. SW:ACDN
CELL HARDWARE
Allow a software or hardware action at a cell site. Request an audit in one or more cell sites. Requests Manual and Cell Conguration and Cell Test (MCAT). Copies the data link information from the active CSC to the ofine CSC. Diagnoses the specied cell site unit. Diagnoses the specied cell site data link. Requests that diagnostics be run on all trunks associated with a specic cell, server group, and antenna face. Requests a non-volatile memory update of the specied unit(s) at the specied cell(s). Request an NVM update of the data link optioning elds. Dumps a block of text or data memory from a cell. Finds out which devices are being diagnosed at a cell, and which devices are waiting to be diagnosed in the high and low priority test equipment queues.
ALW:CELL
AUD:CELL CFR:CELL
COPY:CELL
DGN:CELL DGN:CELL-DL DGN:CELL-SG
DNLD:CELL
DNLD:CELL-DLOPTS
DUMP:CELL
DUMP:CELL-MRAQ
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ CELL HARDWARE Requests an aggregate service measurement count for each voice radio of appropriate technology type on the specied cell, server group, and antenna face. Begins execution of a functional test at a cell site. Begins execution of a routine diagnostic sequence at a cell site. Inhibits a software or hardware action at cell sites. Request a cell site initialization or cell memory boot. Loads one to four bytes of data into a cell site controller. Performs measurements on Series II cell site units. Requests the status of all trunks associated with a specied cell, server group, and antenna face. Finds out version of rmware and/or software installed on one or more devices at the cell site. Removes the specied unit from service. Removes all trunks associated with a specied cell, server group and antenna face from service. Returns cell unit to service. Restores all trunks associated with a specied cell, server group and antenna face to service. Requests exit from Manual and Cell Conguration and Cell Test (MCAT). Terminates a previously-requested diagnostic at a cell site. DUMP:CELL-SG
EXC:CELL-FT EXC:CELL-RTDIAG
INH:CELL
INIT:CELL
LOAD:CELL
MEAS:CELL
OP:CELL-SG OP:CELL-VERS RMV:CELL RMV:CELL-SG RST:CELL RST:CELL-SG STOP:CFR-CELL
STOP:DGN-CELL
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ CELL HARDWARE Terminates a previously requested diagnostic of the Cell Site (CS) Data Link (DL). Requests that diagnostics being run on a specied cell, server group, and antenna face be aborted immediately. Requests that a non-volatile memory update be aborted at the specied cells. STOP:DGN-CELL-DL
STOP:DGN-CELL-SG
STOP:DNLD
CELL SOFTWARE GENERICS
Requests a cell site initialization phase.
INIT:CELL
Moves the functionality of a setup, location, or beacon radio to a voice radio. Lists the cell generics on the ECPs disk, the cell sites dependent on those generics, and a list of cell sites with no available generic. Removes the specied unit from service. Switches the active and standby roles of duplicated equipment, for example: the cell site controllers and reference generators. Terminates the loading of a cell generic tape. Loads a cell generic tape onto the ECPs disk drives. Deletes a cell generic from the ECPs disk drives. CLOCK (CLK) Reports the current date and time. Sets or adjusts the system clock.
MOVE:CELL
OP:CELL-GENERIC
RMV:CELL SW:CELL
UPD:CELL-ABT UPD:CELL-ADD
UPD:CELL-DLT OP:CLK SET:CLK
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ CONTROL UNIT (CU) Allows the logging and processing of all 3B21D Computer error sources. Allows the logging and processing of 3B21D Computer error interrupts attached to the unit specied in the identication eld. Allows the logging and processing of errors specic to the pseudo-nodes representing the 3B21D Computer CU communities. Sets the system status register such that a CU switch can be implemented as a normal fault recovery procedure, thereby allowing a switch to the standby 3B21D Computer control unit when a fault occurs in the active 3B21D Computer control unit. Allows the software error handling routines to incorporate system initialization into their error recovery procedures as a means of handling 3B21D Computer software sanity problems. Runs the CUMEM 1 audit, comparing the contents of the online and off-line main stores when in the ACT/ACT or ACT/STBY modes. Runs the CU hardware status audit in the manual mode. Diagnoses the specied control unit complex. Dumps the contents of the ofine cache into 3B21D Computer processor main memory. Dumps the contents of one or more registers, either as an immediate action, or as an action associated with a breakpoint. Exercises a control unit in an interactive diagnostic mode. ALW:ERRCHK
ALW:ERRINT
ALW:ERRSRC
ALW:HDWCHK
ALW:SFTCHK
AUD:CUMEM
AUD:CUSTAT
DGN:CU DUMP:CACHE
DUMP:REG
EX:CU
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ CONTROL UNIT (CU) Inhibits the logging and processing of all 3B21D Computer error sources. Inhibits the logging and processing of error interrupts attached to the 3B21D Computer unit specied in the identication eld. Inhibits the logging and processing of errors specic to the pseudo-nodes representing the 3B21D Computer CU communities. Sets the system status register so that a CU switch is not implemented as a normal fault recovery action. Alters the manner in which software errors are handled by precluding the use of system initialization when handling 3B21D Computer software errors. Loads a virtual address with specied data as an action associated with a breakpoint. Loads a physical byte address with specied data as an immediate operation or as a breakpoint action. Loads a register with specied data as an immediate action or as a breakpoint action. Loads a Generic Access Package (GRASP) utility variable with specied data as an immediate operation or as an action associated with a breakpoint. Formats and outputs a list of all inhibited 3B21D Computer error conditions, including ERRINT, ERRSRC, HDWCHK, and SFTCHK. INH:ERRCHK
INH:ERRINT
INH:ERRSRC
INH:HDWCHK
INH:SFTCHK
LOAD:ADDR
LOAD:PMEM
LOAD:REG
LOAD:UVAR
OP:ERRCHK
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ CONTROL UNIT (CU) Removes the specied control unit from service, for example: from the standby state to the outof-service state. Restores a CU to standby status. Causes a non-forced switch of the active/standby status of the two half systems. RMV:CU
RST:CU SW:CU
DATABASE (DB)
Refreshes the active (incore) Output Message Database from the OMDB disk le. Applies previous updates to the new copy of the OMDB disk le during eld update. Backs up the master copy of the member(s) database onto backup disk drives. Overwrites the master copy of a data base member with the backup copy. Initializes data base members in a specied CDN. Causes an initialization in main memory of a data base member at the ECP. Output the message text, message class, and alarm level from an OMDB entry for the given key or keys. Compares the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD) and the System Generation (SG) database. Creates a sorted list of keys for all form types in the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD) and the System Generation (SG) database.
ACTV:OMDB
APPLY:OMDB
BKUP:DATABASE
COPY:DB
INIT:CDN-DB
INIT:ECP-DB
OP:OMDB
RCV:M-COMPAREDB
RCV:M-NEWDB
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ DATABASE (DB) Creates les of form instances when specied data form type(s) from the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD) and the System Generation (SG) database are given. Calls ISGEN to rebuild the 3B21D Computer minimum-conguration or full-conguration boot image. RCV:M-PRINTDB
UPD:BLDBOOT
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnoses the specied cell site unit. Diagnoses the specied cell site data link. Requests that diagnostics be run on all trunks associated with a specic cell, server group, and antenna face. Diagnoses the specied 3B21D Computer Control Unit (CU) complex or a specied unit within the CU complex. Diagnoses the specied Dual Serial Channel/Computer Interconnect (DCI). Diagnoses the specied Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) data link. Diagnoses a trunk. Diagnoses the specied Disk File Controller (DFC). Diagnoses the specied Direct User Interface Controller (DUIC). Diagnoses the specied inter-ECP data link. Diagnoses the High-Speed Specied Synchronous Data Link Controller (HSDC).
DGN:CELL DGN:CELL-DL DGN:CELL-SG
DGN:CU
DGN:DCI
DGN:DCS-DL
DGN:DCS-TRKGRP DGN:DFC
DGN:DUIC
DGN:ECP-DL DGN:HSDC
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ DIAGNOSTICS Diagnoses the specied Input/Output Processor (IOP). Diagnoses the specied Link Nodes (LNs). Diagnoses the specied Moving Head Disk (MHD). Diagnoses the specied Magnetic Tape (MT). Diagnoses the specied Magnetic Tape Controller (MTC). Diagnoses the specied Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller (MTTYC). Diagnoses the specied Ring Peripheral Controller Node (RPCN). Diagnoses the specied Scanner and Signal Distributor Controller (SCSDC). Diagnoses the specied Synchronous Data Link Controller (SDLC). Diagnoses the specied Teletypewriter Controller (TTYC). Terminates a previously requested diagnostic at a cell site. Terminates a previously requested diagnostic of the Cell Site (CS) Data Link (DL). Requests that diagnostics being run on a specied cell, server group, and antenna face be aborted immediately. Terminates a previously requested diagnostic of the DCS Data Link (DL). Aborts a trunk diagnostic in progress. DGN:IOP
DGN:LN DGN:MHD
DGN:MT DGN:MTC
DGN:MTTYC
DGN:RPCN
DGN:SCSDC
DGN:SDLC
DGN:TTYC
STOP:DGN-CELL
STOP:DGN-CELL-DL
STOP:DGN-CELL-SG
STOP:DGN-DCS-DL
STOP:DGN-DCS-TRK
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ DIAGNOSTICS Terminates a previously requested diagnostic of an inter-ECP Data Link (DL). STOP:DGN-ECP-DL
DIGITAL CELLULAR SWITCH (DCS)
Diagnoses the specied Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) data link. Diagnoses a trunk. Requests the status of a digital cellular switch. Requests the current status of the specied Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) Data Link (DL). Requests the status of DS-1 units at the DCS. Prints which trunk is being diagnosed by ATMS at a DCS, and which trunks are waiting to be diagnosed in the ATMS trunk diagnostic queue. Requests the status of Cell Site (CS) voice channels. Removes DCS datalink from service. Removes a trunk from service. Restores DCS datalink to service. Restores a trunk member to service. Aborts an ATMS trunk diagnostic if in progress, and removes all requests waiting in the ATMS trunk diagnostic queue. Terminates a previously requested diagnostic of the DCS Data Link (DL). Aborts a trunk diagnostic in progress.
DGN:DCS-DL
DGN:DCS-TRKGRP OP:DCS OP:DCS-DL
OP:DCS-DS1 OP:DCS-MRAQ
OP:DCS-TRKGRP
RMV:DCS-DL RMV:DCS-TRKGRP RST:DCS-DL RST:DCS-TRKGRP STOP:DCS-MRAQ
STOP:DGN-DCS-DL
STOP:DGN-DCS-TRK
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ DISK FILE SYSTEM (DFS) Compares the text portions of the disk and core images of a non-killable process. Compares the contents of two disks or disk partitions. Copies a le from an active disk to an OFL or OOS disk. Copies selected on-line disk partitions to tape in the Load Disk from Tape (LDFT) format. Copies a specic le from an out-of-service disk to an active system disk. Copies a specic partition, or a list of partitions, from one of the system disks to an active spare disk. Diagnoses the specied Disk File Controller (DFC). Diagnoses the specied Moving Head Disk (MHD). Dumps the contents of a specied single disk block or a range of blocks, in hexadecimal. Dumps defect management information for a Moving Head Disk (MHD). Formats and prints the contents of a disk packs Volume Table Of Contents (VTOC). Exercises a disk le controller in an interactive diagnostic mode. Exercises a moving head disk in an interactive diagnostic mode. Formats all or specic disk tracks of the disk pack with initialized sectors. CMPR:DISK-CORE
CMPR:MHD
COPY:ACTDISK
COPY:BKDISK
COPY:OOSDISK
COPY:SPDISK
DGN:DFC
DGN:MHD
DUMP:MHD-BLOCK
DUMP:MHD-DEFECT
DUMP:MHD-VTOC
EX:DFC
EX:MHD
INIT:MHD
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ DISK FILE SYSTEM (DFS) Loads new defect data onto a Moving Head Disk (MHD). Requests current Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) disk space occupancy data. Outputs information on the specied Disk File Controller (DFC) and its associated Moving Head Disks (MHD). Outputs information regarding the specied Moving Head Disk (MHD). Outputs the number of blocks contained in all les and directories within each specied directory or lename. Reports the number of free blocks and free i-nodes available for on-line le systems. Removes the specied disk le controller and any associated moving head disks from service. Removes the specied MHD from service. Conditionally or unconditionally restores a DFC to service. Conditionally or unconditionally restores an MHD to service. Stops the copying of the boot disk to tape. Stops any CMPR MHD commands that are currently executing. Reads all or specic disk tracks or blocks and veries the header and error-correction code of each sector of the tracks or blocks read. LOAD:MHD-DEFECT
OP:AMA-DISK
OP:DFC-INFO
OP:MHD-INFO
OP:ST-DISKUSE
OP:ST-FREEDISK
RMV:DFC
RMV:MHD RST:DFC
RST:MHD
STOP:BKDISK STOP:CMPR-MHD
VFY:MHD
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ EXECUTIVE CELLULAR PROCESSOR (ECP) Terminates an ECP OSDS audit. ABT:ECP-AUD
Allows the routine execution of one or all ECP OSDS audits. Allows the printing of ECP OSDS audit results. Requests an ECP OSDS audit. Diagnoses the specied inter-ECP data link. Inhibits the routine execution of one or all ECP OSDS audits. Inhibits the printing of ECP OSDS audit results. Requests an ECP OKP initialization phase. Causes an initialization in main memory of a data base member at the ECP. Requests the status of a networked Mobile Telephone Switching Ofce (MTSO) Executive Cellular Processor (ECP). Requests a survey of all off-normal alarm scan points, or requests the status of an individual scan point. Requests audit statistics and queuing data. Requests the current status of the specied inter-ECP Data Link (DL). Requests ECP and cell overload status information. Removes the specied inter-ECP Data Link (DL) from service.
ALW:ECP-AUD
ALW:ECP-PRINT AUD:ECP-NAME DGN:ECP-DL INH:ECP-AUD
INH:ECP-PRINT INIT:ECP INIT:ECP-DB
OP:ECP
OP:ECP-AL
OP:ECP-AUD OP:ECP-DL
OP:ECP-OVLD
RMV:ECP-DL
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ EXECUTIVE CELLULAR PROCESSOR (ECP) Restores the specied inter-ECP Data Link (DL) to service. Terminates a previously requested diagnostic of an inter-ECP Data Link (DL). RST:ECP-DL
STOP:DGN-ECP-DL
EXPANDED GENERAL SYSTEM FAILURE (EGSF)
Allows printing of the REPT-GENERAL output message.
ALW:EGSF
Inhibits printing of the REPT-GENERAL output message.
INH:EGSF
FIELD UPDATE (FU) SYSTEM
Changes the access permissions of a specic le.
ALW:FILESYS-ACCES
Allows a removable le system to be mounted. Changes the owner and group of a specic le. Removes a directory from the le system. Removes a le from a directory. Invalidates the memory segments of the old input message catalog, forcing the new one to be loaded into main memory. Copies one set of partitions into a corresponding set of partitions. Requests a report about the current status of the active process. Puts the le receiving computer into the remote-le-receive mode.
ALW:FILESYS-MOUNT ALW:FILESYS-OWNER CLR:FILESYS-DIR CLR:FILESYS-FILE CLR:IMCAT
COPY:PTN-ALL
IN:REMOTE-REPT
IN:REMOTE-START
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ FIELD UPDATE (FU) SYSTEM Terminates the input of update les from a remote source. Displays information (from the eld update database) about computer eld updates. IN:REMOTE-STOP
UPD:DISPLAY
FILE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Dumps the contents of a le in the specied format. Dumps the contents of an ASCII le. Prints one or more lines of an ASCII le. Deletes one or more lines from an ASCII le. Appends one line of user-supplied text after a specied line in an ASCII le. Replaces one or more lines of an ASCII le with one line of user-supplied text. Creates a specied directory with read, write, and execute permissions for the owner, group and others (mode 777). Requests output of the mobile serial number for a specied mobile directory number. Reports the full pathname of a le in a mounted le system. Reports information about all mounted le systems. Reports the number of free blocks and free i-nodes available for on-line le systems.
DUMP:FILE-FORMAT
DUMP:FILE-ALL DUMP:FILE-PARTL IN:FILE-DEL IN:FILE-APND
IN:FILE-REPL
IN:FILESYS-DIR
OP:DN
OP:FNAME
OP:ST-FILESYS
OP:ST-FREEDISK
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ FILE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Reports the contents of a specic directory or le. Calculates and prints a 16-bit checksum for a specied le, and prints the number of blocks in the le. OP:ST-LISTDIR
OP:ST-SUM
GENERIC ACCESS PACKAGE (GRASP)
Causes the computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) transfer trace to start monitoring the ow of execution, as previously set up with an INIT UMEM command. Enables all currently dened GRASP breakpoints so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint conditions occur. Enables a specic GRASP breakpoint so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint condition occurs. Removes the denition of a GRASP transfer trace to be removed. Removes all currently dened GRASP breakpoints; clears denitions. Removes the specied breakpoint and clears the denition. Copies data from virtual addresses in main memory to other virtual addresses, registers, or GRASP utility variables as a response to a breakpoint. Copies data from virtual addresses in main memory to GRASP utility variables. Copies data from registers to virtual addresses in main memory or registers as an action associated with a breakpoint.
ALW:UMEM
ALW:UTIL
ALW:UTILFLAG
CLR:UMEM
CLR:UTIL
CLR:UTILFLAG
COPY:ADDR
COPY:PID
COPY:REG
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ GENERIC ACCESS PACKAGE (GRASP) Copies data from virtual addresses in main memory to GRASP utility variables as an immediate action. Copies data from a GRASP utility variable to virtual addresses in main memory and in registers as an action associated with a breakpoint. Dumps the contents of a specied range of virtual addresses in main memory as an action associated with a breakpoint. Dumps the contents of a specied range of virtual addresses in the kernel as an immediate action. Dumps the contents of a specied range of virtual addresses in main memory in the address space of a process with the specied process identier. Dumps the contents of a specied range of physical addresses in main memory. Dumps the contents of one or more registers, either as an immediate action, or an action associated with a breakpoint. Dumps the contents of a specied range of virtual addresses in main memory in the address space of a process with the specied utility identier. Dumps the contents of one or more specied GRASP utility variables either as an immediate action, or an action associated with a breakpoint. Marks the end of a list of GRASP commands to be performed when a specied breakpoint condition exists. COPY:UID
COPY:UVAR
DUMP:ADDR
DUMP:KERN
DUMP:PID
DUMP:PMEM
DUMP:REG
DUMP:UID
DUMP:UVAR
END:WHEN
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ GENERIC ACCESS PACKAGE (GRASP) Overrides the default GRASP dynamic real-time limit with a specied limit until the specied clock time or the end of the debugging session, whichever occurs rst. Causes the GRASP transfer trace to stop monitoring the ow of execution. Disables all GRASP breakpoints. Disables a specic GRASP breakpoint. Informs GRASP that a working utility circuit has been installed causing GRASP to accept trace and hardware breakpoints, reset the utility circuit if an error occurred, or end the GRASP session. Species the denition of a GRASP transfer trace to be set up. Loads a virtual address with specied data as an action associated with a breakpoint. Loads a register with specied data as a breakpoint action. Loads a GRASP utility variable with specied data as an immediate operation or as an action associated with a breakpoint. Dumps the contents of the GRASP trace to a le. Lists currently dened GRASP breakpoints, their status and trace status. IN:DTIME
INH:UMEM
INH:UTIL INH:UTILFLAG INIT:UC
INIT:UMEM
LOAD:ADDR
LOAD:REG
LOAD:UVAR
OP:UMEM OP:UTIL
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ GENERIC ACCESS PACKAGE (GRASP) Starts a list of GRASP commands that are performed when a specied breakpoint condition exists. Starts a list of GRASP commands that are performed when a specied breakpoint condition exists. WHEN:PID
WHEN:UID
GENERIC UPDATE
Requests output of the system update event log. Stops the system-update command in progress. Removes temporary updates still active in the system. Prepares system for booting from the old generic if it is necessary to back out of the new generic. Commits to the new generic. Enters the new generic data into the system. Prepares the system for booting from the new generic. Restores the old generic by removing the new generic from the system.
OP:GEN-READLOG STOP:GEN UPD:BKOUT
UPD:GEN-BACKOUT
UPD:GEN-COMMIT UPD:GEN-ENTER UPD:GEN-PROCEED
UPD:GEN-RESTORE
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INHIBITS Allows the running of audits managed by the system integrity monitor that were previously inhibited. Allows error logging on the CONFIG error logle of all errors reported to CONFIG for the specied unit. Changes the access permissions of a specic le. Allows a removable le system to be mounted. Changes the owner and group of a specic le. Allows Routine Exercises (REX) by clearing the REX temporary inhibits for one or more hardware communities. Allows transitions of a scanner and signal distributor scan point to be reported. Enables all currently dened GRASP breakpoints so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint conditions occur. Enables a specic GRASP breakpoint so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint condition occurs. Allows option setting in the input/output processor driver to suppress IOP Driver messages. Inhibits the routine execution of one or more audits that are controlled by the system integrity monitor. Inhibits error logging on the CONFIG error logle for all specied computer units. ALW:AUD
ALW:CONFLOG
ALW:FILESYS-ACCES ALW:FILESYS-MOUNT ALW:FILESYS-OWNER ALW:REX
ALW:SCSD
ALW:UTIL
ALW:UTILFLAG
CLR:IODRV
INH:AUD
INH:CONFLOG
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INHIBITS Inhibits the use of a previously mounted le system. Inhibits Routine Exercises (REX) for one or more hardware communities by setting the REX temporary inhibit(s). Inhibits reporting of transitions of a scanner and signal distributor scan point. Disables (but leaves dened) all GRASP breakpoints. Disables (but leaves dened) a specic GRASP breakpoint. INH:FILESYS-UMOUN
INH:REX
INH:SCSD
INH:UTIL
INH:UTILFLAG
IODRV
Allows option setting in the Input/Output Processor (IOP) Driver (IODRV) to print messages.
SET:IODRV
INITIALIZATION
Requests a CDN OSDS initialization phase. Initializes one or all data base members in a specied CDN. Requests a cell site initialization phase or a cell memory boot. Requests the initialization of the Common Network Interface (CNI) ring. Requests an ECP OKP initialization phase. Causes an initialization in main memory of a data base at the ECP. Reinitializes the Mobile Call Register (MCR) associated with an ECID that has been reported as being up for more than 24 hours.
INIT:CDN INIT:CDN-DB
INIT:CELL
INIT:CNI
INIT:ECP INIT:ECP-DB
INIT:MCR-CDN
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INITIALIZATION Formats all or specic disk tracks of the disk pack with initialized sectors. Informs the 3B21D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) that a working utility circuit has been installed so that GRASP will again accept trace and hardware breakpoint denitions, reset the utility circuit if an error occurred, or end the GRASP session. Initializes the UNIX Level Automatic Restart Process (ULARP). Species the denition of a GRASP transfer trace to be set up. Lists all currently initializing computer hardware units. Reports the long duration call data for a Mobile Call Register (MCR) associated with an ECID that has been reported as being up for more than 24 hours. INIT:MHD
INIT:UC
INIT:ULARP
INIT:UMEM
OP:INIT
OP:MCR-CDN
INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES AND LOGS
Allows error logging on the CONFIG error logle of all errors reported to CONFIG for a specied unit. Deletes the selected contents of a logle and cleans corrupt entries from the le. Inhibits error logging on the CONFIG error logle for all specied units. Requests output of the system update event log. Reports the selected contents of a logle.
ALW:CONFLOG
DEL:LOG
INH:CONFLOG
OP:GEN-READLOG OP:LOG
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES AND LOGS Reports an interpreted version of selected MEMLOG entries. Lists the hardware communities for which routine exercises are currently inhibited by means of the INH REX command. Requests a switch of the MTTYCs ROP and/or MTTY to the alternate MTTYC and a switch of the active/standby status of the MTTY and/or ROP. OP:MEMERRS
OP:REXINH
SW:PORTSW
INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
Diagnoses the specied Direct User Interface Controller (DUIC). Diagnoses the high-speed specied synchronous data link controller (HSDC). Diagnoses the specied Input/Output Processor (IOP). Diagnoses the specied Magnetic Tape Controller (MTC). Diagnoses the specied Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller (MTTYC). Diagnoses the specied Scanner and Signal Distributor Controller (SCSDC). Diagnoses the specied Synchronous Data Link Controller (SDLC). Diagnoses the specied Teletypewriter Controller (TTYC). Exercises a Direct User Interface Controller (DUIC) in an interactive diagnostic mode.
DGN:DUIC
DGN:HSDC
DGN:IOP
DGN:MTC
DGN:MTTYC
DGN:SCSDC
DGN:SDLC
DGN:TTYC
EX:DUIC
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR Exercises a High-Speed Synchronous Datalink Controller (HSDC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Exercises an Input/Output Processor (IOP) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Exercises a Magnetic Tape Controller (MTC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Exercises a Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller (MTTYC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Exercises a Synchronous Data Link Controller (SDLC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Exercises a Teletypewriter Controller (TTYC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Reports the current options set for the input/output processor driver messages. Removes the specied Direct User Interface (DUI) device from service. Removes the specied Direct User Interface Controller (DUIC) from service. Removes the specied high-speed synchronous data link subdevice from service. Removes the specied High-Speed Synchronous Data-Link Controller (HSDC) from service. Removes the specied input/output processor and any associated peripheral controllers from service. EX:HSDC
EX:IOP
EX:MTC
EX:MTTYC
EX:SDLC
EX:TTYC
OP:IODRV
RMV:DUI
RMV:DUIC
RMV:HSD
RMV:HSDC
RMV:IOP
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR Removes the specied magnetic tape device from service. Removes the specied Magnetic Tape Controller (MTC) and any associated magnetic tape drives from service. Removes the specied Maintenance Teletypewriter (MTTY) from service. Removes the specied Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller (MTTYC) and all associated MTTYs, ROPs, and SCCs from service. Removes the specied Receive-Only Printer (ROP) from service. Removes the specied Switching Control Center (SCC) data-link subdevice from service. Removes the specied Synchronous Data Link (SDL) subdevice from service. Removes the specied Synchronous Data Link Controller (SDLC) from service. Removes the specied Teletypewriter (TTY) from service. Removes the specied Teletypewriter Controller (TTYC) and any associated teletypewriters from service. Restores a Direct User Interface (DUI) device to service. Restores a Direct User Interface Controller (DUIC) to service. Restores a High-Speed Synchronous Data-Link (HSD) subdevice to service. RMV:MT
RMV:MTC
RMV:MTTY
RMV:MTTYC
RMV:ROP
RMV:SCC
RMV:SDL
RMV:SDLC
RMV:TTY
RMV:TTYC
RST:DUI
RST:DUIC
RST:HSD
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR Restores a High-Speed Synchronous Data-Link Controller (HSDC) to service. Restores an Input/Output Processor (IOP) to service. Restores the specied Magnetic Tape (MT) device to service. Restores a Magnetic Tape Controller (MTC) to service. Restores the specied Maintenance Teletypewriter (MTTY) to service. Restores a Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller (MTTYC) to service. Restores the ROP to service. Restores the Switching Control Center (SCC) data-link subdevice to service. Restores the specied Synchronous Data Link (SDL) subdevice to service. Restores a Synchronous Data Link Controller (SDLC) to service. Unconditionally restores the specied TTY to service. Restores a TTYC to service. RST:HSDC
RST:IOP
RST:MT
RST:MTC
RST:MTTY
RST:MTTYC
RST:ROP RST:SCC
RST:SDL
RST:SDLC
RST:TTY
RST:TTYC
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INTERPROCESSOR MESSAGE SWITCH (IMS) Allows previously inhibited or suspended sources to send maintenance requests to the 3B21D maintenance inhibit request administrator. Allows tracing to occur according to previously input trace parameter settings. Congures the ring to include or exclude ring node(s) from the active ring segment, or--if the ring is down--to initialize it. Diagnoses the specied Link Nodes (LN). Diagnoses the specied Ring Peripheral Controller Node (RPCN). Exercises a link node in an interactive, diagnostic mode. Exercises a ring peripheral controller node in an interactive, diagnostic mode. Inhibits the specied source of diagnostic requests. Forms the basic on/off mechanism for TRACE when used with ALW TRACE. Requests a report of the status of all data links on a node. Allows reading and reporting of specied Node Processor (NP) memory or port locations. Obtains the status or generic information about a particular node, group of nodes, or particular group. ALW:DMQ
ALW:TRACE
CFR:RING
DGN:LN DGN:RPCN
EX:LN
EX:RPCN
INH:DMQ
INH:TRACE
OP:LN-DL
OP:NPMEM
OP:RING
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ INTERPROCESSOR MESSAGE SWITCH (IMS) Prints the status of tracing and the setting of the trace detail ags for subsystems. OP:TRACE
Removes the link node from service. Removes the ring peripheral controller node from service. Restores the specied link node to service. Restores the specied ring peripheral controller node to service. Changes the operational characteristics of a trace.
RMV:LN RMV:RPCN
RST:LN RST:RPCN
SET:TRACE
INTERRUPTS
Allows a specic software or hardware action at specied cell site(s). Inhibits a specic software or hardware action at specied cell site(s). Prints the status of cell site equipment.
ALW:CELL
INH:CELL
OP:CELL
LINE UNITS
Diagnoses the specied Link Nodes (LNs). Exercises a LN in an interactive diagnostic mode. Removes the specied Link Node (LN) from service. Remove all data links on a particular Link Node (LN) from service. Removes a specied Link Node (LN) from service.
DGN:LN EX:LN
RMV:LN
RMV:LN-DL
RMV:LN-UCL
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ LINE UNITS Restores the Link Node (LN) to service. Restore all data links on a particular Link Node (LN) to service. RST:LN RST:LN-DL
MAINTENANCE CONTROL (MC)
Diagnoses a trunk.
DGN:DCS-TRKGRP
Diagnoses the specied inter-ECP data link. Requests log trunk test data. Lists all currently active computer hardware units. Lists all alarmed ECP, CDN, cell, and DCS equipment. Requests output conguration status information for computer hardware units. Requests the current status of the specied DCS DL. Requests the status of DS-1 units at the DCS. Tells which trunk is being diagnosed by ATMS at a DCS, and which trunks (if any) are waiting to be diagnosed in the ATMS trunk diagnostic queue. Requests the current status of all equipped cell, DCS, and inter-ECP data links. Requests the status of all Direct Link Nodes (DLNs).
DGN:ECP-DL DUMP:TRK-DATA OP:ACT
OP:ALARM
OP:CFGSTAT
OP:DCS-DL
OP:DCS-DS1 OP:DCS-MRAQ
OP:DL
OP:DLN
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MAINTENANCE CONTROL (MC) Outputs a list of the queue from the computer maintenance input request administrator. Requests a survey of all off-normal alarm scan points, or requests the status of an individual scan point. Lists all computer hardware units currently in the growth maintenance state. Lists all ofine computer hardware units. Lists all out-of-service computer hardware units. Reports the status of each connected computer message port. Provides a list of all standby computer hardware units. Removes all trunks associated with a specied cell, server group and antenna face from service. Removes a trunk from service. Aborts a trunk diagnostic in progress. OP:DMQ
OP:ECP-AL
OP:GROW
OP:OFL OP:OOS OP:ST-PORTS
OP:STBY
RMV:CELL-SG
RMV:DCS-TRKGRP STOP:DGN-DCS-TRK
OVERLOAD CONTROL
Allows a specic software or hardware action at specied cell site(s). Inhibits a specic software or hardware action at specied cell site(s). Requests CDN overload status information. Requests a printout of cell overload and forward setup channel control status for specied cells. Requests ECP and cell overload status information.
ALW:CELL
INH:CELL
OP:CDN-OVLD OP:CELL-OVLD
OP:ECP-OVLD
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ PLANT MEASUREMENTS Outputs the plant measurements common reports. Requests output of plant measurement data for one or more cell site(s). OP:PMCR
OP:PM-CELL
POWER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS (PLM)
Determines which Power Level Measurement (PLM) requests are active.
VER:PLM
PROCESS CONTROL
Executes a task as either a kernel or supervisor process. Executes a task as a user process. Reports the status of active processes by specic class. Stops any process. Stops a user process specied either by ID number or by pathname. Stops the system-update command in progress.
EXC:ENVIR-PROC
EXC:ENVIR-UPROC OP:ST-PROCESS
STOP:EXC-ANY STOP:EXC-USER
STOP:GEN
PROCESSOR INITIALIZATION AND RECOVERY
Clears the emergency dump partition status ag.
CLR:EMERDMP
Copies data from the emergency dump partition on a disk to a magnetic tape. Initializes the User Level Automatic Restart Process (ULARP). Reports the status of the emergency dump partition on the disk: full or empty. Requests the status of run commands.
COPY:TAPE-EMERDMP
INIT:ULARP
OP:EMERSTAT
OP:ULARP-COMMAND
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ PROCESSOR INITIALIZATION AND RECOVERY Outputs the execution sequence of child processes and run commands during a bootstrap or user initialization procedure. Outputs the status of ULARP child processes. OP:ULARP-EXECSEQ
OP:ULARP-PROCESS
RECENT CHANGE (RC)
Reads or patches a central processor data base using the "browse" tool. Compares the ECD and the SG database. Generates a skeleton ECD. Generates a skeleton SG database. Invokes a specied recent change activity; this format is used to evolve a new data base from an old one. Performs a comparison of two form types. Performs a comparison of two sorted keyles. Creates a list of all keys that are common to two sorted keyles. Creates a sorted list of form keys for all the instances of a given form type found in the ECD and the SG databases. Create a data base in loadle format from a set of data base les. Creates a sorted list of keys for all form types in the ECD and the SG databases. Creates les of form instances when specied data form type(s) from the ECD and the SG databases are given.
RCV:M-BROWSE
RCV:M-COMPAREDB RCV:M-CREATEECD RCV:M-CREATESG RCV:M-EVOL
RCV:M-FDIFF RCV:M-KEYCMP RCV:M-KEYCOMM
RCV:M-KEYS
RCV:M-LOADF3B
RCV:M-NEWDB
RCV:M-PRINTDB
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ RECENT CHANGE (RC) Creates a le of all form instances, given a list of form keys, found in the ECD and the SG database. Reviews or modies an ECD through recent change. Reviews or modies a SG database through recent change. Creates a translation data base when a tree address space and translation specications are given. Builds a tree address space given the old and new form specications. Checks the syntax of the specied default le and veries that the low level eld names and values contained therein are legal. RCV:M-PRINTFRM
RCV:M-RCVECD
RCV:M-RCVSG
RCV:M-TRANSGEN
RCV:M-TREEBLD
RCV:M-VFYDFLT
RETROFIT PROCESS
Aborts the current generic retrot procedural process. Invokes the generic retrot process from the ending generic. Dumps the contents of a le. Prints the named step or supplemental instruction le of the generic retrot procedural process.
RFT:ABORT
RFT:BEGINPOST
RFT:FDUMP RFT:PRINT
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ RING UNITS Congures the ring to include or exclude RNs from the active ring segment or, if the ring is down, to initialize it. Diagnoses the specied RPCN. Exercises a RPCN in an interactive diagnostic mode. Initialize the Common Network Interface (CNI) ring. Obtain status or generic information about one or more nodes. Removes the specied RPCN from service. Restores the RPCN to service. CFR:RING
DGN:RPCN EX:RPCN
INIT:CNI
OP:RING
RMV:RPCN RST:RPCN
SCAN AND SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR (SCSD) POINTS
Performs a remote reset of the computer fan alarm.
CLR:FANALM
Exercises an SCSDC in an interactive diagnostic mode. Reports the inhibit status and the state of SCSD scan points. Performs one of four distribution operations on an SCSD distribute point. Removes the specied SCSDC from service. Restores an SCSDC to service.
EX:SCSDC
OP:SCSD
ORD:SCSD
RMV:SCSDC RST:SCSDC
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ SIGNALING LINK Sets, resets, or requests the status of the alarm inhibit ag of a Signaling Link (SLK). INH:SLK
TAPE MANIPULATION
Copies les from a magnetic tape containing full or relative pathnames and header information, and places them in their respective directories. Copies one or more les to a magnetic tape, along with full or relative pathnames and header (status) information. Writes the diagnostic test tape header onto a magnetic tape. Stops the copying of the boot disk to tape. Veries the readability of information on system tapes and the consistency of corresponding hash sums.
COPY:TAPE-IN
COPY:TAPE-OUT
COPY:TAPE-TEST
STOP:BKDISK VFY:TAPE
TRUNK UNITS
Diagnoses a trunk. Requests logged trunk test data; the resulting data will appear in tabular form on the ROP with explanatory headers. Requests a report of all trunk groups in a DCS alarm. Requests the status of trunks. Removes a trunk from service. Restores a trunk member to service. Aborts a trunk diagnostic in progress.
DGN:DCS-TRKGRP DUMP:TRK-DATA
OP:DCS-TRKALM
OP:DCS-TRKGRP RMV:DCS-TRKGRP RST:DCS-TRKGRP STOP:DGN-DCS-TRK
401-610-055 IM INDEX
Table 2 Index of Input Messages by Function (Continued) _ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ Function Purpose Message ID _ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ USER LEVEL AUTOMATIC RESTART Initializes the UNIX Level Automatic Restart Process (ULARP). Requests the status of run commands. Requests a listing of the execution sequence of child processes and run commands during a bootstrap or user initialization procedure. Requests the status of ULARP child processes. INIT:ULARP
OP:ULARP-COMMAND OP:ULARP-EXECSEQ
OP:ULARP-PROCESS
VOICE CHANNEL SELECTION ACTIVITIES (VCSA)
Schedules Voice Channel Selection Activity (VCSA) measurements for the events requested at the specied Cell Site (CS). Cancels an active or a pending request for measurement of Voice Channel Selection Activity (VCSA). Determines which VCSA measurement requests are currently scheduled or active.
SCHED:VCSA
STOP:VCSA
VER:VCSA
401-610-055 IM INDEX
401-610-055 ALW:RNC TPU DGN
ID ............. ALW:RNC-TPU-DGN RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Allow all Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) board Power On Self Test (POST) diagnostic test. Format 1: Allow POST diagnostic test for the equipped TPU card on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Allow POST diagnostic test for the Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Allow POST diagnostic test for the Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
ALW:RNC a, TPU b, DGN ALW:RNC a, TPU b, CICC c, DGN ALW:RNC a, TPU b, GICC d, DGN
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC. d = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:RNC-TPU-DGN-1
401-610-055 ALW:RNC TPU DGN
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages ALW-RNC-TPU-DGN
Other References: 401-710-082 Radio Network Controller (RNC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:RNC-TPU-DGN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW:RNC ABREVC
WARNING This message may be service-affecting. Read purpose carefully.
ID ............. ALW:RNC-ABREVC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This command may cause active calls to drop.
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. This command Allow assert brevity control on the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
ALW:RNC a, ABREVC
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = RNC number (1-15).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages ALW-RNC-ABREVC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:RNC-ABREVC-1
401-610-055 ALW:RNC ABREVC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:RNC-ABREVC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 BKUP:RNCDB
ID ............. BKUP:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests that a backup occur for the active Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database on the pre-specied Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) proxy server archive directory. 2. FORMAT
BKUP:RNCDB, RNC [a ALL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a BKUP-RNCDB output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the BKUP-RNCDB command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 BKUP:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:RNCDB DELBKUP:RNCDB OP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
Other References: 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE BKUP:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLEAR:RNC GICC
ID ............. CLEAR:RNC-GICC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. To request the clearing of an existing lockout, force switch or manual switch condition on the specied Automatic Protection Switching (APS) mated Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) pair. This command can only be successfully executed when the APS capability is enabled on the RNC. 2. FORMAT
CLEAR:RNC a, GICC b, ATM c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) slot number (3,4,19,20). = ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Out of range value was specied. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages CLEAR-RNC-GICC GET-RNC-GICC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLEAR:RNC-GICC-1
401-610-055 CLEAR:RNC GICC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLEAR:RNC-GICC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY:RNCDB RNC
ID ............. COPY:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests a restore (a copy) of the Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database. The request can be for an individual RNC or for all RNCs using the most recent backup le from the $CDMA_OAM_ROOT/rncdbbackups directory, the backup le is specied by the system user. 2. FORMAT
COPY:RNCDB, RNC [a ALL], DIRNAME "b"

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = RNC number (1-15). = The backup directory/lename entered inside quotes (For example: "rnc24_12.0").
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-RNCDB output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the COPY-RNCDB command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages BKUP:RNCDB DELBKUP:RNCDB OP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DELBKUP:RNCDB RNC
ID ............. DELBKUP:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests that a specied Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database on the pre-specied Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) proxy server archive directory, be deleted. 2. FORMAT
DELBKUP:RNCDB, DIRNAME "a"

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = The backup directory/lename entered inside quotes (For example: "rnc24_12.0").
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DELBKUP:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages BKUP:RNCDB COPY:RNCDB OP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DELBKUP:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXPORT:RNC CONFIG
ID ............. EXPORT:RNC-CONFIG RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Export the conguration values in Radio Network Controller Database (RNCDB) to a specied le in format compatible with config.ini which is used by the Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) software. This command may be used for remote conguration changes. 2. FORMAT
EXPORT:RNC a, CONFIG, b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = RNC number (1-15). = A valid le name including the full path or relative path name, for example: /temp/config.ini or ./config-file.ini.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages EXPORT-RNC-CONFIG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXPORT:RNC-CONFIG-1
401-610-055 EXPORT:RNC CONFIG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXPORT:RNC-CONFIG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC ABREVC
ID ............. GET:RNC-ABREVC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. This command gets the current assert brevity control state on the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
GET:RNC a, ABREVC
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-ABREVC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-ABREVC-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC ABREVC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-ABREVC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC ALARM
ID ............. GET:RNC-ALARM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Format 1: Report the alarm details that have been generated autonomously for the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) on the specied RNC. Format 2: Report summary of all alarms (total number of alarms, and number of alarms in each severity category) that have been generated autonomously on the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, ALARM GET:RNC a, [TPU b], ALARM [;SUMMARY]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b SUMMARY = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = Summary will be displayed instead of detailed alarms.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-ALARM-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC ALARM
Output Messages GET-RNC-ALARM-SUM GET-RNC-TPU-ALARM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-ALARM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC GICC
ID ............. GET:RNC-GICC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. To report Automatic Protection Switching (APS) related information available for the 5ESS Gateways (GWs) resident on the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC). This command can only be successfully executed when the APS capability is enabled on the RNC. 2. FORMAT
GET:RNC a, GICC b, 5EGW, INFO

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = RNC number (1-15). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Out of range value was specied. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-GICC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-GICC-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC GICC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-GICC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC INSTALL
ID ............. GET:RNC-INSTALL RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the installation software and hardware versions of the specied RNC or report the installation status for the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) or Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) of the specied RNC. NOTE: It may take approximately sixty seconds after a GICC initializes or a GICC is removed from a Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) shelf for the GICCs hardware version to be accurately reected in this commands output. Format 1: Report the installation software and hardware versions of the specied RNC. Format 2: Report the installation status for the specied GICC of the specied RNC. Format 3: Report the installation status for the specied BPCF of the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
GET:RNC a, INSTALL, VERSION GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, INSTALL, STATUS GET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF d, INSTALL, STATUS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3). = BPCF slot number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-INSTALL-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC INSTALL
SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages GET-RNC-INSTALL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-INSTALL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC INVENTORY
ID ............. GET:RNC-INVENTORY RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the equipped Trafc Processing Units (TPUs) on the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
GET:RNC a, INVENTORY
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages GET-RNC-INVENTORY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-INVENTORY-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC INVENTORY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-INVENTORY-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC PDSNLIST
ID ............. GET:RNC-PDSNLIST RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN) list for the specic RNC, the Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) shelf, or a specic Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) in an RNC. Format 1: Report the PDSN List for both TPUs on the specied RNC. Format 2: Report the PDSN List on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Report the PDSN List on the specied BPCF card, TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
GET:RNC a, PDSNLIST GET:RNC a, TPU b, PDSNLIST GET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF c, PDSNLIST
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = BPCF card number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-PDSNLIST-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC PDSNLIST
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-PDSNLIST
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-PDSNLIST-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC PSPCF
ID ............. GET:RNC-PSPCF RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the Process Status on the Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) for the specied element. Format 1: Report the Process Status of all BPCF cards on both Trafc Processing Units (TPUs) of the specied RNC. Format 2: Report the Process Status of all BPCF cards for the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Report the Process Status on the specied BPCF card, TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
GET:RNC a, PSPCF GET:RNC a, TPU b, PSPCF GET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF c, PSPCF
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = BPCF card number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-PSPCF-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC PSPCF
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-PSPCF
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-PSPCF-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC STATUS
ID ............. GET:RNC-STATUS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the call processing status for the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
GET:RNC a, STATUS
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages GET-RNC-STATUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-STATUS-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC STATUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-STATUS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU DGNRESULT
ID ............. GET:RNC-TPU-DGNRES RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the available results of Power On Self Test (POST) diagnostics test(s) for the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) managed resource of the specied RNC and report the current status of the POST diagnostics test. Format 1: Report the available results of POST diagnostics test(s) for the equipped TPU cards (CICC and GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Report the available results of POST diagnostics test(s) for the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Report the available results of POST diagnostics test(s) for the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, DGNRESULT GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, DGNRESULT GET:RNC a, TPU b, CICC d, DGNRESULT
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-TPU-DGNRES-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU DGNRESULT
SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-DGNRES
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-DGNRES-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU FAILEDPVC
ID ............. GET:RNC-TPUFAILEDPVC RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the available failed Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) for the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) managed resource of the specied RNC. Format 1: Report the list of failed PVC for the equipped TPU cards (Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card [GICC]) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Report the list of failed PVC for the specied GICC on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Report the list of failed PVC for the specied Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) port on the specied GICC, TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, FAILEDPVC GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, FAILEDPVC GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, ATM d, FAILEDPVC
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-TPU-FAILEDPVC-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU FAILEDPVC
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-FAILEDPVC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-FAILEDPVC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU INFO
ID ............. GET:RNC-TPU-INFO RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the administrative information, operational information and usage information for the specied Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) card and Trafc Processing Unit (TPU).
2. FORMAT
[1]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF c, INFO
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = BPCF card number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-TPU-INFO-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU INFO
Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-INFO
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-INFO-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU INVENTORY
ID ............. GET:RNC-TPU-INVENT RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the equipped Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) cards on the specied TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
GET:RNC a, TPU b, INVENTORY

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-INVENT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-TPU-INVENT-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU INVENTORY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-INVENT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU STATE
ID ............. GET:RNC-TPU-STATE RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the Administrative State, Operational State and Usage State for the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) cards. Format 1: Report the states for the equipped TPU cards on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Report the states for the specied Ethernet Switch Card (ESC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Report the states for the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 4: Report the states for the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 5: Report the states for the specied Alarm Card (AC) number of a specied Alarm Card Slot (ACS) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 6: Report the states for the specied ATM of the specied GICC on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 7: Report the states for the specied SC GICC on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 8: Report the states for the specied Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 9: Report the state of Internet Protocol Base Transceiver Station Gateway (IPBTSGW). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, STATE GET:RNC a, TPU b, ESC c, STATE GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC d, STATE GET:RNC a, TPU b, CICC e, STATE GET:RNC a, TPU b, ACS f, AC g, STATE GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC d, ATM h, STATE GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC i, SC, STATE GET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF j, STATE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE
Issue 28
GET:RNC-TPU-STATE-1
[9]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC i, IPBTSGW, STATE
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d e = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = ESC slot number (2,21). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC. f g h i j = ACS number (1). = AC number (1-2). = ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up). = Shelf Controller (SC) GICC slot number (3). = BPCF card number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-STATE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-STATE-2 Issue 28
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-TPU-STATE-3
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-STATE-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU VER CON
ID ............. GET:RNC-TPU-VER-CON RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the running conguration le version and congured conguration le versions for the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) managed resource of the specied RNC. Format 1: Report the congured application software version and for the equipped TPU cards on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Report the congured application software version and for the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Report the congured application software version and for the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 4: Report the congured application software version and for the specied Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) on the specied TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, VERSION, CONFIG GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, VERSION, CONFIG GET:RNC a, TPU b, CICC d, VERSION, CONFIG GET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF e, VERSION, CONFIG
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC. e = BPCF card number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-TPU-VER-CON-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU VER CON
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-VER-CON
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-VER-CON-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU VERSION
ID ............. GET:RNC-TPU-VERSION RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report active application software version and congured application software version for the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) managed resource of the specied RNC. Format 1: Report the application software version for the equipped TPU cards on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Report the application software version for the specied Ethernet Switch Card (ESC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Report the application software version for the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 4: Report the application software version for the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 5: Report the application software version for the specied Alarm Card (AC) number of a specied Alarm Card Slot (ACS) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 6: Report the application software version for the specied Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) on the specied TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
GET:RNC a, TPU b, VERSION GET:RNC a, TPU b, ESC c, VERSION GET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC d, VERSION GET:RNC a, TPU b, CICC e, VERSION GET:RNC a, TPU b, ACS f, AC g, VERSION GET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF h, VERSION
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = ESC slot number (2,21). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-TPU-VERSION-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC TPU VERSION
= CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC.
f g h
= ACS number (1). = AC number (1-2). = BPCF card number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-VERSION
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-TPU-VERSION-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 GET:RNC VERSION
ID ............. GET:RNC-VERSION RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Report the application software version for the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
GET:RNC a, VERSION
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages GET-RNC-VERSION
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 GET:RNC-VERSION-1
401-610-055 GET:RNC VERSION
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE GET:RNC-VERSION-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 HALT:RNC TPU
ID ............. HALT:RNC-TPU RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This command will result in Radio Network Controller (RNC) losing Communication with Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) card.
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from an RNC Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Halt the specied BPCF card on the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) and RNC. 2. FORMAT
HALT:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = BPCF card slot number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 HALT:RNC-TPU-1
401-610-055 HALT:RNC TPU
Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-STATE HALT-RNC-TPU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE HALT:RNC-TPU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 IMPORT:RNC CONFIG
ID ............. IMPORT:RNC-CONFIG RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Import the conguration values from a specied le in format compatible with config.ini which is used by the Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) software, into Radio Network Controller Database (RNCDB). This command may be used for remote conguration changes. 2. FORMAT
IMPORT:RNC a, CONFIG, b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = RNC number (1-15). = A valid le name including the full path or relative path name, for example: /temp/config.ini or ./config-file.ini.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages IMPORT-RNC-CONFIG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 IMPORT:RNC-CONFIG-1
401-610-055 IMPORT:RNC CONFIG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE IMPORT:RNC-CONFIG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH:RNC ABREVC
ID ............. INH:RNC-ABREVC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. This command inhibits the assert brevity control on the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
INH:RNC a, ABREVC
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages INH-RNC-ABREVC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:RNC-ABREVC-1
401-610-055 INH:RNC ABREVC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:RNC-ABREVC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH:RNC TPU DGN
ID ............. INH:RNC-TPU-DGN RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Inhibit the Power On Self Test (POST) diagnostic on the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) board(s). The inhibition will take effect the next time the TPU board is reset. Format 1: Inhibit POST diagnostic test for all TPU cards (CICC and GICC) for the specied RNC. Format 2: Inhibit POST diagnostic test for the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) of the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Inhibit POST diagnostic test for the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) of the specied TPU and RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
INH:RNC a, TPU b, DGN INH:RNC a, TPU b, CICC c, DGN INH:RNC a, TPU b, GICC d, DGN
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC. d = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:RNC-TPU-DGN-1
401-610-055 INH:RNC TPU DGN
SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages INH-RNC-TPU-DGN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:RNC-TPU-DGN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INSTALL:RNC TPU
ID ............. INSTALL:RNC-TPU RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Install the software and conguration le on the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) or Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) card. Format 1: Install the software and conguration le for all hardware types on the specied GICC. All binary and conguration les are copied to the GICC. Format 2: Install only conguration data on the specied GICC. All conguration les are copied to the GICC. Format 3: Install the software and conguration le for the specied hardware type on the specied GICC. Binary and conguration les of specied hardware only is copied to the GICC. Format 4: Install the software and conguration le for the specied slot on the specied BPCF. The newly installed software is activated after installation. This command may involve a shutdown of BPCF, if the card was in the unlocked state. The command may take anywhere between 10-90 minutes. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4]
INSTALL:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, VERSION d, ALL INSTALL:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, VERSION d, CONFIG INSTALL:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, VERSION d, HWTYPE e INSTALL:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF f, VERSION d
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3). = Version string. This is the BPCF version string of the software package that will be copied to the specied GICC on the specied TPU. The version can be found by using the GET:RNC-INSTALL input command. = Hardware type: ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). BPCF Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INSTALL:RNC-TPU-1
401-610-055 INSTALL:RNC TPU
CICC Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC). GICC Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC). f = BPCF slot number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. INSTALLATION ERROR = An installation error occurred. PARAMETER RANGE ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. TPU MANAGER UNAVAILABLE = The TPU Manager is not available. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages GET:RNC-INSTALL Output Messages GET-RNC-INSTALL INSTALL-RNC-TPU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INSTALL:RNC-TPU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 LOCK:RNC TPU
ID ............. LOCK:RNC-TPU RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Lock the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) cards on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 1: Lock the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Lock the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Lock the specied Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) port for the specied GICC on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 4: Lock the specied Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) card on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 5: Locks the Internet Protocol Base Transceiver Station Gateway (IPBTSGW). gateway on the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
LOCK:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c LOCK:RNC a, TPU b, CICC d LOCK:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, ATM e LOCK:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF f LOCK:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, IPBTSGW
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 LOCK:RNC-TPU-1
401-610-055 LOCK:RNC TPU
= CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC.
e f
= ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up). = BPCF card slot number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-TPU-STATE LOCK-RNC-TPU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE LOCK:RNC-TPU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 LOCKOUT:RNC GICC
ID ............. LOCKOUT:RNC-GICC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. To prevent Automatic Protection Switching (APS) to the protection 5ESS Gateway (5EGW) in the specied APS mated pair. The protection 5EGW always resides on Transaction Processing Unit (TPU) shelf 2 (bottom TPU shelf). This command can only be successfully executed when the APS capability is enabled on the RNC. 2. FORMAT
LOCKOUT:RNC a, GICC b, ATM c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Out of range value was specied. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages GET-RNC-GICC LOCKOUT-RNC-GICC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 LOCKOUT:RNC-GICC-1
401-610-055 LOCKOUT:RNC GICC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE LOCKOUT:RNC-GICC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP RNC
ID ............. OP:RNC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests the status of a Radio Network Controller (RNC). 2. FORMAT
OP:RNC [a]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = RNC number (1-15). If no RNC number is specied, the status of each RNC will be printed.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E = Particular information entered is invalid: RNC number out of range. RNC value must be numeric. Single RNC number expected. No equipped RNC. NG PF = = No Good. The RNC Feature is not active. Printout Follows. Request has been processed. Output message(s) will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-RNC
Other References: None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:RNC-1
401-610-055 OP RNC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:RNC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP:RNCDB RNC
ID ............. OP:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests a list of all Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database backup les for a specied RNC or all. 2. FORMAT
OP:RNCDB, RNC [a ALL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-RNCDB output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the OP-RNCDB command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages BKUP:RNCDB COPY:RNCDB DELBKUP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP RNC TRKGRP
ID ............. OP:RNC-TRKGRP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Request the status Packet Pipe (PP) trunk group or member, homed on a Radio Network Controller (RNC). 2. FORMAT
OP:RNC a, TRKGRP b[, {c MEMBER d}]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = Packet Pipe Trunk Group (TRKGRP) number (1-2000). = State of the requested trunk group: ALL ACTIVE BLOCKED EQP OOS UNEQP d All states. Active. Remotely blocked. Equipped (default). Out of service. Unequipped.
= Packet Pipe trunk member number (1-96).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E = Particular information entered is invalid: RNC number out of range. Single RNC number expected. TRKGRP number out of range for RNC Packet Pipe. Single numeric TRKGRP number expected. Member number out of range for RNC Packet Pipe. Single member number expected. Unknown TRKGRP state. Single state identier expected. Member number not expected when state specied. IP NG = = In Progress. Request is being processed. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. The RNC Feature is not active.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:RNC-TRKGRP-1
401-610-055 OP RNC TRKGRP
PF RL 5. REFERENCES
Printout Follows. Request has been processed. Output message(s) will follow.
= Retry Later. Unable to execute command for provided reason.
IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-RNC-TRKGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:RNC-TRKGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RESET:RNC TPU
ID ............. RESET:RNC-TPU RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This command may cause active calls to drop. Reset of the Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) slot without halting the disk may cause disk damage!
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Reset the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) cards on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 1: Reset the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. A software reset will be performed on the specied unit. Format 2: Reset the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. A software reset will be performed on the specied unit. Format 3: Reset the specied TPU cards on the specied TPU slot on the specied TPU and RNC. A hardware reset will be performed on the specied slot. Format 4: Reset the specied BPCF card on the specied TPU and RNC. A software reset will be performed on the specied unit. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4]
RESET:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c RESET:RNC a, TPU b, CICC d RESET:RNC a, TPU b, SLOT e RESET:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF f
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RESET:RNC-TPU-1
401-610-055 RESET:RNC TPU
e f
= Slot number (3-20). = BPCF card slot number (5,6,17,18). NOTE: Slots 5,6,17,18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages RESET-RNC-TPU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RESET:RNC-TPU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-RNCDBMS
ID ............. RMV:AP-RNCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If UCL is specied, the Radio Network Controller Database Update Manager (RNCDBMS) application will be removed from service even if it cannot be made ACTIVE on the mate Application Processor (AP). This could result in a complete loss of the ability to complete new calls.
1. PURPOSE Removes the Application Processor (AP) Radio Network Controller Database Update Manager (RNCDBMS) application from service. On successful completion of this command the RNCDBMS application will be in the OOSMANUAL state. An attempt to switchover the RNCDBMS application running in an active state will be made for both conditional or unconditional removes. If RNCDBMS cannot be switched over to the mate AP and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the RNCDBMS application will be removed from service even if the RNCDBMS cannot be switched over to the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,RNCDBMS [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = AP number. = Unconditional remove request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-RNCDBMS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-RNCDBMS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-RNCDBMS-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-RNCDBMS
Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-RNCDBMS RST-AP-RNCDBMS SWITCHOVER-RNCDBMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-RNCDBMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-RNCM
ID ............. RMV:AP-RNCM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If UCL is specied, the Radio Network Controller Manager (RNCM) application will be removed from service even if it cannot be made ACTIVE on the mate Application Processor (AP). This could result in a complete loss of the ability to complete new calls.
1. PURPOSE Removes the Application Processor (AP) Radio Network Controller Manager (RNCM) application from service. On successful completion of this command the RNCM application will be in the OOSMANUAL state. An attempt to switchover the RNCM application running in an active state will be made for both conditional or unconditional removes. If RNCM cannot be switched over to the mate AP and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the RNCM application will be removed from service even if the RNCM cannot be switched over to the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,RNCM b [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b UCL = AP number. = RNCM number. = Unconditional remove request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-RNCM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-RNCM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-RNCM-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-RNCM
Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-RNCM RST-AP-RNCM SWITCHOVER-RNCM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-RNCM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV RNC TRKGRP
ID ............. RMV:RNC-TRKGRP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes a Packet Pipe (PP) trunk, homed on a Radio Network Controller (RNC), from service. This input message permits the technician to use the RNC trunk representation to identify the trunk for removal. The system response will vary depending upon whether the removal request was conditional or unconditional.
For Conditional Removal. If the removal of the packet pipe would cause the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Out Of Service (OOS) threshold to be exceeded, the request will fail. If OOS limits would not be exceeded, new call attempts will be blocked on the CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) served by this packet pipe. If any existing calls on the packet pipe remain after ve minutes have elapsed, the packet pipe will be unblocked and the remove will fail. For Unconditional Removal. If the unconditional option is specied, OOS limits are not checked. New call attempts will be blocked on the CCC served by this packet pipe, and all calls present on the packet pipe will be given ve minutes to terminate.
2. FORMAT
RMV:RNC a, TRKGRP b, MEMBER c[;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c UCL = RNC number (1-15). = Packet Pipe Trunk Group (TRKGRP) number (1-2000). = Packet Pipe trunk member number (1-96). = Unconditionally remove the trunk from service. OOS limits are ignored and calls will be terminated after a ve-minute campon interval.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E = Particular information entered is invalid: RNC number out of range. Single RNC number expected. TRKGRP number out of range be for RNC Packet Pipe. Single numeric TRKGRP number expected. Member number out of range for RNC Packet Pipe. Single member number expected. UCL option expected.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:RNC-TRKGRP-1
401-610-055 RMV RNC TRKGRP
IP NG NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= = = =
In Progress. Request is being processed. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Necessary condition for execution of request not met. No Good. RNC Feature is not active. Printout Follows. Request has been processed. Output message(s) will follow.
IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages RMV-RNC-TRKGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:RNC-TRKGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-RNCDBMS
ID ............. RST:AP-RNCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores the Application Processor (AP) Radio Network Controller Database Update Manager (RNCDBMS) application to service. On successful completion of this command, the RNCDBMS managed object will be in the ACTIVE or STBY maintenance state depending on the state of the application on the mate AP. If the application is ACTIVE on the mate AP, it will be brought to the STBY state on this AP. If the application is not ACTIVE on the mate AP, the application will be brought to the ACTIVE state on this AP. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, RNCDBMS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = AP number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-RNCDBMS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-RNCDBMS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-RNCDBMS-1
401-610-055 RST AP-RNCDBMS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST-AP-RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER-RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-RNCDBMS RST-AP-RNCDBMS SWITCHOVER-RNCDBMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-RNCDBMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-RNCM
ID ............. RST:AP-RNCM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores the Application Processor (AP) Radio Network Controller Manager (RNCM) application to service. On successful completion of this command, the specied RNCM managed object will be in the ACTIVE state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, RNCM b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number. = RNCM number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-RNCM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-RNCM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-RNCM-1
401-610-055 RST AP-RNCM
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST-AP-RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER-RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-RNCM RST-AP-RNCM SWITCHOVER-RNCM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-RNCM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST RNC TRKGRP
ID ............. RST:RNC-TRKGRP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a Packet Pipe (PP) trunk, homed on a Radio Network Controller (RNC), into service. This input message permits the technician to use the RNC trunk representation to identify the trunk for restoral. 2. FORMAT
RST:RNC a, TRKGRP b, MEMBER c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = Packet Pipe Trunk Group (TRKGRP) number (1-2000). = Packet Pipe trunk member number (1-96).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E = Error. Particular information entered is invalid: Member number out of range for RNC Packet Pipe RNC number out of range Single MEMBER number expected Single numeric TRKGRP number expected Single RNC Number expected TRKGRP number must be in 1 .. x for RNC Packet Pipe IP NG = = In Progress. Request is being processed. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. One of the following: Bad TM action: x Necessary condition for execution of request not met Optional parameter <string> is not valid for RNC RNC Feature is not active PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been processed. Output message(s) will follow.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:RNC-TRKGRP-1
401-610-055 RST RNC TRKGRP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages RST-RNC-TRKGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:RNC-TRKGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SHUTDOWN:RNC TPU
ID ............. SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Shutdown the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) cards on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 1: Shutdown the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Shutdown the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Shutdown the specied Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) port on the specied GICC, TPU and RNC. Format 4: Shutdown the specied Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) card on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 5: Shutdown the Internet Protocol Base Transceiver Station Gateway (IPBTSGW) on the specied RNC. NOTE: Shutdown differs from lock in that it allows active calls to be drained before doing the lock. The SHUTDOWN command will transition the TPU card from UNLOCKED to SHUTTINGDOWN state, drain the calls, and eventually transition the TPU card to LOCKED state. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
SHUTDOWN:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c SHUTDOWN:RNC a, TPU b, CICC d SHUTDOWN:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, ATM e SHUTDOWN:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF f SHUTDOWN:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, IPBTSGW
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU-1
401-610-055 SHUTDOWN:RNC TPU
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3, 4, 19, 20). = CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5, 6, 17, and 18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC. e f = ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up). = BPCF card slot number (5, 6, 17, 18). NOTE: Slots 5, 6, 17, and 18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages SHUTDOWN-RNC-TPU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SHUTDOWN:RNC-TPU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCH:RNC
ID ............. SWITCH:RNC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Switch the A8A9 and A10A11 IP Gateways for the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
SWITCH:RNC a, A8A9 SWITCH:RNC a, A10A11
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages SWITCH-RNC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCH:RNC-1
401-610-055 SWITCH:RNC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCH:RNC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCH:TOMATE RNC TPU
ID ............. SWITCH:TOMATE-RNCTPU RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. To request a manual or forced protection switch from the specied 5ESS Gateway (5EGW) to its designated Automatic Protection Switching (APS) mate. This command can only be successfully executed when the APS capability is enabled on the RNC. 2. FORMAT
SWITCH:TOMATE, RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, ATM d [FORCE]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = RNC number (1-15). = Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) shelf number (1-2). = Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) slot number (3,4,19,20). = Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) port number (1-2).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Out of range value was specied. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCH:TOMATE-RNC-TPU-1
401-610-055 SWITCH:TOMATE RNC TPU
Output Messages GET-RNC-GICC SWITCH-TOMATE-RNC-TPU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCH:TOMATE-RNC-TPU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER RNCDBMS
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:RNCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** An unconditional switchover may result in the loss of OOS MANUAL removed state information on trunks. Recovery operations in progress at the time of the UCL switchover may be delayed.
1. PURPOSE Switches over an ACTIVE Application Processor (AP) Radio Network Controller Database Update Manager (RNCDBMS) application to its standby instance on the mate AP. On successful completion of this command the state of the RNCDBMS application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. All stable calls will be preserved. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:RNCDBMS [;UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE UCL = Unconditional request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-RNCDBMS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVERRNCDBMS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:RNCDBMS-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER RNCDBMS
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER-RNCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-RNCDBMS RST-AP-RNCDBMS SWITCHOVER-RNCDBMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:RNCDBMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER RNCM
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:RNCM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Switches over an ACTIVE Application Processor (AP) Radio Network Controller Manager (RNCM) application to its STBY instance on the mate Application Processor (AP). On successful completion of this command the state of the RNCM application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. All stable calls will be preserved. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:RNCM a [;UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = Radio Network Controller Manager (RNCM) number. = Unconditional request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-RNCM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVERRNCM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:RNCM-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER RNCM
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER-RNCM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-RNCM RST-AP-RNCM SWITCHOVER-RNCM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:RNCM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 TST:BTS RNC
ID ............. TST:BTS-RNC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Perform Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) loop back test to Base Transceiver System (BTS) on the specied trunk resource(s) on the specied ATM processor, Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC), Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) and RNC. Although this command goes from the RNC "toward" the BTS, the loop back actually occurs at the rst PacketStar Access Gateway (PSAX) that the RNCs ATM link terminates at. Thus, the PSAX performs the loop back to the RNC and the loop back does not go all the way to the BTS. 2. FORMAT
TST:BTS, RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, ATM d, TG e, [TM f]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d e f = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up). = Trunk Group (TG) number (1-2000). = Trunk Group Member (TM) number (1-96). Without the TM parameter the command will be issued on all (TG, TM) Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) pairs that match the specied TG number.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 TST:BTS-RNC-1
401-610-055 TST:BTS RNC
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages TST-BTS-RNC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE TST:BTS-RNC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 TST:PSU RNC
ID ............. TST:PSU-RNC RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Perform Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) loop back test to Packet Switching Unit (PSU) on the specied network resource(s); on the specied ATM processor, Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC), Trafc Processing Unit (TPU), and RNC. If Virtual Channel Connection (VCC) or Virtual Path Connection (VPC) is not provided as part of the command, provisioned outgoing connection type will be used for intra-subnet loopbacks. All inter-subnet loopbacks utilize VCC connectivity. A Virtual Path Identier (VPI) must be provisioned for the local subnet when requesting an intra-subnet VCC loopback. A VPI must be provisioned for the remote subnet when requesting an intersubnet loopback. If the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) capability is enabled on the RNC, the 5ESS Gateway (GW) must be the active 5ESS GW in the mated pair for the test to pass. Please browse to the TPU Graphical User Interface (GUI) APS status page (or use the GET:RNC a,GICC b, 5EGW, INFO CLI input command) to determine if the port to be tested is the active port in the pair. You may execute the TPU GUI Network Elements (NE) status page based ATM port SWITCH TO MATE command (or the SWITCH:TOMATE CLI input command) to activate the port, if necessary. In addition, if the operational mode for that port (see the GUI APS status page or CLI GET:RNC a,GICC b, 5EGW, INFO output message) is unidirectional, the ATM switch Optical Carrier Level 3 (OC3) port that is physically connected to the port under test must be also be active for the test to pass. Please refer to your ATM switch manual to determine which OC3 port on the ATM switch is active. 2. FORMAT
TST:PSU, RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, ATM d, FARCA {eALL} [,SUBNET f] [,VCCVPC] [;ENH]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d e ALL = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3,4,19,20). = ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up). = Far End Community Address (FARCA) (1-254). = The command will be issued on all FARCA (1-254) excluding the Near End Community Address (NEARCA). SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 TST:PSU-RNC-1
401-610-055 TST:PSU RNC
VCC VPC f ENH
= VCC connection type. = VPC connection type. = Far End Subnet (0-3). = Proprietary enhanced option. An enhanced loop back test is the same as a standard loop back test except that the far end inserts their actual VPI and Virtual Channel Identier (VCI) into the looped back message thereby allowing the user to verify exactly who it is they are communicating with.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SWITCH:TOMATE-RNC-TPU Output Messages TST-PSU-RNC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE TST:PSU-RNC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 UNLOCK:RNC TPU
ID ............. UNLOCK:RNC-TPU RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Command may affect service.
1. PURPOSE NOTE: This command may be entered only from a Radio Network Controller (RNC) Application Processor (AP) or Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Proxy AP by invoking the Trafc Processing Unit Command Line Interface (TPUCLI) command. Unlock the specied Trafc Processing Unit (TPU) cards on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 1: Unlock the specied Gateway Intelligent Carrier Card (GICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 2: Unlock the specied Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 3: Unlock the specied GICC Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) processor on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 4: Unlock the specied Blade Packet Control Function (BPCF) card on the specied TPU and RNC. Format 5: Unlocks the Internet Protocol Base Transceiver Station Gateway (IPBTSGW) on the specied RNC. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
UNLOCK:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c UNLOCK:RNC a, TPU b, CICC d UNLOCK:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, ATM e UNLOCK:RNC a, TPU b, BPCF f UNLOCK:RNC a, TPU b, GICC c, IPBTSGW
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = RNC number (1-15). = TPU shelf number (1-2). = GICC slot number (3, 4, 19, 20).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 UNLOCK:RNC-TPU-1
401-610-055 UNLOCK:RNC TPU
= CICC slot number (5-18). NOTE: Slots 5, 6, 17, and 18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for CICC.
e f
= ATM port number (1-2, the ATM ports are number 1 and 2 from the bottom up). = BPCF card slot number (5, 6, 17, 18) NOTE: Slots 5, 6, 17, and 18 are multipurpose slots, which may or may not be provisioned for BPCF.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IN PROGRESS = Command is being executed by the system. The input command has passed syntax checking and is being executed by the system. Output message will follow. PARAMETER ERROR = Invalid input parameters were specied. REJECTED = The input command was rejected because it is not supported by the system. SYNTAX ERROR = Invalid input syntax was specied. UNEXPECTED ERROR = A software error occurred. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages UNLOCK-RNC-TPU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE UNLOCK:RNC-TPU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW BTS AUD
ID ............. ALW:BTS-AUD RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Enable the execution of the audit of the maintenance state information of all Cell components. Format 2: Enable the execution of the audit of the conguration information associate with all Cell components. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:BTS a, AUD MAINT ALW:BTS a, AUD CONFIG
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Base Transceiver System (BTS) number (1-600).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:BTS-AUD Output Messages ALW-BTS-AUD = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Followed by a ALW-BTSAUD output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:BTS-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW BTS AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:BTS-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW TP AUD
ID ............. ALW:TP-AUD RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Enable the execution of the audit of the maintenance state information of Trafc Processor (TP). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
ALW:TP a, AUD MAINT

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = TP number (1-448).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:TP-AUD Output Messages ALW-TP-AUD INH-TP-AUD = In Progress. Request has been sent to the AP. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Followed by a ALW-TPAUD output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:TP-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW TP AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:TP-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COMMIT AP
ID ............. COMMIT:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Commits the Application Processor (AP) to the version of platform software currently running. NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Format 1: This command commits the AP to the version of platform software currently running on the AP. A commit removes the "backout" version of AP platform software if it exists. A commit also removes the "new" version of AP platform software if a new version (different from the currently running version) of AP platform software exists. COMMIT is done only as part of a software update or generic retrot procedure, after the new software has stabilized on the system for some time interval. See the Application Processor Cluster Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide to follow the software update or generic retrot procedure. The COMMIT will fail if the selected version of AP platform software differs from the currently running version of AP platform software. This command can be run only from the EMS. Format 2: This is a 1xEV-DO message. Commits the current sets of software versions so that they cannot be backed out or removed. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
COMMIT:AP a, SOFTWARE b COMMIT:AP a, SOFTWARE
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number (1-278). = Software type: platform is the only type of software supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a COMMIT-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the COMMIT:AP command will be delayed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COMMIT:AP-1
401-610-055 COMMIT AP
RL
= Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-VERSION SELECT:AP Output Messages COMMIT-AP OP-AP-VERSION SELECT-AP
Other References: 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-110 Element Management System (EMS) Users Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COMMIT:AP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL BTS GENERIC
ID ............. DEL:BTS-GENERIC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Deletes the requested generic from a Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
DEL:BTS a[, CDM b], GENERIC c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
= Name of the Generic Description File (GDF). A string of 12 characters. For Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, the generic name should follow the naming convention: For example: F2000DDAA.60 1st character Software type: F Functional software (Cell and Radio Cluster Server [RCS]). 2nd-3rd character Release level of the load. 4th character Base/Package release number: 0 Base release. 1 Package release. 5th character Incremented for maintenance release. 6th character Technology type: E 1xEV-DO 7th character Cell type: A Flexent Microcell. B Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. D Flexent Modular & CDBS Cells. 8th character Type of load: E F G P Experimental loads. FOA loads. GA loads. Private loads.
Other names are used for internal alpha, beta, etc loads.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:BTS-GENERIC-1
401-610-055 DEL BTS GENERIC
9th character Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to cell compatibility indicator. Always D. 10th character Decimal point. 11th-12th character Load sequence number. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:BTS-GENERIC SEND:BTS-GENERIC STOP:SEND-BTS-GENERIC Output Messages DEL-BTS-GENERIC = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Followed by a OP-BTSGENERIC output message. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:BTS-GENERIC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN:BTS ASMB TXAMP
ID ............. DGN:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnose a Transmit Amplier (TXAMP) for a specied cabinet of a specic Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
DGN:BTS a, ASMB b, TXAMP c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = BTS number (1-600). = Assemblage (cabinet) number (1-4). = TXAMP number (1-36).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DGN-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-1
401-610-055 DGN:BTS ASMB TXAMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN BTS CDM
ID ............. DGN:BTS-CDM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses a Base Transceiver System (BTS) for a particular unit. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
DGN:BTS a, CDM b, CBR c DGN:BTS a, CDM b, CRC DGN:BTS a, CDM b, EVM d
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b CBR c CRC d = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
= CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR). = CBR number (1-3). = CDMA Radio Controller (CRC). = 1xEV-DO Modem (EVM) number (0-11).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-BTS-CDM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:BTS-CDM-1
401-610-055 DGN BTS CDM
Output Messages DGN-BTS-CDM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:BTS-CDM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN BTS-TFU
ID ............. DGN:BTS-TFU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses a Base Transceiver System (BTS) for a specied Time Frequency Unit (TFU). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command is not supported on the active TFU. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
DGN:BTS a, TFU b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = BTS number (1-600). = TFU number (1-8).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DGN-BTS-TFU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-BTS-TFU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:BTS-TFU-1
401-610-055 DGN BTS-TFU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:BTS-TFU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC:BTS FLUS
ID ............. EXC:BTS-FLUS RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initiate a Forward Link User Simulation (FLUS) on a given carrier. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
EXC:BTS a, FLUS CDM b, SECTOR c, USER d, TT e, CC f, LOC g

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d e = Base Transceiver System (BTS) number (1-600). = Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM) number (114). = Sector number within the CDM (1-3). = FLUS user number (1-25). = FLUS Trafc Type (TT): 1 A high trafc intensity user such as a ftp session. 2 A medium trafc such as a HTTP application session. 3 A low trafc such as a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) session. f = Channel Condition (CC): 1 A model derived from the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) pedestrian A model with one antenna. 2 A model derived from the ITU pedestrian A model with two antennas. 3 A model derived from the ITU vehicular B model with one antenna. 4 A model derived from the ITU vehicular B Model with two antennas. g = Location: 1 A 25 percentile for average served rate. 2 A 50 percentile for average served rate. 3 A 80 percentile for average served rate. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:BTS-FLUS-1
401-610-055 EXC:BTS FLUS
PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= Printout Follows. Followed by a EXC-BTS-FLUS output message. = Retry Later.
IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages EXC-BTS-FLUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:BTS-FLUS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 FLUS CELL
ID ............. FLUS:CELL RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests setup and control of Forward Link User Simulation (FLUS) at a specied cell. NOTE: This command only applies for converged cells supporting 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO) carrier. Format 1 Format 2 Format 3 Requests initialization of FLUS at the cell. Sets FLUS parameters for a session. Requests that a FLUS session be stopped.
Use an initial request before entering any secondary request. As many secondary requests as needed can be used to adjust the FLUS activity level. After a secondary request has been entered, the FLUS supervisor will remain active until terminated by a STOP:FLUSCELL input command. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
FLUS:CELL a; START FLUS:CELL a, SECTOR b, CARRIER c, USER d, TT e, CC f, LOC g FLUS:CELL a [, CARRIER c [, USER d] ]; STOP
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600):

A single cell site. A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
b c
= Sector number (0-6). = Carrier number (1-18). For Format 3, if user is omitted, all users on the specied carrier are terminated. If carrier and user are omitted, the entire FLUS session (all carriers/users) are terminated. = Simulated user number (1-25) for the FLUS session. = FLUS user trafc type number: 1 High trafc intensity user such as a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) user. 2 Medium trafc intensity user such as a Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) user. 3 Low trafc intensity user such as a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) user.
d e
= FLUS user channel condition type number: 1 A model derived from the ITU Pedestrian "A" model with one antenna.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 FLUS:CELL-1
401-610-055 FLUS CELL
2 A model derived from the ITU Pedestrian "A" model with two antennas. 3 A model derived from the ITU Vehicular model with one antenna. 4 A model derived from the ITU Vehicular model with two antennas. g = FLUS user location type number: 1 At 25 percentile for average served rate. 2 At 50 percentile for average served rate. 3 At 80 percentile for average served rate. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:CELL-FLUS STOP:FLUS-CELL Output Messages FLUS-CELL OP-CELL OP-CELL-FLUS = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution were not met. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE FLUS:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH BTS AUD
ID ............. INH:BTS-AUD RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Inhibits an audit of the maintenance state information of all cell components. Format 2: Inhibits an audit of the conguration information associate with all cell components. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
INH:BTS a, AUD MAINT INH:BTS a, AUD CONFIG
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Base Transceiver System (BTS) number (1-600).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:BTS-AUD Output Messages INH-BTS-AUD = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Followed by an INH-BTSAUD output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:BTS-AUD-1
401-610-055 INH BTS AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:BTS-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH TP AUD
ID ............. INH:TP-AUD RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Inhibits the execution of the audit of the maintenance state information of Trafc Processor (TP). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
INH:TP a, AUD MAINT

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:TP-AUD Output Messages ALW-TP-AUD INH-TP-AUD = In Progress. Request has been sent to the TP. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Followed by a INH-TPAUD output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:TP-AUD-1
401-610-055 INH TP AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:TP-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INIT AP
ID ............. INIT:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initialize an Application Processor (AP) at a specic initialization level. NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Format 1: INIT:AP-FULL takes several minutes longer than INIT:AP-APPL but is more thorough. Note that no output messages will be displayed when the INIT:AP FULL or INIT:AP APPL commands run successfully. The AP must be in the OOS MANUAL state before running either INIT:APAPPL or INIT:AP-FULL. After the AP is initialized, it is returned to the OOS MANUAL state. INIT:AP-FULL is primarily used for software update. Both forms of INIT:AP may be used for certain rare errors when a reinitialization is required to recover an AP. Format 2: This is a 1xEV-DO message. Initialize a specied unit. This will reboot the platform software on the AP. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
INIT:AP a, b INIT:AP a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number (1-278). = Initialization level: APPL FULL Only the Flexent /AUTOPLEX software will be reinitialized. The entire AP, including the operating system, will be immediately rebooted.

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INIT:AP-1
401-610-055 INIT AP
PF
= Printout Follows. Followed by a INIT-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the INIT:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RMV:AP RST:AP SELECT:AP Output Messages INIT-AP RMV-AP RST-AP SELECT-AP
Other References: 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INIT:AP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INIT BTS
ID ............. INIT:BTS RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initializes a Base Transceiver System (BTS) in Stable Clear (SC) mode. NOTE: Only Stable Clear is supported. The 1xEV modular Cell does not support Transient Clear (TC). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
INIT:BTS a:SC
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = BTS number (1-600).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages INIT-BTS REPT-EVDO-BTS = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an INIT-BTS output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INIT:BTS-1
401-610-055 INIT BTS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INIT:BTS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INIT TP
ID ............. INIT:TP RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initialize a Trafc Processor (TP). NOTE: This command is not supported on the active TP. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
INIT:TP a
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages INIT-TP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a INIT-TP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INIT:TP-1
401-610-055 INIT TP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INIT:TP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the status of an 1xEV-DO user session using the International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI) and Application Processor (AP) ID. The operator can nd out where the mobile is located in the Network and whether it is Active or Dormant. Other session related information are also provided by this command. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS) Command Line Interface (CLI), for 1xEV-DO Application Processors (APs). 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, IMSI b, STATUS

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number. = 15 digit IMSI number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE Command not supported on this AP = AP specied in command is a non 1xEV-DO AP. COMMAND ACKNOWLEDGMENT TIMEOUT = Command Acknowledgement not received by EMS from the Controller. IP NA NG = In Progress. Command Accepted and is in progress. Followed by a OPAP-IMSI-STATUS output message. = No Acknowledgement. Command is not accepted. Reason will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution were not met.
syntax error:[echoed input command], IMSI must be a 15 digit numeric value = Invalid IMSI in the command. syntax error:[echoed input command] = Error in syntax of the message. The reason could be one of the following: Invalid AP in the command. Wrong use of reserved words in the command. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS-1
401-610-055 OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS
Output Messages OP-AP-IMSI-STATUS
Other References: 401-614-102 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Radio Networks Controller Application Processor Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-IMSI-STATUS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP OOS
ID ............. OP:AP-OOS RELEASE ....... 21.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This is a 1xEV-DO message. It reports all the Application Processor (AP) components that are Out Of Service (OOS) for the system. (Either in Out of Service Manual [OOS-MAN] or Out of Service Fault [OOS-FLT] state.) NOTE: When issued from AP Command Line Interface (CLI), this commands reports for only the frame from which the AP CLI is invoked. The Output message displays the status of all OOS AP components for that particular frame. Output from the AP CLI version of this command is not displayed on the Read Only Printer (ROP). NOTE: When issued from the Element Management System (EMS) CLI, this command reports for all frames connected to the EMS. The output message displays the status of all OOS AP components for all frames connected to that Operations Maintenance Platform (OMP). 2. FORMAT
OP:AP, OOS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:OOS OP:BTS-OOS OP:TP-OOS = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that an invalid input parameter was specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-OOS-1
401-610-055 OP AP OOS
Output Messages OP-AP-OOS OP-BTS-OOS OP-OOS OP-TP-OOS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-OOS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-PROCCFG
ID ............. OP:AP-PROCCFG RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the status of all the 1xEV-DO processes in an Application Processor (AP). (Includes the process groups FDBMS, HOC, HWSERVER, LOGSERVER, OHM, and TPAGENT). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, PROCCFG
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = AP number. Must be an odd number (1-277).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-PROCCFG output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SWITCHBACK:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-PROCCFG SWITCHBACK-AP SWITCHOVER-AP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-PROCCFG-1
401-610-055 OP AP-PROCCFG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-PROCCFG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-VERSION
ID ............. OP:AP-VERSION RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Lists the version(s) of the software on the Application Processor (AP). NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). This command displays: The version of AP platform software running on the AP. The new version of AP platform software on the AP (if it exists), or the backout version of AP platform software on the AP (if it exists). The new or backout version will exist only if a version has been installed since the last COMMIT:AP. The version of AP platform software selected on the AP (SELECT:AP). The available versions of Radio Cluster Server (RCS) software installed on the AP. The available versions of cell software installed on the AP. The selected version and running version for each RCS congured on the AP. This is also a 1xEV-DO message. The 1xEV-DO AP provides application software version information. This command displays the following application versions:

The 1xEV-DO Controller (EVC) Application version(s) installed on the AP. Cell software versions installed on this AP. EVC Application versions, from the list of installed software, which are Selected (the next to be activated), Current (running at the time the OP:AP-VERSION command is executed), and Committed.
2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, VERSION
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = AP number (1-278).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-VERSION output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-VERSION-1
RL
= Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COMMIT:AP SELECT:AP Output Messages COMMIT-AP OP-AP-VERSION SELECT-AP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-VERSION-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS
ID ............. OP:BTS RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the status of all equipped components on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). The response from this command lists the summary state of the BTS and the status of its Time Frequency Unit (TFU), if applicable. Other than this information, it will only list the other elements from the BTS if they exhibit some abnormal characteristic (For example: alarm, out-of-service, and so forth.). To see the state of any particular element (For example: for the CDM, AMP, and so forth.), use the OP command for that particular element. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1x EV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS a
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-BTS output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-1
401-610-055 OP BTS
Output Messages OP-BTS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS ALARM
ID ............. OP:BTS-ALARM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports all active alarms on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS a, ALARM
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-BTS-ALARM = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-BTS-ALARM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-ALARM-1
401-610-055 OP BTS ALARM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-ALARM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP:BTS AMP
ID ............. OP:BTS-AMP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the status of all equipped Ampliers (AMPs) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS a, AMP
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:BTS-TXAMP Output Messages OP-BTS-AMP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-BTS-AMP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-AMP-1
401-610-055 OP:BTS AMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-AMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP:BTS ASMB TXAMP
ID ............. OP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the status of a specied Transmit Amplier (TXAMP) in a given cabinet of a specic Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS a, ASMB b, TXAMP c

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP-BTS-AMP Output Messages OP-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-1
401-610-055 OP:BTS ASMB TXAMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS CDM
ID ............. OP:BTS-CDM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Reports the status of a specied Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). Format 2: Reports the status of a specied CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR) on a particular CDM for a specied BTS. Format 3: Reports the status of a specied CDMA Radio Controller (CRC) on a particular CDM for a specied BTS. Format 4: Reports the status of a specied 1xEV-DO Modem (EVM) on a particular CDM for a specied BTS. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4]
OP:BTS a, CDM b OP:BTS a, CDM b, CBR c OP:BTS a, CDM b, CRC OP:BTS a, CDM b, EVM d
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = BTS number (1-600). = CDM number (1-16). = CBR number (1-3). = EVM number (0-11).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-BTS-CDM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-CDM-1
401-610-055 OP BTS CDM
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-BTS-CDM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-CDM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS CDM INVENTORY
ID ............. OP:BTS-CDM-INVENT RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports a cell sites equipment inventory. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS a [, CDM b ], INVENTORY

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Base Transceiver System (BTS) number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-BTS-CDM-INVENT = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-BTS-CDM-INVENT output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-CDM-INVENT-1
401-610-055 OP BTS CDM INVENTORY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-CDM-INVENT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS FLUS
ID ............. OP:BTS-FLUS RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Reports the status of a single Forward Link User Simulation (FLUS) user on a specied carrier in a given Base Transceiver System (BTS). Format 2: Reports the status of all FLUS users on a specied carrier in a given BTS. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
OP:BTS a, FLUS CDM b, USER c OP:BTS a, FLUS CDM b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = BTS number (1-600). = CDM number (1-14). = FLUS user number (1-25).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-BTS-FLUS = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-BTS-FLUS output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-FLUS-1
401-610-055 OP BTS FLUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-FLUS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS GENERIC
ID ............. OP:BTS-GENERIC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a list of cell generics on a Base Transceiver System (BTS). Format 1: If no generic is specied, the output lists all software generics present for that modular cell and indicates which, if any, is the active generic and which, if any, is being downloaded to the respective Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM). If a generic is specied, the output indicates if that generic is currently being downloaded. The output also includes a list of image les associated with that generic and their states. Format 2: If the BTS number, CDM number, nor generic is specied, the output lists the provisioned CDM generic and cell type. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
OP:BTS a [, CDM b ], GENERIC [c] OP:BTS, GENERIC
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = BTS number (1-600). = CDMA Digital Module (CDM) number (1-16). = Name of the Generic Description File (GDF). A string of 12 characters. For Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, the generic name should follow the naming convention: For example: F2000DDAA.60 1st character Software type: F Functional software (Cell and Radio Cluster Server [RCS]). 2nd-3rd character Release level of the load. 4th character Base/Package release number: 0 Base release. 1 Package release. 5th character Incremented for maintenance release. 6th character Technology type: E 1xEV-DO
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-GENERIC-1
401-610-055 OP BTS GENERIC
7th character Cell type: A Flexent Microcell. B Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. D Flexent Modular & CDBS Cells. 8th character Type of load: E F G P Experimental loads. FOA loads. GA loads. Private loads.
Other names are used for internal alpha, beta, etc loads. 9th character Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to cell compatibility indicator. Always D. 10th character Decimal point. 11th-12th character Load sequence number. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DEL:BTS-GENERIC SEND:BTS-GENERIC STOP:SEND-BTS-GENERIC Output Messages OP-BTS-GENERIC = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = = = No Good. Information could not be retrieved, or other necessary conditions for message execution were not met. Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-GENERIC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP:BTS OOS
ID ............. OP:BTS-OOS RELEASE ....... 21.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This is a 1xEV-DO message. It reports all the Base Transceiver System (BTS) components that are Out Of Service (OOS) for the system. (Either in Out of Service Manual [OOSMAN] or Out of Service Fault [OOS-FLT] state.) NOTE: This command is not supported from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). NOTE: When issued from the Element Management System (EMS) CLI, this command reports for all frames connected to the EMS. The output message displays the status of all OOS BTS components for all frames connected to that Operations Maintenance Platform (OMP). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS, OOS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-OOS OP:OOS OP:TP-OOS = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that an invalid input parameter was specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-OOS-1
401-610-055 OP:BTS OOS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-OOS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS-TDU
ID ............. OP:BTS-TDU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the status of a specied Test and Diagnostic Unit (TDU) in a given Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command is not supported for BTSs of type Modular Cell 1, Modular Cell 2, or Modular Cell 3. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS a, TDU b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = BTS number (1-600). = TDU number (1-14).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-BTS-TDU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-BTS-TDU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-TDU-1
401-610-055 OP BTS-TDU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-TDU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP BTS-TFU
ID ............. OP:BTS-TFU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the status of a specied Time Frequency Unit (TFU) in a given Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:BTS a, TFU b
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-BTS-TFU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-BTS-TFU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:BTS-TFU-1
401-610-055 OP BTS-TFU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:BTS-TFU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP CELL FLUS
ID ............. OP:CELL-FLUS RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests the status of all Forward Link User Simulation (FLUS) users at a specied cell. NOTE: This command only applies for converged cells supporting 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO) carrier. 2. FORMAT
OP:CELL a, FLUS [, CARRIER b]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Cell site number (1-600). = Carrier number (1-18). If carrier is omitted, the status of all users on all carriers are shown.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG PF RL = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution were not met. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages FLUS:CELL STOP:FLUS-CELL Output Messages FLUS-CELL OP-CELL-FLUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:CELL-FLUS-1
401-610-055 OP CELL FLUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:CELL-FLUS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP OOS
ID ............. OP:OOS RELEASE ....... 21.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This is a 1xEV-DO message. Reports all the Application Processor (AP), Base Transceiver System (BTS) and Trafc Processor (TP) components that are Out Of Service (OOS) for the system. (Either in Out of Service Manual [OOS-MAN] or Out of Service Fault [OOS-FLT] state.) NOTE: When issued from AP Command Line Interface (CLI), this command reports for only the frame from which AP CLI is invoked. The Output message displays the status of all OOS AP and TP (but not BTS) components for that particular frame. Output from the AP CLI version of this command is not displayed on the Read Only Printer (ROP). NOTE: When issued from the Element Management System (EMS) CLI, this command reports all OOS AP, TP, and BTS elements for all frames connected to the EMS.
2. FORMAT
OP:OOS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-OOS OP:BTS-OOS OP:TP-OOS Output Messages OP-AP-OOS OP-BTS-OOS OP-OOS OP-TP-OOS = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that an invalid input parameter was specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:OOS-1
401-610-055 OP OOS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:OOS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP TP-ALARM
ID ............. OP:TP-ALARM RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the alarms that have been generated autonomously for the specied Trafc Processor (TP). NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
OP:TP a, ALARM
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-BTS-ALARM OP-TP-ALARM OP-TP-STATUS OP-TP-VERSION = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-TP-ALARM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:TP-ALARM-1
401-610-055 OP TP-ALARM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:TP-ALARM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP TP OOS
ID ............. OP:TP-OOS RELEASE ....... 21.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This is a 1xEV-DO message. It reports all the Trafc Processor (TP) components that are Out Of Service (OOS) for the system. (Either in Out of Service Manual [OOS-MAN] or Out of Service Fault [OOS-FLT] state.) NOTE: When issued from Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI), this command reports for only the frame from which the AP CLI is invoked. The Output message displays the status of all OOS TP components for that particular frame. Output from the AP CLI version of this command is not displayed on the Read Only Printer (ROP). NOTE: When issued from the Element Management System (EMS) CLI, this command reports for all frames connected to the EMS. The output message displays the status of all OOS TP components for all frames connected to that Operations Maintenance Platform (OMP). 2. FORMAT
OP:TP, OOS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-OOS OP:BTS-OOS OP:OOS = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that an invalid input parameter was specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:TP-OOS-1
401-610-055 OP TP OOS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:TP-OOS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP TP-STATUS
ID ............. OP:TP-STATUS RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the maintenance status of an Trafc Processor (TP). NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
OP:TP a, STATUS
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:TP-ALARM OP:TP-VERSION Output Messages OP-BTS-ALARM OP-TP-ALARM OP-TP-STATUS OP-TP-VERSION = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-TP-STATUS output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:TP-STATUS-1
401-610-055 OP TP-STATUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:TP-STATUS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP TP-VERSION
ID ............. OP:TP-VERSION RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Lists the version(s) of the software on the Trafc Processor (TP). NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
OP:TP a, VERSION
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages OP-TP-VERSION = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-TP-VERSION output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:TP-VERSION-1
401-610-055 OP TP-VERSION
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:TP-VERSION-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP
ID ............. RMV:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Radio Cluster Server (RCS) transient calls may be lost. If the UCL option is used, an attempt to save RCS stable calls will be made, but they may also be lost. If UCL is specied, the database update application will be removed from service even if it cannot be made primary elsewhere. This could result in a complete loss of the ability to perform database Recent Changes. If the UCL option is used and Voice Channel Administration (VCA) cannot be switched over to the mate Application Processor (AP), execution of this command will result in the loss of the ability to complete new calls. If the UCL option is used and this AP has the last ACTIVE Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR), the removal of this application will result in a loss of call processing. If the UCL option is used and this AP hosts the last ACTIVE HVLR Integrity Manager (HVLRIM), the removal of this application will prevent HVLR from successfully reinitializing. Also the Technician Interface (TI) commands backup:db and copy:db cannot be run. If the UCL option is used and the last ACTIVE Signaling System 7 (SS7) link in a linkset is removed, all calls for the IS634 base station associated with the linkset will be lost. If the UCL option is used and this AP has the last active Signaling System 7 High Speed Link (SS7HSL) in a link set, the SS7HSL will become OOS MANUAL and the linkset will become OOS FAULT resulting in the loss of all service to the associated base station. If the last active Signaling System 7 Message Manager (SS7MM) application is running on this AP, the use of the UCL option will result in the removal of the SS7MM application from service and the complete loss of the ability to process SS7 messages.
1. PURPOSE Remove the specied Application Processor (AP), including any applications and resources associated with the AP, from service. Successful completion of this command results in the AP and its associated applications and resources transitioning to the OOS MANUAL state. A list of the resources and applications associated with an AP can be determined by executing the OP:AP-STATUS command.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-1
401-610-055 RMV AP
NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Applications and resources are removed from service in turn. Attempts to switchover mated applications running in an active state or with a primary update role will be made for both conditional or unconditional removes. If the remove is conditional, a failure to remove or successfully switchover any application or the failure to remove a single resource will result in the failure of the AP remove command. Any component that is removed before the command fails will remain OOS MANUAL and will need to be restored manually. If the AP remove command is unconditional (UCL option) it will not be failed if any application or resource fails to be removed. Attempts will be made to switchover stable calls on each RCS to the mate RCS, but the UCL option doesnt require that the mate RCS be ACTIVE so that stable calls are not guaranteed to be maintained for unconditional AP removes. Message Mapping Applications (MMAs) must be in the inhibited state (OP:AP-STATUS, INH:AP-MMA) before they may be removed under a conditional AP remove command. There must be an active SS7 link on the mate AP before the links may be removed under a conditional AP remove command. While the AP is OOS MANUAL, some commands may still be accepted (such as RST:AP). This is also a 1xEV-DO message. Remove a specied AP from service. Adding the optional argument UCL has the same effect as if no argument is supplied. That is, there is no conditional remove. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
RMV:AP a [;UCL] RMV:AP a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = AP number (1-278). = Unconditional remove request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP command will be delayed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP
RL
= Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) INIT:AP OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC RESTART:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-3
401-610-055 RMV AP RST:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-MMA INH-AP-MMA INIT-AP OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC RESTART:AP-HVLRIM RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-AP-HVLR RMV-AP-MMA RMV-AP-MSCDBMS RMV-AP-ROP RMV-AP-SP RMV-AP-SS7 RMV-AP-SS7MM RMV-AP-VCA RMV-RCS RMV-SS7 RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-AP-HVLR RST-AP-MMA RST-AP-MSCDBMS RST-AP-ROP RST-AP-SP RST-AP-SS7 RST-AP-SS7MM RST-AP-VCA RST-RCS RST-SS7
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide
401-610-055 RMV AP
401-710-202 Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide apoffline (invoked from AP UNIX login) aponline (invoked from AP UNIX login)
401-610-055 RMV AP
401-610-055 RMV:BTS ASMB TXAMP
ID ............. RMV:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes a Transmit Amplier (TXAMP) for a specied cabinet of a specic Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed mode cell. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
RMV:BTS a, ASMB b, TXAMP c [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c UCL = BTS number (1-600). = Assemblage (cabinet) number (1-4). = TXAMP number (1-36). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages RMV-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-1
401-610-055 RMV:BTS ASMB TXAMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV BTS CDM
ID ............. RMV:BTS-CDM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes a specied unit on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
RMV:BTS a, CDM b, CBR c [;UCL] RMV:BTS a, CDM b, CRC [;UCL] RMV:BTS a, CDM b, EVM d [;UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b CBR c CRC UCL d = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
= CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR). = CBR number (1-3). = CDMA Radio Controller (CRC). = Unconditional. = 1xEV-DO Modem (EVM) number (0-11).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-BTS-CDM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:BTS-CDM-1
401-610-055 RMV BTS CDM
Output Messages RMV-BTS-CDM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:BTS-CDM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV BTS-TDU
ID ............. RMV:BTS-TDU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes a Test and Diagnostic Unit (TDU) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported for BTSs of type Modular Cell 1, Modular Cell 2, Modular Cell 3 or in a mixed mode cell. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
RMV:BTS a, TDU b [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b UCL = BTS number (1-600). = TDU number (1-14). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages RMV-BTS-TDU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-BTS-TDU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:BTS-TDU-1
401-610-055 RMV BTS-TDU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:BTS-TDU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV BTS-TFU
ID ............. RMV:BTS-TFU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes a Time Frequency Unit (TFU) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed mode cell. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI).
2. FORMAT
RMV:BTS a, TFU b [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b UCL = BTS number (1-600). = TFU number (1-8). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages RMV-BTS-TFU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-BTS-TFU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:BTS-TFU-1
401-610-055 RMV BTS-TFU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:BTS-TFU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV TP
ID ............. RMV:TP RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes the specied Trafc Processor (TP). This command is always unconditional. NOTE: This command cannot remove a TP that is already Out Of Service (OOS). NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
RMV:TP a
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RST:TP Output Messages RMV-TP RST-TP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-TP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:TP-1
401-610-055 RMV TP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:TP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP
ID ............. RST:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores an Application Processor (AP) and any resources and applications associated with that AP to service. NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). On successful completion of the command, the AP and all its associated resources and applications will be ACTIVE. A list of the resources and applications associated with an AP can be determined by executing the OP:AP-STATUS command. Each mated application will be brought to the ACTIVE or STBY state depending on the state of the application on the mate AP. If the application is ACTIVE on the mate AP, it will be brought to the STBY state on this AP. If the application is not ACTIVE on the mate AP, the application will be brought to the ACTIVE state on this AP. Each non-mated (simplex) application will be brought to the active state. Each Radio Cluster Server (RCS) that is made ACTIVE will begin stable clearing the cells, and it will be a few minutes before the cells can process calls. If an RCS is OOS MANUAL on both of its associated APs before the AP restore command is issued, that RCS will not be restored to service since it is assumed that the technician manually removed that RCS from service (RMV:RCS) and it should not be automatically restored. The RCS should be manually restored to service if desired (RST:RCS). The Mobile Switching Center Database Management System (MSCDBMS) update application is restored to the ACTIVE maintenance state on each AP where it is running. The MSCDBMS update role is assigned to be primary and secondary on the AP pair where it is executing. The MSCDBMS update application will be assigned the primary update role if the MSCDBMS update role is not primary on the mate AP. The MSCDBMS update application will be assigned the secondary update role if the MSCDBMS update role is primary on the mate AP. The Message Mapping Application (MMA) is a mated application that runs ACTIVE/ACTIVE on the AP pair. Each MMA application instance will be brought to the ACTIVE state as a result of the successful execution of this command. This is also a 1xEV-DO message. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-1
401-610-055 RST AP
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INIT:AP OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC RESTART:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-2 Issue 28
RL
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005 RMV:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages INIT-AP OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC RESTART-AP-HVLRIM RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-AP-HVLR RMV-AP-MMA RMV-AP-MSCDBMS RMV-AP-ROP RMV-AP-SP RMV-AP-SS7 RMV-AP-SS7MM RMV-AP-VCA RMV-RCS RMV-SS7 RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-AP-HVLR RST-AP-MMA RST-AP-MSCDBMS RST-AP-ROP RST-AP-SP RST-AP-SS7 RST-AP-SS7MM RST-AP-VCA RST-RCS RST-SS7
401-610-055 RST AP
401-610-055 RST AP
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-710-202 Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide 401-710-205 Mobility Manager Signaling System 7 / Direct Link Node (MM-SS7/MM-DLN) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST:BTS ASMB TXAMP
ID ............. RST:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a Transmit Amplier (TXAMP) for a specied cabinet of a specic Base Transceiver System (BTS). Specifying UCL is required for the TXAMP. NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
RST:BTS a, ASMB b, TXAMP c ;UCL

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c UCL = BTS number (1-600). = Assemblage (cabinet) number (1-4). = TXAMP number (1-36). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-1
401-610-055 RST:BTS ASMB TXAMP
Output Messages RST-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST BTS CDM
ID ............. RST:BTS-CDM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a specied unit on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
RST:BTS a, CDM b, CBR c [;UCL] RST:BTS a, CDM b, CRC [;UCL] RST:BTS a, CDM b, EVM d [;UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b CBR c UCL CRC d = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
= CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR). = CBR number (1-3). = Unconditional. = CDMA Radio Controller (CRC). = 1xEV-DO Modem (EVM) number (0-11).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-BTS-CDM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:BTS-CDM-1
401-610-055 RST BTS CDM
Output Messages RST-BTS-CDM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:BTS-CDM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST BTS-TDU
ID ............. RST:BTS-TDU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a Test and Diagnostic Unit (TDU) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported for BTSs of type Modular Cell 1, Modular Cell 2, Modular Cell 3 or in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
RST:BTS a, TDU b [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b UCL = BTS number (1-600). = TDU number (1-14). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages RST-BTS-TDU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-BTS-TDU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:BTS-TDU-1
401-610-055 RST BTS-TDU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:BTS-TDU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST BTS-TFU
ID ............. RST:BTS-TFU RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a Time Frequency Unit (TFU) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
RST:BTS a, TFU[:GPS] b [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a GPS b UCL = BTS number (1-600). = Requests the restore of the GPS. = TFU number (1-8). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages RST-BTS-TFU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-BTS-TFU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:BTS-TFU-1
401-610-055 RST BTS-TFU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:BTS-TFU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST TP
ID ............. RST:TP RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a Trafc Processor (TP) from the Out Of Service (OOS) state to the active state. This command is used to put a TP back into service after maintenance activities are complete. NOTE: This command may only be entered from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS), but for 1xEV-DO it may also be entered from the Application Processor (AP) Command Line Interface (CLI). 2. FORMAT
RST:TP a
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RMV:TP Output Messages RMV-TP RST-TP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-TP output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:TP-1
401-610-055 RST TP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:TP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SELECT AP
ID ............. SELECT:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Selects the Application Processor (AP) platform software version for a software update or generic retrot procedure. Format 1: The AP will initialize to the selected version of AP platform software on either of the following events:

An initialization of the AP in response to INIT:AP-FULL (during a software update). An initialization of the AP in response to a "42 r, 50, 54" sequence at the ECP Emergency Action Interface (during a generic retrot).
NOTE: This command can only be run from the Technician Interface Command Line Interface (TICLI). Format 2: This is a 1xEV-DO message. The 1xEV-DO command selects the AP Application Software Version to activate. The 1xEV-DO command does not select platform software; a single platform version may be present. Before activating the software, all the APs in the same frame must select the same application version. The compatible platform version also needs to be installed and activated beforehand. NOTE: This command can only be run from the Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
SELECT:AP a, SOFTWARE b, VERSION "c" SELECT:AP a, APPLICATION SOFTWARE, VERSION d
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = AP number (1-278). = Software type. "platform" is the only supported software type. = Software version. A string of characters within double quotes. = AP Application Software version identier. A string of 12 characters. 1st character Software type: F Functional software (Cell and Radio Cluster Server [RCS]). 2nd-3rd character Release level of the load. 4th character Base/Package release number: 0 Base release. 1 Package release.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SELECT:AP-1
401-610-055 SELECT AP
5th character Incremented for maintenance release. 6th character Technology type: E 1xEV-DO 7th character Cell type: D Flexent Modular & CDBS Cells and APs. 8th character Type of load: F FOA loads. G GA loads. P Private loads. Other names are used for internal alpha, beta, etc loads. 9th character Compatibility indicator. Always D. 10th character Decimal point. 11th-12th character Load sequence number. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a SELECT:AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SELECT:AP command will be delayed.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SELECT:AP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SELECT AP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COMMIT:AP INIT:AP OP:AP-VERSION Output Messages COMMIT-AP INIT-AP OP-AP-VERSION SELECT-AP
401-610-055 SELECT AP
401-610-055 SEND BTS GENERIC
ID ............. SEND:BTS-GENERIC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a download of specied generic software at the specied Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
SEND:BTS a[, CDM b], GENERIC c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
= Name of the Generic Description File (GDF). A string of 12 characters. For Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, the generic name should follow the naming convention: For example: F2000DDAA.60 1st character Software type: F Functional software (Cell and Radio Cluster Server [RCS]). 2nd-3rd character Release level of the load. 4th character Base/Package release number: 0 Base release. 1 Package release. 5th character Incremented for maintenance release. 6th character Technology type: E 1xEV-DO 7th character Cell type: A Flexent Microcell. B Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. D Flexent Modular & CDBS Cells.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SEND:BTS-GENERIC-1
401-610-055 SEND BTS GENERIC
8th character Type of load: E F G P Experimental loads. FOA loads. GA loads. Private loads.
Other names are used for internal alpha, beta, etc loads. 9th character Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to cell compatibility indicator. Always D. 10th character Decimal point. 11th-12th character Load sequence number. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages STOP:SEND-BTS-GENERIC Output Messages SEND-BTS-GENERIC = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow.
= No Acknowledgement. = = = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met. Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later. Data links to the cell are down.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SEND:BTS-GENERIC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 START TAA UATI
ID ............. START:TAA-UATI RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Starts both forward and reverse link test application tests. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
START:TAA:UATI 0xa [, BTS b, SECTOR c] [, DRCRATE d] [, ACK e] [, NOLOOPBACK] [, DATAPKTS] [, MINRATE f, MAXRATE g] [, DURATION h] [, INTERVAL i] [,TAI j]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d e = Universal Access Terminal Identier (UATI) ID in hexadecimal format. = Base Transceiver System (BTS) number (1-600). = Sector number (1-3). = Fixed Data Rate Channel (DRC) (0-12). If not specied, test will use variable DRC rate. = Fixed ACK bit indicator: 0 Indicates that the test does not use a x ACK bit. 1 Indicates that the test makes use of a x ACK bit. NOLOOPBACK = Requests that no loopback related packets will be generated/processed. Otherwise, loopback related packets will be generated/processed. DATAPKTS f = Requests that data packets will be generated. Otherwise, no data packets will be generated during the test. = Minimum data rate throughout the reverse test: 0 0 kbps 1 9.6 kbps 2 19.2 kbps 3 38.4 kbps 4 76.2 kbps 5 153.6 kbps g = Maximum data rate throughout the reverse test: 0 0 kbps 1 9.6 kbps 2 19.2 kbps 3 38.4 kbps 4 76.2 kbps 5 153.6 kbps
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 START:TAA-UATI-1
NOTE: The MINRATE value must be less than or equal to the MAXRATE value. If the MINRATE value is equal to the MAXRATE value, then the MAXRATE value cannot be equal to zero. If one value is specied then the other must also be specied. h = Test duration. If not specied, 30 minutes will be used. Test duration: 1 15 minutes. 2 30 minutes. 3 45 minutes. 4 60 minutes. 5 75 minutes. 6 90 minutes. 7 105 minutes. 8 120 minutes. 9 135 minutes. 10 150 minutes. 11 165 minutes. 12 180 minutes. 13 195 minutes. 14 210 minutes. 15 225 minutes. 16 240 minutes. i j = Data collection interval in seconds (2-5). If not specied, 2 seconds will be used. = Idle state timer for collecting data for UATI in minutes (1-15). If not specied, no idle states data will be collected.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages START:TAF-UATI START:TAR-UATI = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an START-TAA-UATI output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE START:TAA-UATI-2 Issue 28
Output Messages START-TAA-UATI STOP-TAx-UATI
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 START:TAA-UATI-3
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE START:TAA-UATI-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 START TAF UATI
ID ............. START:TAF-UATI RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Starts forward link test application tests. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
START:TAF:UATI 0xa [, BTS b, SECTOR c] [, DRCRATE d] [, ACK e] [, NOLOOPBACK] [, DATAPKTS] [, DURATION f] [, INTERVAL g] [,TAI h]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d e = Universal Access Terminal Identier (UATI) ID in hexadecimal format. = Base Transceiver System (BTS) number (1-600). = Sector number (1-3). = Fixed Data Rate Channel (DRC) (0-12). If not specied, test will use variable DRC rate. = Fixed ACK bit indicator: 0 Indicates that the test does not use a x ACK bit. 1 Indicates that the test makes use of a x ACK bit. NOLOOPBACK = Requests that no loopback related packets will be generated/processed. Otherwise, loopback related packets will be generated/processed. DATAPKTS f = Requests that data packets will be generated. Otherwise, no data packets will be generated during the test. = Test duration. If not specied, 30 minutes will be used. Test duration: 1 15 minutes. 2 30 minutes. 3 45 minutes. 4 60 minutes. 5 75 minutes. 6 90 minutes. 7 105 minutes. 8 120 minutes. 9 135 minutes. 10 150 minutes. 11 165 minutes. 12 180 minutes. 13 195 minutes.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 START:TAF-UATI-1
401-610-055 START TAF UATI
14 210 minutes. 15 225 minutes. 16 240 minutes. g h = Data collection interval in seconds (2-5). If not specied, 2 seconds will be used. = Idle state timer for collecting data for UATI in minutes (1-15). If not specied, no idle states data will be collected.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages START:TAA-UATI START:TAR-UATI Output Messages START-TAF-UATI STOP-TAx-UATI = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an START-TAF-UATI output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE START:TAF-UATI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 START TAR UATI
ID ............. START:TAR-UATI RELEASE ....... 21.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Starts reverse link test application tests. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
START:TAR:UATI 0xa [, MINRATE b, MAXRATE c] [, DURATION d] [, INTERVAL e]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Universal Access Terminal Identier (UATI) ID in hexadecimal format. = Minimum data rate throughout the reverse test: 0 0 kbps 1 9.6 kbps 2 19.2 kbps 3 38.4 kbps 4 76.2 kbps 5 153.6 kbps c = Maximum data rate throughout the reverse test: 0 0 kbps 1 9.6 kbps 2 19.2 kbps 3 38.4 kbps 4 76.2 kbps 5 153.6 kbps NOTE: The MINRATE value must be less than or equal to the MAXRATE value. If the MINRATE value is equal to the MAXRATE value, then the MAXRATE value cannot be equal to zero. If one value is specied then the other must also be specied. d = Test duration. If not specied, 30 minutes will be used. Test duration: 1 15 minutes. 2 30 minutes. 3 45 minutes. 4 60 minutes. 5 75 minutes. 6 90 minutes. 7 105 minutes. 8 120 minutes. 9 135 minutes.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 START:TAR-UATI-1
401-610-055 START TAR UATI
10 150 minutes. 11 165 minutes. 12 180 minutes. 13 195 minutes. 14 210 minutes. 15 225 minutes. 16 240 minutes. e = Data collection interval in seconds (2-5). If not specied, 2 seconds will be used.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages START:TAA-UATI START:TAF-UATI Output Messages START-TAR-UATI STOP-TAx-UATI = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an START-TAR-UATI output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE START:TAR-UATI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP:BTS ASMB TXAMP
ID ............. STOP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stops an initiated but not yet executed maintenance activity on a Transmit Amplier (TXAMP) for a specied Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
STOP:BTS a, ASMB b, TXAMP c

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages STOP-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. message. = Retry Later. Followed by a STOP-BTS-ASMB-TXAMP output
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-1
401-610-055 STOP:BTS ASMB TXAMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:BTS-ASMB-TXAMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP BTS CDM
ID ............. STOP:BTS-CDM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stops an initiated but not yet executed maintenance activity on a specied unit on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
STOP:BTS a, CDM b, CBR c STOP:BTS a, CDM b, CRC STOP:BTS a, CDM b, EVM d
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b CBR c CRC d = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
= CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR). = CBR number (1-3). = CDMA Radio Controller (CRC). = 1xEV-DO Modem (EVM) number (0-11).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a STOP-BTS-CDM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:BTS-CDM-1
401-610-055 STOP BTS CDM
Output Messages STOP-BTS-CDM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:BTS-CDM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP BTS-TDU
ID ............. STOP:BTS-TDU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stops an initiated but not yet executed maintenance activity on a Test and Diagnostic Unit (TDU) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported for BTSs of type Modular Cell 1, Modular Cell 2, Modular Cell 3 or in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
STOP:BTS a, TDU b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = BTS number (1-600). = TDU number (1-14).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages STOP-BTS-TDU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a STOP-BTS-TDU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:BTS-TDU-1
401-610-055 STOP BTS-TDU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:BTS-TDU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP BTS-TFU
ID ............. STOP:BTS-TFU RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stops an initiated but not yet executed maintenance activity on a Time Frequency Unit (TFU) on a particular Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command is not supported in a mixed cell mode. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
STOP:BTS a, TFU b
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages STOP-BTS-TFU = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a STOP-BTS-TFU output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:BTS-TFU-1
401-610-055 STOP BTS-TFU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:BTS-TFU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP:EXC BTS FLUS
ID ............. STOP:EXC-BTS-FLUS RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Terminates a single Forward Link User Simulation (FLUS) user on a specied carrier in a given Base Transceiver System (BTS). Format 2: Terminates all FLUS users on a specied carrier in a given BTS. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
STOP:EXC;BTS a, FLUS CDM b, USER c STOP:EXC;BTS a, FLUS CDM b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM) number (114). = FLUS user number (1-25).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages STOP-EXC-BTS-FLUS = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a STOP-EXC-BTS-FLUS output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:EXC-BTS-FLUS-1
401-610-055 STOP:EXC BTS FLUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:EXC-BTS-FLUS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP FLUS CELL
ID ............. STOP:FLUS-CELL RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Ends the Forward Link User Simulation (FLUS) session at a specied cell. NOTE: This command only applies for converged cells supporting 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO) carrier. 2. FORMAT
STOP:FLUS;CELL a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600).

A single cell site. A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG PF RL = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution were not met. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages FLUS:CELL Output Messages FLUS-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:FLUS-CELL-1
401-610-055 STOP FLUS CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:FLUS-CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP SEND BTS GENERIC
ID ............. STOP:SEND-BTSGENERIC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stops a download of software to a specied Base Transceiver System (BTS). NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
STOP:SEND;BTS a[, CDM b], GENERIC

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = BTS number (1-600). = Code Division number (1-16). Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM)
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SEND:BTS-GENERIC Output Messages STOP-SEND-BTS-GENERIC = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow.
= No Acknowledgement. = = = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met. Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later. Data links to the cell are down.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:SEND-BTS-GENERIC-1
401-610-055 STOP SEND BTS GENERIC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:SEND-BTS-GENERIC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP:TAx UATI
ID ............. STOP:TAx-UATI RELEASE ....... 20.1 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Terminates a specied test application test. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
STOP:{TAATAFTAR}; UATI 0xa

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE TAA TAF TAR a = Test application both forward and reverse. = Test application forward. = Test application reverse. = Universal Access Terminal Identier (UATI) ID in hexadecimal format.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages START:TAA-UATI START:TAF-UATI START:TAR-UATI Output Messages STOP-TAx-UATI = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a STOP:TAx-UATI output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:TAx-UATI-1
401-610-055 STOP:TAx UATI
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:TAx-UATI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHBACK AP
ID ............. SWITCHBACK:AP RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Switchback all server processes from the specied Application Processor (AP) to the original position. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
SWITCHBACK:AP a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = AP number. Must be an odd number (1-277).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = = = = In Progress. No Acknowledgement. No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHBACK-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHBACK:FROMAP command will be delayed.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHBACK:AP-1
401-610-055 SWITCHBACK AP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SWITCHOVER:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages SWITCHOVER-AP SWITCHBACK-AP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHBACK:AP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER AP
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If Voice Channel Administration (VCA) is switched over unconditionally as a result of this command, this may result in the loss of OOS MANUAL information on trunks. Some maintenance operations in progress may be terminated.
1. PURPOSE NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Switchover all applications in the ACTIVE state or primary role on the specied Application Processor (AP) to their mate APs. Switchover all ACTIVE applications on the specied AP to their STDBY mates on other APs. If the MSCDBMS update application is executing on the specied AP with an update role of primary, the primary update role will be switched over to the mate AP. During a conditional AP switchover, switchovers will be attempted only on RCSs who are STBY on their mate AP. During an unconditional AP switchover, RCS graceful switchovers will rst be attempted. If an RCS fails to be switched over gracefully, it will be forced to switchover to its mate RCS, dropping all calls as well as denying new call attempts. Format 1 Format 2 Switchover for non 1xEV-DO AP. Switchover for 1xEV-DO AP. For a 1xEV-DO AP, there is an option to switchover one server process or all the server processes. To switch over all server process, type the AP number only without the server process name.
2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
SWITCHOVER:AP a [;UCL] SWITCHOVER:AP a [,b]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = AP number. = Unconditional.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:AP-1
= Server name. Only one server process can be specied: FDBMS HOC HWSERVER LOGSERVER OHM TPAGENT
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER-AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHBACK:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHBACK:FROMAP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP)
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:AP-2 Issue 28
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005 SWITCHOVER:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:SP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS SWITCHBACK-FROMAP SWITCHOVER-AP SWITCHOVER-MSCDBMS SWITCHOVER-RCS SWITCHOVER-ROP SWITCHOVER-SP SWITCHOVER-VCA
Other References: 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-710-202 Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide
401-610-055 ALW AP HVLR
ID ............. ALW:AP-HVLR RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Changes the state of the Application Processor (AP) Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR) to allow access to the Home Location Register (HLR) or the Visitor Location Register (VLR) from the specied AP. The INH:HVLR command may be used to inhibit access to the HVLR. 2. FORMAT
ALW:AP a, HVLR
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a ALW-HVLR output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the ALW-HVLR command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:AP-HVLR-1
401-610-055 ALW AP HVLR
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-HVLR INH-AP-HVLR OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-HVLR RST-AP-HVLR SWITCHOVER-HVLR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:AP-HVLR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW AP-MMA
ID ............. ALW:AP-MMA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allow call processing on a Message Mapping Application (MMA) This command re-enables call processing on an MMA that may have had call processing inhibited using the INH:AP-MMA input command. If the MMA is in either the CAMP-ON or INHIBIT call processing state (OP:AP-STATUS), its state will be returned to NORMAL and the MMA will resume processing calls for its associated IS634 Base Station. 2. FORMAT
ALW:AP a,MMA b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Application Processor (AP) number. = MMA number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a ALW-AP-MMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the ALW:AP-MMA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:AP-MMA-1
401-610-055 ALW AP-MMA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-MMA INH-AP-MMA OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP RMV-AP-MMA RST-AP RST-AP-MMA
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:AP-MMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CELL-DL
ID ............. ALW:CELL-DL RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allow the virtual data links between the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) complex and the Message Mapping Application (MMA) for a particular IS634 Cell, thus allowing call processing for that cell within the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). This command restores the virtual data links for an IS634 cell, thus allowing call processing for that cell within the MSC. A virtual data link for an IS634 cell is the "logical" connection between the ECP complex and the Message Mapping Application (MMA) that runs on an Open Air Interface Application Processor (OAI-AP). There are two virtual data links for each IS634 cell, one to each OAI-AP where the MMA application is hosted. An MMA processes messages for an IS634 Base Station, which has particular IS634 cells associated with it. This command allows both virtual data links for an individual IS634 cell. This command allows the technician to undo the inhibit function performed by the INH:CELL-DL command. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CELL a, DL
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a DL = Cell number. = Data link. Species that the virtual data links for the IS-634 cell are being allowed.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a ALW-CELL-DL output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the ALW:CELL-DL command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CELL-DL-1
401-610-055 ALW CELL-DL
Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:CELL-DL (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-MMA INH-AP-MMA INH-CELL-DL OP-AP-STATUS
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CELL-DL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW MSCDBMS-AUD
ID ............. ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allow Application Processor (AP) based AUTOPLEX daily comprehensive database audits. This command allows daily comprehensive database audits between AP and Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) databases. On successful completion of this command, the daily comprehensive audits will be resumed. If the TIME parameter is specied, then the audits will begin at the specied time. If the TIME parameter is not specied, the previously specied audit time will be used; if no time has ever been specied, the default audit time of 03:00 will be used. This command also allows the mufdb and ccfdb key crosscheck audit. 2. FORMAT
ALW:MSCDBMS,AUD[,TIME a]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Time at which to run daily comprehensive audits (in format hh:mm, where hh represents the hour of the day in military time at which the audits should be run, and mm represents the minute within the hour).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW MSCDBMS-AUD
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:MSCDBMS-AUD (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) STOP:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-MSCDBMS-AUD AUD-MSCDBMS INH-MSCDBMS-AUD OP-AP-STATUS STOP-MSCDBMS-AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW MSCDBMS-RCV
ID ............. ALW:MSCDBMS-RCV RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allow Application Processor (AP) based Recent Change / Verify (RC/V). This command allows recent change processing to take place on the APs. On successful completion of this command, new recent change sessions will be allowed to be initiated (apxrcv) and changes to the AUTOPLEX database will be allowed within existing sessions in which they had been inhibited. 2. FORMAT
ALW:MSCDBMS,RCV
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:MSCDBMS-RCV-1
401-610-055 ALW MSCDBMS-RCV
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:MSCDBMS-RCV (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-MSCDBMS-RCV INH-MSCDBMS-RCV OP-AP-STATUS
Other References: 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide apxrcv (invoked from ECP or OMP)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:MSCDBMS-RCV-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD MSCDBMS
ID ............. AUD:MSCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Audits Application Processor (AP) and Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) database tables and synchronizes them if necessary. This command runs a comprehensive audit on a specied table or on all tables if no table is specied with the TABLE parameter. The audit will compare the AP and ECP versions of the table(s) and if discrepancies are detected the AP table will be modied to match the ECP table. When Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR) is enabled and the table specied is ccfdb, the audit will compare the master mufdb keys to each instance of ccfdb keys and will correct any discrepancies. The output of the command will indicate which tables have been modied and whether alarms were generated as a result of the audit, because audit mismatches could not be corrected. The output of the command will also indicate if the audit nds a Linked List Indexed (LLI) record marked for deletion. Note that this command should not be run while a COPY:DB command is in progress. 2. FORMAT
AUD:MSCDBMS[,TABLE a]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Name of the table to be audited.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:MSCDBMS-1
401-610-055 AUD MSCDBMS
Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD (Flexent EMS/AP) COPY:DB INH:MSCDBMS-AUD (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) STOP:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-MSCDBMS-AUD AUD-MSCDBMS INH-MSCDBMS-AUD OP-AP-STATUS STOP-MSCDBMS-AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:MSCDBMS-2 Issue 28
ID ............. BKUP:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests that a backup occur for the active Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database on the pre-specied Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) proxy server archive directory. 2. FORMAT
BKUP:RNCDB, RNC [a ALL]

RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 BKUP:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:RNCDB DELBKUP:RNCDB OP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE BKUP:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CFR AP-DS1
ID ............. CFR:AP-DS1 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Congures the loopback state of a Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) in order to prepare it for testing or operation. This command puts the specied DS1 into and out of "external loopback" mode. The DS1 must be manually removed from service (RMV:AP-DS1) before the CFR:AP-DS1-EXT command can be performed. Once the CFR:AP-DS1-EXT command has successfully completed the DS1 has been placed into "external loopback" mode. The DS1 can then be tested with external DS1 test equipment. When testing has completed, the DS1 must be manually put back into "normal mode" (no loopback) using the CFR:AP-DS1-NORM command or the DS1 can be restored to service directly (RST:AP-DS1). Note that a DS1 may not be congured in "external loopback" mode while it is being diagnosed (DGN:AP-DS1). The current mode of a DS1 can be determined by displaying its status (OP:AP-STATUS). 2. FORMAT
CFR:AP a,DS1 b,c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Application Processor (AP) number. = DS1 number. = Mode keyword: EXT Congure the DS1 into "external loopback" mode, which means that an external loopback test with external DS1 test equipment can now be performed. NORM Congure the DS1 back into "normal mode" (no loopback), which means the DS1 can now be diagnosed (DGN:AP-DS1) or restored (RST:AP-DS1). 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CFR-AP-DS1 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the CFR:AP-DS1 command will be delayed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:AP-DS1-1
401-610-055 CFR AP-DS1
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CFR-AP-DS1 DGN-AP-DS1 OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-DS1 RST-AP-DS1
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:AP-DS1-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CFR:AP-SS7
ID ............. CFR:AP-SS7 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If the Signaling System 7 Message Manager Application (SS7MMA) link is in the EXTERNAL LOOP mode and the remote end attempts to restore the link, the link will appear to become active but fail at higher levels of the SS7 protocol. Use the EXTERNAL LOOP mode only when both ends agree that the link is in the test state.
1. PURPOSE Toggles the Signaling System 7 Message Manager Application (SS7MMA) link between the normal (NO LOOP) mode and the EXTERNAL LOOP mode. Use the CFR:AP-DS1-EXT and CFR:AP-DS1-NORM command to toggle a Signaling System 7 High Speed Link (SS7HSL) between normal (NO LOOP) and EXTERNAL LOOP mode. The SS7MMA link must be manually removed from service (RMV:AP-SS7) before the CFR:AP-SS7-EXT command can be performed. When the CFR:AP-SS7-EXT command has successfully completed, the link has been placed into EXTERNAL LOOP mode. The external loopback mode can be used to facilitate pattern (For example: Bit Error Rate Test [BERT]) testing from the remote end. Examples of BERT patterns are qrss and 511. NOTE: The remote end must be able to perform the BERT test at a single Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0) level. The BERT tests can be used to verify the quality of the transmission facility, troubleshoot SS7 connection problems, and verify some of the circuitry in the Application Processors (APs) Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) interface. To remove the external loopback, execute the CFR:AP-SS7-NORM command or the RST:AP-SS7 command. The mode an SS7MMA link can be determined by displaying its status by using the OP:AP-STATUS or OP:AP-DS1-STATUS command. 2. FORMAT
CFR:AP a,SS7 b,c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number = SS7 link number
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:AP-SS7-1
401-610-055 CFR:AP-SS7
= Mode keyword: EXT Congure the SS7 link into "external loopback" mode, which means that an external loopback test with external test equipment can now be performed. NORM Congure the SS7 link back into "normal mode" (no loopback) which means the link can now be restored (RST:AP-SS7).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CFR-AP-SS7 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the CFR-AP-SS7 command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CFR-AP-SS7 OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-SS7 RST-AP-SS7
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:AP-SS7-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CFR:AP-SS7
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:AP-SS7-3
401-610-055 CFR:AP-SS7
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:AP-SS7-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 CFR SS7
ID ............. CFR:SS7 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If the Signaling System 7 Low Speed Link (SS7LSL) is in the EXTERNAL LOOP mode and the remote end attempts to restore the link, the link will appear to become active but fail at higher levels of the SS7 protocol. Use the EXTERNAL LOOP mode only when both ends agree that the link is in the test state.
1. PURPOSE Toggles the Signaling System 7 Low Speed Link (SS7LSL) between the normal (NO LOOP) mode and the EXTERNAL LOOP mode. Use the CFR:AP-DS1-EXT and CFR:AP-DS1-NORM command to toggle a Signaling System 7 High Speed Link (SS7HSL) between normal (NO LOOP) and EXTERNAL LOOP mode. The SS7LSL must be manually removed from service (RMV:SS7) before the CFR:SS7-EXT command can be performed. When the CFR:SS7-EXT command has successfully completed, the link has been placed into EXTERNAL LOOP mode. The external loopback mode can be used to facilitate pattern (For example: Bit Error Rate Test [BERT]) testing from the remote end. Examples of BERT patterns are qrss and 511. NOTE: The remote end must be able to perform the BERT test at a single Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0) level. The BERT tests can be used to verify the quality of the transmission facility, troubleshoot SS7 connection problems, and verify some of the circuitry in the Application Processors (APs) Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) interface. To remove the external loopback, execute the CFR:SS7-NORM command or the RST:SS7 command. The mode of an SS7LSL can be determined by displaying its status by using the OP:AP-STATUS or OP:AP-DS1-STATUS input command. 2. FORMAT
CFR:SS7 a,b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Signaling System 7 Low Speed Link (SS7LSL) number.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:SS7-1
401-610-055 CFR SS7
= Mode keyword: EXT Congure the SS7LSL into EXTERNAL LOOP mode, which means that an external loopback test with external test equipment can now be performed. NORM Congure the SS7LSL back into normal mode (NO LOOPBACK) which means the link can now be restored (RST:SS7).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CFR-SS7 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the CFR-SS7 command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CFR-SS7 OP-AP-STATUS RST-SS7 RMV-SS7
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:SS7-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CFR SS7
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:SS7-3
401-610-055 CFR SS7
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:SS7-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 COMMIT AP
ID ............. COMMIT:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Commits the Application Processor (AP) to the version of platform software currently running. NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Format 1: This command commits the AP to the version of platform software currently running on the AP. A commit removes the "backout" version of AP platform software if it exists. A commit also removes the "new" version of AP platform software if a new version (different from the currently running version) of AP platform software exists. COMMIT is done only as part of a software update or generic retrot procedure, after the new software has stabilized on the system for some time interval. See the Application Processor Cluster Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide to follow the software update or generic retrot procedure. The COMMIT will fail if the selected version of AP platform software differs from the currently running version of AP platform software. This command can be run only from the EMS. Format 2: This is a 1xEV-DO message. Commits the current sets of software versions so that they cannot be backed out or removed. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
COMMIT:AP a, SOFTWARE b COMMIT:AP a, SOFTWARE
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number (1-278). = Software type: platform is the only type of software supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a COMMIT-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the COMMIT:AP command will be delayed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COMMIT:AP-1
401-610-055 COMMIT AP
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-VERSION SELECT:AP Output Messages COMMIT-AP OP-AP-VERSION SELECT-AP
Other References: 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-110 Element Management System (EMS) Users Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COMMIT:AP-2 Issue 28
ID ............. COPY:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests a restore (a copy) of the Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database. The request can be for an individual RNC or for all RNCs using the most recent backup le from the $CDMA_OAM_ROOT/rncdbbackups directory, the backup le is specied by the system user. 2. FORMAT
COPY:RNCDB, RNC [a ALL], DIRNAME "b"

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = RNC number (1-15). = The backup directory/lename entered inside quotes (For example: "rnc24_12.0").
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-RNCDB output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the COPY-RNCDB command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages BKUP:RNCDB DELBKUP:RNCDB OP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CREATE MMA
ID ............. CREATE:MMA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Create a new Message Mapping Application (MMA) instance. Create new instances of the MMA on both Application Processors (APs) in the congured AP pair. Before issuing this command, the MMA must be congured in the Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) bsconfig form. After the MMA has been created, it may be placed in service using the RST:AP-MMA command. The CREATE:MMA command is used as part of the MMA growth procedure as described in the 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide document. 2. FORMAT
CREATE:MMA a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = MMA number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF = Printout Follows. Followed by a CREATE-MMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the CREATE:MMA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. NG = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CREATE:MMA-1
401-610-055 CREATE MMA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DELETE:MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CREATE-MMA DELETE-MMA
Other References: 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-610-036 Database Update Manual 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CREATE:MMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CREATE RCS
ID ............. CREATE:RCS RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Create a new Radio Cluster Server (RCS) instance. Create a new instance of an RCS. Before issuing this command, the RCS must be congured in the Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) rcslink form. This command is used as part of the RCS growth procedure as described in the 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) This command is not required or supported for RCSs with Internet Protocol Backhaul (IPBH) enabled. RCSs that are congured for IP Backhaul will be in the Out Of Service Manual (OOS-M) state after the cmodeqp form is inserted for the RCS. 2. FORMAT
CREATE:RCS a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = RCS number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CREATE-RCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the CREATE:RCS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CREATE:RCS-1
401-610-055 CREATE RCS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DELETE:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CREATE-RCS DELETE-RCS
Other References: 401-610-036 Database Update Manual 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CREATE:RCS-2 Issue 28
ID ............. DELBKUP:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests that a specied Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database on the pre-specied Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) proxy server archive directory, be deleted. 2. FORMAT
DELBKUP:RNCDB, DIRNAME "a"

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = The backup directory/lename entered inside quotes (For example: "rnc24_12.0").
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DELBKUP:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages BKUP:RNCDB COPY:RNCDB OP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DELBKUP:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DELETE MMA
ID ............. DELETE:MMA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Delete a Message Mapping Application (MMA) from the Application Processor (AP) cluster. This command deletes MMA instances from both APs where the MMA is congured. The MMA instances must be in either the OOS MANUAL (RMV:AP-MMA) or OOS FAULT state. The MMA must rst be deleted with this command before the associated Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) bsconfig form is deleted or before the AP designations are changed in the RC/V bsconfig form. This command is used as part of the MMA degrowth procedure as described in 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide. Once the MMA is deleted, it appears as "congured" in the OP:AP-STATUS command. The "congured" state indicates that the MMA is in the process of being grown or degrown. 2. FORMAT
DELETE:MMA a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = MMA number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DELETE-MMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the DELETE:MMA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DELETE:MMA-1
401-610-055 DELETE MMA
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CREATE:MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CREATE-MMA DELETE-MMA OP-AP-STATUS
Other References: 401-610-036 Database Update Manual 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DELETE:MMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DELETE RCS
ID ............. DELETE:RCS RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Delete a Radio Cluster Server (RCS) from the AP Application Processor (AP) cluster. This command deletes the RCS from both the primary and alternate APs where it is equipped. The RCS must rst be deleted with this command before the associated Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) rcslink form is deleted or before the primary or alternate AP designations are changed in the RC/V rcslink form. Once the RCS is deleted, it appears as congured in the OP:AP-STATUS command. This command is not required or supported for RCSs with Internet Protocol Backhaul (IPBH) enabled. 2. FORMAT
DELETE:RCS a
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DELETE-RCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the DELETE:RCS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DELETE:RCS-1
401-610-055 DELETE RCS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CREATE:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CREATE-RCS DELETE-RCS OP-AP-STATUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DELETE:RCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN AP-DS1
ID ............. DGN:AP-DS1 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses a Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) that is congured for the Link Access Procedure D-Channel (LAPD) or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) protocol using an internal loopback test. This command puts the specied DS1 in "internal loopback" mode and then tests the DS1. The results of the test are displayed in output messages. The test should take less than 75 seconds for a T1 link test to complete and 120 seconds for an E1 link. Once the test is completed, the DS1 is put back into "normal mode" (no loopback). The DS1 must then be manually restored to service (RST:AP-DS1). Note that only one DS1 may be diagnosed at a time. A second request on the same DS1 will be rejected. A second request on a different DS1 will be queued until the rst one nishes. The DS1 must be in "normal mode" (no loopback) (CFR:AP-DS1) when this command is executed. The mode a DS1 is currently in can be determined by displaying its status (OP:AP-STATUS). The DS1 must also be manually removed from service before this command can be performed (RMV:AP-DS1). 2. FORMAT
DGN:AP a, DS1 b [, DS0 c, CONNECT ]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Application Processor (AP) number. = DS1 number. = Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0) number (1-24).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-AP-DS1 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the DGN:AP-DS1 command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:AP-DS1-1
401-610-055 DGN AP-DS1
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CFR:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CFR-AP-DS1 DGN-AP-DS1 OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-DS1 RST-AP-DS1
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:AP-DS1-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN SS7
ID ............. DGN:SS7 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If this Signaling System 7 (SS7) link is on a preferred referenced Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1), the recommendation is to place the DS1 loopback at the other end of the Digital Access and CrossConnect System (DACS), 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS), and so forth, otherwise links on other DS1s might bounce.
1. PURPOSE Diagnose a Signaling System 7 (SS7) link using Bit Error Rate Test (BERT). The results of the test are displayed to the Read Only Printer (ROP) and the Application Processor (AP) Admin log. (See the 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster [APC] Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) for information on AP Admin log les and how to use them.) This command will run a BERT test on the specied SS7 Link. If no DURATION or CONT option is entered, the default duration of the test will be set to two minutes. The minimum duration for the test is two minutes and the maximum allowed duration is 24 hours. Note that in order to successfully run a BERT command the following conditions must be met: At most one BERT test may be running for a single SS7 link at any one time. A second request on the same SS7 link will be rejected. A maximum of three BERT tests may be running on any one AP at any one time. The Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) associated with the SS7 link must be equipped and active. The SS7 link must also be either in the growth state or in the available state. The SS7 link must be manually out of service (RMV:SS7). 2. FORMAT
DGN:SS7 a [, CONT DURATION b:cc ]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a CONT DURATION b cc = SS7 number (1-512). = Continuous test. This keyword denotes that the BERT will run for the maximum amount of time allowable. = Duration of the test. = The number of hours the test is set to run (0-24). = The number of minutes the test is set to run (00-59). This must be 00 if b is set to 24. This must not be 00 or 01 if b is set to 00.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:SS7-1
401-610-055 DGN SS7
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-AP-SS7 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the DGN-AP-SS7 command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages DGN-SS7 OP-AP-STATUS RMV-SS7 RST-SS7
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:SS7-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH AP HVLR
ID ............. INH:AP-HVLR RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Changes the state of the Application Processor (AP) Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR) to inhibit access to the Home Location Register (HLR) or the Visitor Location Register (VLR) from the specied AP. The ALW:HVLR command may be used to allow access to the HVLR. 2. FORMAT
INH:AP a, HVLR
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a INH-AP-HVLR output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the INH-HVLR command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:AP-HVLR-1
401-610-055 INH AP HVLR
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-HVLR INH-AP-HVLR OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-HVLR RST-AP-HVLR SWITCHOVER-HVLR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:AP-HVLR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH AP-MMA
ID ............. INH:AP-MMA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Inhibit call processing on a Message Mapping Application (MMA). This command inhibits call processing on an ACTIVE MMA instance. The state of the mate MMA instance is not affected; however, the mate MMA must be ACTIVE and in the NORMAL call processing state in order for this command to succeed. If calls are in progress on the MMA when this command is issued, the MMA is placed in the CAMP-ON call processing state while calls are allowed to drain from the MMA. No new calls are accepted while the MMA is in the CAMP-ON state. The MMA will automatically leave the CAMP-ON state and enter the INHIBIT state when the following conditions are satised: No emergency-911 calls are in progress The number of normal calls in progress on the MMA is below the threshold set for the MMA on the bsconfig Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) form. If the MMA is in either the CAMP-ON or INHIBIT call processing state when the mate MMA fails or is unconditionally removed, it will automatically return to the NORMAL call processing state so that service to the IS634 Base Station is not lost. This command is intended to be used to gracefully remove an MMA from service without affecting service to the associated IS634 Base Station. The conditional RMV:AP-MMA command requires that an ACTIVE MMA be in the INHIBIT call processing state. 2. FORMAT
INH:AP a,MMA b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a a = Application Processor (AP) number. = MMA number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a INH-AP-MMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the INH:AP-MMA command will be delayed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:AP-MMA-1
401-610-055 INH AP-MMA
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-MMA INH-AP-MMA OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP RMV-AP-MMA RST-AP RST-AP-MMA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:AP-MMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH CELL-DL
ID ............. INH:CELL-DL RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If the UCL option is used, the IS634 cell virtual data links are inhibited regardless of whether there are calls in progress (including emergency 911 calls) for that IS634 cell. This will result in any existing calls being terminated and will prevent any new calls between that IS634 cell and the Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
1. PURPOSE Inhibit the virtual data links between the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) complex and the Message Mapping Application (MMA) for a particular IS-634 cell, thus preventing call processing for that cell within the MSC. This command inhibits the virtual data links for an IS-634 cell, thus preventing call processing for that IS-634 cell within the MSC. Without the UCL option, the virtual data links will only be inhibited if there are no calls currently being processed for that IS-634 cell. Without UCL, the Message Mapping Application (MMA) instances on both Application Processors (APs) will be queried for the number of calls in progress for the specied IS-634 cell; if there are any calls up, the command will fail. The Data Link (DL) specied in the command signies data link. The DL option is added to specify that the virtual data links for the IS-634 cell are being inhibited. Currently, INHCELL only supports the DL option. In the future the command might support other options. If the UCL option is specied, the virtual data links will be inhibited regardless of the number of calls. Any calls up between the Base Station and the MSC for the particular IS634 cell will be terminated and no new calls will be allowed. A virtual data link for an IS-634 cell is the "logical" connection between the ECP complex and the Message Mapping Application (MMA) that runs on an Open Air Interface Application Processor (OAI-AP). There are two virtual data links for each IS-634 cell, one to each OAI-AP where the MMA application is hosted. The MMA application processes messages for a particular IS-634 cell Base Station, which has IS-634 cells associated with it. This command inhibits both virtual data links for an individual IS-634 cell without affecting any of the other IS-634 cells associated with the Base Station. This command is intended to be used during IS-634 cell de-growth procedures. It allows the technician to inhibit service for a particular IS-634 cell so that the IS-634 cell can be deleted from Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) using the is634cell form. The ALW:CELL-DL command may be used to allow the IS-634 cell virtual data links. 2. FORMAT
INH:CELL a, DL [;UCL]
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:CELL-DL-1
401-610-055 INH CELL-DL
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a DL UCL = Cell number = Virtual Data Link. = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a INH-CELL-DL output message. If the PF1 is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the INH:CELL-DL command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) ALW:CELL-DL (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-MMA INH-AP-MMA OP-AP-STATUS
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:CELL-DL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH CELL-DL
Other References: 401-610-036 Database Update Manual 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:CELL-DL-3
401-610-055 INH CELL-DL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:CELL-DL-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH MSCDBMS-AUD
ID ............. INH:MSCDBMS-AUD RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Inhibits Application Processor (AP) based AUTOPLEX daily comprehensive database audits. This command inhibits the daily comprehensive database audits between AP and Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) databases. On successful completion of this command, the daily comprehensive audits will be discontinued until the ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD command is run. This command also inhibits the mufdb and ccfdb key crosscheck audit. 2. FORMAT
INH:MSCDBMS,AUD
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:MSCDBMS-AUD-1
401-610-055 INH MSCDBMS-AUD
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD (Flexent EMS/AP) AUD:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) STOP:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-MSCDBMS-AUD AUD-MSCDBMS INH-MSCDBMS-AUD OP-AP-STATUS STOP-MSCDBMS-AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:MSCDBMS-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INH MSCDBMS-RCV
ID ............. INH:MSCDBMS-RCV RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Inhibits Application Processor (AP) based Recent Change / Verify (RC/V). This command inhibits recent change processing on the APs. On successful completion of this command, recent change sessions will be prohibited from starting (apxrcv) and changes to the AUTOPLEX database will be disallowed within existing sessions. Changes to the database through the Recent Change interface will be disallowed until the ALW:MSCDBMS-RCV command is run successfully. Note that this command affects apxrcv, but does not affect other database tools such as apxsub. 2. FORMAT
INH:MSCDBMS,RCV
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INH:MSCDBMS-RCV-1
401-610-055 INH MSCDBMS-RCV
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:MSCDBMS-RCV (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages INH-MSCDBMS-RCV ALW-MSCDBMS-RCV OP-AP-STATUS
Other References: 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide apxrcv (invoked from ECP or OMP) apxsub (invoked from OMP)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INH:MSCDBMS-RCV-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 INIT AP
ID ............. INIT:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initialize an Application Processor (AP) at a specic initialization level. NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Format 1: INIT:AP-FULL takes several minutes longer than INIT:AP-APPL but is more thorough. Note that no output messages will be displayed when the INIT:AP FULL or INIT:AP APPL commands run successfully. The AP must be in the OOS MANUAL state before running either INIT:APAPPL or INIT:AP-FULL. After the AP is initialized, it is returned to the OOS MANUAL state. INIT:AP-FULL is primarily used for software update. Both forms of INIT:AP may be used for certain rare errors when a reinitialization is required to recover an AP. Format 2: This is a 1xEV-DO message. Initialize a specied unit. This will reboot the platform software on the AP. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
INIT:AP a, b INIT:AP a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number (1-278). = Initialization level: APPL FULL Only the Flexent /AUTOPLEX software will be reinitialized. The entire AP, including the operating system, will be immediately rebooted.

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 INIT:AP-1
401-610-055 INIT AP
PF
= Printout Follows. Followed by a INIT-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the INIT:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RMV:AP RST:AP SELECT:AP Output Messages INIT-AP RMV-AP RST-AP SELECT-AP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE INIT:AP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP ALARM
ID ............. OP:ALARM-EMS RELEASE ....... 14.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports alarms for all Application Processors (APs) and for the Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs), Message Mapping Applications (MMAs), Digital Signal Level 1s (DS1s), Signaling System 7 (SS7) links, Ethernet Interface Node Link (EINLINK), and Local Area Networks (LANs) associated with each AP. NOTE: This command may be entered only from the Flexent Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
OP:ALARM
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE Report the alarms that have been generated autonomously for the APs and for the RCSs, MMAs, DS1s, SS7 links, EINLINK, and LANs on each AP. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-ALARM output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:ALARM-EMS-1
401-610-055 OP ALARM
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-110 Element Management System (EMS) Users Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:ALARM-EMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-ALARM
ID ............. OP:AP-ALARM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the alarms that have been generated autonomously for the specied Application Processor (AP) and for the Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs), Message Mapping Applications (MMAs), Digital Signal Level 1s (DS1s), Signaling System 7 (SS7) links, Ethernet Interface Node Link (EINLINK), and Local Area Networks (LANs) associated with that AP. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, ALARM
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-ALARM output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-ALARM-1
401-610-055 OP AP-ALARM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-ALARM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-CMDS
ID ............. OP:AP-CMDS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Outputs running and queued commands. This command outputs a list of running commands and queued commands. Queued commands have been entered, but cannot be run until a running command completes. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, CMDS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Application Processor (AP) number (1-278).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-CMDS-1
401-610-055 OP AP-CMDS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-CMDS OP-AP-STATUS
Other References: 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-CMDS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-DS1-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-DS1-STAT RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of all the Digital Signal Level 1s (DS1s) on the specied Application Processor (AP). 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, DS1, STATUS

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-DS1-STAT output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMA-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMAx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCS-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCSx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-DS1-STAT OP-AP-DS1x-STAT OP-AP-MMA-STAT OP-AP-MMAx-STAT SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-DS1-STAT-1
401-610-055 OP AP-DS1-STATUS
OP-AP-RCS-STAT OP-AP-RCSx-STAT OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-DS1-STAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-DS1x-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-DS1x-STAT RELEASE ....... 15.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of a Digital Signal Level 1s (DS1s), and the Digital Signal Level 0s (DS0s) or Signaling System 7 (SS7) links on that DS1. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, DS1 b, STATUS

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Application Processor (AP) number. = DS1 number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by OP-AP-DS1x-STAT output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMA-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMAx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCS-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCSx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-DS1-STAT OP-AP-DS1x-STAT OP-AP-RCS-STAT SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-DS1x-STAT-1
401-610-055 OP AP-DS1x-STATUS
OP-AP-RCSx-STAT OP-AP-MMA-STAT OP-AP-MMAx-STAT OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-DS1x-STAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-INFO
ID ............. OP:AP-INFO RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command outputs information about the Application Processor (AP) hardware type, a list of applications that can be supported on the AP and the features that are enabled on the AP. The information is listed for the AP specied on the command line, or for all APs in the system if no AP number is entered. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP [a], INFO

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-AP-INFO output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the OP-AP-INFO command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. ?E = Error. The AP entered is not congured in the database.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-INFO-1
401-610-055 OP AP-INFO
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-INFO OP-AP-STATUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-INFO-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-INV
ID ............. OP:AP-INV RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command outputs location information about the Application Processor (AP) which includes: hardware type, frame type, Ethernet Interface Node (EIN) group and member, and frame / drawer / slot numbers. If the AP is a Dedicated Network File Service (DNFS) Host AP, its satellite APs will be listed. For a satellite AP, its DNFS host and drawer host will be listed. If the AP is a Drawer Host, its Satellite APs will be listed. The information is listed for the AP specied on the command line, or for all APs in the system if no AP number is entered. This information can also be requested on a per frame basis. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP [a , FRAME b], INV

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number (1-278). = Frame number (1-28).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-AP-INV output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the OP-AP-INV command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. ?E = Error. The AP entered is not congured in the database.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-INV-1
401-610-055 OP AP-INV
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS OP:AP-INFO Output Messages OP-AP-INFO OP-AP-INV OP-AP-STATUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-INV-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-IPBHINFO
ID ............. OP:AP-IPBHINFO RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests that the Internet Protocol Backhaul (IPBH) information be displayed if the Application Processor (AP) has Radio Cluster Server (RCS) Internet Protocol (IP) services enabled. This information will be for a single AP only. The requested result will contain the IP addresses for the interfaces and for the gateways. Furthermore, a listing of each RCS that is IPBH feature enabled will be shown. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, IPBHINFO
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E NG PF = Error. The AP entered is not congured in the database. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-AP-IPBHINFO output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the OP-AP-IPBHINFO command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-IPBHINFO-1
401-610-055 OP AP-IPBHINFO
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-INFO (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-INFO OP-AP-IPBHINFO
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-IPBHINFO-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-MMA-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-MMA-STAT RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of all the Message Mapping Applications (MMAs) on the specied Application Processor (AP). 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, MMA, STATUS

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-AP-AMA-STAT output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMA-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMAx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCS-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCSx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-DS1-STAT OP-AP-DS1x-STAT OP-AP-RCS-STAT SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-MMA-STAT-1
401-610-055 OP AP-MMA-STATUS
OP-AP-RCSx-STAT OP-AP-MMA-STAT OP-AP-MMAx-STAT OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-MMA-STAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-MMAx-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-MMAx-STAT RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of a Message Mapping Application (MMA), and the Digital Signal Level 1s (DS1s) and Signaling System 7 (SS7) links on that MMA. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, MMA b, STATUS

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Application Processor (AP) number. = MMA number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by OP-AP-MMAx-STAT output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMA-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCS-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCSx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-MMAx-STAT-1
401-610-055 OP AP-MMAx-STATUS
Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-DS1-STAT OP-AP-DS1x-STAT OP-AP-MMA-STAT OP-AP-MMAx-STAT OP-AP-RCS-STAT OP-AP-RCSx-STAT OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-MMAx-STAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-RCS-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-RCS-STAT RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of all the Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs) on the specied Application Processor (AP). 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, RCS, STATUS

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-RCS-STAT output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMA-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMAx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCSx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-DS1-STAT OP-AP-DS1x-STAT OP-AP-MMA-STAT OP-AP-MMAx-STAT SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-RCS-STAT-1
401-610-055 OP AP-RCS-STATUS
OP-AP-RCS-STAT OP-AP-RCSx-STAT OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-RCS-STAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-RCSx-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-RCSx-STAT RELEASE ....... 15.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of a Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs), and the Digital Signal Level 1s (DS1s) and Digital Signal Level 0s (DS0s) on that RCS. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, RCS b, STATUS

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Application Processor (AP) number. = RCS number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-RCSx-STAT output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMA-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-MMAx-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-RCS-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-DS1-STAT OP-AP-DS1x-STAT OP-AP-MMA-STAT SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-RCSx-STAT-1
401-610-055 OP AP-RCSx-STATUS
OP-AP-MMAx-STAT OP-AP-RCS-STAT OP-AP-RCSx-STAT OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-RCSx-STAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP AP-STATUS
ID ............. OP:AP-STATUS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of an Application Processor (AP), and the Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR), Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs), Message Mapping Applications (MMAs), Digital Signal Level 1s (DS1s), Signaling System 7 (SS7) links, Ethernet Interface Node Link (EINLINK) and Local Area Networks (LANs) on that AP. 2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, STATUS
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-STATUS output message. = Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-STATUS-1
401-610-055 OP AP-STATUS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-STATUS-2 Issue 28
ID ............. OP:AP-VERSION RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Lists the version(s) of the software on the Application Processor (AP). NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). This command displays: The version of AP platform software running on the AP. The new version of AP platform software on the AP (if it exists), or the backout version of AP platform software on the AP (if it exists). The new or backout version will exist only if a version has been installed since the last COMMIT:AP. The version of AP platform software selected on the AP (SELECT:AP). The available versions of Radio Cluster Server (RCS) software installed on the AP. The available versions of cell software installed on the AP. The selected version and running version for each RCS congured on the AP. This is also a 1xEV-DO message. The 1xEV-DO AP provides application software version information. This command displays the following application versions:

The 1xEV-DO Controller (EVC) Application version(s) installed on the AP. Cell software versions installed on this AP. EVC Application versions, from the list of installed software, which are Selected (the next to be activated), Current (running at the time the OP:AP-VERSION command is executed), and Committed.
2. FORMAT
OP:AP a, VERSION
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by an OP-AP-VERSION output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:AP-VERSION-1
RL
= Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COMMIT:AP SELECT:AP Output Messages COMMIT-AP OP-AP-VERSION SELECT-AP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:AP-VERSION-2 Issue 28
ID ............. OP:RNCDB RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command requests a list of all Radio Network Controller (RNC) application database backup les for a specied RNC or all. 2. FORMAT
OP:RNCDB, RNC [a ALL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a OP-RNCDB output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the OP-RNCDB command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:RNCDB-1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages BKUP:RNCDB COPY:RNCDB DELBKUP:RNCDB Output Messages BKUP-RNCDB COPY-RNCDB DELBKUP-RNCDB OP-RNCDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:RNCDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP SS7APNET
ID ............. OP:SS7APNET RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Reports the Signaling System 7 (SS7) network level point code and subsystem status. Use of this input command is only allowed when the High Speed SS7 Link (HSL) or Low Speed SS7 Link (LSL) feature is activated in the Feature Activation File (FAF). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
OP:SS7APNET,PRTE OP:SS7APNET,ABNORM OP:SS7APNET,PRN "aaa" OP:SS7APNET,PCLU "aaabbb" OP:SS7APNET,PMEM ["aaabbbccc" "fffff"] OP:SS7APNET,STATES ["aaabbbccc" "fffff"] OP:SS7APNET,SSINFO "d" OP:SS7APNET,SSINFO ALL OP:SS7APNET,CONCERNED OP:SS7APNET,LOCPC OP:SS7APNET,SLK ["e"]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE aaabbbccc = Far-End Point Code - 9-character string. aaa bbb ccc d e fffff = Network identier (3 digits from 001-254). = Cluster (3 digits from 000-255). = Member number (3 digits from 000-255). = Subsystem number (1-254). = Signaling link number (3 digits, each digit 0-9). = 5-digit point code.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:SS7APNET-1
401-610-055 OP SS7APNET
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by OP-SS7APNET output message. Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:SS7x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION OP-SS7x-STAT OP-CELL OP-SS7APNET
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:SS7APNET-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 OP SS7x-STATUS
ID ............. OP:SS7x-STAT RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Report the maintenance status of the specied Signaling System 7 High Speed Link (SS7HSL) link on that Application Processor (AP). 2. FORMAT
OP:SS7 a, STATUS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = SS7 link number (1-384). Use the OP:AP-STATUS input message to obtain the SS7 link number for this AP.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by OP-SS7x-STAT output message. Retry Later. The following reason may be specied: Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-DS1x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:SS7APNET (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-DS1-STAT OP-AP-DS1x-STAT OP-AP-STATUS OP-AP-VERSION
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 OP:SS7x-STAT-1
401-610-055 OP SS7x-STATUS
OP-CELL OP-SS7APNET OP-SS7x-STAT
Other References: 401-710-205 Mobility Manager Signaling System 7 / Direct Link Node (MM-SS7/MM-DLN) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE OP:SS7x-STAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RESTART MMA
ID ............. RESTART:MMA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This command will result in a loss of all calls for the IS634 base station associated with the Message Mapping Application (MMA) number.
1. PURPOSE Restart the Message Mapping Application (MMA) on both Application Processors (APs) that the MMA is associated with. The UCL qualier is required since this command will be service impacting. 2. FORMAT
RESTART:MMA a;UCL
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = MMA number. = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a RESTART-MMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RESTART:MMA command will be delayed. Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RESTART:MMA-1
401-610-055 RESTART MMA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RESTART-MMA RST-AP RST-AP-MMA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RESTART:MMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RESTART RCS
ID ............. RESTART:RCS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This command always results in a stable clear of the associated cells. All calls on the cells will be lost. This command should be used in offpeak hours to minimize service impact.
1. PURPOSE Restart the Radio Cluster Server (RCS) on both its primary and alternate Application Processors (APs). This command restarts the RCS on both its primary and alternate APs. It is used during the Cell generic retrot procedure to cause the RCS to restart on the version of RCS software specied on the Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) cell2 form (and, if applicable, the RC/V crcseq or trcseq forms). It can also be used independently of the Cell generic retrot procedure to force the RCS to stop, and then restart. This command does not cause a switchover of the ACTIVE and STDBY RCS instances. That is, if the RCS has an ACTIVE instance on AP x and a STDBY instance on AP y before the command is issued, the RCS will remain ACTIVE on AP x, and STDBY on AP y after restarting. If this command is invoked from the AP, it must be invoked from the AP hosting the ACTIVE instance of the RCS. 2. FORMAT
RESTART:RCS a
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a RESTART-RCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RESTART:RCS command will be delayed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RESTART:RCS-1
401-610-055 RESTART RCS
RL
Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-VERSION (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-VERSION REPT-AP-GRRCSAUD RESTART-RCS RST-AP RST-RCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RESTART:RCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP
ID ............. RMV:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Radio Cluster Server (RCS) transient calls may be lost. If the UCL option is used, an attempt to save RCS stable calls will be made, but they may also be lost. If UCL is specied, the database update application will be removed from service even if it cannot be made primary elsewhere. This could result in a complete loss of the ability to perform database Recent Changes. If the UCL option is used and Voice Channel Administration (VCA) cannot be switched over to the mate Application Processor (AP), execution of this command will result in the loss of the ability to complete new calls. If the UCL option is used and this AP has the last ACTIVE Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR), the removal of this application will result in a loss of call processing. If the UCL option is used and this AP hosts the last ACTIVE HVLR Integrity Manager (HVLRIM), the removal of this application will prevent HVLR from successfully reinitializing. Also the Technician Interface (TI) commands backup:db and copy:db cannot be run. If the UCL option is used and the last ACTIVE Signaling System 7 (SS7) link in a linkset is removed, all calls for the IS634 base station associated with the linkset will be lost. If the UCL option is used and this AP has the last active Signaling System 7 High Speed Link (SS7HSL) in a link set, the SS7HSL will become OOS MANUAL and the linkset will become OOS FAULT resulting in the loss of all service to the associated base station. If the last active Signaling System 7 Message Manager (SS7MM) application is running on this AP, the use of the UCL option will result in the removal of the SS7MM application from service and the complete loss of the ability to process SS7 messages.
1. PURPOSE Remove the specied Application Processor (AP), including any applications and resources associated with the AP, from service. Successful completion of this command results in the AP and its associated applications and resources transitioning to the OOS MANUAL state. A list of the resources and applications associated with an AP can be determined by executing the OP:AP-STATUS command.
401-610-055 RMV AP
NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Applications and resources are removed from service in turn. Attempts to switchover mated applications running in an active state or with a primary update role will be made for both conditional or unconditional removes. If the remove is conditional, a failure to remove or successfully switchover any application or the failure to remove a single resource will result in the failure of the AP remove command. Any component that is removed before the command fails will remain OOS MANUAL and will need to be restored manually. If the AP remove command is unconditional (UCL option) it will not be failed if any application or resource fails to be removed. Attempts will be made to switchover stable calls on each RCS to the mate RCS, but the UCL option doesnt require that the mate RCS be ACTIVE so that stable calls are not guaranteed to be maintained for unconditional AP removes. Message Mapping Applications (MMAs) must be in the inhibited state (OP:AP-STATUS, INH:AP-MMA) before they may be removed under a conditional AP remove command. There must be an active SS7 link on the mate AP before the links may be removed under a conditional AP remove command. While the AP is OOS MANUAL, some commands may still be accepted (such as RST:AP). This is also a 1xEV-DO message. Remove a specied AP from service. Adding the optional argument UCL has the same effect as if no argument is supplied. That is, there is no conditional remove. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
RMV:AP a [;UCL] RMV:AP a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = AP number (1-278). = Unconditional remove request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP command will be delayed.
401-610-055 RMV AP
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) INIT:AP OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC RESTART:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-3
401-610-055 RMV AP RST:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-MMA INH-AP-MMA INIT-AP OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC RESTART:AP-HVLRIM RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-AP-HVLR RMV-AP-MMA RMV-AP-MSCDBMS RMV-AP-ROP RMV-AP-SP RMV-AP-SS7 RMV-AP-SS7MM RMV-AP-VCA RMV-RCS RMV-SS7 RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-AP-HVLR RST-AP-MMA RST-AP-MSCDBMS RST-AP-ROP RST-AP-SP RST-AP-SS7 RST-AP-SS7MM RST-AP-VCA RST-RCS RST-SS7
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide
401-610-055 RMV AP
401-710-202 Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide apoffline (invoked from AP UNIX login) aponline (invoked from AP UNIX login)
401-610-055 RMV AP
401-610-055 RMV:AP-AMA
ID ............. RMV:AP-AMA RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of the UCL option on this command may result in a loss of Automatic Message Accounting information.
1. PURPOSE This command removes the Application Processor (AP) Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) application from service. If this is the last active AP AMA application in the system and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the AMA application will be removed from service even if there are no other active AMA applications in the system. This will result in loss of AMA call records. On successful completion of this command, AMA will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,AMA [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-AMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-AMA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-AMA-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-AMA
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS RST:AP-AMA SWITCHOVER:AMA Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-AMA RST-AP-AMA SWITCHOVER-AP-AMA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-AMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-AMATPS
ID ............. RMV:AP-AMATPS RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of the UCL option on this command may result in a loss of Automatic Message Accounting information.
1. PURPOSE This command removes the Application Processor (AP) Automatic Message Accounting Teleprocessing System (AMATPS) application from service. If this is the last active AP AMATPS application in the system and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the AMATPS application will be removed from service even if there are no other active AMATPS applications in the system. This will result in loss of AMA call records. On successful completion of this command, AMATPS will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,AMATPS [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-AMATPS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-AMATPS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-AMATPS-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-AMATPS
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS RST:AP-AMATPS SWITCHOVER:AMATPS Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-AMATPS RST-AP-AMATPS SWITCHOVER-AP-AMATPS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-AMATPS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP-DS1
ID ............. RMV:AP-DS1 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of the UCL option may result in loss of calls. If the Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) is congured with the Link Access Procedure DChannel (LAPD) or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) protocol and has RCSs associated with it, transient calls may be lost. An attempt will be made to save stable calls on the Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs), but they may also be lost. If the DS1 is congured with the Signaling System 7 (SS7) protocol, all of its associated SS7 links will be removed from service. If any of the removed SS7 links were the last active link in their linkset, the linkset and the MMAs on both Application Processors (APs) associated with the linkset will be taken out of service, resulting in loss of all calls. If the DS1 is congured with the Signaling System 7 High Speed Link (SS7HSL) or Signaling System 7 Low Speed Link (SS7LSL) protocol, all of its associated SS7 links will be removed from service. If any of the removed SS7 links were the last active link in their linkset, the linkset will be taken out of service, resulting in loss of all messaging to the signaling end point.
1. PURPOSE Format 1: Removes the DS1 from service. Format 2: Removes the Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0) from service. If the DS1 is congured with the LAPD or ATM protocol, any RCSs associated with it are removed from service. If the DS1 is congured with the SS7, SS7HSL, or SS7LSL protocol, any SS7 links associated with it are removed from service. If the specied DS1 is congured with the LAPD or ATM protocol, the DS1 will be removed from service, and attempts will be made to gracefully switchover its associated RCSs before removing the RCSs and the DS1 from service. Successful completion of the command results in the DS1 and all of its associated RCSs being placed in the OOS MANUAL state. If any RCSs fail to be removed during the conditional removal of a LAPD or ATM DS1, the DS1 will not be removed and removal of subsequent RCSs will not be attempted. Any RCSs already removed before the command fails will remain OOS MANUAL. If an RCS cannot be removed during the unconditional removal of a LAPD or ATM DS1, the command will continue with the next RCS associated with the DS1, removing as many RCSs as possible. The DS1 will then be removed, and RCSs that were not successfully removed will be placed in the OOS FAULT state. Although attempts are made to switchover stable calls to the mate RCS, the calls are not guaranteed to be maintained. The UCL option does not require that the mate RCS be in service.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-DS1-1
401-610-055 RMV AP-DS1
If the DS1 is congured with the SS7, SS7HSL, or SS7LSL protocol, the DS1 will be removed from service and attempts will be made to remove the SS7 links associated with the DS1. Successful completion of the command results in the DS1 and all of its associated SS7 links being placed in the OOS MANUAL state. All SS7 links that were already OOS MANUAL will not be affected. If any SS7 link fails to be removed during the conditional removal of a SS7 DS1, the DS1 will not be removed, and the remaining links on the DS1 will not be removed. The conditional removal will be failed if an attempt is made to remove a SS7 link that is the last link in service in a linkset. Any SS7 links already removed before the command fails will remain OOS MANUAL. If a SS7 link cannot be removed during the unconditional removal of a SS7 DS1, the command will continue with the next SS7 link associated with the DS1, removing as many links as possible and nally removing the DS1 itself. The UCL option will force the removal of any SS7 links on the DS1 that are the last links in service in a linkset. If the DS1 is congured with the SS7 protocol and the SS7 link is the last link in the linkset, MMAs on both APs associated with the linkset will be placed in the OOS FAULT state and all calls will be lost. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
RMV:AP a, DS1 b [; UCL ] RMV:AP a, DS1 b, DS0 c
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c UCL = AP number. = DS1 number. = Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0) number (1-24). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-DS1 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-DS1 message will be delayed. Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-DS1-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP-DS1
Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CFR:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) CFR:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) CFR:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) DGN:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC OP:CELL-MICRO RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CFR-AP-DS1 CFR-AP-SS7 CFR-SS7 DGN-AP-DS1 OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC OP-CELL-MICRO RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-AP-SS7 RMV-RCS SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-DS1-3
401-610-055 RMV AP-DS1
RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-AP-SS7 RST-RCS
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-205 Mobility Manager Signaling System 7 / Direct Link Node (MM-SS7/MM-DLN) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-DS1-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-HVLR
ID ............. RMV:AP-HVLR RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of the UCL option on this command may result in a loss of call processing.
1. PURPOSE This command removes the Application Processor (AP) Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR) from service. If this is the last active AP HVLR application in the system and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the HVLR application will be removed from service even if there are no other active HVLR applications in the system. This could result in a loss of call processing. On successful completion of this command, HVLR will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,HVLR [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-HVLR output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-HVLR command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-HVLR-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-HVLR
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-HVLR INH-AP-HVLR OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-HVLR RST-AP-HVLR
Other References: 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-710-204 Mobility Manager Home Visitor Location Register (MM-HVLR) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-HVLR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-HVLRIM
ID ............. RMV:AP-HVLRIM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command removes the Application Processor (AP) Home Visitor Location Register Integrity Manager (HVLR-IM) application from service. If the AP HVLR-IM application on the specied AP is in the ACTIVE state and the mate AP HVLR-IM application is not in the STBY state and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the AP HVLR-IM application will be removed from service even if there are no other active AP HVLR-IM applications in the system. On successful completion of this command, the AP HVLR-IM application will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a, HVLRIM [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-HVLRIM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-HVLRIM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-HVLRIM-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-HVLRIM
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP RMV-AP-HVLRIM RST-AP RST-AP-HVLRIM SWITCHOVER-HVLRIM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-HVLRIM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP-MMA
ID ............. RMV:AP-MMA RELEASE ....... 14.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If the UCL option is used, the Message Mapping Application (MMA) instance is removed from service on the Application Processor (AP) regardless of whether it has calls in progress (including emergency 911 calls) or the mate MMA is in service. Use of the UCL option when the mate MMA is not in service will result in the loss of all calls to the IS634 Base Station.
1. PURPOSE Removes the specied Message Mapping Application (MMA) from service on the designated Application Processor (AP). This command removes the MMA instance to the OOS MANUAL state on the designated AP. Without the UCL option, the MMA will only be removed if it is in the inhibited state (OP:AP-STATUS, INH:AP-MMA, ALW:AP-MMA). The MMA will be in the inhibited state after: an INH:AP-MMA command has been executed there are no emergency 911 calls active for this MMA instance the number of non-emergency calls has dropped below the threshold specied on the RC/V bsconfig form. If the UCL option is used, the MMA instance is removed from service on the AP regardless of whether it has calls in progress (including emergency 911 calls) or the mate MMA is in service. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a, MMA b[; UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b UCL = AP number. = MMA number. = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-MMA-1
401-610-055 RMV AP-MMA
PF
Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-MMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV:AP-MMA command will be delayed.
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-MMA INH-AP-MMA RMV-AP RMV-AP-MMA RST-AP-MMA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-MMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP-MSCDBMS
ID ............. RMV:AP-MSCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of the UCL option on this command may result in a complete loss of the ability to perform database Recent Changes.
1. PURPOSE Removes Application Processor (AP) database update application from service. This command removes the AP database update application from service. If the database update role is primary on the specied AP, then the update application will be switched over to another AP (The equivalent of SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS will be performed) where its role will become primary. If the database update application cannot become primary on another AP and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the database update application will be removed from service even if it cannot be made primary elsewhere. This could result in a complete loss of the ability to perform database Recent Changes. On successful completion of this command the Mobile Switching Center Database Management System (MSCDBMS) managed object will be in the OOS-MANUAL state and the database update role will be none. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,MSCDBMS[;UCL]
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-MSCDBMS-1
401-610-055 RMV AP-MSCDBMS
Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-MSCDBMS RST-AP-MSCDBMS SWITCHOVER-MSCDBMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-MSCDBMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-OAMPROXY
ID ............. RMV:AP-OAMPROXY RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Removes an Application Processor (AP) Operations, Administration and Maintenance Proxy (OAMPROXY) application from service. If this is the last active AP OAMPROXY application in the system and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the OAMPROXY application will be removed from service even if there are no other active OAMPROXY applications in the system. On successful completion of this command, OAMPROXY will be in the OOSMANUAL state. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,OAMPROXY [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-OAMPROXY output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-APOAMPROXY command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-OAMPROXY-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-OAMPROXY
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-OAMPROXY (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-OAMPROXY RST-AP-OAMPROXY SWITCHOVER-OAMPROXY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-OAMPROXY-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-SP
ID ............. RMV:AP-SP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of the UCL option on this command may result in a complete loss of Status Display Pages in the system.
1. PURPOSE Removes an Application Processor (AP) Status Display Process (SP) application from service. This command removes the AP SP application from service. An attempt to switchover the SP application running in an active state will be made for both conditional or unconditional removes. If SP cannot be switched over to the mate AP and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the SP application will be removed from service even if the SP cannot be switched over to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command, SP will be in the OOS-MANUAL state on the specied AP. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,SP [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-SP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-SP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-SP-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-SP
Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:SP (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-SP RST-AP-SP SWITCHOVER-SP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-SP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV AP SS7MM
ID ............. RMV:AP-SS7MM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of the UCL option on this command may result in a complete loss of the ability to process Signaling System 7 (SS7) messages.
1. PURPOSE Remove Application Processor (AP) Signaling System 7 Message Manager (SS7MM) application from service. This command removes the AP SS7MM application from service. If this is the last active AP SS7 message manager application in the system and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the SS7MM application will be removed from service even if there are no other active SS7MM applications in the system. This could result in a complete loss of the ability to process SS7 messages. On successful completion of this command, SS7MM will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,SS7MM[;UCL]
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-SS7MM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-SS7MM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-SS7MM-1
401-610-055 RMV AP SS7MM
Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-SS7MM RST-AP-SS7MM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-SS7MM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-TCS
ID ............. RMV:AP-TCS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If UCL is specied, the Trafc Control Server (TCS) application will be removed from service even if it cannot be made ACTIVE on the mate Application Processor (AP). This could result in a complete loss of the ability to complete new calls.
1. PURPOSE Removes the Application Processor (AP) Trafc Control Server (TCS) application from service. On successful completion of this command the TCS application will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. An attempt to switchover the TCS application running in an active state will be made for both conditional or unconditional removes. If TCS cannot be switched over to the mate AP and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the TCS application will be removed from service even if the TCS cannot be switched over to the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,TCS b [;UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b UCL = AP number. = TCS number. = Unconditional remove request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-TCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-TCS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-TCS-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-TCS
Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-TCS RST-AP-TCS SWITCHOVER-TCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-TCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-TPUGUI
ID ............. RMV:AP-TPUGUI RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Removes an Application Processor (AP) Trafc Processing Unit Graphical User Interface (TPUGUI) application from service. If this is the last active AP TPUGUI application in the system and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the TPUGUI application will be removed from service even if there are no other active TPUGUI applications in the system. On successful completion of this command, TPUGUI will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,TPUGUI [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-TPUGUI output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-TPUGUI command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-TPUGUI-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-TPUGUI
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-TPUGUI (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-TPUGUI RST-AP-TPUGUI SWITCHOVER-TPUGUI
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-TPUGUI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV:AP-VCA
ID ............. RMV:AP-VCA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If UCL is specied, the Voice Channel Administration (VCA) application will be removed from service even if it cannot be made ACTIVE on the mate AP. This could result in a complete loss of the ability to complete new calls.
1. PURPOSE Removes the Application Processor (AP) Voice Channel Administration (VCA) application from service. This command removes the Application Processor (AP) Voice Channel Administration (VCA) application from service. On successful completion of this command the VCA application will be in the OOS-MANUAL state. An attempt to switchover the VCA application running in an active state will be made for both conditional or unconditional removes. If VCA cannot be switched over to the mate AP and the UCL parameter is not specied, this command will fail. If UCL is specied, the VCA application will be removed from service even if the VCA cannot be switched over to the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
RMV:AP a,VCA [;UCL]

4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-AP-VCA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV-AP-VCA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:AP-VCA-1
401-610-055 RMV:AP-VCA
Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-VCA RST-AP-VCA SWITCHOVER-VCA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:AP-VCA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV RCS
ID ............. RMV:RCS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes the specied Radio Cluster Server (RCS) from service. This command removes the RCS from service on both the primary and alternate Application Processors (APs) assigned to this RCS along with its associated signaling links. This command can only be executed in the unconditional mode. 2. FORMAT
RMV:RCS a; UCL
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = RCS number. = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-RCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV:RCS command will be delayed.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:RCS-1
401-610-055 RMV RCS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:CELL RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages REPT-AP-APPLNKU RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-CELL RMV-RCS RST-RCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:RCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RMV SS7
ID ............. RMV:SS7 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If the UCL option is used to unconditionally remove the last ACTIVE Signaling System 7 Link (SS7LINK) or Signaling System 7 Message Manager Application (SS7MMA) in a linkset, the linkset will become OOS FAULT resulting in loss of all messaging to the associated signaling end point.
1. PURPOSE Removes the specied high speed or low speed SS7-LINK or SS7MMA link from service. Remove the specied high speed or low speed SS7-LINK or SS7MMA link from service on the Application Processor (AP). If the link is the last ACTIVE link in its linkset, the command will fail unless the UCL option is specied. If a linksets last ACTIVE link is removed, the linkset will become OOS FAULT resulting in loss of all messaging to the associated signaling end point. Removing an SS7-LINK or SS7MMA from service does not affect the state of the Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) it is associated with. 2. FORMAT
RMV:SS7 a[; UCL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = SS7-LINK or SS7MMA number (1-512). = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a RMV-SS7 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RMV:SS7 command will be delayed.
RL
= Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RMV:SS7-1
401-610-055 RMV SS7
Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:SS7x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:SS7APNET RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-SS7x-STAT OP-SS7APNET RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-SS7 RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-SS7
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RMV:SS7-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP
ID ............. RST:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores an Application Processor (AP) and any resources and applications associated with that AP to service. NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). On successful completion of the command, the AP and all its associated resources and applications will be ACTIVE. A list of the resources and applications associated with an AP can be determined by executing the OP:AP-STATUS command. Each mated application will be brought to the ACTIVE or STBY state depending on the state of the application on the mate AP. If the application is ACTIVE on the mate AP, it will be brought to the STBY state on this AP. If the application is not ACTIVE on the mate AP, the application will be brought to the ACTIVE state on this AP. Each non-mated (simplex) application will be brought to the active state. Each Radio Cluster Server (RCS) that is made ACTIVE will begin stable clearing the cells, and it will be a few minutes before the cells can process calls. If an RCS is OOS MANUAL on both of its associated APs before the AP restore command is issued, that RCS will not be restored to service since it is assumed that the technician manually removed that RCS from service (RMV:RCS) and it should not be automatically restored. The RCS should be manually restored to service if desired (RST:RCS). The Mobile Switching Center Database Management System (MSCDBMS) update application is restored to the ACTIVE maintenance state on each AP where it is running. The MSCDBMS update role is assigned to be primary and secondary on the AP pair where it is executing. The MSCDBMS update application will be assigned the primary update role if the MSCDBMS update role is not primary on the mate AP. The MSCDBMS update application will be assigned the secondary update role if the MSCDBMS update role is primary on the mate AP. The Message Mapping Application (MMA) is a mated application that runs ACTIVE/ACTIVE on the AP pair. Each MMA application instance will be brought to the ACTIVE state as a result of the successful execution of this command. This is also a 1xEV-DO message. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a
401-610-055 RST AP
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INIT:AP OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC RESTART:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-2 Issue 28
RL
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005 RMV:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages INIT-AP OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC RESTART-AP-HVLRIM RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-AP-HVLR RMV-AP-MMA RMV-AP-MSCDBMS RMV-AP-ROP RMV-AP-SP RMV-AP-SS7 RMV-AP-SS7MM RMV-AP-VCA RMV-RCS RMV-SS7 RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-AP-HVLR RST-AP-MMA RST-AP-MSCDBMS RST-AP-ROP RST-AP-SP RST-AP-SS7 RST-AP-SS7MM RST-AP-VCA RST-RCS RST-SS7
401-610-055 RST AP
401-610-055 RST AP
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-710-202 Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide 401-710-205 Mobility Manager Signaling System 7 / Direct Link Node (MM-SS7/MM-DLN) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST:AP-AMA
ID ............. RST:AP-AMA RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command restores an Application Processor (AP) Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) application to service. On successful completion of this command, AMA application will be in the ACTIVE maintenance state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, AMA
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-AMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-AMA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-AMA-1
401-610-055 RST:AP-AMA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS RMV:AP-AMA SWITCHOVER:AMA Output Messages RMV-AP-AMA RST-AP-AMA SWITCHOVER-AP-AMA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-AMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST:AP-AMATPS
ID ............. RST:AP-AMATPS RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command restores an Application Processor (AP) Automatic Message Accounting Teleprocessing System (AMATPS) application to service. On successful completion of this command, AMATPS application will be in the ACTIVE maintenance state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, AMATPS
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-AMATPS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-AMATPS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-AMATPS-1
401-610-055 RST:AP-AMATPS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS RMV:AP-AMATPS SWITCHOVER:AMATPS Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-AMATPS RST-AP-AMATPS SWITCHOVER-AP-AMATPS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-AMATPS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-DS1
ID ............. RST:AP-DS1 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) to the ACTIVE state. If the DS1 is congured for the Link Access Procedure DChannel (LAPD) or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) protocol, its associated Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs), Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0s), and signaling links will also be restored to the ACTIVE state. If the DS1 is congured for the Signaling System 7 (SS7), Signaling System 7 High Speed Link (SS7HSL) or Signaling System 7 Low Speed Link (SS7LSL) protocol, its associated SS7 link(s) will also be restored to the ACTIVE state. If the specied DS1 is congured for the LAPD or ATM protocol, the DS1 will be made ACTIVE. RCSs associated with the DS1 are restored to ACTIVE if their mate RCS is not ACTIVE; otherwise they are restored to STBY. The DS0s and signaling links associated with the DS1 are also restored to ACTIVE, and the ACTIVE RCSs begin stable clearing the cells. A few minutes afterwards the cells can process calls. If both an RCS and its mate are in the OOS MANUAL state as a result of a RMV-RCS;UCL command, they will remain OOS MANUAL when the DS1 is restored and must be manually restored using the RST:RCS command. If the specied DS1 is congured for the SS7 protocol, the DS1 will be made ACTIVE, and its associated SS7 links will be restored to the ACTIVE state. SS7 links in loopback will have their loopback state cleared before being made ACTIVE. If a restored SS7 link is the rst link in its linkset to be made ACTIVE, and if the associated Message Mapping Application (MMA) on either or both Application Processors (APs) are OOS FAULT, an attempt will be made to bring the MMA(s) to the ACTIVE state. If the specied DS1 is congured for the SS7HSL or SS7LSL protocol, the DS1 will be made ACTIVE, and its associated SS7 links will be restored to the ACTIVE state. SS7 links in loopback will have their loopback state cleared before being made ACTIVE. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, DS1 b [, DS0 c ] [; UCL ]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = AP number. = DS1 number. = Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0) number (1-24).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-DS1-1
401-610-055 RST AP-DS1
PF
= Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-DS1 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-DS1 message will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CFR:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) DGN:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:CELL OP:CELL-GENERIC OP:CELL-MICRO RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-DS1-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-DS1
Output Messages CFR-AP-DS1 DGN-AP-DS1 OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-CELL OP-CELL-GENERIC OP-CELL-MICRO RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-AP-SS7 RMV-RCS RMV-SS7 RST-AP RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-AP-SS7 RST-RCS RST-SS7
Other References: 401-710-080 MSC Support for IS-634 Base Stations Feature Guide 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-205 Mobility Manager Signaling System 7 / Direct Link Node (MM-SS7/MM-DLN) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-DS1-3
401-610-055 RST AP-DS1
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-DS1-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST:AP-HVLR
ID ............. RST:AP-HVLR RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command restores an Application Processor (AP) Home Visitor Location Register (HVLR) application to service. On successful completion of this command, HVLR will be in the ACTIVE maintenance state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, HVLR
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-HVLR output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-HVLR command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-HVLR-1
401-610-055 RST:AP-HVLR
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLR (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-AP-HVLR INH-AP-HVLR OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-HVLR RST-AP-HVLR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-HVLR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST:AP-HVLRIM
ID ............. RST:AP-HVLRIM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE On successful completion of this command, the Application Processor (AP) Home Visitor Location Register Integrity Manager (HVLR-IM) application will be restored to the ACTIVE or STBY maintenance state depending on the state of the application on the mate AP. If the application is ACTIVE on the mate AP, it will be brought to the STBY state on this AP. If the application is not ACTIVE on the mate AP, the application will be brought to the ACTIVE state on this AP. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, HVLRIM
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-HVLRIM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-HVLRIM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-HVLRIM-1
401-610-055 RST:AP-HVLRIM
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP RMV-AP-HVLRIM RST-AP RST-AP-HVLRIM SWITCHOVER-HVLRIM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-HVLRIM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-MMA
ID ............. RST:AP-MMA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores the specied Message Mapping Application (MMA) to the ACTIVE state on the designated Application Processor (AP). After the MMA is restored, it will initialize and begin processing calls. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, MMA b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number. = MMA number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-MMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST:AP-MMA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-MMA-1
401-610-055 RST AP-MMA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MMA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages RST-AP RST-AP-MMA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-MMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-MSCDBMS
ID ............. RST:AP-MSCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores Application Processor (AP) database update application to service. This command restores the AP database update application to service. On successful completion of this command the Mobile Switching Center Database Management System (MSCDBMS) managed object will be in the ACTIVE maintenance state and the database update role will be secondary if it is primary on another AP or primary otherwise. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a,MSCDBMS
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER:AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-MSCDBMS-1
401-610-055 RST AP-MSCDBMS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-MSCDBMS RST-AP-MSCDBMS SWITCHOVER-MSCDBMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-MSCDBMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-OAMPROXY
ID ............. RST:AP-OAMPROXY RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores the Application Processor (AP) Operations, Administration and Maintenance Proxy (OAMPROXY) application to service. On successful completion of this command, OAMPROXY will be in the ACTIVE maintenance state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, OAMPROXY
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-OAMPROXY output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-APOAMPROXY command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-OAMPROXY-1
401-610-055 RST AP-OAMPROXY
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-OAMPROXY (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-OAMPROXY RST-AP-OAMPROXY SWITCHOVER-OAMPROXY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-OAMPROXY-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST:AP-SP
ID ............. RST:AP-SP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command restores the Application Processor (AP) Status Display Process (SP) application to service. On successful completion of this command, the SP managed object will be in the ACTIVE or STBY maintenance state depending on the state of the application on the mate AP. If the application is ACTIVE on the mate AP, it will be brought to the STBY state on this AP. If the application is not ACTIVE on the mate AP, the application will be brought to the ACTIVE state on this AP. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, SP
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-SP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-SP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-SP-1
401-610-055 RST:AP-SP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:SP (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-SP RST-AP-SP SWITCHOVER-SP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-SP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-SS7MM
ID ............. RST:AP-SS7MM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restore Application Processor (AP) Signaling System 7 Message Manager (SS7MM) application to service. On successful completion of this command, SS7MM will be in the ACTIVE maintenance state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, SS7MM
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-SS7MM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-SS7MM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE NUMBER is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE and NUMBER already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-SS7MM-1
401-610-055 RST AP-SS7MM
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST-AP-SS7MM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-SS7MM RST-AP-SS7MM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-SS7MM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-TCS
ID ............. RST:AP-TCS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores the Application Processor (AP) Trafc Control Server (TCS) application to service. On successful completion of this command, the specied TCS managed object will be in the ACTIVE state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, TCS b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = AP number. = TCS number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-TCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-TCS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-TCS-1
401-610-055 RST AP-TCS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST-AP-TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER-TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-TCS RST-AP-TCS SWITCHOVER-TCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-TCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST AP-TPUGUI
ID ............. RST:AP-TPUGUI RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores the Application Processor (AP) Trafc Processing Unit Graphical User Interface (TPUGUI) application to service. On successful completion of this command, TPUGUI will be in the ACTIVE maintenance state. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, TPUGUI
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-TPUGUI output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-TPUGUI command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-TPUGUI-1
401-610-055 RST AP-TPUGUI
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-TPUGUI (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-TPUGUI RST-AP-TPUGUI SWITCHOVER-TPUGUI
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-TPUGUI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST:AP-VCA
ID ............. RST:AP-VCA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command restores the Application Processor (AP) Voice Channel Administration (VCA) application to service. On successful completion of this command, the VCA managed object will be in the ACTIVE or STBY maintenance state depending on the state of the application on the mate AP. If the application is ACTIVE on the mate AP, it will be brought to the STBY state on this AP. If the application is not ACTIVE on the mate AP, the application will be brought to the ACTIVE state on this AP. 2. FORMAT
RST:AP a, VCA
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-AP-VCA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST-AP-VCA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:AP-VCA-1
401-610-055 RST:AP-VCA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-VCA RST-AP-VCA SWITCHOVER-VCA
Other References: 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-710-206 Mobility Manager Voice Channel Administration (MM-VCA) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:AP-VCA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST RCS
ID ............. RST:RCS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores the specied Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to service. The RCS will be restored with this command on the primary and alternate Application Processors (APs) along with its assigned signaling links. This command is considered successful if the RCS is restored on at least one AP, at that point however, the RCS will begin stable clearing the cells and it will be a few minutes before the cells can process calls. This command may be used when the RCS is UNAVAILABLE on one AP and ACTIVE on another AP (or UNAVAILABLE on both APs) to restore the UNAVAILABLE RCS. This command will rst attempt to restore the RCS on the primary AP then the alternate AP. 2. FORMAT
RST:RCS a
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-RCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RCS:RCS command will be delayed.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:RCS-1
401-610-055 RST RCS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:CELL RESTART:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-CELL REPT-AP-APPLNKU RESTART-RCS RMV-RCS RST-RCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:RCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 RST SS7
ID ............. RST:SS7 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores a high speed or low speed Signaling System 7 Link (SS7-LINK) or Signaling System 7 Message Manager Application (SS7MMA) link to the ACTIVE state on the Application Processor (AP). 2. FORMAT
RST:SS7 a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = SS7-LINK or SS7MMA number (1-512).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a RST-SS7 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the RST:SS7 command will be delayed.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 RST:SS7-1
401-610-055 RST SS7
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CFR:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:ALARM-EMS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-ALARM (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:SS7x-STAT (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:SS7APNET RMV:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-DS1 (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages CFR-SS7 OP-ALARM OP-AP-ALARM OP-AP-STATUS OP-SS7x-STAT OP-SS7APNET RMV-AP RMV-AP-DS1 RMV-SS7 RST-AP RST-AP-DS1 RST-SS7
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE RST:SS7-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SELECT AP
ID ............. SELECT:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Selects the Application Processor (AP) platform software version for a software update or generic retrot procedure. Format 1: The AP will initialize to the selected version of AP platform software on either of the following events:

An initialization of the AP in response to INIT:AP-FULL (during a software update). An initialization of the AP in response to a "42 r, 50, 54" sequence at the ECP Emergency Action Interface (during a generic retrot).
NOTE: This command can only be run from the Technician Interface Command Line Interface (TICLI). Format 2: This is a 1xEV-DO message. The 1xEV-DO command selects the AP Application Software Version to activate. The 1xEV-DO command does not select platform software; a single platform version may be present. Before activating the software, all the APs in the same frame must select the same application version. The compatible platform version also needs to be installed and activated beforehand. NOTE: This command can only be run from the Element Management System (EMS). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
SELECT:AP a, SOFTWARE b, VERSION "c" SELECT:AP a, APPLICATION SOFTWARE, VERSION d
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = AP number (1-278). = Software type. "platform" is the only supported software type. = Software version. A string of characters within double quotes. = AP Application Software version identier. A string of 12 characters. 1st character Software type: F Functional software (Cell and Radio Cluster Server [RCS]). 2nd-3rd character Release level of the load. 4th character Base/Package release number: 0 Base release. 1 Package release.
401-610-055 SELECT AP
5th character Incremented for maintenance release. 6th character Technology type: E 1xEV-DO 7th character Cell type: D Flexent Modular & CDBS Cells and APs. 8th character Type of load: F FOA loads. G GA loads. P Private loads. Other names are used for internal alpha, beta, etc loads. 9th character Compatibility indicator. Always D. 10th character Decimal point. 11th-12th character Load sequence number. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a SELECT:AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SELECT:AP command will be delayed.
RL
401-610-055 SELECT AP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COMMIT:AP INIT:AP OP:AP-VERSION Output Messages COMMIT-AP INIT-AP OP-AP-VERSION SELECT-AP
401-610-055 SELECT AP
401-610-055 STOP MSCDBMS
ID ............. STOP:MSCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stops in-progress and queued comprehensive database audits. Stops all in progress and queued comprehensive audits (if any) which may have been started manually (AUD:MSCDBMS) or automatically. Audits are run automatically once per day at 3:00 AM or at a time chosen by the technician (ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD). 2. FORMAT
STOP:MSCDBMS,AUD
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:MSCDBMS-1
401-610-055 STOP MSCDBMS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:MSCDBMS-AUD (Flexent EMS/AP) AUD:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) INH:MSCDBMS-AUD (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages ALW-MSCDBMS-AUD AUD-MSCDBMS INH-MSCDBMS-AUD OP-AP-STATUS STOP-MSCDBMS-AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:MSCDBMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 STOP SS7
ID ............. STOP:SS7 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stop in-progress Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) on an Signaling System 7 (SS7) link. Stops an in progress BERT running on an SS7 link. The OP:AP-STATUS command may be run to verify if there is a BERT in progress for that particular link. 2. FORMAT
STOP:SS7 a, DGN
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = SS7 number (1-512).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a STOP-SS7 output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the STOP-SS7 command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 STOP:SS7-1
401-610-055 STOP SS7
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:SS7 (Flexent EMS/AP) OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages DGN-SS7 OP-AP-STATUS STOP-SS7
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE STOP:SS7-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHBACK FROMAP
ID ............. SWITCHBACK:FROMAP RELEASE ....... 13.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Switchback all Radio Cluster Servers (RCSs) that are ACTIVE on the "from" Application Processor (AP) which have the "to" AP assigned as their primary AP. This command will switchover all ACTIVE RCSs on the "from" AP back to the "to" AP as equipped on the Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) rcslink form. For an RCS to be switched back, the "to" AP must be congured as primary AP for the RCS. If a graceful switchover is not possible for a given RCS (for example: the RCS on the mate AP is not STBY) that RCS will not be switched back. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHBACK:FROMAP a, TOAP b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = The AP number of where to switchback the RCSs "from". = The AP number of where to switchback the RCSs "to".
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHBACK-FROMAP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHBACK:FROMAP command will be delayed.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHBACK:FROMAP-1
401-610-055 SWITCHBACK FROMAP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SWITCHOVER:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages SWITCHOVER-AP SWITCHBACK-FROMAP SWITCHOVER-RCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHBACK:FROMAP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:AMA
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:AMA RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command switches the Application Processor (AP) Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) application to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command the state of the AMA application will be switched from ACTIVE to STBY on this AP, and on the mate AP from STBY to ACTIVE. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:AMA[;UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE UCL = Unconditional switchover request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AMA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER-AMA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:AMA-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:AMA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS RMV:AP-AMA RST:AP-AMA Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-AMA RST-AP-AMA SWITCHOVER-AMA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:AMA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:AMATPS
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:AMATPS RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command switches the Application Processor (AP) Automatic Message Accounting Teleprocessing System (AMATPS) application to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command the state of the AMATPS application will be switched from ACTIVE to STBY on this AP, and on the mate AP from STBY to ACTIVE. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:AMATPS[;UCL]
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AMATPS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVERAMATPS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:AMATPS-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:AMATPS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS RMV:AP-AMATPS RST:AP-AMATPS Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-AMATPS RST-AP-AMATPS SWITCHOVER-AMATPS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:AMATPS-2 Issue 28
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:AP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If Voice Channel Administration (VCA) is switched over unconditionally as a result of this command, this may result in the loss of OOS MANUAL information on trunks. Some maintenance operations in progress may be terminated.
1. PURPOSE NOTE: If the Application Processor (AP), is a 1xEV-DO AP, then the command can only be entered from the Element Management System (EMS). Switchover all applications in the ACTIVE state or primary role on the specied Application Processor (AP) to their mate APs. Switchover all ACTIVE applications on the specied AP to their STDBY mates on other APs. If the MSCDBMS update application is executing on the specied AP with an update role of primary, the primary update role will be switched over to the mate AP. During a conditional AP switchover, switchovers will be attempted only on RCSs who are STBY on their mate AP. During an unconditional AP switchover, RCS graceful switchovers will rst be attempted. If an RCS fails to be switched over gracefully, it will be forced to switchover to its mate RCS, dropping all calls as well as denying new call attempts. Format 1 Format 2 Switchover for non 1xEV-DO AP. Switchover for 1xEV-DO AP. For a 1xEV-DO AP, there is an option to switchover one server process or all the server processes. To switch over all server process, type the AP number only without the server process name.
2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
SWITCHOVER:AP a [;UCL] SWITCHOVER:AP a [,b]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = AP number. = Unconditional.
= Server name. Only one server process can be specied: FDBMS HOC HWSERVER LOGSERVER OHM TPAGENT
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NA NG PF = In Progress. = No Acknowledgement. = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-AP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER-AP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHBACK:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHBACK:FROMAP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP)
RL
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005 SWITCHOVER:RCS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:ROP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:SP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS SWITCHBACK-FROMAP SWITCHOVER-AP SWITCHOVER-MSCDBMS SWITCHOVER-RCS SWITCHOVER-ROP SWITCHOVER-SP SWITCHOVER-VCA
Other References: 401-710-101 Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 401-710-201 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-710-202 Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command switches the Application Processor (AP) Home Visitor Location Register Integrity Manager (HVLR-IM) application to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command the state of the HVLR-IM application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM[;UCL]
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-HVLRIM output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVERHVLRIM command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-HVLRIM (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-HVLRIM RST-AP-HVLRIM SWITCHOVER-HVLRIM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:HVLRIM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER MSCDBMS
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Switches Application Processor (AP) database update application to another AP. This command switches the AP database update application to another AP. On successful completion of this command, the values of the database update role on the two APs will be switched. (A role of primary becomes secondary and vice versa.) This command does not affect the maintenance state of the Mobile Switching Center Database Management System (MSCDBMS) managed object. When executed from the AP, this command must be run on the AP on which the update role is primary. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER MSCDBMS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-MSCDBMS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-MSCDBMS RST-AP-MSCDBMS SWITCHOVER-MSCDBMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:MSCDBMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Performs switchover of the ACTIVE Application Processor (AP) Operations, Administration and Maintenance Proxy (OAMPROXY) application to its STBY instance on the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE This command switches the AP OAMPROXY application to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command, the state of the OAMPROXY application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-OAMPROXY output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER-OAMPROXY command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-OAMPROXY (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-OAMPROXY (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-OAMPROXY RST-AP-OAMPROXY SWITCHOVER-OAMPROXY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:OAMPROXY-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER RCS
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:RCS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Switchover an ACTIVE Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to its STBY instance on the mate Application Processor (AP). This command attempts either a conditional or unconditional switchover of an ACTIVE RCS to its STBY instance on the mate AP. During a conditional RCS switchover, only a graceful switchover is attempted. During an unconditional RCS switchover, a graceful switchover is rst attempted. If the RCS fails the graceful switchover, it is forced to switchover to its mate RCS dropping all calls as well as denying new call attempts. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:RCS a [;UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = RCS number. = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-RCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER:RCS command will be delayed.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:RCS-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER RCS
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SWITCHBACK:FROMAP (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER:AP (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages SWITCHBACK-FROMAP SWITCHOVER-AP SWITCHOVER-RCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:RCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:SP
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:SP RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Performs switchover of the ACTIVE Application Processor (AP) Status Display Process (SP) application to its STBY instance on the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:SP
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE This command switches the AP SP application to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command the state of the SP application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-SP output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER-SP command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:SP-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:SP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-SP (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-SP RST-AP-SP SWITCHOVER-SP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:SP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER TCS
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:TCS RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Switches over an ACTIVE Application Processor (AP) Trafc Control Server (TCS) application to its STBY instance on the mate Application Processor (AP). On successful completion of this command the state of the TCS application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. All stable calls will be preserved. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:TCS a [;UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a UCL = Trafc Control Server (TCS) number. = Unconditional request.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-TCS output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER-TCS command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:TCS-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER TCS
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) SWITCHOVER-TCS (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-TCS RST-AP-TCS SWITCHOVER-TCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:TCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Performs switchover of the ACTIVE Application Processor (AP) Trafc Processing Unit Graphical User Interface (TPUGUI) application to its STBY instance on the mate AP. This command switches the AP TPUGUI application to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command the state of the TPUGUI application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI[; UCL]
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE UCL = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-TPUGUI output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVERTPUGUI command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time. Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-TPUGUI (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-TPUGUI (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-TPUGUI RST-AP-TPUGUI SWITCHOVER-TPUGUI
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:TPUGUI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:VCA
ID ............. SWITCHOVER:VCA RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** An unconditional switchover may result in the loss of OOS MANUAL removed state information on trunks. Recovery operations in progress at the time of the UCL switchover may be delayed (for example, CDN stable clear or cell stable clear).
1. PURPOSE Performs switchover of an ACTIVE Application Processor (AP) Voice Channel Administration (VCA) application to its STBY instance on the mate AP. This command switches the AP VCA application to the mate AP. On successful completion of this command the state of the VCA application will be switched from ACTIVE on this AP, STBY on the mate AP to STBY on this AP and ACTIVE on the mate AP. All stable calls will be preserved. 2. FORMAT
SWITCHOVER:VCA[;UCL]
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Indicates that invalid input parameters were specied or an unrecoverable software error occurred. = Printout Follows. Followed by a SWITCHOVER-VCA output message. If the PF is followed by the word QUEUED, the command was queued to allow a running command to complete. Therefore, the SWITCHOVER-VCA command will be delayed. = Retry Later. One of the following reasons may be specied: Command was rejected because it conflicts with an active command. The requested command would cause a problem if it were to run because of an already running or queued command. Managed object TYPE [NUMBER] is busy. The managed object indicated by TYPE [and NUMBER] already has a command running or queued, and it may only have one active command associated with it at a time.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 SWITCHOVER:VCA-1
401-610-055 SWITCHOVER:VCA
Maximum number of commands already running. The system allows only a certain number of commands to run simultaneously; running the requested command would exceed the limit. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AP-STATUS (Flexent EMS/AP) RMV:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) RST:AP-VCA (Flexent EMS/AP) Output Messages OP-AP-STATUS RMV-AP-VCA RST-AP-VCA SWITCHOVER-VCA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE SWITCHOVER:VCA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ABT AMATAPE
ID ............. ABT:AMATAPE RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Aborts the current Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) tape writing session. Aborted tape information should not be used for billing purposes. The next primary session picks up the aborted tapes data. NOTE: Either MT0 or MT1 has to be specied. NOTE: This command is supported for Flexent Mobility Manager - AMA (FMM-AMA) only. For Executive Cellular Processor - AMA (ECP-AMA), please refer to the input message ABT:AMATAPE-ECP. 2. FORMAT
ABT:AMATAPE;a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Session type: MT0 Used if AMA data goes to the Magnetic Tape 0 (MT0). MT1 Used if AMA data goes to the Magnetic Tape 1 (MT1). 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG OK RL 5 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ABT:AMATAPE-ECP COPY:AMATAPE STOP:AMATAPE Output Messages REPT-AMATAPE-ER = No Good. Tape writing is not in progress. = Good. Request has been accepted. = Retry Later. Unable to send message to Tape Process.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABT:AMATAPE-1
401-610-055 ABT AMATAPE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABT:AMATAPE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ABT AMATAPE ECP
ID ............. ABT:AMATAPE-ECP RELEASE ....... 6.1 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Aborts the current Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) tape writing session. Aborted tape information should not be used for billing purposes. The next primary session picks up the aborted tapes data. NOTE: Either ST1 or ST2 has to be specied. NOTE: This command is supported for Executive Cellular Processor - AMA (ECP-AMA) only. For Flexent Mobility Manager - AMA (FMM-AMA), please refer to the input message ABT:AMATAPE. 2. FORMAT
ABT:AMATAPE;a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Data stream: ST1 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 1 (ST1) data stream. ST2 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 2 (ST2) data stream. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Tape writing is not in progress. = Printout Follows. Followed by a REPT:AMATAPE-ER output message.
RL CODE 2 = Retry Later. Internal audit triggered. RL CODE 5 = Retry Later. No abort message can be sent to the AMA tape writer at this time. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ABT:AMATAPE COPY:AMATAPE-ECP STOP:AMATAPE-ECP Output Messages REPT-AMATAPE-ER-ECP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABT:AMATAPE-ECP-1
401-610-055 ABT AMATAPE ECP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABT:AMATAPE-ECP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ABT CDN AUD
ID ............. ABT:CDN-AUD RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Aborts a Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. 2. FORMAT
ABT:CDN a,AUD b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = CDN number (1-24). = Name or index number of audit to be aborted: Administrative Call Processing/Database Node (ACDN) cellular networking trunk list audit. (Index number for this audit is 20.) ANOPO Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) table and Head index array audit. (Index number for this audit is 29.) CCNID Control Network Identication (CNID) database records audit. (Index number for this audit is 36.) CNLIST Call Processing (CP) cellular networking linked list audit. (Index number for this audit is 12.) CNNET CP network entity table audit. (Index number for this audit is 13.) CNTKML CP trunk Mobile Call Register (MCR) list audit. (Index number for this audit is 15.) CPARG CP automatic roamer greeting audit. (Index number for this audit is 23.) CPGCSL CP global call status list audit. (Index number for this audit is 17.) CPIWFDATA CP Interworking Function (IWF) database audit. (Index number for this audit is 30.) CPLCSL CP local call status list audit. (Index number for this audit is 18.) CPMCST CP mobile call status table audit. (Index number for this audit is 8.) CPMPC CP Meter Pulse Call audit. (Index number for this audit is 34.) CPMSG CP mobile call register segmented audit. (Index number for this audit is 10.) CPREG CP tear-down MCR list servicing audit. (Index number for this audit is 11.) CPSCN CP special cellular networking audit. (Index number for this audit is 14.) CPTDML CP tear-down MCR list integrity audit. (Index number for this audit is 9.) ACCNTL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABT:CDN-AUD-1
401-610-055 ABT CDN AUD
Node Integrity global data audit. (Index number for this audit is 24.) IABZOT Interprocessor busy zone ofce trunks audit. (Index number for this audit is 16.) IACPMMA CP Message Mapping Application (MMA) audit. (Index number for this audit is 32.) IARMCR Interprocessor remote mobile call register audit. (Index number for this audit is 25.) LAES Lawfully authorized electronic surveillance data audit. (Index number for this audit is 33.) LCSLCHK CP Local Call Status List (LCSL) /MCR consistency check audit. (Index number for this audit is 19.) LPG Logical processor group audit. (Index number for this audit is 21.) MDTXT CP global data array audit. (Index number for this audit is 37.) OS Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. (Index number for this audit is 1.) OSCLCK OSDS clock audit. (Index number for this audit is 2.) OTAESN Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) Electronic Serial Number (ESN) audit. (Index number for this audit is 28.) OTATRN Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) Temporary Reference Number (TRN) audit. (Index number for this audit is 27.) PGMA CP page message area audit. (Index number for this audit is 6.) PGOPL CP outstanding page list audit. (Index number for this audit is 7.) PRLISTS Periodic Reset (PR) link lists audit. (Index number for this audit is 5.) RUCDNAUD Ring Database Update (RDBU) table checksum request audit. (Index number for this audit is 22.) SMP Sub-Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Paging (SMP) audit. (Index number for this audit is 31.) UZDATA User zone data audit. (Index number for this audit is 26.) WTRGDATA WINTRIG database entry verify audit. (Index number for this audit is 35.) GLB 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:CDN-NAME = Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABT:CDN-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ABT CDN AUD
Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABT:CDN-AUD-3
401-610-055 ABT CDN AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABT:CDN-AUD-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 ABT DLN AUD
ID ............. ABT:DLN-AUD RELEASE ....... 6.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Aborts a Direct Link Node (DLN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. 2. FORMAT
ABT:DLN a, AUD b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = DLN number (1-2). = Name of audit to be aborted: LPG RUXTBLS SS7HDR 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:DLN-NAME Output Messages None. = Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running. Logical Processor Group (LPG) audit. Ring Database Update (RDBU) table checksum request audit. SS7 header audit for 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABT:DLN-AUD-1
401-610-055 ABT DLN AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABT:DLN-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ABT ECP AUD
ID ............. ABT:ECP-AUD RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Aborts an Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. 2. FORMAT
ABT:ECP, AUD a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Name of audit to be aborted: ASTAPT CDNI CICELL CMCSXBUF DLDLT DLDSC DLNI IIMAUD OS OSCLCK RMLNSTAT RUAPEQP Active packet/session layer table integrity audit. Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) integrity audit. Cell Site Integrity (CLSI) audit. Message Communication Subsystem (MCS) cell site transmit buffers audit. Data link maintenance data link table audit. Data link maintenance dedicated switch connection audit. direct link node integrity audit. Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) integrity module logical number range check audit. Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. OSDS clock audit. Ring monitor link node status audit. Ring Database Update (RDBU) application processor equipment table audit. ruapgett table versus apgett database audit. ruaplink table versus aplink database audit. ruapofic table versus apofic database audit. ruappc2ls table versus appc2ls database audit. ruapsubsys table versus apsubsys database audit. RDBU base station conguration table audit. rucco table versus rucco database audit. Cell database cell type and call processing status eld audit. cicelldata() versus RDBU table audit. RDBU data link conguration tables audit. RDBU executive cellular processor audit. RDBU Extended System/Switch Identication (ESID) to pcrid lookup table audit. RDBU general audit. RDBU link node checksum audit. RDBU network entity table audit. network link maintenance process RDBU output message disposition table audit. RDBU processor conguration table audit.
RUAPGTT RUAPLINK RUAPOFID RUAPPC2LS RUAPSUBSYS RUBSCONF RUCCO RUCELL RUCIDATA RUDLT RUECP RUESID2P RUGEN RULNTBL RUNET RUNLMP RUOPT RUPCT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABT:ECP-AUD-1
401-610-055 ABT ECP AUD
RURCSLNK RUSS7LS RUTGI RUXIDATA XISS 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:ECP-NAME Output Messages None.
RDBU Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to channel table audit. RDBU Signaling System 7 (SS7) linkset table audit. RDBU trunk group index table audit. xissar, xigssr and xissr2 versus RDBU table audit. System integrity switch status audit.
= No Good. Audit inactive. = Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABT:ECP-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ABT VCA AUD
ID ............. ABT:VCA-AUD RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Aborts an Application Processor (AP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. 2. FORMAT
ABT:VCA, AUD a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Name of audit to be aborted: BHMDB DCASTATE IACELL IACST IAIZOT OS OSCLCK PPBLK TMPPS VCAS VCDB VCFINFO VCLISTS VCMPT VCMS VCPAFID VCSTATE VCTGI VCTMR VCTP 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Audit inactive or Voice Channel Administration (VCA) is active on the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) and not on the AP. Try again with the ABT:ECP-AUD input command. OK = Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running. Backhaul Manager (BHM) database audit. Dynamic Call Assignment State audit. Voice Channel Administration (VCA) cell interprocessor audit. VCA cell site trunk interprocessor audit. VCA idle zone ofce trunk interprocessor audit. Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. OSDS clock audit. Packet pipe blocking bit (Blocking From DCS [BFD] and Blocking From MSC [BFM]) status audit. VCA Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) packet pipe structure audit. Inter-vendor trunk state audit. VCA database audit. VCA Interfering neighbor list in fin_info table audit. VCA list audit. VCA packet pipe member pointer table audit. VCA member structure audit. VCA paf2indx/indx2paf and Digital Control Channel (DCCH) channels in chan_usage table audit. VCA state validation audit. VCA trunk group index table audit. VCA timer structures audit. VCA terminal process table audit.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABT:VCA-AUD-1
401-610-055 ABT VCA AUD
RL
= Retry Later. Voice Channel Administration on the Application Processor (VCAap) will come up shortly or when it is restored.
?E 5. REFERENCES
= Error.
IM/OM References: Input Messages ABT:ECP-AUD AUD:VCA-NAME Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABT:VCA-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ACTV OMDB
ID ............. ACTV:OMDB RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Refreshes the active (incore) Output Message Database (OMDB) from the OMDB disk le. 2. FORMAT
ACTV:OMDB!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:OMDB UPD:OMDB Output Messages ACTV-OMDB = In Progress. Followed by the ACTV-OMDB output message.
Other References: 254-341-230 Craft Interface Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ACTV:OMDB-1
401-610-055 ACTV OMDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ACTV:OMDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ADD PAUTH
ID ............. ADD:PAUTH RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Adds a new user with its related password to the Personal Authority (PAUTH) database. It embeds the password into the authority record and links the password to its user identity. 2. FORMAT
ADD:PAUTH:IDENT "a",PSSWDPFX "b",PSSWDSFX "c"!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Identity of the person or group that uses the password prex and sufx, in one to eight letters and/or digits. = Password Prex (PSSWDPFX) in three letters and/or digits. = Password Sufx (PSSWDSFX) in six to 13 characters.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. PASSWORD PREFIX ILLEGAL LENGTH The given password prex is not equal to three characters in length. PASSWORD PREFIX NOT UNIQUE The given password prex already exists in the password authority administration. PASSWORD SUFFIX ILLEGAL LENGTH The given password sufx is less than six characters or greater than 13 characters in length. PERSON IDENTITY NOT UNIQUE The given person identity already exists in the personal authority administration. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Password or personal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Password and identity added to database. = Retry Later. AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ADD:PAUTH-1
401-610-055 ADD PAUTH
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CHG:PAUTH DEL:PAUTH RNM:PSSWD VFY:PAUTH Output Messages VFY-PAUTH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ADD:PAUTH-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ADD PCGRP
ID ............. ADD:PCGRP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Associates the Command Groups (COMGRs) with a person Identity (IDENT), thus allowing a user to access specic groups of commands. The IDENT must already exist in the Personal Authority (PAUTH) database. Format 2: Associates a Prole (PROFL) with an IDENT, thus allowing a user access to all the commands associated with a set of command groups. The IDENT must already exist in the PAUTH database. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ADD:PCGRP:IDENT "a", COMGR b! ADD:PCGRP:IDENT "a", PROFL "c"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Identity of the person or group in one to eight letters and/or digits. = Command group. = A prole name which has been previously created, but not assigned to this user.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. COMMAND GROUP ALREADY ASSIGNED TO THIS PERSON The given command group has already been assigned to this person identity. NON-EXISTENT PERSON IDENTITY The given person identity does not exist in the personal authority administration. NON-EXISTENT PROFILE IDENTITY The given prole does not exist in the personal authority administration. PASSWORD ENHANCEMENT NOT ACTIVATED The PROFL option with this command is valid only for applications running with the password enhancement feature. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Person authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Command group added to database. = Retry Later. AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ADD:PCGRP-1
401-610-055 ADD PCGRP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:PAUTH CHG:PAUTH DEL:PAUTH DEL:PCGRP RNM:PSSWD VFY:PAUTH VFY:PCGRP Output Messages VFY-PAUTH VFY-PCGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ADD:PCGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ADD PROFL
ID ............. ADD:PROFL RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Adds a new prole to the list of user proles. A prole is a set of command groups. A maximum of 64 proles are allowed. These proles can later be assigned to individual users. 2. FORMAT
ADD:PROFL,IDENT "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Identifying name of the prole to be added to the database. A maximum of eight characters may be used.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PROFILES EXCEEDED PASSWORD ENHANCEMENT NOT ACTIVATED This command is valid only for applications running with the password enhancement feature enabled. PROFILE IDENTITY NOT UNIQUE UNABLE TO ACCESS PROFILE ADMINISTRATION OK RL = Good. Prole successfully added to the database. = Retry Later. PROFILE ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:PCGRP CHG:PROFL DEL:PCGRP DEL:PROFL VFY:PCGRP VFY:PROFL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ADD:PROFL-1
401-610-055 ADD PROFL
Output Messages VFY-PCGRP VFY-PROFL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ADD:PROFL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ADD TAUTH
ID ............. ADD:TAUTH RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Adds a terminal to the Terminal Authority (TAUTH) database. 2. FORMAT
ADD:TAUTH:TERM "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Terminal identity in four characters, starting with tty.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. INVALID TERMINAL IDENTITY The given terminal identity is either not four characters in length or does not start with "tty". TERMINAL IDENTITY ALREADY EXISTS The given terminal identity already exists in the terminal authority administration. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Password or personal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Terminal identity added to database. = Retry Later. AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DEL:TAUTH VFY:TAUTH Output Messages VFY-TAUTH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ADD:TAUTH-1
401-610-055 ADD TAUTH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ADD:TAUTH-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ADD TCGRP
ID ............. ADD:TCGRP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Associates a Command Group (COMGR) with a terminal Identity (IDENT), thus allowing a user to access only specic groups of commands from that terminal. The IDENT must already exist for the Terminal Command Group (TCGRP) in the Terminal Authority (TAUTH) database. 2. FORMAT
ADD:TCGRP:IDENT "a", COMGR b!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Terminal identity in four characters, starting with tty. = Command group.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. COMMAND GROUP ALREADY ASSIGNED TO THIS TERMINAL The given command group has already been assigned to this terminal identity. INVALID TERMINAL IDENTITY The given terminal identity is either not four characters in length or does not start with "tty". NON-EXISTING TERMINAL IDENTITY The given terminal identity does not exist in the terminal authority administration. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Terminal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Command group added to database. = Retry Later. AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:TAUTH DEL:TAUTH DEL:TCGRP VFY:TAUTH VFY:TCGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ADD:TCGRP-1
401-610-055 ADD TCGRP
Output Messages VFY-TAUTH VFY-TCGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ADD:TCGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ABREVC
ID ............. ALW:ABREVC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that assert brevity control be allowed. NOTE: The following assumes that Format Type destinations associated with REPT-DCF-RECOVERY follow the Lucent Technologies recommended values (either Option 1 or Option 2). Refer to 401-710-202, Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide for details. When assert brevity control is allowed, if more than two of the same assert occur in the same Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) processor during a 15-minute interval, only the rst two asserts (REPT-DCF-RECOVERY) are sent to all the designated destinations. The remaining asserts in the 15-minute interval are logged: ECP-ROP asserts are logged in the /omp-data/logs/rm directory on the Operations Maintenance Platform (OMP) and not sent to the rop0 destination. MM-ROP asserts are logged in the /omp-data/logs/OMPROP1 directory (the OMPLOG destination) on the OMP and are not sent to the RS232 destination. At the end of the 15-minute interval, a single summary message (REPT-DCF-SUMMARY) reports the assert information for the processor for the interval. NOTE: control. The REPT-DCF-SUMMARY message is not subject to assert brevity
When assert brevity control is inhibited, all ECPC assert messages are sent to all designated ROP destinations. Additionally, if more than two of the same assert occur in the same ECPC processor during a 15-minute interval, a single summary message (REPT-DCF-SUMMARY) reports the assert information for the processor for the interval. 2. FORMAT
ALW:ABREVC!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP = In Progress. The request was received; the ALW-ABREVC output message will follow.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ABREVC-1
401-610-055 ALW ABREVC
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:ABREVC OP:ABREVC Output Messages ALW-ABREVC INH-ABREVC OP-ABREVC REPT-DCF-RECOVERY REPT-DCF-SUMMARY
Other References: 401-610-160 ECP Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide 401-710-202 Mobility Manager (MM) Read Only Printer (ROP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) Guide
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ABREVC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW AMA AUTOST ECP
ID ............. ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP RELEASE ....... 6.1 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows auto-start of Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) tape writing. Allows an AMA tape writing session to be started once a day at a designated time. Use the SET:AMA-CONTRL-ECP input message to set the starting and stopping times for the session. NOTE: Either ST1 or ST2 has to be specied. NOTE: This command is supported for Executive Cellular Processor - AMA (ECP-AMA) only. For Flexent Mobility Manager - AMA (FMM-AMA), please refer to the Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) automated message accounting conguration and control information (amacc) form. 2. FORMAT
ALW:AMA;AUTOST[:DAYS {(a[,a])a-a}];b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Days of the week to be allowed (unit, list, or range). One of: sun mon tue wed thu fri sat Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
If DAYS is specied, a must be listed. If DAYS is not specied, all days are allowed. b = Data stream: ST1 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 1 (ST1) data stream. ST2 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 2 (ST2) data stream. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP = In Progress. Request accepted. The AMA monitor process has been called to cancel manual blocking of automatic AMA tape writing sessions.
RL CODE 0 = Retry Later. Tape session is currently in progress. Reissue command after session completes.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP-1
401-610-055 ALW AMA AUTOST ECP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:AMA-AUTOST-ECP OP:AMA-CONTROL-ECP SET:AMA-CONTROL-ECP Output Messages REPT-AMA-MON-CONT-F-A-ECP REPT-AMA-MON-CONT-F-B-ECP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW AMADUMP
ID ............. ALW:AMADUMP RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests activation of the Charge Verify feature for the specied roaming mobile unit. Use of this input command is only allowed when the Charge Verify feature is activated in the Feature Activation File (FAF). Activation of the Charge Verify feature for a mobile allows the REPT-CP-IMMEDIATE output report to be generated each time the mobile completes a call. The INH:AMADUMP command may be used to deactivate Charge Verify for a given mobile. The mobile units Directory Number (DN), Mobile Identication Number (MIN), or International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI) must be entered as a string of digits within double quotes. For example, for a DN of 6309790001234, the command would be entered as: ALW:AMADUMP, DN "6309790001234"! 2. FORMAT
ALW:AMADUMP,{ DN "a" MIN "b" IMSI "c" }!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Variable-length DN 1-14 digits. = 10-digit MIN. = 8- to 15-digit IMSI.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK NG = Good. The request has completed. The Charge Verify feature is activated for the specied mobile. = No Good. Followed by one of the following error messages: Charge Verify FAF is off VLR for this MSID does not exist. Maximum number of allowed mobiles has been reached
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:AMADUMP-1
401-610-055 ALW AMADUMP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:AMADUMP Output Messages None.
Other References: 401-612-436 Charge Verify
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:AMADUMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW AMA SESSION ECP
ID ............. ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP RELEASE ....... 6.1 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Stops manual blocking of Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) operations. NOTE: Either ST1 or ST2 has to be specied. NOTE: This command is supported for Executive Cellular Processor - AMA (ECP-AMA) only. For Flexent Mobility Manager - AMA (FMM-AMA), please refer to the Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) automated message accounting conguration and control information (amacc) form. 2. FORMAT
ALW:AMA;SESSION;a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Data stream: ST1 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 1 (ST1) data stream. ST2 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 2 (ST2) data stream. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. Request accepted. The AMA monitor process has been called to cancel manual blocking of AMA tape sessions.
RL CODE 0 = Retry Later. AMA session is currently in progress. Reissue command after session completes. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:AMA-SESSION-ECP OP:AMA-CONTROL-ECP Output Messages REPT-AMA-MON-CONT-F-A-ECP REPT-AMA-MON-CONT-F-B-ECP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP-1
401-610-055 ALW AMA SESSION ECP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ARGR
ID ............. ALW:ARGR RELEASE ....... 6.1 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Allowing printing of Autonomous Registration Glare Reporting could ood the Read Only Printer (ROP).
1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT:PAGE RSP TO FLOOD PAGE - ARGR output message as part of the Autonomous Registration Glare Reporting (ARGR) feature. Printing of this message is inhibited by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:ARGR!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and the REPT:PAGE-RSP output messages are allowed to print autonomously.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:ARGR Output Messages REPT-PAGE-RSP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ARGR-1
401-610-055 ALW ARGR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ARGR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ARREGTRACE
ID ............. ALW:ARREGTRACE RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Allowing REPTREGTRACE output message printing could ood the Read Only Printer (ROP).
1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT-REGTRACE output message as part of the Autonomous Registration (AR) Inter Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Autonomous Registration Glare Reporting (ARREGTRACE) feature. Printing of this message is inhibited by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:ARREGTRACE!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and the REPT-REGTRACE output messages are allowed to print autonomously.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:ARREGTRACE Output Messages REPT-REGTRACE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ARREGTRACE-1
401-610-055 ALW ARREGTRACE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ARREGTRACE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ARUNSET
ID ............. ALW:ARUNSET RELEASE ....... 6.1 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Allowing REPTARUNSET output message printing could ood the Read Only Printer (ROP).
1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT-AR-UNSET output message. This message indicates the problem of multiple locations reporting Autonomous Registration (AR) for a single mobile. This problem often reects a need to recongure cell site boundaries. Printing of this message is inhibited by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:ARUNSET!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and the REPT:AR-UNSET output messages are allowed to print autonomously.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:ARUNSET Output Messages REPT-AR-UNSET
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ARUNSET-1
401-610-055 ALW ARUNSET
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ARUNSET-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW AUD
ID ............. ALW:AUD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the routine execution of one or more audits controlled by the System Integrity Monitor (SIM) that were previously inhibited. Entering the ALW:AUD input message clears one or more audit inhibits previously set to the manually inhibited or automatically inhibited state. Separate inhibit states are provided for: All audits. When the inhibit state for ALL audits is set, routine audit scheduling is completely turned off. Entering the ALW:AUD input message with the ALL option reinitializes the audit control subsystem and turns on routine audit scheduling, but it has no effect on the inhibit states of individual audits. Each audit, identied by audit name and member number. When an audit is inhibited either manually or automatically, it is not scheduled to run routinely or in response to a software request. Each instance of an audit. One instance of an audit may be inhibited while other instances are allowed to run routinely. Audit inhibit states may be displayed by entering the OP:AUD input message. 2. FORMAT
ALW:AUD:{ALLa[ b]a c,INS "d"}!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE ALL = Species all audits controlled by SIM. Clears a master inhibit state which is independent of the inhibit states for individual audits. Causes SIM to attempt to initialize the audit control system if it has not been successfully initialized. If the control record in the equipment conguration database for SIM has been modied, ALL causes SIM to reinitialize its internal control parameters according to the new content of the control record. a = Audit name. Computer audit names are listed in the input Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-B.
If a is specied without b, all members of the audit will be allowed. b = Member number (see the input Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-B). May be specied as a single number or a list of numbers. See the User Guidelines in this manual for instructions on entering lists of numbers.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW AUD
c d
= Single member number (see the input Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-B). = Instance name.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the appendix, System Responses for Audit System Input Messages, APP:AUD. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:AUD OP:AUD Output Messages ALW-AUD OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD APP:MEM-NUM-B
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CDN AUD
ID ............. ALW:CDN-AUD RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the routine execution of one or all Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audits. Format 1: Allows all CDN audits. Format 2: Allows one CDN audit. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:CDN a, AUD! ALW:CDN a, AUD b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = CDN number (1-24). = Name or index number of audit to be allowed: Administrative Call Processing/Database Node (ACDN) cellular networking trunk list audit. (Index number for this audit is 20.) ANOPO Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) table and Head index array audit. (Index number for this audit is 29.) CCNID Control Network Identication (CNID) database records audit. (Index number for this audit is 36.) CNLIST Call Processing (CP) cellular networking linked list audit. (Index number for this audit is 12.) CNNET CP network entity table audit. (Index number for this audit is 13.) CNTKML CP trunk Mobile Call Register (MCR) list audit. (Index number for this audit is 15.) CPARG CP automatic roamer greeting audit. (Index number for this audit is 23.) CPGCSL CP global call status list audit. (Index number for this audit is 17.) CPIWFDATA CP Interworking Function (IWF) database audit. (Index number for this audit is 30.) CPLCSL CP local call status list audit. (Index number for this audit is 18.) CPMCST CP mobile call status table audit. (Index number for this audit is 8.) CPMPC CP Meter Pulse Call audit. (Index number for this audit is 34.) CPMSG CP mobile call register segmented audit. (Index number for this audit is 10.) CPREG CP tear-down MCR list servicing audit. (Index number for this audit is 11.) ACCNTL SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CDN-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW CDN AUD
CP special cellular networking audit. (Index number for this audit is 14.) CPTDML CP tear-down MCR list integrity audit. (Index number for this audit is 9.) GLB Node Integrity global data audit. (Index number for this audit is 24.) IABZOT Interprocessor busy zone ofce trunks audit. (Index number for this audit is 16.) IACPMMA CP Message Mapping Application (MMA) audit. (Index number for this audit is 32.) IARMCR Interprocessor remote mobile call register audit. (Index number for this audit is 25.) LAES Lawfully authorized electronic surveillance data audit. (Index number for this audit is 33.) LCSLCHK CP Local Call Status List (LCSL) /MCR consistency check audit. (Index number for this audit is 19.) LPG Logical processor group audit. (Index number for this audit is 21.) MDTXT CP global data array audit. (Index number for this audit is 37.) OS Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. (Index number for this audit is 1.) OSCLCK OSDS clock audit. (Index number for this audit is 2.) OTAESN Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) Electronic Serial Number (ESN) audit. (Index number for this audit is 28.) OTATRN Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) Temporary Reference Number (TRN) audit. (Index number for this audit is 27.) PGMA CP page message area audit. (Index number for this audit is 6.) PGOPL CP outstanding page list audit. (Index number for this audit is 7.) PRLISTS Periodic Reset (PR) link lists audit. (Index number for this audit is 5.) RUCDNAUD Ring Database Update (RDBU) table checksum request audit. (Index number for this audit is 22.) SMP Sub-Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Paging (SMP) audit. (Index number for this audit is 31.) UZDATA User zone data audit. (Index number for this audit is 26.) WTRGDATA WINTRIG database entry verify audit. (Index number for this audit is 35.) CPSCN 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. Audit prints have been allowed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CDN-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CDN AUD
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:CDN-NAME INH:CDN-AUD Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CDN-AUD-3
401-610-055 ALW CDN AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CDN-AUD-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CDN CP
ID ............. ALW:CDN-CP RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Restores call processing to the specied Call Processing/Database Node (CDN). 2. FORMAT
ALW:CDN a,CP!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CDN number (1-24).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK NG = Good. Request accepted and the CDN will be restored. = No Good. Request not accepted. The CDN is not in the proper state for this request.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CDN-CP SW:ACDN RMV:LN-UCL Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CDN-CP-1
401-610-055 ALW CDN CP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CDN-CP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CDN PRINT AUD
ID ............. ALW:CDN-PRINT-AUD RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the printing of Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit results. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CDN a, PRINT AUD!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CDN number (1-24).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CDN-PRINT Output Messages None. = Good. Audit prints have been allowed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CDN-PRINT-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW CDN PRINT AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CDN-PRINT-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CELL
ID ............. ALW:CELL RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Most messages of this type merely return the cell site to its normal state as far as a particular function is concerned, and are not serviceaffecting. Two exceptions are: a) The CP option generates a cell site transient clear phase. If call processing was previously inhibited on this cell site, no calls should have been transient anyway. b) The FWDSCHCL option causes a cell to reject requests for service from any except class 0 mobiles. This is considered a manual overload control.
1. PURPOSE Allows a specic software or hardware action at specied cell site(s). Software and hardware actions covered by this message ordinarily are allowed. Exceptions are as noted. Depending on the function inhibited, a stable clear, transient clear, or even a single process purge may erase an inhibit condition. Format 1: Allows a software function. Format 2: Allows automatic running of a particular audit. The audit will be run in its regular place in the routine audit cycle. To request the immediate scheduling of an audit, use input message AUD:CELL. Format 3: Allows printing of various categories of messages. Format 4: Allows a hardware reset or interrupt. This format is invalid Series II cells. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4]
ALW:CELL a, b [ CLASS c]! ALW:CELL a, AUD d [ CLASS c]! ALW:CELL a, PRINT e [ CLASS c]! ALW:CELL a, CSC f; INTR g [ CLASS c]!
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CELL-1
401-610-055 ALW CELL

A single cell site. A range (maximum number of cells in a range is 32). A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
If b is FWDSCHCL, a must be a single cell site number. b = Function to be allowed: BOOT CP Automatic cell boots. INIT:CELL. To request a boot manually, use
Call processing. Originations, terminations, paging, location, and handoff are allowed. The status of the cell becomes ACTIVE.
FT ANT Automatic antenna Functional Tests (FTs) (CDMA). FT DCCH Digital control channel FTs (TDMA). FT LC Automatic location radio FTs. An FT is also run immediately following a manually-requested conditional restoral. See input message RST:CELL. Overhead Channel FTs (CDMA). Modular Cell 4.0. Not valid for Flexent
FT OC FT PL FT SU FT TP
Pilot Level FTs (CDMA). Not valid for Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. Automatic setup radio FTs. Trafc Path FTs (CDMA). Not valid for Flexent Modular Cell 4.0.
FWDSCHCL Forward setup channel controls. Only subscribers in mobile class 0 will be allowed originating access to the specied cell site(s). A mobile unit can be in any one of 16 classes. Forward setup controls are normally inhibited; see input message INH:CELL. INVENTORY Automatic execution of routine inventory. Cell site inventory automatically begins 5 seconds after the time specied by "Time of Day for Routine Diagnostics" in translations. To execute a routine inventory sequence manually, use input message OP:CELL-INVENT. The INVENTORY option is for Series II TDMA and all CDMA cells, however on TDMA, the cell site inventory is not scheduled to begin automatically with the "Time of Day Routine" as with CDMA. Rather, with TDMA, the routine inventory begins only when TRC, AMP, or radio is reset. NOTE: The INVENTORY option is not valid for TDMA Flexent cells.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CELL
OFD ACCESS Allows the Operational Fault Detection ACCESS (OFDACCESS) software functionality at the cell site. The OFDACCESS option is for CDMA cell Release 20.0 and later. OFD CAP Allow the Operational Fault Detection Capacity (OFD-CAP) software functionality at the cell site. This OFD CAP option is only for CDMA cells. OFD MS Allow the Operational Fault Detection Multi-Sector (OFD-MS) software functionality at the cell site. The OFD MS option is only for CDMA cells. OFD PG Allow the Operational Fault Detection Paging (OFD-PG) software functionality at the cell site. The OFD PG option is only for CDMA cells. PHMON Phase monitoring. Repeated phasing will prompt the Mobile Telephone Switching Ofce (MTSO) to remove the cell site from service.
RTDIAG Automatic execution of routine diagnostics. Cell site routine diagnostics automatically begin at 5 seconds after the time specied by "Time of Day for Routine Diagnostics" in translations. To execute a routine diagnostic sequence manually, use input message EXC:CELL. SCSM Selectable Cell Site Messaging (SCSM). All output reports associated with the specied cell will be reported to the input device that issued this command. For a list of cells being monitored by SCSM, see the OP:SCSM input command.
c d e
= Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported. = Audit to be allowed. See Table 1 for details. = Category of prints to be allowed. AUD Individual audit error messages, plus informational post mortem messages.
DIVERR Hardware Error Handler (HEH) error reports for Series II and TDMA Flexent concerning diversity branch imbalance (see the DIVIMB error keyword in output message REPT-CELL-HEH1). HEHMSG Hardware error handler reports. f g = Cell Site Controller (CSC) (0-1) on which a specied interrupt is to be allowed. = Type of reset or interrupt to be allowed: ALL CPIMS All interrupts. Communications message. Processor Interface (CPI) ow control
401-610-055 ALW CELL
CPIST
CPI board status.
CPUADRV User address violation. CPUMISC High Capacity Core Processing Unit (HCPU) misc interrupt. CPUMTX Interrupt from mate (exception on mate side). MPARF MWPER Memory board parity failure. Write protect violation.
NCI0CF Network Control Interface (NCI) 0 TDM clock failure. NCI1CF NCI 1 TDM clock failure. NCI2CF NCI 2 TDM clock failure. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Some necessary precondition(s) for the execution of the message were not met. This includes the case where the cell site is not equipped. If b is FWDSCHCL, NG indicates that the read control ller bit in the AUTOPLEX database must be on.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:CELL EXC:CELL-FT INH:CELL INIT:CELL OP:CELL-INVENT OP:CELL-SCSM RST:CELL Output Messages ALW-CELL ALW-CELL-AUD ALW-CELL-AUDPRINT ALW-CELL-PRINT = = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later Data links to the cell are down.
401-610-055 ALW CELL
REPT-CELL-ANT-TEST REPT-CELL-HEH-1 REPT-CELL-HEH-2
Other References: 401-612-021 Virtual System Output Message Routing
401-610-055 ALW CELL
Table 1 shows the audits within the cell. Audit names range from two to ten alphabetic characters, the rst two characters being the name of the subsystem and the last characters being a mnemonic of the data structure being audited. The numbers 1 through 4 indicate to which cell type the specied audit applies. 1 Series II cell 2 CDMA Flexent Microcell 3 TDMA Flexent Microcell 4 CDMA Flexent Modular cell, Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame, and Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) cell. Table 1. Audit Table _ ______________________________________________________________________________________ Cell type ________________ Audit 1 2 3 4 Name Description _ ______________________________________________________________________________________ _ ______________________________________________________________________________________ x x - x ARCCC Audits all CDMA Cluster Controllers (CCCs). x - - - ARDCCH Audits all voice radios that support DCCH. x - - - ARLRCU All locate radios. - - ARRTU Radio test unit. x - - - ARSRCU All setup radios. x - x - ARVRCU All voice radios. - x x x AS Alarm scanning. x x x AUWCACCC Walsh code administration CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC). - x CCPCCC CDMA call processing/ CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC). x x x x - x CCPCCIDMGR CDMA Call Processing CAMSHO/AHO Call ID Manager x x - x CCPECP CDMA call processing/ Executive Cellular Processor (ECP). x x - x CCPINT CDMA call processing internal. - x CCPNLMGR RCC call process of Neighbor List Manager. x x - x CCPOAM CDMA call processing/ Radio Control x x Complex/Operations, Administration and Maintenance (RCC-OA&M) structures. x x x CCPSEC CDMA call processing secondary cell. x - CPAVAIL Channels available for call processing. x - x - CSCP Call processing software. x - x - CSDL Data link connections. x - CSTDM TDM bus connection map. - - x FLCA Flexible Channel Allocation. x x HHTPKILL Hardware error handler process cleanup. x x - - IIA Cell site controller interrupt inhibit administration. x - x x x x INTRPROC Request for Mobile Telephone Switching Ofce (MTSO) to run interprocessor audit. _ ______________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 ALW CELL
Table 1. Continued _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ Cell type ________________ Audit 1 2 3 4 Name Description _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ x x x x MECHKSUM Audits checksummed memory (which includes most protected data and text) against boot sum table. x - MEMATE Compares the standby mate controllers memory against that of the active controller. x x MEWRPROT Audit master and per-block write protection. x x x x x x NVMVER Non-volatile memory versions. - - x OCQMICRO Microcell overload control. x x OCQCCC CCC overload status. x x OS Audits Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) x x data structures. x Audits OSDS timing. x x x OSCLCK x x x x RASP Cleans up when Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) is purged. x x x RATP Audits equipment status table and other data maintained x by the MRA. x x x x RMCLNP Cleans up when Routine Maintenance Scheduler (RMS) is purged. x x x x RMTPID RMS global data. x x x TEER Audits data structures for trafc event recording. x x x x TEHR Audits data structures for hourly trafc reports. x x x TEPL Audits data structures and decoder information pertaining to power level measurements. Not applicable for CDMA. x x x x TESPINMS Kills terminal processes created by trafc engineering. x x x TPCLNP Audits terminal process clean-up. x x - x TUCDMA CDMA translation update. x x x TURCUD Translation download radio parameters. x x x x TUTRANS Audits translation hash sums. x x TUUNEQ Audits translation unit unequipped. _ ____________________________________________________________________________________
401-610-055 ALW CELL
401-610-055 ALW CELL CP FAIL
ID ............. ALW:CELL-CP-FAIL RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the throttling of the REPT:CELL-CP-FAIL output message. Cell Call Processing (CP) failures are reported in the REPT-CELL-CP-FAIL output message and are normally throttled to ten messages per Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) per minute. This message is throttled by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CELL, CP, FAIL, THROTTLE!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and REPT:CELL-CP-FAIL output message throttling is allowed.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CELL-CP-FAIL Output Messages REPT-CELL-CP-FAIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CELL-CP-FAIL-1
401-610-055 ALW CELL CP FAIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CELL-CP-FAIL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CELL EXTERN FLASH
ID ............. ALW:CELL-EXTERN RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the cell indicators on the 2121 System Equipage Summary, 2122 OffNormal Cells, and 2130 Cell Site Status Summary pages to blink when an external alarm is present at the cell site. These cell indicators will only blink when an external alarm is present at the cell site and when all other alarm conditions are normal (that is, no other kinds of alarms are present at the cell site). NOTE: The default state is blinking of these cell indicators. If you do not wish to see these cell indicators blinking, you will have to turn them off, using the INH:CELL-EXTERN input command. If blinking has been turned off manually, use the ALW:CELL-EXTERN input command to turn the blinking back on again. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CELL,EXTERN,FLASH!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and the cell indicators on the 2121 System Equipage Summary, 2122 Off-Normal Cells, and 2130 Cell Site Status Summary pages are allowed to blink.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CELL-EXTERN Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CELL-EXTERN-1
401-610-055 ALW CELL EXTERN FLASH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CELL-EXTERN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CELL MLG
ID ............. ALW:CELL-MLG RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Allow the specied Multi-Link Group (MLG) to resume handling trafc. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CELL a, CP, CDM b, MLG c

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Cell site number (1-600). = Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Digital Module (CDM) number (116). = MLG number (1-2).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG PF RL = = = = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution were not met. Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later. Data links to the cell are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CELL-MLG Output Messages ALW-CELL-MLG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CELL-MLG-1
401-610-055 ALW CELL MLG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CELL-MLG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CONFLOG
ID ............. ALW:CONFLOG RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows logging of all errors for a specied computer unit and any units beneath it that are reported to CONFIG. Error logging continues until the INH:CONFLOG input message is executed. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CONFLOG;a b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Unit name, as specied in the Unit Control Block (UCB). Computer unit names are listed in the Input Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUMC, Table C. = Unit number, as specied in the UCB. See the Input Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP OK PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CONFLOG Output Messages ALW-CONFLOG Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-C = In Progress. Message syntax is invalid or the unit name or number does not exist in the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD). = Good. Request completed. = Printout Follows. Followed by an ALW-CONFLOG output message. = Retry Later. ECD access failure.
Other References: 254-341-100 SPCS File System Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CONFLOG-1
401-610-055 ALW CONFLOG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CONFLOG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CPREGTRACE
ID ............. ALW:CPREGTRACE RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT-REGTRACE output message as part of the CP Registration Glare for Active Call Reporting (CPREGTRACE) feature. Printing of this output message is inhibited by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CPREGTRACE!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and REPT-REGTRACE output messages are allowed to print autonomously.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CPREGTRACE Output Messages REPT-REGTRACE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CPREGTRACE-1
401-610-055 ALW CPREGTRACE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CPREGTRACE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CPSECOND
ID ............. ALW:CPSECOND RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT-REGTRACE output message as part of the CP Second Page Response Reporting Flag (CPSECOND) feature. Printing of this output message is inhibited by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CPSECOND!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and REPT-REGTRACE output messages are allowed to print autonomously.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CPSECOND Output Messages REPT-REGTRACE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CPSECOND-1
401-610-055 ALW CPSECOND
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CPSECOND-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW CPSG
ID ............. ALW:CPSG RELEASE ....... 6.1 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Allowing REPTCPSETUP output message printing could ood the Read Only Printer (ROP).
1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT-CP-SETUP output message as part of the CP Setup Glare Reporting (CPSG) feature. Printing of this message is inhibited by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:CPSG!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. The request has been executed and REPT-CP-SETUP output messages are allowed to print autonomously.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CPSG Output Messages REPT-CP-SETUP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:CPSG-1
401-610-055 ALW CPSG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:CPSG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW DLN AUD
ID ............. ALW:DLN-AUD RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the routine execution of one or all Direct Link Node (DLN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audits. Format 1: Allows all DLN audits. Format 2: Allows one DLN audit. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:DLN a, AUD! ALW:DLN a, AUD b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = DLN number (1-2). = Name of audit to be allowed: LPG Logical processor group audit.
RUXTBLS Ring Database Update (RDBU) table checksum request audit. SS7HDR SS7 header audit for 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS). 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:DLN-NAME INH:DLN-AUD Output Messages None. = Good. Routine execution of audits has been allowed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:DLN-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW DLN AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:DLN-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW DLN PRINT AUD
ID ............. ALW:DLN-PRINT-AU RELEASE ....... 6.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the printing of Direct Link Node (DLN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit results. 2. FORMAT
ALW:DLN a, PRINT AUD!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = DLN number (1-2).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:DLN-PRINT Output Messages None. = Good. Printing of audit errors has been allowed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:DLN-PRINT-AU-1
401-610-055 ALW DLN PRINT AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:DLN-PRINT-AU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW DMQ
ID ............. ALW:DMQ RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows previously inhibited or suspended sources to send maintenance requests to the 3B Maintenance Input Request Administrator (MIRA). 2. FORMAT
ALW:DMQ;{SRC aRUN}!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE SRC a = Reverses the effect of an inhibit diagnostic source input command (INH:DMQ) for a specied source of requests. = Three character process name: ADP Automatic Diagnostic Process. ALL All nonmanual requests. ARR Automatic Ring Recovery. CNR Critical Node Restore (EISO/BISO restore). ISR Interprocessor Message Switch User Node Soak Restore (ISR). REX Routine Exerciser. = Restart normal execution of all diagnostic request sources after suspension by a system recovery.
RUN
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE None. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:DMQ Output Messages OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:DMQ-1
401-610-055 ALW DMQ
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 254-341-220 3B20D Computer Operating System Diagnostics Software Subsystem Description - 3B Processor Section 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Diagnostics Users Guide Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:DMQ-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW DMQ
ID ............. ALW:DMQ-RTR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows previously inhibited or suspended sources to send automatic maintenance requests to the computer Maintenance Input Request Administrator (MIRA). Format 1: Reverses the effect of an inhibit source message (INH:DMQ) for a specied source of automatic maintenance requests. Format 2: Valid only while execution of deferred maintenance requests is suspended during system recovery. It allows execution of deferred maintenance requests during system recovery. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:DMQ;SRC a! ALW:DMQ;RUN!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Three-character source name. Computer source names are: ADP Automatic diagnostic process. ALL Allows all automatic maintenance requests by clearing the inhibited sources. REX Routine exerciser. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by an ALW-DMQ output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:DMQ-RTR-1
401-610-055 ALW DMQ
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:DMQ OP:DMQ Output Messages ALW-DMQ OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:DMQ-RTR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW EAIINT
ID ............. ALW:EAIINT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the logging and processing of Emergency Action Interface (EAI) error interrupts from the 3B21D computer Control Unit (CU) specied in the identication eld. If a CU is not specied with the input command, EAI error interrupts for both CUs are allowed. NOTE: The 3B21D computer CUs do not have EAI error interrupts. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:EAIINT! ALW:EAIINT;CU a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CU number (0-1).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. One of these messages may follow: INPUT ERROR Identication eld error. PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:ERRCHK INH:EAIINT OP:ERRCHK Output Messages ALW-EAIINT INH-EAIINT OP-ERRCHK = Printout Follows. Followed by the ALW-EAIINT output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:EAIINT-1
401-610-055 ALW EAIINT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:EAIINT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ECP AUD
ID ............. ALW:ECP-AUD RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the routine execution of one or all Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audits. Format 1: Allows all ECP audits. Format 2: Allows one ECP audit. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:ECP, AUD! ALW:ECP, AUD a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Name of audit to be allowed: ASTAPT CDNI CICELL CMCSXBUF DLDLT DLDSC DLNI IIMAUD OS OSCLCK RMLNSTAT RUAPEQP Active packet/session layer table integrity audit. Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) integrity audit. Cell Site Integrity (CLSI) audit. Message Communication Subsystem (MCS) cell site transmit buffers audit. Data link maintenance data link table audit. Data link maintenance dedicated switch connection audit. direct link node integrity audit. Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) integrity module logical number range check audit. Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. OSDS clock audit. Ring monitor link node status audit. Ring Database Update (RDBU) application processor equipment table audit. ruapgett table versus apgett database audit. ruaplink table versus aplink database audit. ruapofic table versus apofic database audit. ruappc2ls table versus appc2ls database audit. ruapsubsys table versus apsubsys database audit. RDBU base station conguration table audit. rucco table versus rucco database audit. Cell database cell type and call processing status eld audit. cicelldata() versus RDBU table audit. RDBU data link conguration tables audit. RDBU executive cellular processor audit. RDBU Extended System/Switch Identication (ESID) to pcrid lookup table audit. RDBU general audit.
RUAPGTT RUAPLINK RUAPOFID RUAPPC2LS RUAPSUBSYS RUBSCONF RUCCO RUCELL RUCIDATA RUDLT RUECP RUESID2P RUGEN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ECP-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW ECP AUD
RULNTBL RUNET RUNLMP RUOPT RUPCT RURCSLNK RUSS7LS RUTGI RUXIDATA XISS 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:ECP-NAME Output Messages None.
RDBU link node checksum audit. RDBU network entity table audit. network link maintenance process RDBU output message disposition table audit. RDBU processor conguration table audit. RDBU Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to channel table audit. RDBU Signaling System 7 (SS7) linkset table audit. RDBU trunk group index table audit. xissar, xigssr and xissr2 versus RDBU table audit. System integrity switch status audit.
= No Good. Audit inactive. = Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ECP-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ECP PRINT AUD
ID ............. ALW:ECP-PRINT RELEASE ....... 19.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the printing of Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit results. 2. FORMAT
ALW:ECP, PRINT AUD!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:ECP-PRINT Output Messages None. = Good. Audit prints have been allowed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ECP-PRINT-1
401-610-055 ALW ECP PRINT AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ECP-PRINT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW EGSF
ID ............. ALW:EGSF RELEASE ....... 6.1 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Allowing general system Call Processing (CP) failure printing could ood the Read Only Printer (ROP).
1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT GENERAL SYSTEM CP FAILURE output message as part of the Expanded General System Failure (EGSF) feature. Printing of this message is inhibited by default. 2. FORMAT
ALW:EGSF!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG OK = No Good. The EGSF feature is not available. = Good. The request has been executed and the REPT-GENERAL output messages are allowed to print autonomously.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:EGSF Output Messages REPT-GENERAL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:EGSF-1
401-610-055 ALW EGSF
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:EGSF-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ERRCHK
ID ............. ALW:ERRCHK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the logging and processing of all computer error sources. This message causes the inhibit administrator to set the inhibit status to allow for all computer inhibit sources. These include HDWCHK, SFTCHK, EAIINT, ERRINT, and the ERRSRC representing the Control Unit (CU) complexes. NOTE: The 3B21D computer CUs do not have Emergency Action Interface (EAI) Error Interrupts (EAIINTs). 2. FORMAT
ALW:ERRCHK!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:EAIINT ALW:ERRINT ALW:ERRSRC ALW:HDWCHK ALW:SFTCHK INH:ERRCHK OP:ERRCHK Output Messages ALW-ERRCHK INH-ERRCHK OP-ERRCHK = Identication Field contains an error. = Printout Follows. Followed by the ALW-ERRCHK output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ERRCHK-1
401-610-055 ALW ERRCHK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ERRCHK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ERRINT
ID ............. ALW:ERRINT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that the logging and processing of error interrupts attached to the unit specied in the identication eld be allowed. If a unit name is not specied with the input command, then error interrupts for all computer units are allowed. 2. FORMAT
ALW:ERRINT[;{a b[,c d]}]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Unit name. Computer unit names are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C. Allowing a Control Unit (CU) in an active/standby duplex conguration allows both CUs since they must be kept in identical states.
NOTE: b c d
= Unit number. (See Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C.) = Subunit name, if a=CU. Subunit names are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D. = Subunit number. (See the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D.)
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. INPUT ERROR Possibly indicates the unit name and number specied. NG = No Good. One of these messages may follow: UNEQUIPPED UNIT Indicates unit name and number specied was found in the database, but is unequipped. PF = Printout Follows. Followed by ALW-ERRINT output message. cannot be found in the database.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:ERRCHK INH:ERRINT OP:ERRCHK Output Messages ALW-ERRINT INH-ERRINT OP-ERRCHK SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ERRINT-1
401-610-055 ALW ERRINT
Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-C APP:MEM-NUM-D
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ERRINT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW ERRSRC
ID ............. ALW:ERRSRC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that the logging and processing of errors specic to the pseudo-nodes representing the computer Control Unit (CU) communities be allowed. This message causes the inhibit administrator to set the inhibit status to allowed for the CU pseudo-nodes. 2. FORMAT
ALW:ERRSRC [AM]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:ERRCHK INH:ERRSRC OP:ERRCHK Output Messages ALW-ERRSRC INH-ERRSRC OP-ERRCHK = Identication Field contains an error. = Printout Follows. Followed by ALW-ERRSRC output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:ERRSRC-1
401-610-055 ALW ERRSRC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:ERRSRC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW FILESYS ACCESS
ID ............. ALW:FILESYS-ACCES RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect permission values can prevent the system from accessing needed les or executing commands and processes.
1. PURPOSE Changes the access permissions of a specic le. Permissions allow the owner, group, and others to read, write, and execute a le. 2. FORMAT
ALW:FILESYS:ACCESS a, FN "b"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = A three-digit number giving access permissions for owner, group and others, in that order. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 b Execute (search in directory) only. Write only. Write and execute (search). Read only. Read and execute (search). Read and write. Read, write, and execute (search).
= Full pathname of the le or directory. See the User Guidelines section of this manual for denitions of pathname, le, and directory.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF = Printout Follows. message. Followed by the ALW-FILESYS-ACCESS output
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:FILESYS-OWNER OP:ST-LISTDIR Output Messages ALW-FILESYS-ACCESS OP-ST-LISTDIR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:FILESYS-ACCES-1
401-610-055 ALW FILESYS ACCESS
Other References: 254-341-100 SPCS File System Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer Display/Menu Page Name: CRAFT FM 01
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:FILESYS-ACCES-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW FILESYS MOUNT
ID ............. ALW:FILESYS-MOUNT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows a removable le system to be mounted. 2. FORMAT
ALW:FILESYS:MOUNT,FN "a",BSDIR "b"[,RO][,AUD]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Special device lename of the le system to be mounted. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions of special device name and le system. = The base directory of the mounted le system, from which all le names in that le system must descend. = File system is to be mounted read only. = File manager is to audit the le system prior to mounting it.
b RO AUD
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF = Printout Follows. Followed by the ALW-FILESYS-MOUNT output message and a PRM output message.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:FILESYS-UMOUN OP:ST-FILESYS Output Messages ALW-FILESYS-MOUNT OP-ST-FILESYS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:FILESYS-MOUNT-1
401-610-055 ALW FILESYS MOUNT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:FILESYS-MOUNT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW FILESYS OWNER
ID ............. ALW:FILESYS-OWNER RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect owner specications can prevent the system from accessing needed les.
1. PURPOSE Changes the owner and group of a specic le. 2. FORMAT
ALW:FILESYS:OWNER "a", FN "b"!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = User ID of the new owner of the le. = Pathname of the le. See the User Guidelines section in this manual for denitions of pathname, le and directory.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF = Printout Follows. message. Followed by the ALW-FILESYS-OWNER output
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:FILESYS-ACCES Output Messages ALW-FILESYS-OWNER
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:FILESYS-OWNER-1
401-610-055 ALW FILESYS OWNER
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:FILESYS-OWNER-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW FMP
ID ............. ALW:FMP RELEASE ....... 2.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows printing of the REPT-FMP-MOBILE output message, which contains directory number and serial number information for fraudulent home, roamer, tumbling, or ANSI41 roamer mobiles. This input message is valid only if the Fraudulent Mobile Print (FMP) optional feature is active in the system. 2. FORMAT
ALW:FMP!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. FMP feature is not active. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. A REPT-FMP output message will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:FMP Output Messages REPT-FMP REPT-FMP-MOBILE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:FMP-1
401-610-055 ALW FMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:FMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW HDWCHK
ID ............. ALW:HDWCHK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Sets the system status register such that a Control Unit (CU) switch can be implemented as a normal fault recovery procedure, thereby allowing a switch to the standby computer control unit when a fault occurs in the active computer control unit. 2. FORMAT
ALW:HDWCHK!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:ERRCHK INH:HDWCHK OP:ERRCHK Output Messages ALW-HDWCHK INH-HDWCHK OP-ERRCHK = Identication Field contains an error. = Printout Follows. Followed by the ALW-HDWCHK output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:HDWCHK-1
401-610-055 ALW HDWCHK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:HDWCHK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW LCP
ID ............. ALW:LCP RELEASE ....... 2.2 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Allowing lost call printing could ood the Read Only Printer (ROP).
1. PURPOSE Lost Call printing is ordinarily inhibited. When allowed via this message, lost calls from all cells are reported in the REPT-CELL-CP-FAIL output message. If a call is lost due to radio transmitter failure, then the lost call message is always printed. 2. FORMAT
ALW:LCP [ CLASS a]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. Indicates that the request has been executed.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:LCP Output Messages REPT-CELL-CP-FAIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:LCP-1
401-610-055 ALW LCP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:LCP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW LSLTRC
ID ............. ALW:LSLTRC RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Activating the Last Seen Cell Mobile Location Trace (LSCMLT) for too many Mobile Subscribers (MS) could result in some impact on system performance as well as location reports congestion at the Read Only Printer (ROP).
1. PURPOSE If the Idle Mobile Subscriber Location Trace (IMSLT) at Serving Mobile Switching Center (MSC) optional feature is active in the Feature Activation File (FAF), this command requests to activate the LSCMLT on an idle MS after reporting the mobiles current location. The command is valid only at serving MSC using Standalone Home Location Registers (SHLR). NOTE: This command does not work at the serving MSC using Integrated Home Location Register (IHLR). The LSCMLT, once activated for the specied MS, will provide: The last seen cell mobile location display and autonomous updates on the vlrlt Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) form. Report at the ROP when location changed. NOTE: This kind of trace invocation could generate multiple mobile location reports. It should be deactivated using the INH:LSLTRC input command. Users could get better trace resolution on the LSCMLT by periodically invoking the OP:LTRC command. 2. FORMAT
ALW:LSLTRC, {DN "a" MIN "b" IMSI "c" }!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Variable length Directory Number (DN) 1-14 digits. = 10-digit Mobile Identication Number (MIN). = 8-15 digit International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E = Error. One of the following additional strings may print: IMSI feature inactive, check FAF IMSLT feature inactive, check FAF
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:LSLTRC-1
401-610-055 ALW LSLTRC
Single string value expected for mobile number the Last Seen Cell Location Trace is not active IP NG RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:LSLTRC OP:LTRC Output Messages REPT-LTRC = In Progress. Output messages will follow. = No Good. The MS has already been active in the location trace. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:LSLTRC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW RCMS
ID ............. ALW:RCMS RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the Read Only Printer (ROP) Client Message Service (RCMS) feature to be enabled. Enabling this service, routes informational error ROP messages to Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio Access Network (OMC-RAN) Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) Agent (ORCA), in addition to being displayed on the ROP. This command can be used from Technician Interface Command Line Interface (TICLI) when Technician Interface (TI) is enabled on the Application Processor (AP) and when ORCA is active on the system.
2. FORMAT
ALW:RCMS
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:RCMS INH:RCMS Output Messages ALW-RCMS = Good. The request has been executed and the Read Only Printer (ROP) Client Message Service (RCMS) feature is allowed. = Retry Later. ORCA is not active now.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:RCMS-1
401-610-055 ALW RCMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:RCMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW REX
ID ............. ALW:REX RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows Routine Exercise (REX) for one or more hardware communities by clearing the REX temporary inhibit(s). A hardware community consists of a major device controller and its associated subdevices. If a hardware community has REX permanently inhibited, its REX temporary inhibit is not available. 2. FORMAT
ALW:REX:{a[ b]ALL}!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Unit name of a major community controller. Applications may add additional major controllers which may be allowed by this command. The computer controllers are: CU Control unit. DCI Dual serial channel/computer interconnect. IOP Input/output processor. b = Unit number (see the Input Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C). If not specied, then all controllers with the specied unit name are allowed. = Clear the temporary REX inhibits for all major community controllers that are not permanently inhibited from REX.
ALL
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D NG OK PF RL = Data eld contains an error. = No Good. REX is permanently inhibited for the unit specied, or for all the units specied. = Good. REX is allowed for the unit specied, or for at least one of the units specied. = Printout Follows. Followed by an ALW-REX output message. = Retry Later. The database manager or a database record could not be opened, try again at a later time. If this persists, seek technical assistance.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:REX-1
401-610-055 ALW REX
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:DMQ INH:DMQ INH:REX OP:DMQ OP:REXINH Output Messages ALW-REX OP-DMQ OP-REXINH Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-C
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:REX-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW REX RPCD
ID ............. ALW:REX-RPCD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allow Routine Exercise (REX) of Ring Peripheral Controller Device (RPCD) nodes [Direct Link Nodes (DLNs)]. 2. FORMAT
ALW:REX:RPCD a b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D OK RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:REX-RPCD Output Messages OP-DMQ = Data eld contains an error. Data eld error, usually invalid unit name. = Good. Routine exercises are allowed for the RPCD (DLNs) specied. = Retry later.
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 254-341-220 3B20D Computer Operating System Diagnostics Software Subsystem Description 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Diagnostics Users Guide Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:REX-RPCD-1
401-610-055 ALW REX RPCD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:REX-RPCD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW REX RPCN
ID ............. ALW:REX-RPCN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows Routine Exercise (REX) of Ring Peripheral Controller Nodes (RPCNs). 2. FORMAT
ALW:REX:RPCN a b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Group number (0-63). = Member number (0).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D OK RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:REX-RPCN Output Messages None. = Data eld contains an error. Usually invalid unit name. = Good. Routine exercises are allowed for the RPCN specied. = Retry later.
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 254-341-220 3B20D Computer Operating System Diagnostics Software Subsystem Description
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:REX-RPCN-1
401-610-055 ALW REX RPCN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:REX-RPCN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW RUTIL
ID ............. ALW:RUTIL RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this command may interrupt operation of a node on the ring or the whole ring.
1. PURPOSE Allows all Ring Generic Access Package (RGRASP) breakpoints in the specied node. An attempt will be made to allow all breakpoints in the specied node. The user will be informed about the result of this operation. When a breakpoint has red MHIT times, it will automatically become inhibited (disabled). 2. FORMAT
ALW:RUTIL (a, b), {APNP} [; MHIT c]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15). = Maximum number of hits to be allowed for that breakpoint. (If not specied MHIT is set to 10.)
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE None. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CLR:RUTIL INH:RUTIL OP:RUTIL WHEN:RUTIL Output Messages ALW-RUTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:RUTIL-1
401-610-055 ALW RUTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:RUTIL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW RUTILFLAG
ID ............. ALW:RUTILFLAG RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Allows specic Ring Generic Access Package (RGRASP) breakpoints in the specied node. An attempt will be made to allow the specied breakpoint in the specied node. The user will be informed about the result of this operation. When this breakpoint has red MHIT times it will automatically become inhibited (disabled). 2. FORMAT
ALW:RUTILFLAG (a, b), {APNP} ; BP c [, MHIT d]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15). = Specic breakpoint to be allowed. = Maximum number of hits to be allowed for that breakpoint. (If not specied MHIT is set to 10.)
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE None. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CLR:RUTILFLAG INH:RUTILFLAG Output Messages ALW-RUTILFLAG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:RUTILFLAG-1
401-610-055 ALW RUTILFLAG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:RUTILFLAG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW SCSD
ID ............. ALW:SCSD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows transitions of a Scanner Signal Distributor (SCSD) scan point to be reported. Scan points can be identied by physical location (as in Format 1) or by logical address (as in Format 2). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:SCSD;UNIT a: PT {b(b,b[,b,b,b,b,b,b...])}! ALW:SCSD;GRPN "c", DUPID d: PT {e(e,e[e,e,e,e])}!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = SCSD unit member number (0-16). = Physical scan point number on an SCSD (0-47). = Name of the logical SCSD group. Examples are: FANALM0, FANALM1, FANACU0, FANACU1, PDF0, PRSWCU0, PRSWCU1, PRSWIOP0, PRSWIOP1, PRSWDFC0, PRSWDFC1, PRSWMHD0, PRSWMHD1, PRSWPD0, PTSWROP, PTSWMCR. = Duplex point ID (0-1). = Number of a point within a logical group (0-5).
d e
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:SCSD OP:SCSD Output Messages ALW-SCSD REPT-FAN-INHIBIT REPT-FAN-MULTIPLE REPT-FAN-SINGLE REPT-SCSDC = No Good. The SCSD administrator process communication with SCSD points is possible. is not active; no
= Printout Follows. Followed by an ALW-SCSD output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:SCSD-1
401-610-055 ALW SCSD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:SCSD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW SFTCHK
ID ............. ALW:SFTCHK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the software error handling routines to incorporate system initialization into their error recovery procedures as a means of handling computer software sanity problems. 2. FORMAT
ALW:SFTCHK!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:ERRCHK INH:SFTCHK OP:ERRCHK Output Messages ALW-SFTCHK INH-SFTCHK OP-ERRCHK = Identication Field contains an error. = Printout Follows. Followed by an ALW-SFTCHK output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:SFTCHK-1
401-610-055 ALW SFTCHK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:SFTCHK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW TCS AUD
ID ............. ALW:TCS-AUD RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the routine execution of one or all Trafc Control Server (TCS) audits. Format 1: Allows all TCS audits. Format 2: Allows one TCS audit. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:TCS a, AUD ALL[; PRINT]! ALW:TCS a, AUD b[; PRINT]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a PRINT = TCS number (1-15). = Will allow the user to see error(s) found during an audit if and only if the PRINT option had previously been entered with an INH:TCS-AUD input command. = Name of audit to be allowed: AUCMCR AURMINT 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:TCS-NAME INH:TCS-AUD Output Messages ALW-TCS-AUD INH-TCS-AUD AUD-TCS-NAME AUD-TCS-NAME-ERR = Printout Follows. Audit TCS Call Manager call records. Audit TCS Resource Manager internal data.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:TCS-AUD-1
401-610-055 ALW TCS AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:TCS-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW TRACE
ID ............. ALW:TRACE RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command, along with INH:TRACE command, forms the basic on/off mechanism for trace. Until this command is issued, no trace report will be attempted (although it will consume a certain amount of xed overhead). After this command is entered, tracing will take place according to the previously input trace parameter settings. The parameter settings may be changed at any time with the SET:TRACE command (whether tracing is allowed or inhibited). 2. FORMAT
ALW:TRACE!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE The TRACE craft process ALW:TRACE joins the terminate class associated with TRACE process tdcp.p. This means that the craft process will be aborted whenever tdcp.p is aborted by its owner which may be either Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) or an application. The 3B21D copies the system-detail-ag structure into the user-detail-ag structure and sets the global trace-activity ag. Sends an updated Local Trace Control Block structure to Node Processors (NPs). NOTE: The IMS driver process must be running before trace updates can be sent to the node processors. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:TRACE OP:TRACE SET:TRACE Output Messages ALW-TRACE INH-TRACE OP-TRACE REPT-TRACE SET-TRACE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:TRACE-1
401-610-055 ALW TRACE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:TRACE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW TRAP
ID ............. ALW:TRAP RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests activation of a pending trap that was entered by the SET:TRAP command. In addition, this command will allow a trap to be resumed that was temporarily suspended/inhibited or a trap that has completed due to duration or message count criterion being satised. Traps that have been aborted before completing can be restarted with an ALW:TRAP command. Traps that have been stopped by a STOP:TRAP command cannot be reactivated with an ALW:TRAP command. These traps can only be activated by entering a new SET:TRAP command. 2. FORMAT
ALW:TRAP;ID {a(a,a,a)ALL}!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a ALL = Trap identication number or numbers. This can be specied as a single ID, a list of IDs or all IDs. = All applicable trap identication numbers.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE Traps will be activated for the specied identication numbers. error/diagnostic messages will be printed. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:TRAP INH:TRAP SET:TRAP STOP:TRAP Output Messages ALW-TRAP Appropriate
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:TRAP-1
401-610-055 ALW TRAP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:TRAP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW UMEM
ID ............. ALW:UMEM RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of this GRASP capability can degrade system performance. It should not be used without expert technical assistance.
1. PURPOSE Causes the computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) transfer trace to start monitoring the ow of execution, as previously set up with an INIT:UMEM message. The transfer trace goes into the running state with successful completion of the message. This message can be used either as an immediate action, or it can be used in the action list of a WHEN command. 2. FORMAT
ALW:UMEM{/!}
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I IP NG PF RL = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error. = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = No Good. No trace is dened. = Printout Follows. Followed by an ALW-UMEM output message. = Retry Later. Or wait for the previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MLH to complete. The system is in an overload condition.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:UMEM INIT:UMEM OP:UMEM OP:UTIL WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages ALW-UMEM OP-UTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:UMEM-1
401-610-055 ALW UMEM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:UMEM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW UTIL
ID ............. ALW:UTIL RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of this GRASP capability can degrade system performance. It should not be used without expert technical assistance.
1. PURPOSE Enables all currently dened computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoints so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint conditions occur. 2. FORMAT
ALW:UTIL{!/}
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG PF RL = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = No Good. No GRASP breakpoints are currently dened. = Printout Follows. Followed by an ALW-UTIL output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:UTILFLAG INH:UTIL OP:UMEM OP:UTIL WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages ALW-UTIL OP-UTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:UTIL-1
401-610-055 ALW UTIL
Other References: 254-341-115 3B20D Computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) and Enhanced Generic Access Package (EGRASP) Software Subsystem Description
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:UTIL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW UTILFLAG
ID ............. ALW:UTILFLAG RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Enables a specic computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoint so that the associated actions are executed when the breakpoint condition occurs. The ALW:UTILFLAG message can be used to enable a breakpoint immediately, or as an action associated with a breakpoint. 2. FORMAT
ALW:UTILFLAG a{!/}
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Numeric identier (one or more decimal digits) for the breakpoint to be enabled.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG PF RL = In Progress. The message was added to the WHEN action list. = No Good. Identier does not correspond to a currently dened breakpoint. = Printout Follows. Followed by the ALW-UTILFLAG output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:UTIL INH:UTILFLAG OP:UMEM OP:UTIL WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages ALW-UTILFLAG OP-UTIL WHEN-PID WHEN-UID
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:UTILFLAG-1
401-610-055 ALW UTILFLAG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:UTILFLAG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW VCA AUD
ID ............. ALW:VCA-AUD RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the routine execution of one or all Application Processor (AP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audits. Format 1: Allows all AP audits. Format 2: Allows one AP audit. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
ALW:VCA, AUD! ALW:VCA, AUD a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Name of audit to be allowed: BHMDB DCASTATE IACELL IACST IAIZOT OS OSCLCK PPBLK TMPPS VCAS VCDB VCFINFO VCLISTS VCMPT VCMS VCPAFID VCSTATE VCTGI VCTMR VCTP 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Audit inactive or Voice Channel Administration (VCA) is active on the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) and not on the AP. Try again with the ALW:ECP-AUD input command. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:VCA-AUD-1 Backhaul Manager (BHM) database audit. Dynamic Call Assignment State audit. Voice Channel Administration (VCA) cell interprocessor audit. VCA cell site trunk interprocessor audit. VCA idle zone ofce trunk interprocessor audit. Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. OSDS clock audit. Packet pipe blocking bit (Blocking From DCS [BFD] and Blocking From MSC [BFM]) status audit. VCA Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) packet pipe structure audit. Inter-vendor trunk state audit. VCA database audit. VCA Interfering neighbor list in fin_info table audit. VCA list audit. VCA packet pipe member pointer table audit. VCA member structure audit. VCA paf2indx/indx2paf and Digital Control Channel (DCCH) channels in chan_usage table audit. VCA state validation audit. VCA trunk group index table audit. VCA timer structures audit. VCA terminal process table audit.
401-610-055 ALW VCA AUD
OK
= Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running.
RL
?E 5. REFERENCES
= Error.
IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:ECP-AUD AUD:VCA-NAME Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:VCA-AUD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 ALW VCA PRINT AUD
ID ............. ALW:VCA-PRINT RELEASE ....... 19.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows the printing of the Application Processor (AP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit results. 2. FORMAT
ALW:VCA, PRINT AUD!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Audit inactive or Voice Channel Administration (VCA) is active on the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) and not on the AP. Try again with the ALW:ECP-PRINT input command. OK = Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running. RL = Retry Later. Voice Channel Administration on the Application Processor (VCAap) will come up shortly or when it is restored. ?E 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:ECP-PRINT INH:VCA-PRINT Output Messages None. = Error.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ALW:VCA-PRINT-1
401-610-055 ALW VCA PRINT AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ALW:VCA-PRINT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 APPLY OMDB
ID ............. APPLY:OMDB RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Applies previous updates to the new copy of the Output Message Database (OMDB) disk le during eld update. 2. FORMAT
APPLY:OMDB!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ACTV:OMDB OP:OMDB UPD:OMDB Output Messages APPLY-OMDB = In Progress. Followed by an APPLY-OMDB output message.
Other References: 254-341-230 Craft Interface Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 APPLY:OMDB-1
401-610-055 APPLY OMDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE APPLY:OMDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD CDN NAME
ID ............. AUD:CDN-NAME RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. 2. FORMAT
AUD:CDN a, NAME b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = CDN number (1-24). = Name or index number of audit requested. Please note that audits LPG and RUCDNAUD are not supported for all Application Processor (AP) - based CDNs. List of audits: Administrative Call Processing/Database Node (ACDN) cellular networking trunk list audit. (Index number for this audit is 20.) ANOPO Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) table and Head index array audit. (Index number for this audit is 29.) CCNID Control Network Identication (CNID) database records audit. (Index number for this audit is 36.) CNLIST Call Processing (CP) cellular networking linked list audit. (Index number for this audit is 12.) CNNET CP network entity table audit. (Index number for this audit is 13.) CNTKML CP trunk Mobile Call Register (MCR) list audit. (Index number for this audit is 15.) CPARG CP automatic roamer greeting audit. (Index number for this audit is 23.) CPGCSL CP global call status list audit. (Index number for this audit is 17.) CPIWFDATA CP Interworking Function (IWF) database audit. (Index number for this audit is 30.) CPLCSL CP local call status list audit. (Index number for this audit is 18.) CPMCST CP mobile call status table audit. (Index number for this audit is 8.) CPMPC CP Meter Pulse Call audit. (Index number for this audit is 34.) CPMSG CP mobile call register segmented audit. (Index number for this audit is 10.) CPREG CP tear-down MCR list servicing audit. (Index number for this audit is 11.) CPSCN CP special cellular networking audit. (Index number for this audit is 14.) ACCNTL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:CDN-NAME-1
CP tear-down MCR list integrity audit. (Index number for this audit is 9.) GLB Node Integrity global data audit. (Index number for this audit is 24.) IABZOT Interprocessor busy zone ofce trunks audit. (Index number for this audit is 16.) IACPMMA CP Message Mapping Application (MMA) audit. (Index number for this audit is 32.) IARMCR Interprocessor remote mobile call register audit. (Index number for this audit is 25.) LAES Lawfully authorized electronic surveillance data audit. (Index number for this audit is 33.) LCSLCHK CP Local Call Status List (LCSL) /MCR consistency check audit. (Index number for this audit is 19.) LPG Logical processor group audit. (Index number for this audit is 21.) MDTXT CP global data array audit. (Index number for this audit is 37.) OS Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. (Index number for this audit is 1.) OSCLCK OSDS clock audit. (Index number for this audit is 2.) OTAESN Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) Electronic Serial Number (ESN) audit. (Index number for this audit is 28.) OTATRN Over-The-Air Activation (OTA) Temporary Reference Number (TRN) audit. (Index number for this audit is 27.) PGMA CP page message area audit. (Index number for this audit is 6.) PGOPL CP outstanding page list audit. (Index number for this audit is 7.) PRLISTS Periodic Reset (PR) link lists audit. (Index number for this audit is 5.) RUCDNAUD Ring Database Update (RDBU) table checksum request audit. (Index number for this audit is 22.) SMP Sub-Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Paging (SMP) audit. (Index number for this audit is 31.) UZDATA User zone data audit. (Index number for this audit is 26.) WTRGDATA WINTRIG database entry verify audit. (Index number for this audit is 35.) CPTDML 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = Good. Audit was already scheduled. = Printout Follows. Audit has been scheduled to run.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:CDN-NAME-2 Issue 28
Output Messages AUD-CDN-OSDS-N-E-C
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:CDN-NAME-3
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:CDN-NAME-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD CELL
ID ............. AUD:CELL RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests an audit in one or more cell sites. 2. FORMAT
AUD:CELL a, NAME b [ CLASS c]!


A single cell site. A range (maximum number of cells in range is 32). A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
b c
= Audit requested. See Table 1 for details. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages AUD-CELL-AUDNAME-C AUD-CELL-AUDNAME-N
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:CELL-1
401-610-055 AUD CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD CELL
Table 1 shows the audits within the cell. Audit names range from two to ten alphabetic characters, the rst two characters being the name of the subsystem and the last characters being a mnemonic of the data structure being audited. The numbers 1 through 4 indicate to which cell type the specied audit applies. 1 Series II cell 2 CDMA Flexent Microcell 3 TDMA Flexent Microcell 4 CDMA Flexent Modular cell, Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame, and Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) cell. Table 1. Audit Table _ ______________________________________________________________________________________ Cell type ________________ Audit 1 2 3 4 Name Description _ ______________________________________________________________________________________ _ ______________________________________________________________________________________ x x - x ARCCC Audits all CDMA Cluster Controllers (CCCs). x - - - ARDCCH Audits all voice radios that support DCCH. x - - - ARLRCU All locate radios. - - ARRTU Radio test unit. x - - - ARSRCU All setup radios. x - x - ARVRCU All voice radios. - x x x AS Alarm scanning. x x x AUWCACCC Walsh code administration CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC). - x CCPCCC CDMA call processing/ CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC). x x x x - x CCPCCIDMGR CDMA Call Processing CAMSHO/AHO Call ID Manager x x - x CCPECP CDMA call processing/ Executive Cellular Processor (ECP). x x - x CCPINT CDMA call processing internal. - x CCPNLMGR RCC call process of Neighbor List Manager. x x - x CCPOAM CDMA call processing/ Radio Control x x Complex/Operations, Administration and Maintenance (RCC-OA&M) structures. x x x CCPSEC CDMA call processing secondary cell. x - CPAVAIL Channels available for call processing. x - x - CSCP Call processing software. x - x - CSDL Data link connections. x - CSTDM TDM bus connection map. - - x FLCA Flexible Channel Allocation. x x HHTPKILL Hardware error handler process cleanup. x x - - IIA Cell site controller interrupt inhibit administration. x - x x x x INTRPROC Request for Mobile Telephone Switching Ofce (MTSO) to run interprocessor audit. _ ______________________________________________________________________________________
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:CELL-3
401-610-055 AUD CELL
Table 1. Continued _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ Cell type ________________ Audit 1 2 3 4 Name Description _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ _ ____________________________________________________________________________________ x x x x MECHKSUM Audits checksummed memory (which includes most protected data and text) against boot sum table. x - MEMATE Compares the standby mate controllers memory against that of the active controller. x x MEWRPROT Audit master and per-block write protection. x x x x x x NVMVER Non-volatile memory versions. - - x OCQMICRO Microcell overload control. x x OCQCCC CCC overload status. x x OS Audits Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) x x data structures. x Audits OSDS timing. x x x OSCLCK x x x x RASP Cleans up when Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) is purged. x x x RATP Audits equipment status table and other data maintained x by the MRA. x x x x RMCLNP Cleans up when Routine Maintenance Scheduler (RMS) is purged. x x x x RMTPID RMS global data. x x x TEER Audits data structures for trafc event recording. x x x x TEHR Audits data structures for hourly trafc reports. x x x TEPL Audits data structures and decoder information pertaining to power level measurements. Not applicable for CDMA. x x x x TESPINMS Kills terminal processes created by trafc engineering. x x x TPCLNP Audits terminal process clean-up. x x - x TUCDMA CDMA translation update. x x x TURCUD Translation download radio parameters. x x x x TUTRANS Audits translation hash sums. x x TUUNEQ Audits translation unit unequipped. _ ____________________________________________________________________________________
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:CELL-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD CNC
ID ............. AUD:CNC RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initiates the central node control audit. (This audit is also routinely executed.) NOTE: Routine execution of this audit may be inhibited by UNIX RTR during outages of the Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) subsystem. This can be checked by using the OP:AUD command and routine execution can be resumed by using the ALW:AUD command. Internal ring node maintenance records are audited for inconsistencies which could prevent jobs (such as RST:LN) from progressing or cause jobs to be unnecessarily aborted. 2. FORMAT
AUD:CNC 1 [;{ aba,b}]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Species whether the audit should correct errors: CORR Indicates correction should occur. This is the default value. NCG Inhibits error correction. b = Species the level of detail of error reporting: DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found. This is the default value. SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See Purpose. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AUD INH:AUD OP:AUD OP:AUDERR STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-CNC Output Appendices APP:AUD SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:CNC-1
401-610-055 AUD CNC
Other References: 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:CNC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD CUMEM
ID ............. AUD:CUMEM RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This audit can take more than 180 minutes to run and can degrade the performance of other UNIX RTR system audits. Excessive audit errors may result in a hardware reconguration with one CU being left out of service.
1. PURPOSE Runs the standby Control Unit Memory (CUMEM) 1 audit in the standby Control Unit (CU), comparing the contents of the online and off-line main stores when in the ACT/ACT or ACT/STBY modes. 2. FORMAT
AUD:CUMEM 1 [;a ;b ;a,b] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors (default). NCG Audit does not correct errors. b = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the Audit Appendix, APP:AUD. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD RST:CU STOP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:CUMEM-1
401-610-055 AUD CUMEM
Output Messages AUD-CUMEM OP-AUD OP-OOS Input Appendices APP:AUD
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-341-235 SPCS Audit Facilities Description 3B20D Model 2 Processor
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:CUMEM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD CUSTAT
ID ............. AUD:CUSTAT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Excessive audit errors may result in a hardware reconguration with one Control Unit (CU) being left out of service.
1. PURPOSE Runs the Control Unit Hardware Status (CUSTAT) audit in the manual mode. 2. FORMAT
AUD:CUSTAT 1 [;a ;b ;a,b] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors (default). NCG Audit does not correct errors. b = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the Audit Appendix, APP:AUD. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-CUSTAT OP-AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:CUSTAT-1
401-610-055 AUD CUSTAT
Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:CUSTAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD DLN NAME
ID ............. AUD:DLN-NAME RELEASE ....... 6.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that a Direct Link Node (DLN) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit be run. 2. FORMAT
AUD:DLN a, NAME b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = DLN number (1-2). = Name of audit requested: RUXTBLS Ring Database Update (RDBU) table checksum request audit. SS7HDR Signaling System 7 (SS7) header audit for 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) LPG Logical processor group audit. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK PF = Good. Audit was already scheduled. = Printout Follows. Audit has been scheduled to run. A printout will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages AUD-DLN-OSDS-N-E-C
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:DLN-NAME-1
401-610-055 AUD DLN NAME
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:DLN-NAME-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD ECD
ID ............. AUD:ECD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Running ECD audit 1 or 3 while diagnostics are running can result in mutilation of database records.
1. PURPOSE Audits the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD). Format 1: Audits the incore ECD. Format 2: Runs a structural audit of the minimum conguration ECD. Format 3: Runs a structural audit of the full conguration ECD. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
AUD:ECD a [;b ;c ;b,c] ! AUD:ECD 2,INS "ecd" [;b ;c ;b,c] ! AUD:ECD 2,INS "appecd" [;b ;c ;b,c] !
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Species the type of incore ECD audit (1-3): 1 3 b Structural audit. Raw data audit.
= CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors (default). NCG Audit does not correct errors.
= DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the Audit Appendix, APP:AUD.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:ECD-1
401-610-055 AUD ECD
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-ECD OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:ECD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD ECDOWN
ID ............. AUD:ECDOWN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Runs the Equipment Conguration Database Manager (ECDMAN) audit of record ownership. This audit releases reserved records for processes that have died. 2. FORMAT
AUD:ECDOWN 1 [;a ;b ;a,b] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors (default). NCG Audit does not correct errors. b = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the Audit Appendix, APP:AUD. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-ECDOWN OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:ECDOWN-1
401-610-055 AUD ECDOWN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:ECDOWN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD ECP NAME
ID ............. AUD:ECP-NAME RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests an Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. This command can only be executed from the ECP CRAFT platform. 2. FORMAT
AUD:ECP, NAME a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Name of audit requested: ASTAPT CDNI CICELL CMCSXBUF DLDLT DLDSC DLNI IIMAUD OS OSCLCK RMLNSTAT RUAPEQP Active packet/session layer table integrity audit. Call Processing/Database Node (CDN) integrity audit. Cell Site Integrity (CLSI) audit. Message Communication Subsystem (MCS) cell site transmit buffers audit. Data link maintenance data link table audit. Data link maintenance dedicated switch connection audit. direct link node integrity audit. Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) integrity module logical number range check audit. Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. OSDS clock audit. Ring monitor link node status audit. Ring Database Update (RDBU) application processor equipment table audit. ruapgett table versus apgett database audit. ruaplink table versus aplink database audit. ruapofic table versus apofic database audit. ruappc2ls table versus appc2ls database audit. ruapsubsys table versus apsubsys database audit. RDBU base station conguration table audit. rucco table versus rucco database audit. Cell database cell type and call processing status eld audit. cicelldata() versus RDBU table audit. RDBU data link conguration tables audit. RDBU executive cellular processor audit. RDBU Extended System/Switch Identication (ESID) to pcrid lookup table audit. RDBU general audit. RDBU link node checksum audit. RDBU network entity table audit. network link maintenance process RDBU output message disposition table audit.
RUAPGTT RUAPLINK RUAPOFID RUAPPC2LS RUAPSUBSYS RUBSCONF RUCCO RUCELL RUCIDATA RUDLT RUECP RUESID2P RUGEN RULNTBL RUNET RUNLMP RUOPT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:ECP-NAME-1
401-610-055 AUD ECP NAME
RUPCT RURCSLNK RUSS7LS RUTGI RUXIDATA XISS 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG OK PF
RDBU processor conguration table audit. RDBU Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to channel table audit. RDBU Signaling System 7 (SS7) linkset table audit. RDBU trunk group index table audit. xissar, xigssr and xissr2 versus RDBU table audit. System integrity switch status audit.
= No Good. Audit inactive. = Good. Audit was already scheduled. = Printout Follows. Audit has been scheduled to run.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages AUD-ECP-NAME-E-C
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:ECP-NAME-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD FMGR
ID ............. AUD:FMGR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Audits the resources of the File Manager (FMGR). 2. FORMAT
AUD:FMGR a [;b ;c ;b,c] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Species the member number (1-9) of the FMGR audit. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 b Task queue audit. Internal inode table audit. Hash table and internal inode pointer table audit. File table audit. Internal capability table audit. Buffer audit. Mount table audit. Delayed queue audit. Message queue audit.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:FMGR-1
401-610-055 AUD FMGR
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-FMGR1 AUD-FMGR2 AUD-FMGR3 AUD-FMGR4 AUD-FMGR5 AUD-FMGR6 AUD-FMGR7 AUD-FMGR8 AUD-FMGR9 OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:FMGR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD FSBLK
ID ............. AUD:FSBLK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that the le system block audit be run. This audit can be run on a mounted or unmounted le system. 2. FORMAT
AUD:FSBLK a,INS "b"[;c;d;c,d][:PARAM "e"]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number of the FSBLK audit. The computer audit member number is 1. = Instance to be audited. Computer instance names are: /dev/bdb /dev/betc /dev/broot /dev/db /dev/etc /dev/root /dev/tmp c = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors. NCG Audit does not correct errors (default). d = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. e = Parameter BACKUP is specied if it is desired that the audit check the lesystem for the appropriateness of generating a backup tape. If this is specied, the audit may report, as errors, conditions that normally would not be considered errors, but could result in the creation of an improper backup tape. These errors are not correctable.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:FSBLK-1
401-610-055 AUD FSBLK
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:FSLINK OP:AUD OP:FNAME STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-FSBLK OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-341-100 SPCS File System Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer 254-341-235 SPCS Audit Facilities Description 3B20D Model 2 Processor
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:FSBLK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD FSCMPT
ID ............. AUD:FSCMPT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that the le system compaction audit be run. This audit can be run on a mounted or unmounted le system. 2. FORMAT
AUD:FSCMPT a,INS "b"[;c;d;c,d][:PARAM "{efe,f}"]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Member number of the FSCMPT audit. The computer audit member number is 1. = Instance to be audited. Instance names are the special device les corresponding to the le system audited. = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors, and complete the compaction (default). NCG Audit should not correct errors, and should not do the compaction. d = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. e = MIN or MAX. MIN Perform or report for a minimum effort compaction (default). MAX Perform or report for a maximum effort compaction. f = COND or UCL. COND Limit number of regular le blocks relocated to achieve compaction (default). UCL An unlimited number of regular le blocks may be relocated to achieve compaction. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the appendix, System Responses for Audit System Input Messages, APP:AUD.
b c
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:FSCMPT-1
401-610-055 AUD FSCMPT
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:FSBLK AUD:FSLINK OP:AUD OP:FNAME Output Messages AUD-FSCMPT OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:FSCMPT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD FSLINK
ID ............. AUD:FSLINK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that the le system link audit be run. This audit can be run on a mounted or unmounted le system. 2. FORMAT
AUD:FSLINK a,INS "b"[;c;d;c,d][:PARAM "e"]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number of the FSLINK audit. The computer audit member number is 1. = Instance to be audited. Computer instance names are: /dev/bdb /dev/betc /dev/broot /dev/db /dev/etc /dev/root /dev/tmp c = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors. NCG Audit does not correct errors (default). d = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. e = Parameter BACKUP is specied if it is desired that the audit check the lesystem for the appropriateness of generating a backup tape. If this is specied, the audit may report as errors conditions that would not normally be considered errors, but could result in the creation of an improper backup tape. These errors are not correctable.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:FSLINK-1
401-610-055 AUD FSLINK
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:FSBLK OP:AUD OP:FNAME STOP:AUD Output Messages OP-AUD AUD-FSLINK Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:FSLINK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD MMGR
ID ............. AUD:MMGR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Runs the memory manager audits. The rst three audits validate the segment descriptor table, page tables and the page descriptor table, and recover lost pages and page tables. The segment release audit completes an interrupted segment breakdown procedure. The segment unlock audit releases old iolocked segments. The swap space compaction audit runs a complete swap disk space compaction. It should be run, load permitting, in response to repeated REPT-MMGR004 output messages. NOTE: While the swap space compaction is running, the memory manager will not be able to swap supervisor processes into memory. As a result, the only supervisor processes that will run during this interval will be those already in memory. The real-time interval depends on the level of kernel process activity, or unpredictable things such as the type and number of supervisor segments that are in memory at the time. 2. FORMAT
AUD:MMGR a [;b ;c ;b,c] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Member number of the audit. 1 2 3 4 5 9 b Segment descriptor table audit. Page table audit. Page descriptor table audit. Segment release audit. Segment unlock audit. Swap space compaction audit.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:MMGR-1
401-610-055 AUD MMGR
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-MMGR OP-AUD REPT-MMGR004 Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:MMGR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD MSGBUF
ID ............. AUD:MSGBUF RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Audits the Message Buffer (MSGBUF) resources. 2. FORMAT
AUD:MSGBUF a [;b;c;b,c] !
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Member number of the audit: 1 2 b Message buffer queue audit. Message buffer extender block audit.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the Audit Appendix, APP:AUD. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-MSGBUF OP-AUD REPT-KAUDPRC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:MSGBUF-1
401-610-055 AUD MSGBUF
Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:MSGBUF-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD NIDATA
ID ............. AUD:NIDATA RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Runs the internal data audits on the recent changeable tables. NOTE: Routine execution of this audit may be inhibited by the UNIX- Real Time Reliable (RTR) system during outages of the Common Network Interface (CNI) subsystem. This may be veried by using the OP:AUD command. Routine execution may be resumed by using the ALW:AUD command. These audits will compare the 3B21D computer and disk copy of the tables and report any mismatches. The tables will also be checked for invalid data within a table, and inconsistencies across tables. If any errors are uncovered that cannot be corrected with recent change, then the audit will correct the error as necessary. 2. FORMAT
AUD:NIDATA a [;b]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Data table to be audited: 1 Ofce Identication Data. 2 Link Conguration Data. 3 Logical-Physical Translation Data. 4 CCS7 Routing Data. 5 Subsystem Information Data. 6 Permanent Relations Data. 8 Global Title Translator Data. 9 Invalid. 10 Protocol Timer/Parameter Data. b = Species the level of detail of error reporting: DETL Generates a raw data report for each error found. (A limited number of reports are generated.) (Default) SUM Generates an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See Purpose.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:NIDATA-1
401-610-055 AUD NIDATA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages AUD-NIDATA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:NIDATA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD NMDATA
ID ............. AUD:NMDATA RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Common Network Interface (CNI) does not recommend running this audit in error correction mode. Error correction mode should only be used under the guidance of CNI Customer Support because of the critical nature of the data being audited. CNI Customer Support should always be notied in the event of an error.
1. PURPOSE NMDATA is the audit family name for the group of audits concerned with the integrity of network management dynamic data. NOTE: Routine execution of this audit may be inhibited by the UNIX- Real Time Reliable (RTR) system during outages of the Common Network Interface (CNI) subsystem. This may be veried by using the OP:AUD command. Routine execution may be resumed by using the ALW:AUD command. NMDATA 1 audits the routing tables. The routing tables consist of the network table, cluster table, page access table, the member table, the link set translation table, the Routing Priority Index (RPI) status table, and the director index to network table. One aspect of the routing tables structure is the dynamic allocation and deallocation of slots in the page access table and the member table (those tables are also referred to as the paging tables) as different network events (such as remote link failures or congestion) occur. CNI processes and maintains status information for the point code affected by those events. Those paging tables that are used in the allocation/deallocation of slots are audited to ensure that pointers connecting the tables are valid. The free entries for the paging tables are audited as well as the used entries. The elds in the routing tables that are used when routing or updating status information about a point code are also audited by NMDATA 1. The audit will look at inconsistencies between the different elds and among the different routing tables. A copy of the data being audited is also found in the Direct Link Node (DLN). When changes are made to the 3B21D computer master copy as a result of error correction, the remote node copy is updated with REMACS. WARNING The application is not notied of the change to the data as a result of error correction. For this reason it is recommended that NMDATA 1 always run in error detection mode only. NMDATA 2 audits the loadshare tables in the 3B21D computer. The loadshare tables are used for message routing. Note that NMDATA 2 is different than NMDATA 1 in that error correction results in any changes to the master copy of the tables.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:NMDATA-1
2. FORMAT
AUD:NMDATA a[;b;c;b,c]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Species the audit member to be run: 1 2 b Routing Tables Linked List and Consistency Check Audit. Loadshare Tables Audit.
= Species whether the audit should correct errors. The default value is contained within the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD) record for this audit (audrec). CORR Indicates error-correction should occur. NCG Inhibits error-detection mode.
= Species the level of detail of error reporting. DETL Indicates a raw data report for each error found should be generated. The raw data report(s) are followed by an audit completion message. A limited number of reports is generated. (Default value.) SUM Indicates only an audit completion message is generated when the audit terminates and in that case raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See Purpose. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AUD INH:AUD OP:AUD OP:AUDERR STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-NMDATA-1 AUD-NMDATA-2 Output Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:NMDATA-2 Issue 28
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:NMDATA-3
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:NMDATA-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD NODEST
ID ............. AUD:NODEST RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initiates ring node state audits. NOTE: Routine execution of these audits may be inhibited by UNIX Real Time Reliable (RTR) during outages of the Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) subsystem. This can be checked by using the OP:AUD command and routine execution can be resumed by using the ALW:AUD command. The node availability map audit compares the two principal records within the IMS driver process of the states of ring nodes. It does not check the major state in the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD). This map contains for each ring node a ag indicating whether the node is an IMS User Node (IUN) in the ACTIVE state. It is used primarily in sending state updates after changes in ring conguration and after initializations. The audit compares the map to the major states of the nodes recorded in the IMS driver process. When errors are detected the map is corrected to agree with the major states. 2. FORMAT
AUD:NODEST a[;{ bcb,c}]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Species a particular member of the NODEST family of audits. 1 b The node availability map audit. (This audit is also routinely scheduled.)
= Species whether the audit should correct errors: CORR Indicates correction should occur. This is the default value. NCG Inhibits error correction.
= Species the level of detail of error reporting: DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found. This is the default value. SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See Purpose.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:NODEST-1
401-610-055 AUD NODEST
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:AUD INH:AUD OP:AUD OP:AUDERR STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-NODEST Output Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:NODEST-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD PMS
ID ............. AUD:PMS RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Runs the Plant Measurements System (PMS) database audit. 2. FORMAT
AUD:PMS 1 [;a;b;a,b] !
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors (default). NCG Audit does not correct errors. b = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the Audit Appendix, APP:AUD. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-PMS OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:PMS-1
401-610-055 AUD PMS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:PMS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD PROAD
ID ............. AUD:PROAD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Audits the Dispatch Control Table (DCT) Extended (DCTEXT), searching for suspended process creations (including forks) and terminations. It also searches for processes which have been suspended from execution for over 30 minutes and terminates them. 2. FORMAT
AUD:PROAD 1 [;a ;b ;a,b] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = CORR or NCG. CORR Audit should correct errors (default). NCG Audit does not correct errors. b = DETL or SUM. DETL Generate a raw data report for each error found followed by an audit completion message (default). (A limited number of reports is generated.) SUM Generate only an audit completion message when the audit terminates. Raw data reports are not created for any errors that are found. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See the Audit Appendix, APP:AUD. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:AUD STOP:AUD Output Messages AUD-PROAD OP-AUD Input Appendices APP:AUD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:PROAD-1
401-610-055 AUD PROAD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:PROAD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD REMACS
ID ............. AUD:REMACS RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Performs control operations on, or requests status of, the REMACS Data Audit. 2. FORMAT
AUD:REMACS: {INHALWSTATUSCYCLE aFREQ b}!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE INH = Inhibits the running of the REMACS Data Audit. Aborts any previously requested cycle(s) that may be running. This inhibit will remain in effect as long as CNI does not perform a level 4 initialization; once this occurs the inhibit will have to be reentered. = Allows the running of the REMACS Data Audit. This is the default state of the REMACS Data Audit. = Displays the current status of the REMACS Data Audit. If the audit is running or is cycling, the current frequency of invocation is also displayed. If the audit is cycling, the current cycle count will be displayed. = Cycles the REMACS Data Audit for the number of cycles entered. the audit must already be inhibited and currently not cycling for this command to be honored by REMACS. = Number of cycles. = Changes the frequency of invocation of the REMACS Data Audit to the number entered. Each time REMACS is invoked, REMACS runs the Data Audit on a portion of REMACS data; this command modies the frequency of Data Audit invocation each time REMACS itself is invoked. For example if REMACS is invoked every 200 milliseconds and the Data Audit frequency of invocation is 3, then the Data Audit will be run once every 600 milliseconds. = Data audit frequency. The Data Audit frequency of invocation is initially set to 1 (Data Audit invoked each time REMACS itself is invoked).
ALW STATUS
CYCLE
a FREQ
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE See Explanation of Message. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages AUD-REMACS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:REMACS-1
401-610-055 AUD REMACS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:REMACS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD TCS NAME
ID ............. AUD:TCS-NAME RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests one or all Trafc Control Server (TCS) audits. Format 1: Requests all TCS audits. Format 2: Requests one TCS audit. For additional information about the TCS audits see the Audit Tables at the end of AUDTCS-NAME-ERR output manual page. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
AUD:TCS a, NAME ALL AUD:TCS a, NAME b
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = TCS number (1-15). = Name of audit requested: AUCMCR AURMINT 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:TCS-AUD INH:TCS_AUD Output Messages ALW-TCS-AUD INH-TCS-AUD AUD-TCS-NAME AUD-TCS-NAME-ERR = Printout Follows. Audit TCS Call Manager call records. Audit TCS Resource Manager internal data.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:TCS-NAME-1
401-610-055 AUD TCS NAME
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:TCS-NAME-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 AUD VCA NAME
ID ............. AUD:VCA-NAME RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests an Application Processor (AP) Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. 2. FORMAT
AUD:VCA, NAME a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Name of audit requested: BHMDB DCASTATE IACELL IACST IAIZOT OS OSCLCK PPBLK TMPPS VCAS VCDB VCFINFO VCLISTS VCMPT VCMS VCPAFID VCSTATE VCTGI VCTMR VCTP 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Audit inactive or Voice Channel Administration (VCA) is active on the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) and not on the AP. Try again with the AUD:ECP-NAME input command. OK = Good. Audit has been aborted or was not running. Backhaul Manager (BHM) database audit. Dynamic Call Assignment State audit. Voice Channel Administration (VCA) cell interprocessor audit. VCA cell site trunk interprocessor audit. VCA idle zone ofce trunk interprocessor audit. Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) audit. OSDS clock audit. Packet pipe blocking bit (Blocking From DCS [BFD] and Blocking From MSC [BFM]) status audit. VCA Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) packet pipe structure audit. Inter-vendor trunk state audit. VCA database audit. VCA Interfering neighbor list in fin_info table audit. VCA list audit. VCA packet pipe member pointer table audit. VCA member structure audit. VCA paf2indx/indx2paf and Digital Control Channel (DCCH) channels in chan_usage table audit. VCA state validation audit. VCA trunk group index table audit. VCA timer structures audit. VCA terminal process table audit.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 AUD:VCA-NAME-1
401-610-055 AUD VCA NAME
RL
?E 5. REFERENCES
= Error.
IM/OM References: Input Messages AUD:ECP-NAME Output Messages AUD-VCA-NAME-E-C
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE AUD:VCA-NAME-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 BKUP DATABASE DB
ID ............. BKUP:DATABASE RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests the master copy of the specied database be backed up to disk in the dbbackup directory. All changes made to the databases are made to the master copy in /1apx10/dbdata or the Administrative Call Processing/Database Node (ACDN) copy for ACDN master databases. A backup causes the master copy of one or all databases to be backed up into the /1apx10/dbbackup directory. The LAESDB, LAESTKDB, LLCDB, PRTLTDB, RGDB, VDN2PDB, VLRCSTDB, VLRDB, VLRUZDB, VS2PDB, and WINTRIGDB databases do not have full backup copies. Although the BKUP:DATABASE command may be executed on these databases, the resulting le in the /1apx10/dbbackup directory contains only the basic structure of the database without any records. When one member of a database dependency group is backed up, all databases in that group will be backed up to maintain consistency. The dependency groups are: 1. 2. 3. MUFDB, CCFDB, SUBAUXDB, AUDB, SUBUZDB, UZDB, CNIDDB, DN2PDB, P2LDNDB, S2PDB, WINCRDDB, WINSRVDB, WINTDADB, SUBMBRDB, SUBPLTDB. ATDB, RTDB, REDB, PDTDB. IUNDB, APCDNDB, RDTKDB, CEQDB, TRUNKDB, FCIDB, CGSADB, FCAUXDB, MCADB, PCTNDB, RESELDB, DCSDB, IWFDB, RSAUXDB, DLCDB, APDB, APGTTDB, APOFIDDB, APPC2LSDB, APSS7LKDB, APSS7SSDB, RCSLINKDB, APFRMDB, BSDB, CICDB, SS7LSDB, LACLDB, FCSDB, CDMEQPDB, CELLDB, FINDB, IOSFACEDB, MODCELLDB, NID2SECDB, RNCTRKDB, ZID2SECDB. OPCLASSDB, OPTYPEDB. APOPDSTDB, APOPMSGDB. ECPDB, FSCODEDB. VLRDB, VDN2PDB, VLRUZDB, VS2PDB, WINTRIG. CDHFLDB, CDHNLDB. TELSGRPDB, TELSCRNDB. CHRATEDB, TARIFFDB, DAYPGDB, EXCDAYDB, CIEXPDB, TREATDB. LAESDB, LAESTKDB. TONEDB, TAMAPDB.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 BKUP:DATABASE-1
The dependency groups specic to the Inter-Operability Specication (IOS) Base Station Controller (BSC) conguration are: 1. APCDNDB, APDB, APFRMDB, APGTTDB, APOFIDDB, APPC2LSDB, APSS7LKDB, BSDB, CDMEQPDB, CELLDB, CEQDB, CGSADB, DCSDB, DLCDB, FCAUXDB, FCIDB, IUNDB, IWFDB, LACLDB, MCADB, MODCELLDB, PCTNDB, RCSLINKDB, RDTKDB, RESELDB, RNCTRKDB, RSAUXDB, SS7LSDB, TRUNKDB, APSS7SSDB, CICDB, FCSDB, FINDB. CDHFLDB, CDHNLDB. APOPDSTDB, APOPMSGDB. OPCLASSDB, OPTYPEDB. ECPDB, FSCODEDB. BSLKDB, IOSCELLDB, IOSHODB, LUBSCDB, OVBSDB SHICCDB, SHODB.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
2. FORMAT
BKUP:DATABASE;DB a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Database name: ALL All database members. ADAPTPGDB Adaptive Paging. AMACCDB Automated Message Accounting Conguration and Control. APCDNDB AP Call Processing/Database Node (CDN). APDB Application processor equipage. APFRMDB Application processor frame equipage. APGTTDB Application processor global title translation. APOFIDDB Application processor ofce identication. APOPDSTDB Application processor output message destination. APOPMSGDB Application processor output message formats. APPC2LSDB Application processor point code to link set routing. APSS7LKDB Application processor Signaling System 7 (SS7) link information. APSS7SSDB Application processor subsystem number translation. ARGDB Authorized roaming group. ATDB Ambiguous tables. AUDB Authentication center. BSDB Base station conguration. BSLKDB Base station A3/A7 link. CALDB Dynamic routing calendar. CCODB Customer controlled options. CCFDB Custom calling features. CDHFLDB Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Directed Handoff Frequency List. CDHNLDB CDMA Directed Handoff Neighbor List. CDMEQPDB CDMA Digital Module (CDM) Equipage code. CELLDB Cell site information. CEQDB Cell equipage.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE BKUP:DATABASE-2 Issue 28
Cellular geographic service area. Charge rate. Circuit identication code. Charge index expansion. CDMA Inter-Band Load Management (IBLM) redirection neighbor list. CNIDDB CDMA Network ID. DAYPGDB Day program denition. DCSDB Digital cellular switch. DLCDB Data link conguration. DN2EDB Directory Number to Extended System ID. DN2PDB Directory Number to Primary. DNMODDB Dialed number modication. DPLANDB Dialing plan. DXDRTEDB Digit by digit routing. ECPDB Executive cellular processor. EXCDAYDB Exception day denition. FCAUXDB Face code auxiliary. FCIDB Face code information. FCSDB Flexible channel allocation channel set. FINDB Flexible channel allocation interfering neighbors. FLTRDB Filter. FRMDB Fraudulent serial numbers. FSCODEDB Feature/service code. I3DDB International direct distance dial. ICDB Carrier information. IMRDB Input message routing. IOSCELLDB Inter-Operability Specication (IOS) cell. IOSFACEDB IS634 cell site sector equipped information. IOSHODB IOS cell handoff information. IUNDB Inter-process message switch user node. IVCDB Inter-vendor cell. IVTDB Inter-vendor trunk. IWFDB Inter-working function. LACLDB Local area cluster information. LUBSCDB IOS cell list under abutting BSC. MCADB Multiple component assignment. MMCMDNDB Mobile directory number on multiple message center. MMCSRDB Special routing on multiple message center. MODCELLDB CDMA Modular Cell Equipage. MRDB Message routing. MSIDMPCDB Mobile Identication Number (MIN) - based point code routing for Mobile Positioning Center (MPC). MUFDB Subscriber. NETDB Cellular networking. NETMSCDB Network Mobile Switching Center (MSC). NID2SECDB IS634 cell site sector equipped information for provisioned Network IDs. NNBRDB Network neighbor. OAMPRXYDB Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) proxy. CGSADB CHRATEDB CICDB CIEXPDB CIRNLDB SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 BKUP:DATABASE-3
OPCLASSDB OPTYPEDB ORBDB OVBSDB P2LDNDB PCTNDB PDTDB PNDB RCSLINKDB RDTKDB REDB RESELDB RLSDB RLSTODDB RNCTRKDB ROMDB RSAUXDB RTDB S2PDB SACDB SHICCDB
SHODB SS7LSDB STARTDB STDLDB SUBAUXDB SUBMBRDB SUBPLTDB SUBUZDB TAMAPDB TARIFFDB TELSCRNDB TELSGRPDB TGLDB TISECURDB TONEDB TREATDB TRUNKDB USERDB UZDB WINCRDDB
Output message class. Output message type. Object Request Broker. Other Vender Base Station. Primary Mobile Station Identication (MSID) to local Directory Number (DN). Point code to trunk member. Primary digit tables. Ported numbers list. Radio Cluster Server (RCS)/ Microcell signaling link. Radio-to-trunk translator. Resolution entries. Reselection control channel list. Route list selector. Route list selector time of day. Radio Network Controller (RNC) Trunk Database (DB) used for Packet Core. Roamer service list. Auxiliary reselection control channel list. Resolution tables. Secondary Mobile Station Identication (MSID) to primary MSID. Service access code. IOS soft handoff Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) conguration. IOS soft handoff application conguration. SS7 link set. Start tables. Standard list. Subscriber auxiliary. Subscriber exible alerting member. Subscriber exible alerting pilot. Subscriber user zones. External Tone/Announcement Mapping. Tariff ID. Teleservice screening treatment. Teleservice screening group. Trunk group list. Technician Interface Security Database. Tones and announcements. Call treatment. Trunk group and member. Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio Access Network (OMC-RAN) user. User zones. Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) Critical Restriction Digits Database.
WINSRVDB WIN Service Database. WINTDADB WIN Trigger Destination Address Database. ZID2SECDB IS634 cell site sector equipped information for provisioned Zone Area IDs. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages REPT-DATABASE-NAME = In Progress. Database backup has begun.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 BKUP:DATABASE-5
401-610-055 CFR CELL
ID ............. CFR:CELL RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests Manual and Cell Conguration and Cell Test (MCAT). Format 1: Requests initial MCAT. Format 2: Requests secondary MCAT session. It also indicates the radio conguration used. Format 3: Requests cleanup of MCAT session. Format 4: Requests a secondary stop and normal cleanup of MCAT session. Format 5: Requests a secondary stop or cleanup of MCAT messages. This format is only valid for TDMA RCS cells only. This format has the same functionality as STOP:CFR-CELL. Format 6: Requests a secondary MCAT session for Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 and Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame. Use an initial request before entering any secondary request. As many secondary requests as needed can be used to congure a test path. After a secondary request has been entered, an initial request cannot be entered until a STOP:CFR (see input message STOP:CFRCELL) or CFR:CELL a, MULTI; MSTOP is used. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
CFR:CELL a, c; START [ CLASS h]! CFR:CELL a[, b] , c; d e[: CHANL f][ RC g][ CLASS h]! CFR:CELL a,c[ CLASS h]! CFR:CELL a, MULTI; MSTOP! CFR:CELL a[; STOP]! CFR:CELL a, b, c [, TXPORT j ] [, CARRIER i ]; d e [ RC g ] [ CLASS h ]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE START = Start the MCAT on the specied unit. The MCAT mode will be active until terminated by a STOP:CFR-CELL or CFR:CELL a, MULTI; MSTOP input message. = Cell site number (1-600): A single cell site. A range (1-32). A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:CELL-1
401-610-055 CFR CELL
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005 = Flexent identier: This eld is required for all actions except for "XMIT" and "CONFIG", where it is optional. If b is not specied the action is specied to all Code Division Multiple Access Baseband Radio (CBR)/ Pre-Distortion Code Division Multiple Access Baseband Radios (PCBRs) (Flexent CDBS) in the session. For Format 6, only CDM x is applicable. BBU x CDM x MICRO x where x = 1 - 3. Baseband Unit (BBU) is applicable to Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) cells.
where x = 1 - 16. CDMA Digital Module (CDM) is applicable to Flexent Modular cells and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. where x = 1 - 6. MICRO is applicable to TDMA and CDMA Flexent Microcells.
NOTE: a must be a single cell site number if c is any of the following: BBA x RA x [,UC y] RA x ORIG [,UC y] SU SU x ORIG c = Cell site unit: NOTE: MULTI is an option that allows you to issue the same command to multiple radios at the same time. Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages only: MULTI CBR x Flexent Modular Cell / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) baseband radio (Message Format 6 only). x = (1-3) (Flexent Modular cell) x = (1-6) (Flexent Modular Cell 4.0). Series II/Flexent only: MULTI MULTI ANT x Physical Transmit face (Message Format 2 only). x = (0-6) (Series II and modular cell) x = (optional ) (Flexent only). MULTI BBA x BBA numbers NOTE: You may enter only one BBA number at a time. (Message Format 2 only). x = (142). MULTI CBR Flexent Microcell CDMA baseband radio (Message Format 2 only). MULTI CBR x Flexent Modular Cell / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. baseband radio (Message Format 2 only, for modular cells only). x = (1-3) for Flexent Modular cell, x = (1-6) for Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. Where x can be one of the following:
A single CBR.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CFR CELL
A range (1-6). A list of CBRs separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
MULTI PCBR x Pre-distortion CDMA baseband radio (Message Format 2 only, for Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station only). x = (1-3). MULTI RA x Radio numbers (Up to 16 (non-RCS) or 5 (RCS) comma separated numbers enclosed in parentheses) (Message Format 2 only). x = (0-191) (non-RCS) x = (1-5) RCS only. Flexible Channel Allocation (FLCA), affects the following change associated with the CFR and MULTI RA commands. NOTE: If the RA is an FLCA RA, then the cell needs to have its QFAF for FLCA Dynamic Assignment (DA) set or the CFR request will be rejected. RA x [,UC y] Radio (User Channel [UC] is valid only with the TRKREQ or RATDS actions for a TDMA RA. If the RA is associated with Packet-Pipe then the technician can only use UC #3.) x = (0-191) y = (1-3). RA x ,CARRIER y Radio Carrier number (TDMA RCS cell only). x = (1-5) y = (1-2). RA x ORIG Original Radio [,UC y] (UC is valid only with the TRKREQ or RATDS actions for a TDMA RA. If the RA is associated with Packet-Pipe then the technician can only use UC #3.) x = (0-191) y = (1-3). NOTE: The SU option is not supported in Flexent TDMA. x Setup radioT{ x = (0-7) or x = (0-35) with Directional Setup. SU x ORIG Original Setup radioT{ x = (0-7) or x = (0-35) with Directional Setup. TRTU TDMA Test EDRU (Cant be used with MULTI). SU d,e = The action d and option e requested: The following table lists the conguration actions for Series II Multiple Congurations (MULTI) and CDMA Modular cells and Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Stations. It also applies to Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages.
401-610-055 CFR CELL
Cell Conguration Command Actions For Series II _ ________________________________________________________________ ACTIONS _ ________________________________________________________________ _ ________________________________________________________________ BBA only BBA & Voice Radios Voice Radios only _ ________________________________________________________________ CONFIG n VRADPC n (for Series II only). ADDCE n CDMADPC n XMITC n DELCE n PNOFFSET n _ ________________________________________________________________ where n is the option to be entered after each action. NOTE: All other SII actions are used for single radio processing, including CONFIG, VRADPC and XMITC. NOTE: For Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages the following actions are applicable: CONFIG, CDMADPC, ADDCE, DELCE. NOTE: For converged cell the following actions are applicable to a 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO) carrier: CONFIG, CDMADPC, XMITC. ADDCE: Number of CEs to add: 1-55 Non-Flexent 1-40 Flexent and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 BASEB: BASEBAND MODULE CONTROL NOTE: Options 105-115 apply to Analog in Flexent TDMA microcells. Options 110-115 are not valid if c is a TDMA RA. 100 Connect Clock and Tone (CAT) Board / turn on 1004Hz tone at 0 dBm. 101 Connect CAT/turn on 1004Hz tone at -16 dBm. 102 Disconnect CAT/turn off tone. 105 Enable muting. 106 Disable muting. 110 Turn on SAT 0 (5970 Hz). 111 Turn off SAT 0. 112 Turn on SAT 1 (6000 Hz). 113 Turn off SAT 1. 114 Turn on SAT 2 (6030 Hz). 115 Turn off SAT 2.
401-610-055 CFR CELL
CDMADPC: CBR Power Control (Microcell). 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 Select 20.5 dB RF power level. Select 20.0 dB RF power level. Select 19.5 dB RF power level. Select 19.0 dB RF power level. Select 18.5 dB RF power level. Select 18.0 dB RF power level. Select 17.5 dB RF power level. Select 17.0 dB RF power level. Select 16.5 dB RF power level. Select 16.0 dB RF power level. Select 15.5 dB RF power level. Select 15.0 dB RF power level. Select 14.5 dB RF power level. Select 14.0 dB RF power level. Select 13.5 dB RF power level. Select 13.0 dB RF power level. Select 12.5 dB RF power level. Select 12.0 dB RF power level. Select 11.5 dB RF power level. Select 11.0 dB RF power level. Select 10.5 dB RF power level. Select 10.0 dB RF power level. Select 9.5 dB RF power level. Select 9.0 dB RF power level. Select 8.5 dB RF power level. Select 8.0 dB RF power level. Select 7.5 dB RF power level. Select 7.0 dB RF power level. Select 6.5 dB RF power level. Select 6.0 dB RF power level. Select 5.5 dB RF power level. Select 5.0 dB RF power level. Select 4.5 dB RF power level. Select 4.0 dB RF power level. Select 3.5 dB RF power level.
CDMADPC: CBR Power Control (Flexent ). 55 60 65 .. .. .. 290 295 300 Select -5.5 db RF power level. Select -6.0 db RF power level. Select -6.5 db RF power level. Increment of 5 (0.5dB). Select -29.0 db RF power level. Select -29.5 db RF power level. Select -30.0 db RF power level.
401-610-055 CFR CELL
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005 CDMADPC: CBR Power Control (Flexent Modular Cell 4.0). 00 05 10 .. .. .. 290 295 300 Select -0.0 db RF power level. Select -0.5 db RF power level. Select -1.0 db RF power level. Increment of 5 (0.5dB). Select -29.0 db RF power level. Select -29.5 db RF power level. Select -30.0 db RF power level.
CDMADPC: PCBR Power Control (Flexent Station). 20 21 .. .. .. 55 56 57 .. .. .. 249 250 Select -2.0 db RF power level. Select -2.1 db RF power level. Increment of 1 (0.1dB). Select -5.5 db RF power level. Select -5.6 db RF power level. Select -5.7 db RF power level. Increment of 1 (0.1dB). Select -24.9 db RF power level. Select -25.0 db RF power level.
CDMA Distributed Base
CDMADPC: BBA Power Control (Series II). .. 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 Increment of 5 (0.5dB). Select -30 dB RF power level. Select -28 dB RF power level. Select -26 dB RF power level. Select -24 dB RF power level. Select -22 dB RF power level. Select -20 dB RF power level. Select -18 dB RF power level. Select -16 dB RF power level. Select -14 dB RF power level. Select -12 dB RF power level. Select -10 dB RF power level. Select -8 dB RF power level. Select -6 dB RF power level. Select -4 dB RF power level. Select -2 dB RF power level. Select full power level.
NOTE: The allowable BBA power control values for the PCS CDMA minicell are:
401-610-055 CFR CELL
705 706 707 708 709 710 711
Select -20 dB RF power level. Select -18 dB RF power level. Select -16 dB RF power level. Select -14 dB RF power level. Select -12 dB RF power level. Select -10 dB RF power level. Select -8 dB RF power level.
CHANL: SELECT CHANNEL NUMBER NOTE: d must be congured to run the CHANL option. chan# 1-799 or 990-1023. chan# 1-1999 (for TDMA PCS mini-cells). NOTE: For TDMA PCS mini-cells only, the upper limit of the range has been extended to 1999. CONFIG: CONFIGURE A VOICE RADIO/BBA 149 Disassociate a radio or group of radios (CDMA pilots only) or CDMA BBAs. 150 Send conguration message to radios (set up CDMA pilots only) or CDMA BBAs. 151 Select antenna face Omni (SII). 152 Select antenna face Alpha (SII). 153 Select antenna face Beta (SII). 154 Select antenna face Gamma (SII). 155 Select antenna face Delta (SII). 156 Select antenna face Epsilon (SII). 157 Select antenna face Zeta (SII). 159 Disassociate a radio or group of radios (both CDMA and 1xEV-DO pilots). 160 Send conguration message to radios (set up both CDMA and 1xEV-DO pilots). DELCE: Number of CEs to delete: 1-55 No-RCS 1-40 Flexent Micro and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. ECODC: ENCODER CONTROL NOTE: This choice is not valid if c is a TDMA RA. 201 Request to send 10kHz tone. 202 Request to stop sending 10kHz tone.
401-610-055 CFR CELL
PNOFFSET: PN offset number (0-511). RATDS: RADIO TO DS0/DS1 NOTE: When c is an RCS, this option only applies to Analog radios. 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 540 541 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 Connect RA to DS0. Connect RA to DS0 1. Connect RA to DS0 2. Connect RA to DS0 3. Connect RA to DS0 4. Connect RA to DS0 5. Connect RA to DS0 6. Connect RA to DS0 7. Connect RA to DS0 8. Connect RA to DS0 9. Connect RA to DS0 10. Connect RA to DS0 11. Connect RA to DS0 12. Connect RA to DS0 13. Connect RA to DS0 14. Connect RA to DS0 15. Connect RA to DS0 16. Connect RA to DS0 17. Connect RA to DS0 18. Connect RA to DS0 19. Connect RA to DS0 20. Connect RA to DS0 21. Connect RA to DS0 22. Connect RA to DS0 23. Connect RA to DS0 24. Connect RA to DS0 25 (for E1 mode only). Connect RA to DS0 26 (for E1 mode only). Connect RA to DS0 27 (for E1 mode only). Connect RA to DS0 28 (for E1 mode only). Connect RA to DS0 29 (for E1 mode only). Disconnect RA from DS0/DS1. Connect RA to DS0 30 (for E1 mode only). Connect RA to DS0 31 (for E1 mode only). Connect RA to DS1 0. Connect RA to DS1 1. Connect RA to DS1 2. Connect RA to DS1 3. Connect RA to DS1 4. Connect RA to DS1 5. Connect RA to DS1 6. Connect RA to DS1 7. Connect RA to DS1 8. Connect RA to DS1 9.
401-610-055 CFR CELL
610 611 612 613
Connect RA to DS1 10. Connect RA to DS1 11. Connect RA to DS1 12. Connect RA to DS1 13.
TRKREQ: TRUNK LOOPBACK CONTROL NOTE: If c is a non-RCS TDMA RA, UC must be specied. However, if the RA is associated with Packet-pipe then the technician can only use UC #3. When c is RCS, then this option applies only to Analog radios. 400 Set trunk loopback. 401 Remove trunk loopback. VRADPC: VOICE RADIO POWER CONTROL 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 Select -28 dB RF power level. Select -24 dB RF power level. Select -20 dB RF power level. Select -16 dB RF power level. Select -12 dB RF power level. Select -8 dB RF power level. Select -4 dB RF power level. One of the following: For a single radio only. Select 0 dB RF power level (0 attenuation level). For use with the MULTI option only. Select full power level, at the maximum allowed by the Voice Radio Attenuation Level (VRAL) setting. (The VRAL setting is congurable and is shown in elds 8 and 9 of the ceqface form.) NOTE: Use of the VRAL setting as the upper limit with the MULTI option protects the Linear Amplier Frame (LAF) from overload. XMITC: TRANSMITTER CONTROL 300 Turn the radio transmitter on. 301 Turn the radio transmitter off. f g = Channel number (1-666). Must be used with multi-BBA and TRTU. = Radio Conguration: 1 Default value. 3 h = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
401-610-055 CFR CELL
Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005 = Radio Carrier number applies to Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages. CDMA carrier is required for ADDCE and DELCE. Carrier is optional for CONFIG and CDMADPC. If omitted, action applies to all carriers. 1-10 for pre-R22.0 cells. 1-18 for R22.0 and later cells.
= CBR Transmit Port (TXPORT) number (1-2). Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages only. TXPORT is optional for XMITC. If omitted, action applies to the rst active TXPORT.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution where not met.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages STOP:CFR-CELL Output Messages CFR-CELL OP-CELL = = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later. Data links to the cell are down.
401-610-055 CFR RING
ID ............. CFR:RING RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If the ring initialization is successful any subsequent problems which cause it to go down will probably cause an IMS level 3 or higher initialization unless Manual Ring Mode is in effect. See the REPT MANUAL RING MODE output message for details. **WARNING** Use of this command with option LEVEL may be serviceaffecting and should only be used after consulting with the appropriate customer technical support group.
1. PURPOSE Congures the ring to include or exclude ring node(s) from the active ring segment or, if the ring is down, initialize it. In addition, a level [0345] ring recovery and a clearing of ring Error Analysis and Recovery (EAR) history can be executed. 2. FORMAT
CFR:RING [,a [,b] ,a [,b];EXCLUDE ,a [,b];INCLUDE] ,a;MOVFLT ,ZEROCNTS ,LEVEL c]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Species a ring node or, if b is present, the rst of a range of ring nodes (in the direction of ow of ring 0). a is of the form {RPCNx 0 LNx y} RPCN Indicates a ring peripheral controller node. LN x y b Indicates a link node. A Ring Node (RN) group number (00-63) with explicit leading zero for group numbers less than 10. The nodes position in the RN group (1-15).
= Species the last node in the range begun by a. b is of the form {RPCNx 0 LNx y}
= Species the level of ring EAR recovery requested. c is of the form {0 3 4 5}
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:RING-1
401-610-055 CFR RING
INCLUDE
= This is a request to make ring nodes part of the active ring segment. This is the default state for this command. If node(s) are specied, only those nodes will be added to the active ring segment in response to this command. If no nodes are specied, the new conguration will include as many nodes as possible. If the ring is down, it will be initialized. If an isolated ring segment currently exists, the requested node or nodes must include the BISOs and/or EISOs nearest isolated neighbor node, or segment, so as not to fragment the existing isolated segment.
EXCLUDE
= This is a request to isolate specied node(s) from the active ring segment. This may cause inclusion or isolation of other nodes to form a workable ring. Active ring nodes cannot be isolated. A section of the ring cannot be isolated such that the remaining active ring segment is too short. That is, the active ring segment must contain a minimum combination of ring nodes and interframe buffers to allow simultaneous propagation of long messages plus the token message. Note that when the system attempts to choose active BISO and EISO ring nodes to isolate a given requested range of node(s), this threshold could be crossed. If an isolated segment currently exists, the node or nodes requested must either include the BISO and/or EISO node(s) or must already be excluded from the active ring segment.
MOVFLT
= This is a request to move an indication of a faulty ring interface from the currently isolated ring node to the adjacent ring node, a, and to recongure the ring so that a becomes the isolated node. Automatic ring error analysis cannot always determine which of two adjacent nodes is at fault. When manual maintenance indicates that the wrong ring node has been isolated, this command is used to correct the ring conguration. Such correction may not be possible using other methods because it may be essential to have an isolated node adjacent to the fault and the ring may be too small to allow both nodes to be isolated, even temporarily. This form of the command is accepted only when a single node is currently isolated and the specied node, a is adjacent (for example: a is the BISO or EISO ring node) and is not undergoing restoral.
ZEROCNTS
= This is a request to clear the history of past level 0, level 3, level 4 and level 5 ring recoveries. Also, ring EARs mode will be set to the stable mode.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:RING-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CFR RING
If this request is typed when the ring status is unstable, the request will be rejected. If this request is typed within the condence interval associated with a successful ring restoration, approximately 5 seconds, the request will be rejected. If ring EARs mode is the quasi-instable mode, then after this request is completed, ring EARs mode will be switched to the stable mode and the information "RING ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED" will be removed from 1105 display page. The key idea of this request is to clear the ring EAR recovery history and set ring EARs mode to the stable state. Consequently, when the next ring communication failure occurs, ring EAR will rst try to execute the lowest level ring EAR recovery. LEVEL c = Use of this option may be service-affecting. See the WARNING on the rst page of this message. This is a request to execute a specic level ring recovery and clear the recovery history of ring EAR. If this request is typed when the ring status unstable, this request will be rejected. If this request is typed within the condence interval associated with a successful ring restoration, approximately 5 seconds, the request will be rejected. If ring EARs mode is the quasi-instable mode, then after this request is completed, ring EARs mode will be switched to the stable mode and the information "RING ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED" will be removed from the 1105 display page. This command will rst zero the ring recovery history and then execute the requested level of ring recovery. This ring recovery will not be counted in ring EARs recovery history. If a ring communication failure occurs during the manual level [0345] ring recovery, ring EAR will trigger a level 3 ring recovery. Ring congurations established by this command have no special permanence. They are not remembered as having been requested manually and they do not change the ring interface hardware maintenance states of the nodes. For example, a ring segment isolated by this command and not containing a ring fault may be included back into the active ring segment by any subsequent ring conguration change, such as by a fault recovery, diagnostic, restore or subsequent CFR:RING command. An exception is that nodes in the GROW major state will always be kept isolated to prevent installation from causing ring recoveries.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CFR:RING-3
401-610-055 CFR RING
The ring can not be recongured using the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE options if either the current BISO and/or EISO ring node is not active. A ring with an inactive BISO and/or EISO node is in a transient state, restoral of this node(s) will be given top priority. The MOVFLT option may be used subject to limitations described above. When the ring is down, the CFR:RING command (without options) will attempt to initialize the ring. This requires at least one RPCN node in the STBY state. (A successful RST:RPCN input command will leave the RPCN node in the STBY state when the ring is down). The ring initialization will not, in itself, restore any IUNs to service. Ring initializations are much slower than ring recongurations. Allow several minutes per one hundred nodes equipped in the ofce. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG RL = No Good. The request was not accepted, reason to follow. = Retry Later. The CFR:RING command can not execute at this time, reason to follow.
The ring is recongured or initialized as per the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE or MOVFLT or LEVEL c keyword explanation above. NOTE: Ring recongurations abort diagnostics of ring nodes. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages EXC:OFLBOOT STOP:OFLBOOT Output Messages CFR-RING EXC-OFLBOOT REPT-MANUAL STOP-OFLBOOT
Other References: 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 254-303-111 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Output Messages Manual 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - International Link Node Signaling Link Operating Procedures Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CFR:RING-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 CHG GEN
ID ............. CHG:GEN RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Changes the Common Network Interface (CNI) incore view of the CNI Generic ID. It is to be used once at the completion of Broadcast Warning Message (BWM) additions or generic updates. 2. FORMAT
CHG:GEN!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE None. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CHG-GEN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CHG:GEN-1
401-610-055 CHG GEN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CHG:GEN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CHG MRVT
ID ............. CHG:MRVT RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Changes or displays the Message Routing Verication Test (MRVT) Delay (D) parameter which is used in the calculation of the T1 timer. 2. FORMAT
CHG:MRVT[ a]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = New value of the delay parameter (8-15 seconds). NOTE: If this argument is not present on the command line, the current value of the delay parameter is displayed. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages EXC:MRVT Output Messages CHG-MRVT EXC-MRVT REPT-MRVR = Printout Follows. Followed by a CHG-MRVT output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CHG:MRVT-1
401-610-055 CHG MRVT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CHG:MRVT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CHG PAUTH
ID ............. CHG:PAUTH RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Changes the password for a given user Identity (IDENT). Either password prex or password sufx or both must be entered. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
CHG:PAUTH:IDENT "a",{PSSWDPFX "b"PSSWDSFX "c"}! CHG:PAUTH:IDENT "a",PSSWDPFX "b",PSSWDSFX "c"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Identity of the person or group that uses the password prex and sufx, in one to eight letters and/or digits. = Password Prex (PSSWDPFX) in three letters and/or digits. = Password Sufx (PSSWDSFX) in six to 13 characters.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. One of these messages may follow: NON-EXISTENT PERSON IDENTITY The given person identity does not exist in the personal authority administration. PARAMETER(S) MISSING Necessary parameters are missing. Either a password prex or password sufx or both must be entered. PASSWORD PREFIX ILLEGAL LENGTH The given password prex is not equal to three characters in length. PASSWORD PREFIX NOT UNIQUE The given password prex already exists in the password authority administration. PASSWORD SUFFIX ILLEGAL LENGTH The given password sufx is greater than 13 characters in length. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Password or personal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Password and identity has been changed in the database. = Retry Later. One of these messages may follow: AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CHG:PAUTH-1
401-610-055 CHG PAUTH
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:PAUTH DEL:PAUTH VFY:PAUTH RNM:PSSWD Output Messages VFY-PAUTH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CHG:PAUTH-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CHG PROFL
ID ............. CHG:PROFL RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Adds or removes a Command Group (COMGR) from a prole Identity (IDENT). This allows a prole to contain a set of command groups. The IDENT must already exist in the Prole (PROFL) database. 2. FORMAT
CHG:PROFL:IDENT "a",ACTION b,COMGR c,[-d],[-e],[-f],[-g],[-h],[-i],[-j],[-k] [-l],[-m],[-n],[-o],[-p],[-q,][-r]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c-r = Identity of the prole in one to eight letters and/or digits. = The action to perform on the prole, either INCLUDE or EXCLUDE the given command group(s). = Command group.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. PASSWORD ENHANCEMENT NOT ACTIVATED This command is valid only for applications running with the Password Enhancement feature enabled. PROFILE IDENTITY DOES NOT EXIST The given prole identity does not exist in the prole authority administration. UNABLE TO ACCESS PROFILE ADMINISTRATION Prole authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Command group successfully added to or removed from prole. = Retry Later. PROFILE ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Prole information is currently being updated. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:PCGRP ADD:PROFL DEL:PCGRP DEL:PROFL VFY:PCGRP VFY:PROFL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CHG:PROFL-1
401-610-055 CHG PROFL
Output Messages VFY-PROFL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CHG:PROFL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CHG SLK
ID ............. CHG:SLK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a change in the minor state of a Signaling Link (SLK). A request is made to change the minor state of the particular SLK to the specied state or to request the transfer of the SLK from the active to the standby Voice Frequency Link (VFL). It should be noted that entering either of these requests does not guarantee the specied action. Successful SLK prove-in is required to accomplish either of these requested actions. For example, when a request is made to change a link that is in the MOOS state to the IS state, the link is rst moved from MOOS to OOS. Once the link is in the OOS state, automatic link prove-in can begin. It is not until successful prove-in has been reached that the link is moved to the IS state. The minor states TEST and MOOS are maintained by the system during a node removal and restoral. However, these states are lost during a system initialization. After a system initialization, links in the UNAVAILABLE major state will be set to the GROW minor state. Links in the AVAILABLE major state will start in the OOS minor state after initialization, and will attempt to move to the IS minor state automatically. 2. FORMAT
CHG:SLK(a,b); c!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15). = Requested minor state: ARST Auto restore service. Return a signaling link to service from the MOOS state. The link will attempt to move to the IS state. Valid for major state AVL, minor state MOOS. NOTE: ARST and IS are equivalent commands. FIS This option may be used to force manual out-of-service restrictions off of a CCS7 link. Valid for CCS7 signaling links with major state AVL, MINOR state MOOS or OOS. GROW Growth. This state is used during link installation and deinstallation. Valid for signaling links with major state UNA. IS In service. Return a signaling link to service from the MOOS state. The link will attempt to move to the IS state. Valid for major state AVL, minor state MOOS. NOTE: ARST and IS are equivalent commands.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CHG:SLK-1
401-610-055 CHG SLK
MOOS Manual out-of-service. Signaling link cannot handle trafc. Typically, when performing maintenance on the link. Valid for signaling links with major state AVL. The following minor state transitions are allowed, depending on link type: For CC7 or CCIS6 links: OOS MOOS, if alternate links are IS. IS MOOS, if alternate links are IS. NOTE: MOOS state may be automatically removed by the system if all alternate links are lost. TEST Test. This state is used during link installation and de-installation. Valid for signaling links with major state UNA. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE None. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CHG-SLK
Other References: 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Ring and Ring Node Maintenance Procedures Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CHG:SLK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CHG SRVT
ID ............. CHG:SRVT RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that the SCCP Routing Verication Test (SRVT) delay parameter, which is used in the calculation of the T2 timer, be changed or displayed. The expiration of the T2 timer signies the end of the waiting period for the reception and processing of all expected SCCP Routing Verication Acknowledgement (SRVA) messages. If a request is made to change the delay parameter, and the requested value is within range, it is written onto disk and the delay parameter is updated to the new value. This new value becomes the new "default" that will be read in on initializations. The initial default is 12. 2. FORMAT
CHG:SRVT[ a]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = New value of the delay parameter (8-16). NOTE: If this argument is not present on the command line, the current value of the delay parameter is displayed to the maintenance output class. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages EXC:SRVT OP:TPC Output Messages CHG-SRVT EXC-SRVT OP-TPC = Printout Follows. Followed by a CHG-SRVT output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CHG:SRVT-1
401-610-055 CHG SRVT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CHG:SRVT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR ACKDB
ID ............. CLR:ACKDB RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Invalidates the segment name of the ACKDB so that the next invocation of either the craft shell or Display Administration Process reinitializes it. Current running process will continue to use the old copy of the ACKDB until they are terminated. 2. FORMAT
CLR:ACKDB!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages STOP:EXC-ANY STOP:EXC-USER Output Messages None. = In Progress.
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-341-230 Craft Interface Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:ACKDB-1
401-610-055 CLR ACKDB
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:ACKDB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR APPSLT
ID ............. CLR:APPSLT RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests the reset of the Periodic Signaling Link Test (PSLT) inhibit ag of one or all Application Processor (AP) signaling links. 2. FORMAT
CLR:APPSLT, SS7 ["a" ALL]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a ALL = Signaling System 7 (SS7) link number (1-512). = Resets the PSLT inhibit ag of all AP signaling links.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E PF = Error. An invalid value was entered. = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages MON:APSLK OP:APPSLT SET:APPSLT Output Messages MON-APSLK REPT-SET-APPSLT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:APPSLT-1
401-610-055 CLR APPSLT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:APPSLT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR CELL
ID ............. CLR:CELL-SYNC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Clears all Reference Frequency Timing Generator (RFTG) count buffers. 2. FORMAT
CLR:CELL a, CELLSYNC [ CLASS b ]

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Cell site number (1-600). = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CLR-CELLSYNC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:CELL-SYNC-1
401-610-055 CLR CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:CELL-SYNC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR DB DNLD
ID ............. CLR:DB-DNLD RELEASE ....... 19.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This command should only be used at the direction of technical support personnel. The improper use of this command could result in database corruption in the Call Processing/Database Nodes (CDNs) and severely impact call delivery.
1. PURPOSE Places the database download process into the normal operation mode. Clears the effects of the SET:DB-DNLD input command if the the rst group of CDNs have not completed a database download using the new database sizes. The unconditional option can be used to return the database download process to normal operation mode regardless of the success or failure of any previous CDN database download attempts. 2. FORMAT
CLR:DB DNLD[;UCL]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE UCL = Unconditional.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK = Good. Places DBcdninit process in normal operation mode if a CLR DBRESIZE message is present in /etc/log/DBIBLOG1. If message is not present, contact Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Assistance Management for support.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SET:DB-DNLD Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:DB-DNLD-1
401-610-055 CLR DB DNLD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:DB-DNLD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR DB SU
ID ............. CLR:DB-SU RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Places the database download process into the normal operation mode. Clears the effects of the SET:DB-SU command if the software update apply is aborted and the Call Processing/Database Nodes (CDNs) are not to be removed and restored. Note, DBcdninit places itself back into normal operation mode after all CDNs on the system have been removed and restored following a SET:DB-SU command. 2. FORMAT
CLR:DB SU!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages SET:DB-SU Output Messages None. = Good. Places DBcdninit process in normal operation mode.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:DB-SU-1
401-610-055 CLR DB SU
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:DB-SU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR EMERDMP
ID ............. CLR:EMERDMP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Clears the emergency dump partition status ag. The ag is set whenever an emergency dump is written to disk. Until the ag is cleared, it causes the REPT EMERGENCY DUMP PARTITION FULL output message to be printed periodically and prevents a new emergency dump being written to disk until 12 hours later. The user is thus provided sufcient time to copy out the partition contents onto a tape. 2. FORMAT
CLR:EMERDMP!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE OK PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:TAPE-EMERDMP OP:EMERSTAT Output Messages CLR-EMERDMP REPT-EMERGENCY = Good. Emergency dump partition is marked empty. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-EMERDMP output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:EMERDMP-1
401-610-055 CLR EMERDMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:EMERDMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR FANALM
ID ............. CLR:FANALM RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Performs a remote reset of the computer Fan Alarm (FANALM). The points are identied by physical location (as in Format 1) or by logical address (as in Format 2). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
CLR:FANALM;UNIT a:PT {b(b,b[,b,b...])}! CLR:FANALM;GRPN "c",DUPID d: PT{e(e,e[e,e])}!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Scanner Signal Distributor (SCSD) unit number (0-16). = Physical point number on SCSD (0-31). = Name of the logical SCSD group. Logical SCSD group names for fan alarms begin with the prex FANA. Examples are: FANACU0 FANACU1 d e = Duplex identier (0-1). = Logical point number (0-5).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:SCSD INH:SCSD OP:SCSD = No Good. SCSD administrator process is not active; no communication with SD points is possible. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-FANALM output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:FANALM-1
401-610-055 CLR FANALM
Output Messages CLR-FANALM REPT-FAN-SINGLE REPT-FAN-MULTIPLE REPT-SCSDC
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-341-110 3B20D Computer Kernel and Basic Services Software Subsystem Description
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:FANALM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR FILESYS DIR
ID ............. CLR:FILESYS-DIR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this command can result in the removal of needed le system directories.
1. PURPOSE Removes a directory from the le system. The directory must be empty (no les or subdirectories stored under the directory name) before it can be removed. 2. FORMAT
CLR:FILESYS:DIR, FN "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Pathname of the directory to be removed. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions of pathname and directory.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CLR:FILESYS-FILE IN:FILESYS-DIR OP:ST-LISTDIR Output Messages CLR-FILESYS-DIR = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-FILESYS-DIR output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:FILESYS-DIR-1
401-610-055 CLR FILESYS DIR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:FILESYS-DIR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR FILESYS FILE
ID ............. CLR:FILESYS-FILE RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this command can result in the removal of needed les and processes.
1. PURPOSE Removes a le from a directory. 2. FORMAT
CLR:FILESYS:FILE, FN "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Pathname of the le. See the User Guidelines section in this manual for denitions of pathname and le.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ST-LISTDIR Output Messages CLR-FILESYS-FILE OP-ST-LISTDIR = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-FILESYS-FILE output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:FILESYS-FILE-1
401-610-055 CLR FILESYS FILE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:FILESYS-FILE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR IMCAT
ID ............. CLR:IMCAT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Invalidates the memory segments of the old input message catalog, forcing the new one to be loaded into the main memory. This message is used during a eld update of the input message catalog. 2. FORMAT
CLR:IMCAT!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. One of these messages may follow: FILE INACCESSIBLE File did not open. SEGCODE CANNOT BE DETERMINED No segment names. SEGMENT NAME CANNOT BE CLEARED Segments not marked invalid. OK PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CLR-IMCAT = Good. Segments are marked invalid. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-IMCAT output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:IMCAT-1
401-610-055 CLR IMCAT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:IMCAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR IODRV
ID ............. CLR:IODRV RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Allows option setting in the Input/Output Processor (IOP) driver to suppress IOP driver messages. NOTE: Entering this command without the options turns off all severity levels, handler IDs and classes, but leaves the MSGSAVE ag as is. 2. FORMAT
CLR:IODRV[;LVL a(a,a[,a])][,ID b(b,b[,b...])] [,CLASS c(c,c[,c...])] [,MSGSAVE]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Severity level (1-3), where one is the most severe setting and three is the least severe. = Administrative Module (AM) handler identication: ALL APH APPL1-APPL5 CIH DUIH IOP MAINT MTH NPH SCSDH SDLH SPH TPH PPH c MSGSAVE Turns on all IDs. Application protocol handler. Reserved for application handlers. Craft interface handler. Direct user interface handler. Input/output driver. Maintenance handler. Magnetic tape handler. Network protocol handler. Scanner and signal distributor handler. Synchronous data link handler. Session protocol handler. Transport protocol handler. Presentation protocol handler.
= Thirty-two classes available. = IOP error messages will not be saved in the IODRVLOG logle.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Conict with system status. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-IODRV output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:IODRV-1
401-610-055 CLR IODRV
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:IODRV SET:IODRV Output Messages CLR-IODRV OP-IODRV
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:IODRV-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR MHD MAEC
ID ............. CLR:MHD-MAEC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Clears a given MHDs Media Access Error Counter (MAEC). The MAEC for a given MHD is set to zero. A MAEC counts all errors which could be classied as bad disk blocks (media defects). If upon investigation some or all of these errors are attributed to specic bad disk blocks, the bad disk blocks should be mapped out using the LOAD:MHD;DEFECT and INIT:MHD commands. This procedure will reset the specied MHDs MAEC back to zero. If upon further investigation none of these errors are attributed to media defects, then mapping bad blocks and formatting the disk is not necessary. In this case, the CLR:MHD;MAEC command is used to reset the specied MHDs MAEC back to zero. 2. FORMAT
CLR:MHD a;MAEC!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = MHD member number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INIT:MHD LOAD:MHD-DEFECT VFY:MHD Output Messages CLR-MHD-MAEC REPT-DKDRV = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-MHD-MAEC output message.
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual - File System Maintenance, Procedure for Handling Disk Errors
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:MHD-MAEC-1
401-610-055 CLR MHD MAEC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:MHD-MAEC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR PTN MHD
ID ............. CLR:PTN-MHD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Clears (initializes with zeroes) partitions on a specied disk. The partitions to be cleared are determined from a specle (default /etc/clearspec). Both the disk specied and its mate should be active before this message is entered. This command will be used by the applications that have Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) partitions (on removable media disk packs) which need to be cleared whenever a disk copy is generated. 2. FORMAT
CLR:PTN;MHD a [;SPECF "b"]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Identies of disk unit to be initialized with zeroes. = Pathname of specication le containing list of partition names that will be initialized with zeroes. Default will be /etc/clearspec. See the User Guidelines section of this manual for denitions of pathnames and les.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CLR-PTN = No Good. Process not initiated. = Printout Follows. Followed by an INIT-PTN output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:PTN-MHD-1
401-610-055 CLR PTN MHD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:PTN-MHD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR RUTIL
ID ............. CLR:RUTIL RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Clears all Ring Generic Access Package (RGRASP) breakpoints in the specied node. 2. FORMAT
CLR:RUTIL(a, b), {APNP}!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:RUTIL INH:RUTIL OP:RUTIL WHEN:RUTIL Output Messages CLR-RUTIL = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-RUTIL output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:RUTIL-1
401-610-055 CLR RUTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:RUTIL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR RUTILFLAG
ID ............. CLR:RUTILFLAG RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Clears specic Ring Generic Access Package (RGRASP) breakpoints in a specied node. 2. FORMAT
CLR:RUTILFLAG(a, b), {APNP}; BP c!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15). = Specic breakpoint to be cleared.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ALW:RUTILFLAG INH:RUTILFLAG Output Messages CLR-RUTILFLAG = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-RUTILFLAG output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:RUTILFLAG-1
401-610-055 CLR RUTILFLAG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:RUTILFLAG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR SRST
ID ............. CLR:SRST RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use of this command can be service affecting.
1. PURPOSE Clears the status of a route making it available, and stops the Signaling Route Set Test (SRST) for the route. This is used to reduce the amount of unnecessary signaling network management message trafc for primary or alternate routes. Format 1: ANSI Standard Format. Format 2: Lucent Format. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
CLR:SRST;DPC (a,b[,c])[;LS d]! CLR:SRST;DPC (a,e,f[,c])[;LS d]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Destination Point Code (DPC) network identier (1-254). = DPC network cluster (0-255). = DPC member identier (0-255). Include this eld if you want to stop the SRST for a single member of a cluster. Do not include this eld if you want to stop the SRST for an entire cluster. = Link set (1-511). Include this eld if you want to stop the SRST for one link set. Do not include this eld if you want to stop the SRST for all the link sets used by the DPC. = Region identier (0-31). = Cluster identier (0-7).
e f
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. The message was not recognized. Repeat the request. = Printout Follows. The request was received and will be acted on. A printout will follow later to explain in detail the results of the work initiated. = Retry Later. System resources are unavailable to execute command now.
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:SRST-1
401-610-055 CLR SRST
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CLR-SRST
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:SRST-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR SS7SRST
ID ............. CLR:SS7SRST RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Clears the route status for the specied point code. If the POPCLU keyword is used the command will clear the route status for the specied point code and if the given point code is a Populated Cluster (POPCLU), then the route status will be cleared for all other members in the same POPCLU whose congured route is the same as the populated cluster. Hexadecimal 24 bit point code is used for the ANSI or China point code format, and 14 bit point code is used for ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector) point code format. No matter which point code format is used in system, if ALL keyword is used, the command will clear all point codes (for any point code format) with an abnormal status. NOTE: If there are static members in the populated cluster which use a different route than the populated cluster, then those routes will NOT be cleared. This input command will allow the technician to clear the status of the route making it available for use, and will stop the Signaling Route Set Test (SRST) for the route. Use of this input command is only allowed when the High Speed SS7 Link (HSL) or Low Speed SS7 Link (LSL) feature is activated in the Feature Activation File (FAF). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
CLR:SS7SRST "aaaaaa"[, POPCLU] CLR:SS7SRST "bbbbb" CLR:SS7SRST ALL
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE aaaaaa bbbbb = Point code value (6 digit hex number, for example: "e61000"). = Point code value (5 digit decimal number, for example: "61000").
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E NG PF RL = Error. Error in input command format. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution were not met. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-SS7SRST output message. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:SS7SRST-1
401-610-055 CLR SS7SRST
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CLR-SS7SRST
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:SS7SRST-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR UMEM
ID ............. CLR:UMEM RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Causes the denition of an computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) transfer trace to be removed. The trace goes into the UNDEF state with successful completion of the message. 2. FORMAT
CLR:UMEM [;UCL]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE UCL = Unconditional execution.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?A ?I NG = Action eld contains an error. INVALID KEYWORD Message not allowed in a WHEN action list. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error. = No Good. Includes one of the following: TRACE NOT DEFINED The trace is not dened. UCERR The circuit is unavailable. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-UMEM output message. = Retry Later. Or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete. The system is in an overload condition.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INIT:UMEM OP:UMEM OP:UTIL Output Messages CLR-UMEM OP-UTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:UMEM-1
401-610-055 CLR UMEM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:UMEM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR UTIL
ID ............. CLR:UTIL RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes all currently dened computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoints; clears denitions. 2. FORMAT
CLR:UTIL[;RESET]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE RESET = The RESET option causes breakpoint numbering to be reinitialized; the next breakpoint dened will be given the number 1.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?A = Action eld contains an error. INVALID KEYWORD Command not allowed in a WHEN action list. NG PF RL = No Good. No GRASP breakpoints are currently dened. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-UTIL output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CLR:UTILFLAG OP:UMEM OP:UTIL WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages CLR-UTIL OP-UTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:UTIL-1
401-610-055 CLR UTIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:UTIL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CLR UTILFLAG
ID ............. CLR:UTILFLAG RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Removes the specied computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) breakpoint and clears the denition. 2. FORMAT
CLR:UTILFLAG a[;RESET]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RESET = Numeric identier (one or more decimal digits) for the breakpoint to be cleared. = If a is the last remaining dened breakpoint, then the RESET option causes breakpoint numbering to be reinitialized; the next dened breakpoint will be given the number 1. If a is not the last dened breakpoint, then the RESET keyword is ignored.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF RL = No Good. Identier does not correspond to a currently dened breakpoint. = Printout Follows. Followed by a CLR-UTILFLAG output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CLR:UTIL OP:UMEM OP:UTIL WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages CLR-UTILFLAG OP-UTIL WHEN-PID WHEN-UID
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CLR:UTILFLAG-1
401-610-055 CLR UTILFLAG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CLR:UTILFLAG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CMPR DISK CORE
ID ............. CMPR:DISK-CORE RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Compares the text portions of the disk and core images of a non-killable process. Equipment Conguration Database Library (ECDLIB), Public Library (PLIB), and 3bsgen.kern can also be compared. 2. FORMAT
CMPR:DISK,CORE,FN "a"; [, OPTNM "b",MPT "c",MHDNUM "d"]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = Pathname of the le. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions of pathname and le. = Special device le name on ofine partition (for example: /dev/root). = Pathname of mount point. = MHD number.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages CMPR-DISK-CORE = Printout Follows. Followed by a CMPR-DISK-CORE output message.
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual Display/Menu Page Name: CRAFT FM 01
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CMPR:DISK-CORE-1
401-610-055 CMPR DISK CORE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CMPR:DISK-CORE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 CMPR MHD
ID ............. CMPR:MHD RELEASE ....... 13.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this command can degrade system performance. This command should not be used without expert technical assistance.
1. PURPOSE Compares the contents of two disks or two disk partitions. A disk partition may reside on the disk of its duplex mate, or on an arbitrary disk. Also, both disk partitions may reside on the same disk. Only one CMPR:MHD or COPY:DIFF command is allowed to run at one time. If more than one is attempted, the DFC driver will deny the request and output an error code to that effect. 2. FORMAT
CMPR:MHD a [,PTN {b c-d}];[MATE MHD e] [,PTN {f g-h}] [:BLOCKS i,RO]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b and f = First member number. = Partition numbers within a range of (0 to 63), or list of partitions (r1, r2, r3, ..., rn) where the list may include 64 entries. Default will be all but the FREE, UNASGN, partitions. c-d DIAG, SWAP, and PDUMP
= A range of partition numbers where a list of up to 32 ranges (p0-p1, p2-p3, p4-p5, ..., pm-pn) may be specied. A range has the format c-d where d must be greater than c. = Second member number. If MHD e or MATE is not specied, MATE is the default. = A range of partition numbers where a list of up to 32 ranges (p0-p1, p2-p3, p4-p5, ..., pm-pn) may be specied. A range has the format g-h where h must be greater than g.
e g-h
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 CMPR:MHD-1
401-610-055 CMPR MHD
= An integer value indicating the size of the Input/Output (I/O) buffers as a multiple of disk blocks. The legal values are 1-256. If BLOCKS is not specied, the default is 256. However, if BLOCKS is not specied, and the RO option is used, then the default is 128. = All blocks on specied Moving Head Disks (MHDs) or partitions will be read into memory, but no comparison will be performed. If MHD e or MATE is not specied, the reads will only be performed on MHD a.
RO
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CMPR:MHD COPY:DIFF-SRC-MHD DUMP:MHD-BLOCK STOP:CMPR-MHD Output Messages CMPR-MHD = Printout Follows. Followed by a CMPR-MHD output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE CMPR:MHD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY ACTDISK
ID ............. COPY:ACTDISK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies a le from an active disk to an Off Line (OFL) or Out Of Service (OOS) disk. The le can be a regular le, a contiguous le (type "C" or "x"), or a block device (type "b", partition or le system). For a regular or contiguous le, the destination le will be created with type, owner, and permission ags similar to those of the source le. 2. FORMAT
COPY:ACTDISK :MHD a ,SRC "b" ,PTN "c" [,DEST "d"]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Species destination disk unit (0-255). This disk should not be active. = Full pathname of the le to be copied. This le should exist on an active disk. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions of pathname and le. = Special device lename or number of the destination partition on the non-active disk. If a name is specied, then this partition should exist on the active disk. = A pathname where the le is to be written, on the non-active le system. If this name is not specied, the path name of the source le will be used. If the name starts with a /, then the mount point will be excluded. This name should not be specied if the source is a partition or le system.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages COPY-ACTDISK = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-ACTDISK output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:ACTDISK-1
401-610-055 COPY ACTDISK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:ACTDISK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY ADDR
ID ............. COPY:ADDR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies data from virtual addresses in main memory to other virtual addresses, registers, or computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) utility variables as a response to a breakpoint. Indirect addressing may be specied. The rst listed offset is added to the value of the source address and the result is used as a virtual address of a location in main memory. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of source locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the source for the location to be copied. 2. FORMAT
COPY:ADDR a [,OFF b] [,L c,NL c] {;ADDR d;UVAR e;REG f} [;WORD]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = The starting virtual address for the source data in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. = The length of the copy in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words. The default is 1 word or byte. = The operation will use the locations beginning c lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. = The virtual address of the destination for the data in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. = A GRASP utility variable (1-50), in decimal, to be written as the destination copy. Utility variable values are reset to zero at the end of a debugging session. = The name of the register to be written as the destination copy. Valid register names are as follows: AP, ATBBGR, ATBPSW, ATBQ, ATBSAR, ATBSCR, ATBSDR, BGR, CAR, CDR, ERC, FP, HG, HSR, HSRBGC, IM, ISC, ISS, PA, PPR, PSW, R10, R11, R8, R9, RNULL, RTC, SBR0, SBR1, SBR2, SBR3, SBR4, SBR5, SBR6, SBR7, SCRATCH0, SCRATCH1, SDR, SM, SP, SSRC, SSRS, SYSBASE, T0, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, TIMERS, TOPIS, UINT0, UINT1, UINT2, UINT3, UINTER. = All addresses, offsets, and lengths are interpreted in terms of words (including addresses derived in address chains). If this option is omitted, values given are in bytes. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:ADDR-1
L c NL c
d e
WORD
401-610-055 COPY ADDR
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error or one of the following errors: INCONSISTENT KEYWORDS (NL-OFF) Negative length not allowed without OFF. INVALID KEYWORD ADDR is invalid in an immediate action. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long. INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. RANGE ERROR (UVAR) Invalid utility variable number was specied. IP NG = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = No Good. BAD REG NAME A named register is not a valid destination. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:PID COPY:UID DUMP:ADDR LOAD:ADDR WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages COPY-ADDR COPY-PID COPY-REG COPY-UID COPY-UVAR = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-ADDR output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:ADDR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY AMATAPE
ID ............. COPY:AMATAPE RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Writes primary or secondary Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) data onto tape. NOTE: Either MT0 or MT1 has to be specied. Format 1: Copies primary data. Format 2: Copies secondary data. NOTE: This command is supported for Flexent Mobility Manager - AMA (FMM-AMA) only. For Executive Cellular Processor - AMA (ECP-AMA), please refer to the input message COPY:AMATAPE-ECP. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
COPY:AMATAPE;PRIM [;DENS a];b! COPY:AMATAPE;SEC, SBLK c, EBLK d [;DENS a];b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = AMA tape density: DDS2 Length 120m, native capacity 4.0 Gbytes. DDS2C Length 120m, compressed capacity 8.0 Gbytes. DDS3 Length 125m, native capacity 12.0 Gbytes. DDS3C Length 125m, compressed capacity 24.0 Gbytes. DDS4 Length 150m, native capacity 20.0 Gbytes. DDS4C Length 150m, compressed capacity 40.0 Gbytes. b = Session type: MT0 Used if AMA data goes to the Magnetic Tape 0 (MT0). MT1 Used if AMA data goes to the Magnetic Tape 1 (MT1). c d = Sequence number of the rst block of secondary data required. = Sequence number of the last block of secondary data required.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG NG 0 5 = No Good. Tape session in progress. = No Good. Unable to send message to Tape process. = No Good. Tape sessions are inhibited. = No Good. Session type invalid. = No Good. New session not allowed.
NG 10 NG 18 NG 19
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:AMATAPE-1
401-610-055 COPY AMATAPE
NG 20 OK 5. REFERENCES
= No Good. New primary session not allowed. = Good. Request has been accepted.
IM/OM References: Input Messages ABT:AMATAPE COPY:AMATAPE-ECP STOP:AMATAPE Output Messages REPT-AMA-SESSION-E REPT-AMATAPE-ER REPT-AMATAPE-SESS-C
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:AMATAPE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY AMATAPE ECP
ID ............. COPY:AMATAPE-ECP RELEASE ....... 14.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Writes primary or secondary Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) data onto tape. NOTE: Either ST1 or ST2 has to be specied. Format 1: Copies primary data. Format 2: Copies secondary data. NOTE: This command is supported for Executive Cellular Processor - AMA (ECP-AMA) only. For Flexent Mobility Manager - AMA (FMM-AMA), please refer to COPY:AMATAPE. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
COPY:AMATAPE;PRIM, MT a [;DENS d];e! COPY:AMATAPE;SEC, MT a, SBLK b, EBLK c [;DENS d];e!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = Tape drive number. = Sequence number of the rst block of secondary data required. = Sequence number of the last block of secondary data required. = AMA tape density. The control le holds the default option (see SET:AMACONTROL-ECP). DAT 600,000 AMA Blocks to (60/90m) DAT. HIGH 6250 BPI operation. MED 1600 BPI operation. e = Data stream: ST1 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 1 (ST1) data stream. ST2 Used if AMA data goes to the Stream 2 (ST2) data stream. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG CODE 1 = No Good. Tape sessions are manually inhibited, or other necessary conditions for command execution were not met. PF = Printout Follows. Tape writing is allowed and session will be started. REPT-AMATAPE-SESS-C-ECP or REPT-AMATAPE-ER-ECP will be output when tape writing is complete. REPT-AMA-SESS-ECP will be output when session is started.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:AMATAPE-ECP-1
401-610-055 COPY AMATAPE ECP
NOTE: The number of AMA records written depends upon the density specied (high density writes more records). RL CODE 0 = Retry Later. Tape session already in progress. RL CODE 2 = Retry Later. Internal audit invoked. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ABT:AMATAPE-ECP COPY:AMATAPE STOP:AMATAPE-ECP Output Messages REPT-AMATAPE-ER-ECP REPT-AMATAPE-SESS-C-ECP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:AMATAPE-ECP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY BKDISK
ID ............. COPY:BKDISK RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies selected on-line disk partitions to tape in the Load Disk From Tape (LDFT) format. The partitions must be specied in a specication le. The default for the specication le name is /etc/pdtspec. The full pathname must be given for each partition, and only one partition can appear on each line. If the system is booted on the primary root le system, for those partitions having backup partitions, the backup partitions are written to tape. If the system is booted on the backup root le system, the primary disk partitions are written to tape. Partitions without backup partitions are written from the primary partitions in both cases. Collectively the partitions make up one logical volume. Format 1: Copies the partitions to magnetic tape in single volume format. Format 2: Acknowledges the mounting of a new tape by the user. Format 2 is only used in conjunction with Format 1. Format 3: Copies partitions to a Digital Audio Tape (DAT) in multi-volume format. On a 3B21D Computer with a Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive, Format 3 is used to format the DAT with multiple logical volumes, provided the tape already contains the TOP le at the beginning of tape. (The TOP le is considered to be Session 1 Volume 0 and is written by the COPY:TAPE:TOP command.) One or more of these logical volumes form a backup session. A DAT may be formatted with no more than nine (1-9) backup sessions in sequential order. A backup session may contain any combination of logical volumes meeting the following criterion: the logical volumes within a session must be ordered such that any given volume identied by its logical volume number has a greater number than the previous volume in the session. See section 3 for the mapping of logical volume numbers to the volume names they represent. By default, Format 3 will try to append logical volumes to the current end of data mark. There are optional parameters for session and volume position to request that a logical volume be appended to the end of a specic logical volume on the DAT for the purpose of overwriting the DAT from that point forward. This option is only valid for overwriting logical volumes within the most recent backup session or for appending a logical volume for the next session to the last logical volume of the specied positioning session.
NOTE: When specifying a DAT as the tape device, COPY:BKDISK will always use a DAT device which writes low density (uncompressed) data to satisfy a requirement of LDFT processing. In the event that the specied DAT device writes high density (compressed) data, COPY:BKDISK will override the selection and use the equivalent low density DAT device. For example, if the high density SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:BKDISK-1
rewind DAT device (/dev/mt00) is specied, COPY:BKDISK will override the selection and use the low density rewind DAT device (/dev/mt08). 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
COPY:BKDISK;START:SRC "a",TD "b",TPSIZE c [,FN "d"][,MRG] [,EXT] [,SKP] [,NODMTMSG] [,COM]! COPY:BKDISK;ACK:TPSIZE c! COPY:BKDISK;MULTI:SRC"a",TD "b",SESS e,VOL f [,PSESS g, PVOL h] [,FN "d"][,MRG] [,EXT] [,SKP] [,NODMTMSG] [,COM]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Pathname that species the boot disk. See the User Guidelines in this manual for a description of special device le names. = Special device le name of the tape drive to be used. See NOTE in the PURPOSE section for additional information. Also, see the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions and examples of tape device names. = Species the size of the tape mounted. The tape size is in meters for Digital Audio Tapes (DATs). The acceptable range for a DAT tape size is 30 to 150. The format requires entry of the tape size separated from the keyword by a space. = Specication le name that contains a set of partitions to be written to tape. The full pathname of the le is required. = Backup session number which is used to group one or more logical volumes together. The rst backup session on tape must be numbered backup session 1 and increased sequentially thereafter with a maximum value of 9. = Logical volume number which identies the group of partitions being written to tape. The logical volume numbers have a range from 1 to 9 with the following association to logical volume names: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AMTEXT AMODD SMTEXT SMODD1 SMODD2 SMODD3 SMODD4 SMODD5 SMODD6
d e
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:BKDISK-2 Issue 28
= Positioning backup session number which identies a backup session on tape. The range of positioning backup session numbers is 1 to 9. This number is used along with the positioning logical volume number to locate a specic logical volume on tape to which to append the new logical volume. The absence of the positioning elds will result in the logical volume being appended to the current end of data mark on tape. = Positioning logical volume number. The range of positioning logical volume numbers is 0 to 9. Note that 0 is included in this range to allow for appending to the TOP le. Refer to the explanation of eld g for more information. = Writes generic and database partitions as one generic sequence. With this option, the specication le should contain both database and generic partitions. As the default, if the specication le contains generic and database partitions, then two sequences will be created. Note that the default action is not supported for a multi-volume LDFT tape. The user must specify this option when the specication le contains both database and generic partitions and input command Format 3 is being used. = LDFT extended format tapes where the data blocks can be up to 6K bytes. This option cannot be used on a Kennedy tape drive controlled by a UN134 PC. = Skip block usage bitmap and unused data blocks when writing le systems to tape. Use of this option is generally recommended, because it will conserve tape, if possible. This will usually save time also. Note, however, that tape reading and writing time may double when this option is used with streaming tape drives (drives without mechanical tensioners or vacuum columns) in a worst-case data scattering scenario.
MRG
EXT
SKP
NODMTMSG = Upon completion, the DISMOUNT TAPE AND LABEL message will not be printed. COM = This option must be used when creating an RTR disk image that contains a common VTOC (a VTOC containing both the 3B21D lboot partitions) or when creating other generic text tapes that will be shared among 3B21D processors.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D NG = Data eld contains an error. = No Good. A fatal error was encountered because the actual disk writer or the user acknowledgement program (invoked by COPY:BKDISK;ACK) could not be initiated. Try the command again. If the process fails again, seek technical assistance. = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-BKDISK output message.
PF
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:BKDISK-3
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages STOP:BKDISK COPY:TAPE-TOP DUMP:BKTAPE Output Messages COPY-BKDISK
Other References: 254-341-114 Field Operations Tools Software System Description 3B20D Computer
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:BKDISK-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY BKTAPE
ID ............. COPY:BKTAPE RELEASE ....... 20.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies the contents of a multi-volume formatted Digital Audio Tape (DAT) from a source DAT drive to a destination DAT drive. The default action is to make a complete copy of the source DAT. If the optional session number is specied, then the multi-volume formatted data is copied from the beginning of the specied session on the source DAT and appended to the end of the previous session on the destination DAT. NOTE: COPY:BKTAPE will always use a destination DAT device which writes low density (uncompressed) data to satisfy a requirement of Load Disk From Tape (LDFT) processing. In the event that the specied destination DAT device writes high density (compressed) data, COPY:BKTAPE will override the selection and use the equivalent low density DAT device. For example, if the high density rewind DAT device (/dev/mt10) is specied, COPY:BKTAPE will override the selection and use the low density rewind DAT device (/dev/mt18). It is unnecessary to override the source DAT device since data is always returned uncompressed, regardless of format, on read operations. 2. FORMAT
COPY:BKTAPE:SRC "a", DEST "b" [,SESS c]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Device lename of the source DAT drive. See NOTE in the PURPOSE section for additional information. Also, see the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions and examples of tape device names. = Device lename of the destination DAT drive. See NOTE in the PURPOSE section for additional information. Also, see the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions and examples of tape device names. = Session number on the source DAT. This session is the starting point for the copy from the source DAT (1-9).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY-BKDISK DUMP-BKTAPE = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-BKTAPE output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:BKTAPE-1
401-610-055 COPY BKTAPE
Output Messages COPY-BKTAPE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:BKTAPE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY CELL
ID ............. COPY:CELL RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies the data link information stored in the Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) of the active Cell Site Controller (CSC)) to the NVM of the ofine CSC. 2. FORMAT
COPY:CELL a,CPYNVM!
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP = In Progress. Request accepted - output message COPY-CELL-NVMCOPY will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages COPY-CELL-NVMCOPY REPT-CELL-NVM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:CELL-1
401-610-055 COPY CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY DB
ID ............. COPY:DB RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** 1 Only use this command when absolutely necessary because all Recent Changes to the database since the last backup are lost. To ensure proper execution, COPY:DB command will automatically do the following: a Verify there is no Mobile Switching Center Database Management System (MSCDBMS) audits in progress or queued. b Block all periodic and ondemand Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) audits from executing. All ECP audit counters will remain constant while COPY:DB is in progress. Refer to the OP:ECPAUD input message for more details on audit counters. c Inhibit all Mobile Switching Center Database Management System (MSCDBMS) audits unless the are already found inhibited. If MSCDBMS audits are found inhibited, COPY:DB will ensure they remain inhibited while executing. 3 Once the COPY:DB is completed, all ECP audits will no longer be blocked from executing, and all MSCDBMS audits will be restored to the original state from the time when COPY:DB was requested. NOTE: If MSCDBMS audits are allowed at the time COPY:DB is requested, they will be restored to the allowed state. If MSCDBMS audits are inhibited at the time COPY:DB is requested, they will be left in the inhibited state. 4 After COPY:DB completes, a download to the Ring CDNs (CDN3s) for the databases modied by COPY:DB will take place. **READ PURPOSE CAREFULLY**
1. PURPOSE Overwrites the master copy of a database with the backup copy. Sends a message to the Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP) to synchronize databases with the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Linked List Indexed (LLI) databases.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:DB-1
401-610-055 COPY DB
This message requests the master copy be overwritten with the backup copy of the database. All other instances of the database including the ECP, ring CDNs, CDN4s, HVLR MM-APs are also updated to maintain consistency. The LAESDB, LAESTKDB, LLCDB, PRTLTDB, RGDB, VDN2PDB, VLRCSTDB, VLRDB, VLRUZDB, VS2PDB, and WINTRIGDB databases do not have full backup copies. Although the COPY:DB command may be executed on these databases, all records in the master database will be removed. When any member of a database dependency group is copied, all members of the dependency group will have their master copies overwritten to maintain consistency. The database dependency groups are: 1. 2. 3. MUFDB, CCFDB, SUBAUXDB, AUDB, SUBUZDB, UZDB, CNIDDB, DN2PDB, P2LDNDB, S2PDB, WINCRDDB, WINSRVDB, WINTDADB, SUBMBRDB, SUBPLTDB. ATDB, RTDB, REDB, PDTDB. IUNDB, APCDNDB, RDTKDB, CEQDB, TRUNKDB, FCIDB, CGSADB, FCAUXDB, MCADB, PCTNDB, RESELDB, DCSDB, IWFDB, RSAUXDB, DLCDB, APDB, APGTTDB, APOFIDDB, APPC2LSDB, APSS7LKDB, APSS7SSDB, RCSLINKDB, APFRMDB, BSDB, CICDB, SS7LSDB, LACLDB, FCSDB, CDMEQPDB, CELLDB, FINDB, IOSFACEDB, MODCELLDB, NID2SECDB, RNCTRKDB, ZID2SECDB. OPCLASSDB, OPTYPEDB. APOPDSTDB, APOPMSGDB. ECPDB, FSCODEDB. VLRDB, VDN2PDB, VLRUZDB, VS2PDB, WINTRIGDB. CDHFLDB, CDHNLDB. TELSGRPDB, TELSCRNDB. CHRATEDB, TARIFFDB, DAYPGDB, EXCDAYDB, CIEXPDB, TREATDB. LAESDB, LAESTKDB. TONEDB, TAMAPDB.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
The database dependency groups specic to the Inter-Operability Specication (IOS) Base Station Controller (BSC) conguration are: 1. APCDNDB, APDB, APFRMDB, APGTTDB, APOFIDDB, APPC2LSDB, APSS7LKDB, BSDB, CDMEQPDB, CELLDB, CEQDB, CGSADB, DCSDB, DLCDB, FCAUXDB, FCIDB, IUNDB, IWFDB, LACLDB, MCADB, MODCELLDB, PCTNDB, RCSLINKDB, RDTKDB, RESELDB, RNCTRKDB, RSAUXDB, SS7LSDB, TRUNKDB, APSS7SSDB, CICDB, FCSDB, FINDB. CDHFLDB, CDHNLDB. APOPDSTDB, APOPMSGDB. OPCLASSDB, OPTYPEDB. ECPDB, FSCODEDB.
2. 3. 4. 5.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:DB-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY DB
6.
BSLKDB, IOSCELLDB, IOSHODB, LUBSCDB, OVBSDB SHICCDB, SHODB.
NOTE: Ofces using ISDN User Part (ISUP) signaling must verify that the correct ISUP data is still present in DLCDB and TGLDB after the COPY:DB command is run. If ISUP trunk information changed because of the COPY:DB, it might be necessary to change the LINK and/or the Trunk Group List (TGL) form to reect the new ISUP trunk information. The following ISUP rules should be applied: RULE: Ofces using ISUP signaling on the 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) must have an instance of the LINK form for each 5ESS DCS connected to the ECP via Signaling System 7 (SS7) links. The Send Calling Party Number eld on the TGL form only applies to ISUP trunks on the 5ESS DCS. 2. FORMAT
COPY:DB a[; UCL]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Database name: ALL All database members. This option is only valid for InterOperability Specication (IOS) Base Station Controller (BSC) conguration. ADAPTPGDB Adaptive Paging. AMACCDB Automated Message Accounting Conguration and Control. AMAMDDB Automated Message Accounting Meta Data. APCDNDB AP Call Processing/Database Node (CDN). APDB Application Processor Equipage. APFRMDB Application processor frame equipage. APGTTDB Application processor global title translation. APOFIDDB Application processor ofce identication. APOPDSTDB Application processor output message destination. APOPMSGDB Application processor output message formats. APPC2LSDB Application processor point code to link set routing. APSS7LKDB Application processor SS7 link information. APSS7SSDB Application processor subsystem number translation. ARGDB Authorized roaming group. ATDB Ambiguous tables. AUDB Authentication center. BSDB Base station conguration. BSLKDB Base station A3/A7 link. CALDB Dynamic routing calendar. CCFDB Custom calling features. CCNID Custom control network identication. CCODB Customer controlled options. CDHFLDB Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) directed handoff frequency list. CDHNLDB CDMA directed handoff neighbor list. CDMEQPDB CDMA Digital Module (CDM) equipage. CELLDB Cell site information. CEQDB Cell equipage.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:DB-3
401-610-055 COPY DB
CGSADB CHRATEDB CICDB CIEXPDB CIRNLDB CNIDDB DAYPGDB DCSDB DLCDB DN2EDB DN2PDB
DNMODDB DPLANDB DXDRTEDB ECPDB EXCDAYDB FCAUXDB FCIDB FCSDB FINDB FLTRDB FRMDB FSCODEDB I3DDB ICDB IMRDB IOSCELLDB IOSFACEDB IOSHODB IUNDB IVCDB IVTDB IWFDB LACLDB LAESDB LAESTKDB LLCDB LUBSCDB MCADB MMCMDNDB MMCSRDB MODCELLDB MRDB MSIDMPCDB MUFDB NETDB NETMSCDB
Cellular geographic service area. Charge rate. Circuit identication code. Charge index expansion. CDMA Inter-Band Load Management (IBLM) redirection neighbor list. CDMA network ID. Day program denition. Digital cellular switch. Data link conguration. Directory number to extended System ID. Directory number to primary Mobile Station Identication (MSID). Dialed number modication. Dialing plan. Digit by digit routing. Executive cellular processor. Exception day denition. Face code auxiliary. Face code information. Flexible channel allocation channel set. Flexible channel allocation interfering neighbors. Filter. Fraudulent serial numbers. Feature/service code. International direct distance dial. Carrier information. Input message routing. Inter-Operability Specication (IOS) cell. IS634 cell site sector equipped information. IOS cell handoff information. Inter-process message switch user node. Inter-vendor cell. Inter-vendor trunk. Inter-working function. Local area cluster information. Lawfully authorized electronic surveillance. Lawfully authorized electronic surveillance trunk. Link layer connection. IOS cell list under abutting BSC. Multiple component assignment. Mobile directory number on multiple message center. Special routing on multiple message center. CDMA Modular Cell equipage. Message routing. Mobile Identication Number (MIN) - based point code routing for Mobile Positioning Center (MPC). Subscriber. Cellular networking. Network Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
401-610-055 COPY DB
NID2SECDB IS634 cell site sector equipped information for provisioned Network IDs. NNBRDB Network neighbor. OAMPRXYDB Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) proxy. OPCLASSDB Output message class. OPTYPEDB Output message type. ORBDB Object Request Broker. OVBSDB Other Vender Base Station. P2LDNDB Primary Mobile Station Identication (MSID) to local Directory Number (DN). PCTNDB Point code to trunk member. PDTDB Primary digit tables. PNDB Ported numbers list. PRTLTDB Period location trace. RCSLINKDB Radio Cluster Server (RCS)/ Microcell signaling link. RDTKDB Radio-to-trunk translator. REDB Resolution entries. RESELDB Reselection control channel list. RGDB Roamer greeting. RLSDB Route list selector. RLSTODDB Route list selector time of day. RNCTRKDB Radio Network Controller (RNC) Trunk Database (DB) used for Packet Core. ROMDB Roamer service list. RSAUXDB Auxiliary reselection control channel list. RTDB Resolution tables. S2PDB Secondary MSID to primary MSID. SACDB Service access code. SHICCDB IOS soft handoff Common Intelligent Carrier Card (CICC) conguration. SHODB IOS soft handoff application conguration. SS7LSDB SS7 link set. TAMAPDB External Tone/Announcement Mapping. STARTDB Start tables. STDLDB Standard list. SUBAUXDB Subscriber auxiliary. SUBMBRDB Subscriber exible alerting member. SUBPLTDB Subscriber exible alerting pilot. SUBUZDB Subscriber user zones. TARIFFDB Tariff ID. TELSCRNDB Teleservice screening treatment. TELSGRPDB Teleservice screening group. TGLDB Trunk group list. TISECURDB Technician Interface Security Database. TONEDB Tones and announcements. TREATDB Call treatment. TRUNKDB Trunk group and member. UZDB User zones. VDN2PDB Visitor Directory Number to Primary Mobile Station Identication (MSID). SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:DB-5
401-610-055 COPY DB
VLRCSTDB VLRDB VLRUZDB VS2PDB WINCRDDB
WINSCFDB WINSRVDB WINTDADB WINTRIGDB ZID2SECDB
Visitor Location Register (VLR) call status trace. Visitor Location Register (VLR). VLR user zones. Visitor secondary MSID to primary MSID. Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) Critical Restriction Digits Database. WIN Service Control Function Database. WIN Service Database. WIN Trigger Destination Address Database. WIN Trigger database. IS634 cell site sector equipped information for provisioned Zone Area IDs.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ECP-AUD Output Messages REPT-AP-COPY-DB REPT-COPY-DB REPT-DATABASE-NAME = In Progress. Database copy has begun.
401-610-055 COPY DIFF SRC MHD
ID ............. COPY:DIFF-SRC-MHD RELEASE ....... 13.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this input message can degrade system performance and result in disk data mutilation. This command should not be used without expert technical assistance.
1. PURPOSE Compares disk partitions in order to detect differences. When a difference is found, data is copied from the source partition to the destination partition. The input arguments can specify disks or specic partitions. A disk partition may reside on the disk of its duplex mate, or on an arbitrary disk. Also, both partitions may reside on the same disk. A difference generates a message which identies the location of the difference. A copy will then be performed to correct the difference. The source argument is considered to contain the correct disk data. The mismatch messages provide an audit trail of corrected disk blocks. Only one COPY:DIFF or CMPR:MHD command is allowed to run at one time. If more than one is attempted, the DFC driver will deny the request and output an error code to that effect. 2. FORMAT
COPY:DIFF;SRC,MHD a[,PTN {b c-d}];DEST,{MATE MHD e}, [PTN {f g-h}][:BLOCKS i]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b and f = Source member number. = Partition number within a range of (0 to 63), or list of partitions (r1, r2, r3, ..., rn) where the list may include 64 entries. Default will be all but the FREE, UNASGN, partitions. c-d DIAG, SWAP, and PDUMP
= A range of partition numbers where a list of up to 32 ranges (p0-p1, p2-p3, p4-p5, ..., pm-pn) may be specied. A range has the format c-d where d must be greater than c. = Destination member number. = A range of partition numbers where a list of up to 32 ranges (p0-p1, 4p2-p3, p4-p5, ..., pm-pn) may be specied. A range has the format g-h where h must be greater than g. = An integer value indicating the size of the Input/Output (I/O) buffers as a multiple of disk blocks. The legal values are 1-256. If BLOCKS is not specied, the default number of 128 will be used.
e g-h
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:DIFF-SRC-MHD-1
401-610-055 COPY DIFF SRC MHD
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CMPR:MHD STOP:COPY-DIFF Output Messages None. = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-DIFF-SRC output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:DIFF-SRC-MHD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY OOSDISK
ID ............. COPY:OOSDISK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies a specic le from an out-of-service disk to an active system disk. This message is typically used for retrieving a le from a software backup maintained on a spare disk. 2. FORMAT
COPY:OOSDISK;MHD a, SRC "b", DEST "c"[,PTN d]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = Species a non-active disk containing the source le (0-255). = Full pathname that species the le to be copied. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denition of pathname and le. = Pathname of the destination le. = Species partition number, where the source le resides in the out-of-service disk. If not specied, the partition corresponding to the le on the active disk will be used.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages COPY-OOSDISK = Printout Follows. Followed by the COPY-OOSDISK output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:OOSDISK-1
401-610-055 COPY OOSDISK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:OOSDISK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY PID
ID ............. COPY:PID RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies data from virtual addresses in main memory to the computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) utility variables. Indirect addressing may be specied. The rst listed offset is added to the value of the source address and the result is used as a virtual address of a location in main memory. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of source locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the source for the location to be copied. 2. FORMAT
COPY:PID a, ADDR b [,OFF c] [,L d,NL d] ;UVAR e [;WORD] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Process ID of the target process. = The starting virtual address for the source data in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. = The length of the le to be copied in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words. The default is 1 byte or 1 word. = Indicates that the operation should use the locations beginning d lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitations are the same as for the L option. = A GRASP utility variable (1-50), in decimal, to be written as the address of the destination of the copy. Utility variable values are reset to zero at the end of a debugging session. = All addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted in words, including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted, values given are assumed to be in bytes.
L d
NL d
WORD
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error or one of the following errors: EXTRA KEYWORD (PID) PID is invalid in a breakpoint. INCONSISTENT KEYWORDS (NL-OFF) Negative length not allowed without OFF.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:PID-1
401-610-055 COPY PID
INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. INVALID KEYWORD Destination of ADDR or REG not valid outside of a WHEN action list. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long. RANGE ERROR (PID) Process ID is out of range. RANGE ERROR (UVAR) Invalid utility variable number was specied. NG = No Good. BAD PID The PID specied is for a process for which copies are not allowed. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-PID output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:ADDR COPY:REG COPY:UID COPY:UVAR DUMP:PID LOAD:ADDR LOAD:PMEM LOAD:REG LOAD:UVAR OP:ST-PROCESS OP:UMEM Output Messages COPY-ADDR COPY-PID COPY-REG COPY-UID COPY-UVAR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:PID-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY PTN ALL
ID ............. COPY:PTN-ALL RELEASE ....... 13.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** All existing data in the destination partitions will be destroyed.
1. PURPOSE Copies one set of disk partitions into a corresponding set of partitions. A duplex disk conguration is a prerequisite for the command to work properly. To ensure data consistency, one of the Moving Head Disks (MHDs) of the duplex pair will be removed from service and the data from its copy of the source partition will be copied to the destination partition on the disk which is left active. After the copy is complete, the MHD which was removed from service will be restored. 2. FORMAT
COPY:PTN:ALL, SRC "a", DEST "b" [,ACT]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Full pathname of a le that species a list of partitions, or a special device lename of a partition to be copied. Refer to the 235-600-31x 7R/E 5ESS Switch ECD/SG Data Base Manual - Where x is the release-specic version of the specied document. = Full pathname of a le that contains the corresponding list of destination partitions, or the special device lename for a destination partition. = Leaves the system in a duplex disk conguration as it copies the partitions.
b ACT
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CLR:FILESYS-FILE Output Messages COPY-PTN-ALL = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-PTN-ALL output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:PTN-ALL-1
401-610-055 COPY PTN ALL
Other References: 235-600-31x 7R/E 5ESS Switch ECD/SG Data Base Manual - Where x is the release-specic version of the specied document. 254-341-100 SPCS File System Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer Display/Menu Page Name: CRAFT FM 01
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:PTN-ALL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY REG
ID ............. COPY:REG RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies data from computer registers to virtual addresses in main memory and in registers as an action associated with a breakpoint. Copies data from registers to computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) utility variables as either an immediate action or as an action associated with a breakpoint. Indirect addressing may be specied. The rst listed offset is added to the value of the source address and the result is used as a virtual address of a location in main memory. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of source locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the source for the location to be copied. Format 1: Executed as an action associated with a breakpoint. Format 2: Executed as either an immediate action or as an action associated with a breakpoint. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
COPY:REG a [,OFF b] [,L c] {;ADDR d;REG f;UVAR=e} [;WORD]! COPY:REG a [,L c];UVAR e [;WORD]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Species a register to be read as the source for the copy. Valid register names are as follows: AP ATBBGR Argument Pointer (AP). Register used by the Address Translation Buffer (ATB) miss routine to temporarily store the Bi-directional Gating Register (BGR). Register used by the ATB miss routine to temporarily store the Program Status Word (PSW) register. Register used by the ATB miss routine to temporarily store the q register. Register used by the ATB miss routine to temporarily store the Store Address Register (SAR) contents. Register used by the ATB miss routine to temporarily store the Store Control Register (SCR) contents. Register used by the ATB miss routine to temporarily store the Store Data Register (SDR) contents. Bi-directional gating register. Channel address register. Channel data register. Error Register (ER) clear. Frame Pointer (FP).
ATBPSW ATBQ ATBSAR ATBSCR ATBSDR BGR CAR CDR ERC FP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:REG-1
401-610-055 COPY REG
Reserved register HG. Bi-directional gating control bits of the Hardware Status Register (HSR). HSR Hardware status register. IM Interrupt Mask (IM) register. ISC Interrupt Source (IS) register clear. ISS Interrupt Source (IS) register set. PA Program address register. PPR Pulse point register. PSW Program status word. R0 General register R0. R10 Frame Pointer (FP). R11 Stack Pointer (SP). R1 General register R1. R2 General register R2. R3 General register R3. R4 General register R4. R5 General register R5. R6 General register R6. R7 General register R7. R8 General register R8. R9 Argument Pointer (AP). RNULL Null register. RTC Real time clock. SBR0 Segment Base Register 0 (SBR0). SBR1 Segment Base Register 1 (SBR1). SBR2 Segment Base Register 2 (SBR2). SBR3 Segment Base Register 3 (SBR3). SBR4 Segment Base Register 4 (SBR4). SBR5 Segment Base Register 5 (SBR5). SBR6 Segment Base Register 6 (SBR6). SBR7 Segment Base Register 7 (SBR7). SCRATCH0 JE group temp subgroup scratch register SCRATCH0. SCRATCH1 JE group temp subgroup scratch register SCRATCH1. SDR Store data register. SP Stack pointer SP. SSRC System Status Register (SSR) clear. SSRS System Status Register (SSR) set. SYSBASE Beginning address of UNIX RTR Operating System tab. T0 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T0. T1 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T1. T2 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T2. T3 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T3. T4 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T4. T5 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T5. T6 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T6. T7 JE group temp subgroup scratch register T7. TIMERS Timing circuit. TOPIS Interrupt stack pointer. UINT0 Error microinterrupt hander register UINT0. UINT1 Error microinterrupt hander register UINT1. HG HSRBGC SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:REG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY REG
UINT2 UINT3 UINTER b
Error microinterrupt hander register UINT2. Error microinterrupt hander register UINT3. Shadow error register (uint_er) loaded during an error microinterrupt.
= A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. (Used as an action associated with a breakpoint.) = The length of the copy assumed to be in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words. The default for an omitted or zero length is 1. = Species the destination virtual address for the data in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. (Used as an action associated with a breakpoint.) = Species a GRASP utility variable (1-50), in decimal, to be written as the destination copy. Utility variable values are reset to 0 at the end of a debugging session. (Can be used as an immediate action or associated with a breakpoint.) = Species the register to be written as the destination copy. (Used as an action associated with a breakpoint.) Valid register names are as follows: AP, ATBBGR, ATBPSW, ATBQ, ATBSAR, ATBSCR, ATBSDR, BGR, CAR, CDR, ERC, FP, HG, HSR, HSRBGC, IM, ISC, ISS, PA, PPR, PSW, R0, R1, R10, R11, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, RNULL, RTC, SBR0, SBR1, SBR2, SBR3, SBR4, SBR5, SBR6, SBR7, SCRATCH0, SCRATCH1, SDR, SP, SSRC, SSRS, SYSBASE, T0, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, TIMERS, TOPIS, UINT0, UINT1, UINT2, UINT3, UINTER. = All addresses and lengths are in terms of words. If this option is omitted, values given are assumed to be in bytes.
L c
d e
WORD
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error or one of the following errors: EXTRA KEYWORD (OFF) Indirection not allowed except as action of a WHEN. INCONSISTENT KEYWORDS (NL-OFF) Negative length not allowed without OFF. INVALID KEYWORD Destination of ADDR or REG not valid outside of a WHEN action list. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long. RANGE ERROR (UVAR) Invalid utility variable number was specied. IP NG = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = No Good. BAD REG NAME A named register is not a valid source or destination.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:REG-3
401-610-055 COPY REG
PF RL
= Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-REG output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:ADDR COPY:PID COPY:UID COPY:UVAR DUMP:REG LOAD:ADDR LOAD:REG LOAD:UVAR OP:UMEM WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages COPY-ADDR COPY-PID COPY-REG COPY-UID COPY-UVAR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:REG-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY SPDISK
ID ............. COPY:SPDISK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies a specic partition, or a list of partitions, from one of the system disks to an active spare disk. This command is typically used for generating a backup copy of the software on a system disk. The system disk pair must be duplexed to use this input message. 2. FORMAT
COPY:SPDISK;SRC "a", DEST "b"!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Full pathname of a le that contains a list of partitions, or a special device le name of a partition, to be copied. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions of full pathname and special device le name. = Filename for the corresponding list of destination partitions, or the special device lename for a destination partition.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages COPY-SPDISK = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-SPDISK output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:SPDISK-1
401-610-055 COPY SPDISK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:SPDISK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY TAPE EMERDMP
ID ............. COPY:TAPE-EMERDMP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies data from the emergency dump partition on a disk to a magnetic tape. NOTE: If the resulting tape is to be read on a UNIX system, it must be read using the dd command.
2. FORMAT
COPY:TAPE:EMERDMP, TD "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Tape special device le name. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denition and examples of tape device names.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CLR:EMERDMP OP:EMERSTAT OP:ST-FILESYS Output Messages COPY-TAPE-EMERDMP REPT-EMERGENCY = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-TAPE-EMERDMP output message.
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-341-100 SPCS File System Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer Display/Menu Page Name: CRAFT FM 01
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:TAPE-EMERDMP-1
401-610-055 COPY TAPE EMERDMP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:TAPE-EMERDMP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY TAPE IN
ID ............. COPY:TAPE-IN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** If a full pathname is specied on the COPY:TAPE;OUT command line, directory information is retained and the le will be placed in the same directory it was copied from, overwriting any existing version.
1. PURPOSE Copies les from a magnetic tape containing full or relative pathnames and header information, and places them in their respective directories. This command can also print a table of contents of the tape. NOTE: If the tape to be read was written on a UNIX system, it must have been written using the cpio message with the -c option.
2. FORMAT
COPY:TAPE:IN, TD "a"[,TOC][,BSDIR "b"]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a TOC b = Tape special device le name. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions and examples of tape device names. = Table of contents. Prints a list of the les on the tape with their status information. No les are created. = Pathname of the base directory into which the les on the tape will be copied. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions of pathname and directory. If the relative path is specied on the COPY:TAPE;OUT command line, the default base directory is /cft/shl/cmds. Use the BSDIR option to specify an alternate base directory. Remember, the BSDIR option does not apply if the full pathname was specied on the COPY:TAPE;OUT command line. Use the TOC option of COPY:TAPE;IN to determine how a le or list of les were copied to tape, that is whether copied by relative pathnames or by full pathnames. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-TAPE-IN output message.
NOTE:
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:TAPE-IN-1
401-610-055 COPY TAPE IN
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:TAPE-OUT Output Messages COPY-TAPE-IN COPY-TAPE-OUT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:TAPE-IN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY TAPE OUT
ID ............. COPY:TAPE-OUT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Use extreme caution when invoking this command with full pathnames. Reading a tape that contains full pathnames may destroy existing data.
1. PURPOSE Copies one or more les to a magnetic tape, along with full or relative pathnames and header (status) information. Format 1: Used to copy one or more les with full pathnames. See the User Guidelines in this manual for a denition of full pathnames. Format 2: Used to copy one or more les with relative pathnames. See the User Guidelines in this manual for a denition of relative pathnames. NOTE: If the resulting tape is to be read on a UNIX system, it must be read using the cpio command with the -c options.
2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
COPY:TAPE:OUT, TD "a" {,FN "b" ,FLIST "c"}! COPY:TAPE:OUT, TD "a" {,FN "d" ,FLIST "e"} ,BSDIR "f"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = Tape special device le name. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions and examples of tape device names. = Full pathname of the single le to be written to the tape. See the User Guidelines in this manual for a denition of full pathname. = Pathname of a le that contains a list of full pathnames of the les to be written to the tape. Used if two or more les are to be written. = Relative pathname of the single le to be written to the tape. Specify the base directory via the BSDIR option. See the User Guidelines in this manual for a denition of relative pathname. = Pathname of a le that contains a list of relative pathnames of the les to be written to the tape. Used if two or more les are to be written. Specify the base directory via the BSDIR option.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:TAPE-OUT-1
401-610-055 COPY TAPE OUT
= Pathname of the base directory where the le to be copied to tape is located. Relative pathnames are relative to this directory. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions of pathname and directory.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:TAPE-IN Output Messages COPY-TAPE-IN COPY-TAPE-OUT = Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-TAPE-OUT output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:TAPE-OUT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY TAPE TEST
ID ............. COPY:TAPE-TEST RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Writes the diagnostic test tape header block onto a magnetic tape. A demand diagnostic phase for the tape unit veries the tape has this header block (in low density) before using the tape for testing. 2. FORMAT
COPY:TAPE:TEST,TD "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Tape special device le name. See User Guidelines for denition and examples of tape device names. Select low density and rewind. The diagnostic phase will not accept the tape if the header block is written in high density.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages COPY-TAPE-TEST = Printout Follows. Followed by the COPY-TAPE-TEST output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:TAPE-TEST-1
401-610-055 COPY TAPE TEST
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:TAPE-TEST-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY TAPE TOP
ID ............. COPY:TAPE-TOP RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies a Task Oriented Practice (TOP) le(s) from disk to tape. A TOP le contains writable microcode and the Load Disk From Tape (LDFT) program used for a "deadstart." If the COM option is specied, the Very Large Main Memory (VLMM) TOP le and 3B21D TOP le are copied from disk to tape, strictly in that order. Otherwise, a hardware-platform-specic TOP le is copied. For example, if the current hardware platform is VLMM, /etc/topfile64 or /etc/topfile is copied to tape.
NOTE: When specifying a Digital Audio Tape (DAT) as the tape device, COPY:TAPE:TOP will always use a DAT device which writes low density (uncompressed) data to satisfy a requirement of LDFT processing. In the event that the specied DAT device writes high density (compressed) data, COPY:TAPE:TOP will override the selection and use the equivalent low density DAT device. For example, if the high density rewind DAT device (/dev/mt00) is specied, COPY:TAPE:TOP will override the selection and use the low density rewind DAT device (/dev/mt08). 2. FORMAT
COPY:TAPE:TOP,TD "a",[COM]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Tape special device le name. See NOTE in the PURPOSE section for additional information. Also, see the User Guidelines, in Section 2 of this manual, for denition and examples of tape device names. = Option used to create a common TOP tape which consists of both the VLMM TOP le and the 3B21D TOP le.
COM
NOTE: The input message with the COM option does not copy the Standard Main Memory (SMM) or Expanded Main Memory (EMM) TOP le. If this option is not specied, the TOP le copied to tape will be the one for the current hardware platform. See the example in the PURPOSE section. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = Printout Follows. Followed by the COPY-TAPE-TOP output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:TAPE-TOP-1
401-610-055 COPY TAPE TOP
Output Messages COPY-TAPE-TOP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:TAPE-TOP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY UID
ID ............. COPY:UID RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies data from virtual addresses in main memory to computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) utility variables as an immediate action. Indirect addressing may be specied. The rst listed offset is added to the value of the source address and the result is used as a virtual address of a location in main memory. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of source locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the source for the location to be copied. 2. FORMAT
COPY:UID a, ADDR b [,OFF c] [,L d ,NL d] ;UVAR e [;WORD] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = The utility ID of the process from which the source data will be copied. = The starting virtual address for the data in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. = The length of the copy in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words. The default is 1 byte or 1 word. = The operation will use the locations beginning d lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. = A GRASP utility variable (1-50), in decimal, to be written as the destination copy. Utility variable values are reset to zero at the end of a debugging session. = All addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted in words, including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted, values given are assumed to be in bytes.
L d NL d
WORD
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. One of these messages may follow: EXTRA KEYWORD (UID) UID is not valid in a WHEN action list. EXTRA KEYWORD (UID) UID is invalid in a breakpoint. INCONSISTENT KEYWORDS (NL-OFF) Negative length not allowed without OFF.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:UID-1
401-610-055 COPY UID
INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. INVALID KEYWORD Destination of ADDR or REG not valid outside of a WHEN action list. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long. RANGE ERROR (UID) Utility ID is out of range. RANGE ERROR (UVAR) Invalid utility variable number was specied. NG = No Good. One of these messages may follow: BAD UID The UID specied is for a process for which copies are not allowed. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by the COPY-UID output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:ADDR COPY:PID COPY:REG COPY:UVAR DUMP:UID LOAD:UVAR OP:UMEM Output Messages COPY-ADDR COPY-PID COPY-REG COPY-UID COPY-UVAR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:UID-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY UVAR
ID ............. COPY:UVAR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Copies data from a computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) in utility variable to virtual addresses in main memory and in registers as an action associated with a breakpoint. Copies data from another GRASP utility variable as an immediate action or as an action triggered by a breakpoint. Indirect addressing may be specied. The rst listed offset is added to the value of the source address and the result is used as a virtual address of a location in main memory. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of source locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the source for the location to be copied. Format 1: Required by action to be triggered by a breakpoint. Format 2: Either executed immediately or triggered by a breakpoint. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
COPY:UVAR a [,OFF b] [,L c,NL c] {;ADDR d ;REG f} [;WORD]! COPY:UVAR a [,L c,NL c] ;UVAR e [;WORD]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = A GRASP utility variable (1-50), in decimal, as the source for the copy. Utility variable values are reset to zero at the end of a debugging session. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. (Used as an action associated with a breakpoint.) = The length of the copy in bytes unless the WORD option is specied. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words. The default is 1. = The operation should use the locations beginning c lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. = The destination virtual address for the data in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. (Used as an action associated with a breakpoint.) = A GRASP utility variable (1-50), in decimal, to be written as the destination copy. Utility variable values are reset to zero at the end of a debugging session. (Can be used as an immediate action or associated with a breakpoint.)
L c NL c
d e
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:UVAR-1
401-610-055 COPY UVAR
= The register to be written as the destination of the copy. (Used as an action associated with a breakpoint.) Valid register names are as follows: AP ATBBGR ATBPSW ATBQ ATBSAR ATBSCR ATBSDR BGR CAR CDR ERC FP HG HSRBGC HSR IM ISC ISS PA PPR PSW R0 R10 R11 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 RNULL RTC SBR0 SBR1 SBR2 SBR3 SBR4 SBR5 Argument Pointer (AP) Register used by the ATB miss routine to the Bi-directional Gating Register (BGR). Register used by the ATB miss routine to the Program Status Word (PSW) register. Register used by the ATB miss routine to the q register. Register used by the ATB miss routine to the Store Address Register (SAR) contents. Register used by the ATB miss routine to the Store Control Register (SCR) contents. Register used by the ATB miss routine to the Store Data Register (SDR) contents. Bi-directional gating register. Channel address register. Channel data register. Error Register (ER) clear. Frame Pointer (FP). Reserved register HG. Bi-directional gating control bits of the Register (HSR). Hardware status register. Interrupt Mask (IM) register. Interrupt Source (IS) register clear. IS register set. Program address register. Pulse point register. Program status word. General register R0. Frame pointer. Stack Pointer (SP). General register R1. General register R2. General register R3. General register R4. General register R5. General register R6. General register R7. General register R8. Argument pointer. Null register. Real time clock. Segment base register SBR0. Segment base register SBR1. Segment base register SBR2. Segment base register SBR3. Segment base register SBR4. Segment base register SBR5. temporarily store temporarily store temporarily store temporarily store temporarily store temporarily store
Hardware Status
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:UVAR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 COPY UVAR
SBR6 SBR7 SCRATCH0 SCRATCH1 SDR SP SSRC SSRS SYSBASE T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 TIMERS TOPIS UINT0 UINT1 UINT2 UINT3 UINTER WORD
Segment base register SBR6. Segment base register SBR7. JE group temp subgroup scratch register SCRATCH0. JE group temp subgroup scratch register SCRATCH1. Store data register. Stack pointer. System Status Register (SSR) clear. SSR set. Beginning address of UNIX RTR Operating System tab. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T0. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T1. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T2. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T3. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T4. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T5. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T6. JE group temp subgroup scratch register T7. Timing circuit. Interrupt stack pointer. Error microinterrupt hander register UINT0. Error microinterrupt hander register UINT1. Error microinterrupt hander register UINT2. Error microinterrupt hander register UINT3. Shadow error register (uint_er) loaded during an error microinterrupt.
= Indicates that all addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted in terms of words, including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted, values given are assumed to be in bytes.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. One of these messages may follow: EXTRA KEYWORD (OFF) Indirection not allowed except as action of a WHEN. INCONSISTENT KEYWORDS (NL-OFF) Negative length not allowed without OFF. INVALID KEYWORD Destination of ADDR or REG not valid outside of a WHEN action list. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long. RANGE ERROR (UVAR) Invalid utility variable number was specied. IP NG = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = No Good. One of these messages may follow: BAD REG NAME 1 A named register is not a valid destination.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 COPY:UVAR-3
401-610-055 COPY UVAR
PF RL
= Printout Follows. Followed by a COPY-UVAR output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete. Printout Follows.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:ADDR COPY:PID COPY:REG COPY:UID DUMP:UVAR LOAD:ADDR LOAD:REG LOAD:UVAR OP:UMEM WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages COPY-ADDR COPY-PID COPY-REG COPY-UID COPY-UVAR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE COPY:UVAR-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL CELL GENERIC
ID ............. DEL:CELL-GENERIC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Deletes requested generic from an Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) at the specied Flexent or Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. 2. FORMAT
DEL:CELL a[, b], GENERIC c[ CLASS d]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Flexent or Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 site number (1-600).


= Flexent identier: BBU x CDM x MICRO x where x = 1 - 3. Baseband Unit (BBU) is applicable to Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) Cells.
where x = 1 - 16. CDMA Digital Module (CDM) is applicable to Flexent Modular Cells and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. where x = 1 - 6. MICRO is applicable to TDMA and CDMA Flexent Microcells.
x can be:

A single number. A range of numbers. A list of numbers separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
= Name of the Generic Description File (GDF). A string of 12 characters within double quotes. For Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, the generic name should follow the naming convention when a range of CDM is entered or all CDMs are implied (variable b is not entered): For example: F2000DDAA.60 1st character Software type: B Cell boot software (releases prior to 17.0 only). D Cell diagnostic software. (Microcell all releases; Flexent Modular prior to 17.0 only.) F Functional software (Cell and Radio Cluster Server [RCS]). 2nd-3rd character Release level of the load.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:CELL-GENERIC-1
4th character Base/Package release number: 0 Base release. 1 Package release. 5th character Incremented for maintenance release. 6th character Technology type: B TDMA D CDMA 7th character Cell type: A B D U Flexent Microcell. Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. Flexent Modular and CDBS Cells. Flexent Modular 1.0-3.0 with Universal Radio Controller (URC) controller board.
8th character Type of load: E F G P Experimental loads. FOA loads. GA loads. Private loads.
Other names are used for internal alpha, beta, etc loads. 9th character Radio Cluster Server (RCS) to cell compatibility indicator. Usually A. 10th character Decimal point. 11th-12th character Load sequence number. NOTE: If a single CDM is specied, the generic requested will be downloaded regardless of the cell type.
For Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame, conguration only, when a list or range of CDMs is specied, or no CDMs are specied, then:
If the specied generic is a Flexent Modular Cell generic, the Flexent Modular Cell generic will be deleted from the CDMs in the Flexent Modular Cell assemblage(s) and the Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 equivalent generic will be deleted from the CDMs in the Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblage(s). If the specied generic is a Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 generic, the Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 generic will be deleted from the CDMs in the Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblage(s) and the Flexent Modular Cell equivalent generic will be deleted from the CDMs in the Flexent Modular Cell assemblage(s).
= Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:CELL-GENERIC-2 Issue 28
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Followed by a OP-CELLGENERIC output message. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:CELL-GENERIC SEND:CELL-GENERIC STOP:SEND-CELL-GENERIC Output Messages DEL-CELL-GENERIC OP-CELL-GENERIC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:CELL-GENERIC-3
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:CELL-GENERIC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL LOG
ID ............. DEL:LOG RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Deletes the selected contents of a logle and cleans corrupt entries from the le. If the lename is the only criterion entered, only corrupt entries are deleted. Otherwise, only entries in the logle that meet all of the specied criteria are deleted. 2. FORMAT
DEL:LOG;LG "a"[:[DATE b[-c],][TIME d[-e],][KW "f",][ID g,][TYPE h]];

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Name of the logle. Any valid logle name; for example, ULARP. = Start date as six-digit format (mmddyy) or ten-digit format (mmddyyhhmm). For example, 100257 = October 2, 1957; 0102571000 = January 2, 1957, at 10:00 a.m. = End date as six-digit format (mmddyy) or ten-digit format (mmddyyhhmm). The default is the start date. If supplied, this date must be in the same format (six or ten digits) as the start date. = Start time in hours and minutes format (hhmm). For example, 0110 = 1:10 a.m. = End time in hours and minutes format (hhmm). For example, 1530 = 3:30 p.m. The default is the start time.
d e
NOTE: When the six-digit date range is used in conjunction with a time range, the log entries will be deleted from start time to end time for each day in the range of start date through end date. The ten-digit date allows the user to delete log entries from the start time on start date until end time on end date. Specifying the start time (variable d) and end time (variable e) with the ten-digit date range is invalid. f g = A keyword that appears in all entries that are to be deleted. = An optional decimal number (0-9999) which is used to link an item in a logle with an entry in another le. The ID is lled in by the process that made the logle entry. = An optional decimal number (0-9999) that species the type of entry on a logle. This TYPE is lled in by the process that made the logle entry.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:LOG-1
401-610-055 DEL LOG
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. = No Good. CANNOT ATTACH TO ECD. Could not attach to the Equipment Conguration Database (ECD). 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:LOG Output Messages DEL-LOG OP-LOG
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual 254-341-230 Craft Interface Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:LOG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL PAUTH
ID ............. DEL:PAUTH RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Deletes a person Identity (IDENT) from the Personal Authority (PAUTH) database. 2. FORMAT
DEL:PAUTH:IDENT "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Identity of the person or group that uses the password prex and sufx, in one to eight letters and/or digits.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. NON_EXISTENT PERSON IDENTITY The given person identity does not exist in the personal authority administration. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Personal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Personal authority deleted. = Retry Later. AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:PAUTH CHG:PAUTH VFY:PAUTH Output Messages VFY-PAUTH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:PAUTH-1
401-610-055 DEL PAUTH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:PAUTH-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL PCGRP
ID ............. DEL:PCGRP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Disassociates the Command Group (COMGR) from a personal Identity (IDENT), thus preventing a user from accessing this group of commands. The IDENT for the Person Command Group (PCGRP) must already exist in the Personal Authority (PAUTH) database. Format 2: Disassociates a prole from a personal identity. It prevents a user from accessing this group of commands. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
DEL:PCGRP:DATA,IDENT "a",COMGR b; DEL:PCGRP:IDENT "a",PROFL "c";
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Identity of the person or group in one to eight letters and/or digits. = Command group. = A prole name which has been previously created and assigned to this user. The name is one to eight letters and/or digits.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. COMMAND GROUP NOT ASSIGNED TO THIS PERSON The given command group was never assigned to this person identity. NON-EXISTENT PERSON IDENTITY The given person identity does not exist in the personal authority administration. NON-EXISTENT PROFILE IDENTITY Prole does not exist in the database. PASSWORD ENHANCEMENT NOT ACTIVATED The PROFL option with this command is valid only for applications running with the password enhancement feature. PROFILE NOT ASSIGNED Prole not assigned to the identity. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Personal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Command group deleted from database. = Retry Later. AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:PCGRP-1
401-610-055 DEL PCGRP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:PAUTH ADD:PCGRP CHG:PAUTH DEL:PAUTH VFY:PAUTH VFY:PCGRP Output Messages VFY-PAUTH VFY-PCGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:PCGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL PROFL
ID ............. DEL:PROFL RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Deletes an existing prole from the list of user proles. A prole is a set of command groups. The prole is also deleted from any user to which it is assigned. 2. FORMAT
DEL:PROFL:IDENT "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Identifying name of the prole to be deleted from the database. A maximum of eight characters may be used.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. One of these messages may follow: PASSWORD ENHANCEMENT NOT ACTIVATED This command is valid only for applications running with the password enhancement feature enabled. PROFILE IDENTITY DOES NOT EXIST UNABLE TO ACCESS PROFILE ADMINISTRATION OK RL = Good. Prole successfully deleted from the database. = Retry Later. One of these messages may follow: AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE PROFILE ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:PCGRP ADD:PROFL CHG:PROFL DEL:PCGRP VFY:PCGRP VFY:PROFL Output Messages VFY-PROFL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:PROFL-1
401-610-055 DEL PROFL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:PROFL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL TAUTH
ID ............. DEL:TAUTH RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Deletes a terminal identity from the Terminal Authority (TAUTH) database. 2. FORMAT
DEL:TAUTH:TERM "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Terminal identity in four characters, starting with tty.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. One of these messages may follow: INVALID TERMINAL IDENTITY The given terminal identity is either not four characters in length or does not start with tty. NON-EXISTENT TERMINAL IDENTITY The given terminal identity does not exist in the terminal authority administration. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Terminal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Terminal identity deleted from the database. = Retry Later. One of these messages may follow: AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:TAUTH VFY:TAUTH Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:TAUTH-1
401-610-055 DEL TAUTH
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:TAUTH-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL TCGRP
ID ............. DEL:TCGRP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Disassociates the Command Group (COMGR) from a Terminal (TERM) identity, thus preventing a user from accessing this group of commands from that terminal. The TERM must already exist in the Terminal Authority (TAUTH) database. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
DEL:TCGRP:TERM "a",COMGR b; DEL:TCGRP:TERM "a",PROFL "c";
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Terminal identity in four characters, starting with tty. = Command group. = A prole name which has been previously created and assigned to this terminal. The name is one to eight letters and/or digits.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. COMMAND GROUP NOT ASSIGNED TO THIS TERMINAL The given command group has not been assigned to this terminal identity. INVALID TERMINAL IDENTITY The given terminal identity is either not four characters in length or does not start with tty. NON-EXISTENT PROFILE IDENTITY Prole does not exist in the database. NON-EXISTENT TERMINAL IDENTITY The given terminal identity does not exist in the terminal authority administration. UNABLE TO ACCESS AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION Terminal authority information is inaccessible. OK RL = Good. Command group deleted from the database. = Retry Later. AUTHORITY ADMINISTRATION UNDER UPDATE Authority information is currently being updated.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:TCGRP-1
401-610-055 DEL TCGRP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages ADD:TAUTH ADD:TCGRP DEL:TAUTH VFY:TAUTH VFY:TCGRP Output Messages VFY-TAUTH VFY-TCGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:TCGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DEL:VLR:DCS
ID ............. DEL:VLR-DCS RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This input command will allow technician to erase all Visitor Location Registers (VLRs) at a serving Mobile Switching Center (MSC) for roamers subscribed to a particular home Mobile Switching Center Identication (MSCID). All the parameters of the command must be entered. 2. FORMAT
DEL:VLR:DCS a, ECP b, SI c!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Home Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) ID (0-16 in decimal). = Home Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) ID (0-15 in decimal). = Home System Identier (1-32767 in decimal).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E IP NG = Error. Error in input command format. = In Progress. The request has been received and has been initiated. Printout will follow. = No Good. Input command format is correct but some necessary condition for message execution was not met.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DEL-VLR-DCS
Other References: 401-612-493 Visitor Location Register (VLR) Erasure for a Mobile Switching Center Identication (MSCID)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DEL:VLR-DCS-1
401-610-055 DEL:VLR:DCS
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DEL:VLR-DCS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN CELL
ID ............. DGN:CELL RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied cell site unit. NOTE: For the PH, TLP and CHANL options, the comma is used to separate the multiple options. The comma is not needed if only one option is chosen. The option c is always required if option b is not specied. 2. FORMAT
DGN:CELL a, [ b ] [ ,c ] [ ; [ RPT d ] [ ,RAW ] [ ,UCL ] ] [ : [ PH e ] [ ,TLP ] [ ,CHANL f ] ] [ , BOTH ] [ CLASS g ]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE Except for voice radios, the unit is left in the out-of-service state on completion of the diagnostic. Voice radios are returned to the state they were in before the diagnostic request. If Automatic Radio Reconguration (ARR) is in effect and a diagnostic is requested on a voice radio that is being used by ARR to replace a faulty unit, the diagnostic will be rejected. A message will be printed, stating that the voice radio has been recongured and therefore is unavailable for diagnostics. a = Cell site number (1-600):

NOTE: a must be a single cell site number if c is any of the following: AMP BBA x CAT x CBR CBR x CCU x CRC DL x LC x LC x ORIG ORIG PCBR x RA x SU x TRC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:CELL-1
401-610-055 DGN CELL = Series II or Flexent identier: BBU x CDM x CCC x MICRO x c
where x = 1 - 3. Baseband Unit (BBU) is applicable to Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) cells.
where x = 1 - 16. CDMA Digital Module (CDM) is applicable to Flexent Modular Cells and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. where x = 1 - 42. CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) is applicable CDMA Series II cells. where x = 1 - 6. MICRO is applicable to TDMA and CDMA Flexent Microcells.
= Cell site unit (required for Flexent Modular Cells and Flexent CDBS Cells). NOTE: The following units cannot be diagnosed in Series II: Reference Generator (RG), Reference Calibration Generator (RCG), Linear Amplier Circuit (LAC), Lightguide Microcell/Modular Cell Transceiver (LMT), Optical Transceiver Unit (OTU) and Multiple Linear Amplier Circuit (MLAC). Cell unit is not required if option b is specied. If the cell unit is not specied for Microcells, then diagnostics are run on all Microcell units. AMP TDMA or CDMA amplier. Applicable to TMDA Microcell, CDMA Microcell, Flexent Modular Cell, Flexent CDBS Cell, and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0.
BBA x CDMA BIU-BCR-ACU (BBA) set for Series II cells. x = 1-42 CAT x Clock and tone x = 10-11 for 13.1 CDMA Personal Communication Service (PCS) minicell, with growth frame 5 frame technology. x = 8-9 for 13.1 CDMA PCS minicell, with growth frame 4 frame technology. x = 6-7 for 12.1 CDMA PCS minicell. x = 4-5 for CDMA. x = 2-3 for CDMA or non-CDMA. x = 0-1 for non-CDMA. CBR CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR) for CDMA Flexent Microcell.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN CELL
CBR x CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR) x = 1-3 for Flexent Modular Cells and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages.
x = 1-6 for Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages.
CCU x CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) x = 1-2 for CDMA Flexent Microcells. x = 1-7 for CDMA Series II cells. x = 1-6 for Flexent Modular Cells, Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages, and Flexent CDBS Cells. x = 1-12 for Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 assemblages. CRC CDMA Radio Controller (CRC).
CRTU CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU). CSC x Cell Site Controller (CSC). x = 0-1 CSC x, AL CSC alarm interface x = 0-1 CSC x, CPI CSC communications processor interface. x = 0-1 CSC x, CPU CSC central processor unit. x = 0-1 CSC x, MEM CSC memory. x = 0-1 CSC x, NCI y CSC network control interface. x = 0-1 y = 0-2 DL x Data links. x = 0-1 EDRU Enhanced Digital Radio Unit. LC x Locate Channel (LC) radio. x = 0-39 LC x ORIG Original LC radio, that is, radio that was being used in LC radio prior to reconguration by ARR. x = 0-39 LEDRU Locate Enhanced Digital Radio Unit.
401-610-055 DGN CELL
PCBR x Pre-distortion CDMA baseband radio. x = 1-3 for CDBS cells. PCBR x, MMA amplier. x = 1-3 for CDBS cells. RA x Radio. x = 0-191 for Series II cells. NOTE: If the RA is a Flexible Channel Allocation (FLCA) RA, then the cell needs to have its Feature Activation File with Qualication (QFAF) for FLCA Dynamic Assignment (DA) set or the Diagnose (DGN) request will be rejected. x = 1-5 for Flexent Microcells, Flexent Modular Cells, Flexent CDBS Cells, and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. RA x ORIG Original voice radio, that is, radio that was being used as a voice radio prior to reconguration by ARR. x = 0-191 RTU Radio test unit (AMPS).
SU x Setup (SU) radio x = 0-7 without Directional Setup. x = 0-35 with Directional Setup. SU x ORIG Original Setup (SU) radio, that is, radio that was being used as SU radio prior to reconguration by ARR. x = 0-7 without Directional Setup. x = 0-35 with Directional Setup. TFU CDMA Time Frequency Unit (TFU) is applicable for CDMA Flexent Microcells and Flexent CDBS Cells.

TFU x CDMA Time Frequency Unit (TFU). x = 1-8 for Flexent Modular Cells and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. TRC Radio controller.
TRTU Radio test unit (TDMA). d RAW = Number of times the diagnostic is to be repeated. Default is one time. Maximum is 32,767. If the unit is Data Link (DL), the maximum is 256. = Prints expected and observed values during the diagnostic of every phase, and only the rst failure of any failing phase.
401-610-055 DGN CELL
UCL
= Unconditionally execute the diagnostic and print all failures. Normal mode stops on rst failure. In Flexent Cells, when running diagnostics without specifying the unit by default the request is run with the UCL option. So regardless or not the UCL option is specied, the request is taken as UCL. The request will run to completion regardless of the number of problems encounter by the request.
PH
= Execute only the specied phase number(s). This option is for SII Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) only. When specied, diagnosis will be carried out on both DS1 units of the Digital Facility Interface (DFI) board.
= Phase number in decimal. May be a single number or a range. Phase numbers per unit are as follows: AMP BBA CAT Amplier. Phase number: 1. CDMA BIU-BCR-ACU (BBA) set. Phase number: 1. Clock and tone. NOTE: Phase 2 is a CDMA-only diagnostic. Phase number: 1-2. CDMA baseband radio. Phase number: 1. CDMA cluster controller. Phase number: 1. CDMA channel unit. Phase number: 1. CDMA channel unit (Flexent Microcell). Phase number: 1. CDMA channel unit (Flexent and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0). Phase number: 1. CDMA radio controller. Phase number: 1. CDMA Radio test unit (CDMA). Phase number: 1. Cell site controller. Phase number: 1-17. Cell site controller, alarm interface. Phase number: 1. Cell site controller, communications process interface. Phase number: 1. Cell site controller, memory. Phase number: 1. Cell site controller, network control interface. Phase number: 1. Data links. Phase number: 2. Linear amplier circuit. Cannot be diagnosed. Locate radio. Phase number: 1. Radio CDMA-only diagnostic (non-Flexent ). Phase number: 2. Radio (Flexent Microcell). Phase number: 1-4. Radio (Flexent and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0). Phase number: 1-4. Reference calibration generator. Cannot be diagnosed. Reference generator Cannot be diagnosed. Radio test unit (AMPS). Phase number: 1. Setup radio. Phase number: 1.
CBR CCC CCC, CCU CCU CCU CRC CRTU CSC CSC, AL CSC, CPI CSC, MEM CSC, NCI DL LAC LC RA RA RA RCG RG RTU SU
401-610-055 DGN CELL
TFU TRC TRTU TLP f
CDMA Time Frequency Unit (TFU). Phase number: 1. TDMA radio controller. Phase number: 1. Radio test unit (TDMA). Phase number: 1.
= Print the trouble locating procedure for all failures. = Channel number: 1-799 or 990-1023 Used to diagnose LC, SU, or Radio Frequency (RF) test unit. 2-1998 Used for TDMA PCS mini-cells and Flexent TDMA PCS only. NOTES: For TDMA PCS mini-cells only, the upper limit of the range has been extended to 1999. If CHANL is not specied, the diagnostic supervisor will pick any available channel. If the specied channel is not available at the cell site, the request will be denied. TDMA Flexible Channel Allocation (FLCA), introduced in R14.0, affects the following changes associated with the DGN command For R14.0, TDMA FLCA feature applies to non-Flexent Cells. 1. The CHANL option can apply to a FLCA RA but only if the Feature Activation File (FAF) for FLCA DA is set. Otherwise, the command will be rejected as before when using the CHANL option on RAs. The channel cannot be a channel for a xed channel radio in the same sector. 2. If CHANL option is not used for a FLCA RA, but an Area Wide Test Channel (AWTC) is dened in Translations, then the cell will use AWTC. If CHANL option is not used for a FLCA, and an AWTC is not dened in Translations, then the cell will search for an available FLCA channel. If no FLCA channel is available, then a message will display indicating no FLCA channel was available as part of the normal output for the DGN command.
3.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on.
401-610-055 DGN CELL
PF RL
= =
Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later. Data links to the cell are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DGN-CELL RMV-CELL-DL RMV-CELL-RANGE RMV-CELL-SG-ANT RMV-CELL-RA RST-CELL
401-610-055 DGN CELL
401-610-055 DGN CELL DL
ID ............. DGN:CELL-DL RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Cell Site (CS) data link. The loopback option tests the associated data transmission facility. 2. FORMAT
DGN:CELL a, DL b; c [;ERR] [,RPT d] [,UCL][,CLASS e]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Cell site number (1-600). = Data Link (DL) number (0-1). = One of the following: CELLLB DSCLB Place the CELL end of the data line in the loopback mode. Remove the loopback mode by RST:CELL DL. Place the Dedicated Switch Connection (DSC) associated with CELL a, DL b in the loopback mode. This action will cause the DSC to be looped back toward the Link Node (LN) and toward the CELL. Remove the loopback connection by using RST:CELL or RMV:CELL. Put the specied link node data link controller in the echo mode. All data received from the data facility are echoed back. Use this mode when external test equipment requires a loopback mode. Remove the echo mode by restoring the data link.
ECHO
LOCALLB Perform near-end data facility loopback test. The test automatically places the near-end data facility in the near-end loopback mode. Only applicable with an RS-449 interface. LOOPBACK Perform data facility loopback test from the linknode. This test requires a manually placed loopback in the data facility. ERR = Dump the protocol error registers at the conclusion of the loopback test. Valid only if c = LOOPBACK or LOCALLB (with RS-449) for Series II. d UCL = Number of times the diagnostic is to be repeated. (1-256). = Unconditionally execute the cell resident diagnostic with no early termination and prints all failures. Normal mode stops on rst failure. NOTE: The UCL mode can ood the Teletypewriter (TTY) with output messages. e = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:CELL-DL-1
401-610-055 DGN CELL DL
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped inter-ECP data link) were not met.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DGN-CELL-DL STOP-DGN-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:CELL-DL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN CELL SG
ID ............. DGN:CELL-SG RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Run diagnostics on all trunks associated with a specied cell, server group and antenna face. 2. FORMAT
DGN:CELL a, SG b, ANT c[,ALL]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c ALL = Cell site number (1-600). = Server group number (0-1). = Antenna face number: (0-6 for Series II cells). = Request all measurement data, regardless of diagnostic passage or failure. Without this option selected, measurement data is provided only on diagnostic failure.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DGN-DCS-TRKGRP = In Progress. Request has been accepted. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution were not met.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:CELL-SG-1
401-610-055 DGN CELL SG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:CELL-SG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN CU
ID ............. DGN:CU RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied computer Control Unit (CU) complex or a specied unit within the CU complex. Format 1: Diagnoses the specied CU complex. Format 2: Diagnoses the Central Control (CC) unit. Format 3: Diagnoses the specied Channel (CH). Format 4: Diagnoses the Cache Store Unit (CSU). Format 5: Diagnoses the specied Direct Memory Access (DMA) unit. Format 6: Diagnoses the specied Main Store Controller (MASC) unit. Format 7: Diagnoses the Store Address Translator (SAT) circuit pack. Format 8: Diagnoses the Utility Circuit (UC) circuit pack. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
DGN:CU a [;[RAW] [,UCL] [,REX,DEX ]] [:TLP]! DGN:CU a,CC 0[;[RPT c][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH d[-e]] [,TLP]]! DGN:CU a,CH b[;[RPT c][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH d[-e]] [,TLP][,{DFCIOP}f]]! DGN:CU a,CSU 0[;[RPT c][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH d[-e]] [,TLP]]! DGN:CU a,DMA b[;[RPT c][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH d[-e]] [,CONT][,TLP]]! DGN:CU a,MASC b[;[RPT c][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH d[-e]] [,TLP]]! DGN:CU a,SAT 0[;[RPT c][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH d[-e]] [,TLP]]! DGN:CU a,UC 0[;[RPT c][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH d[-e]] [,TLP]]!
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:CU-1
401-610-055 DGN CU
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Member number (0-1). = Subunit number. See the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D. = Number of times diagnostic is repeated. Maximum is 256; default is one. UCL should also be
NOTE: This option does not override early terminations. specied if the diagnostic terminates. RAW UCL
= Print the diagnostic results of every phase. Default is the rst ve failures of each failing phase. = Unconditional execution.
NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. REX = Run routine exercise phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow demand exercise phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Run demand exercise phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases which require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = The number of the rst phase to be executed. = The number of the last phase to be executed. = Protocol handler. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
d e PH TLP
NOTE: It is recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters not be specied together because it may produce an improper TLP listing. f = Member number of the DFC (0-7) or IOP (0-15) that is to be used as a helper unit. When a helper unit is required but the specied helper unit is inappropriate or unavailable, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. = Include only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored. Format 5 is currently used by the DMA. If this parameter is not specied, the DMA controller and all channels connected to it are diagnosed.
CONT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:CU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN CU
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:CU RST:CU STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-CU OP-DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-CU output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:CU-3
401-610-055 DGN CU
Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-D
Other References: 254-303-106 3B20D and 3B21D Computers UNIX RTR Operating System System Maintenance Manual Display/Menu Page Name: COMMON PROCESSOR DISPLAY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:CU-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN DCI
ID ............. DGN:DCI RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Dual Serial Channel/Computer Interconnect (DCI). 2. FORMAT
DGN:DCI a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP]]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number (0-255). = Number of times diagnostic is repeated. The maximum is 256. The default is one. UCL should also be
= Prints the diagnostic results of every phase. The default is the rst ve failures of each failing phase. = Unconditional execution.
NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. REX = Runs routine exercise phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow demand exercise phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs demand exercise phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases that require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = The number of the rst phase to be executed. = The number of the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters should not be used together because additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:DCI-1
401-610-055 DGN DCI
INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:DCI RST:DCI STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-DCI OP-DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-DCI output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:DCI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN DCS DL
ID ............. DGN:DCS-DL RELEASE ....... 6.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) data link. The loopback option tests the associated data transmission facility. This command is not applicable for a DCS switch with Signaling System 7 (SS7) data link connections. 2. FORMAT
DGN:DCS a, DL b; c [,ERR] [,RPT d][,UCL] [ CLASS e]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = DCS number (1-16). = Data Link (DL) number (0-1). = One of the following: DSCLB Place the Dedicated Switch Connection (DSC) associated with DCS a, DL b in the loopback mode. This action will cause the DSC to be looped back toward the Link Node (LN) and toward the DCS. Remove the loopback connection by using RST:DCS-DL or RMV:DCS-DL. Puts the specied linknode data link controller in the echo mode. All data received from the data facility are echoed back. Use this mode when external test equipment requires a loopback mode. Remove the echo mode by restoring the data link.
ECHO
LOCALLB Perform near-end data facility loopback test. The test automatically places the near-end data facility in the near-end loopback mode. Only applicable with an RS-449 interface. LOOPBACK Performs data facility loopback test from the linknode. This test requires a manually placed loopback in the data facility. REMOTELB Perform far-end data facility loopback test. This automatically places the far-end data facility in the far-end loopback mode. Only applicable with an RS-449 interface. ERR d UCL e = Dumps the protocol error registers at the conclusion of the loopback test. Valid only if c = LOOPBACK, LOCALLB or REMOTELB. = Number of times the diagnostic is to be repeated. (1-256). = Unconditionally executes the diagnostic with no early termination and prints all failures. Normal mode stops on rst failure. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:DCS-DL-1
401-610-055 DGN DCS DL
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = = In Progress. Request has been accepted. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped DCS data link) were not met. Requested DCS is a switch with SS7 data link connections.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RMV:DCS-DL RST:DCS-DL Output Messages DGN-DCS-DL STOP-DGN-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:DCS-DL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN DCS TRKGRP
ID ............. DGN:DCS-TRKGRP RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses a trunk. This input message permits use of the Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) trunk representation to identify the trunk for diagnosis. A trunk that has failed a diagnostic will be removed from service; otherwise, the trunk will be returned to its state before the diagnostic. 2. FORMAT
DGN:DCS a, TRKGRP b [, MEMBER c][, LBC][, ALL] [ CLASS d]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = DCS number (1-16). = Trunk group number: 1-2000 for 5ESS DCS. c = Trunk member number: 1-1951 for 5ESS DCS. If a trunk member is not specied, the entire trunk group will be diagnosed. LBC ALL = Request the Loopback Clear (LBC) test. = Request all measurement data, regardless of diagnostic passage or failure. Without this option selected, measurement data is provided only on diagnostic failure. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG NG = In Progress. Request has been accepted. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary condition for execution of request not met. DCS or trunk identication likely not valid. = No Good.
NG - CDMA feature not on for cell n No Good. The packet pipe is associated with cell n which does not have the CDMA feature activated. NG - REQUEST NOT ALLOWED No Good. For packet pipe trunks, the diagnostic is not currently supported. NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:DCS-TRKGRP-1
401-610-055 DGN DCS TRKGRP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DGN-DCS-TRKGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:DCS-TRKGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN DFC
ID ............. DGN:DFC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Disk File Controller (DFC). NOTE: The Moving Head Disk (MHD) cannot be diagnosed if the DFC is not in service. Therefore, a controller and its associated disk units cannot be diagnosed with one input message. 2. FORMAT
DGN:DFC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,CONT][,TLP] [,CU e]]!

NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. REX = Runs routine exercise phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow demand exercise phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs demand exercise phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases that require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = The number of the rst phase to be executed. = The number of the last phase to be executed. = Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. Default is diagnose DFC variable a only. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d CONT TLP
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters should not be used together because additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:DFC-1
401-610-055 DGN DFC
= Member number of the Control Unit (CU) helper unit (0-1). When a helper unit is not required, the specied helper unit is not used. When a helper unit is required but the specied helper unit is inappropriate or unavailable, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. The off-line CU is required as a helper unit when demand phase 15 is executed.
NOTE: The helper CU must be Out Of Service (OOS) and must be diagnosed as All Tests Passed (ATP) before it is used as a helper unit. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-DFC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:DFC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN DFC
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:DFC RST:DFC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-DFC OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:DFC-3
401-610-055 DGN DFC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:DFC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN DUIC
ID ............. DGN:DUIC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Direct User Interface Controller (DUIC). NOTE: The Input/Output Processor (IOP) must be in service before the DUIC can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:DUIC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP][,CONT]]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number (0-255). = Number of times the diagnostic is repeated. The maximum is 256. The default is one. UCL should also be
NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs routine exercise phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow demand exercise phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs demand exercise phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases that require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Number of the phase to be executed, or the rst number in a range of phases. = Species the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters should not be used together because additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing. CONT = Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:DUIC-1
401-610-055 DGN DUIC
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:DUIC RST:DUIC STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-DUIC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:DUIC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN DUIC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-DUIC OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:DUIC-3
401-610-055 DGN DUIC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:DUIC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN ECP DL
ID ............. DGN:ECP-DL RELEASE ....... 2.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied inter- Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) data link. The loopback option tests the associated data transmission facility. 2. FORMAT
DGN:ECP a, DL b; c [,ERR] [,RPT d][,UCL] [ CLASS e]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = ECP number (1-15). = Data Link (DL) number (0-1). = One of the following: DSCLB Places the Dedicated Switch Connection (DSC) associated with ECP a DL b in the loopback mode. This action will cause the DSC to be looped back toward the Link Node (LN) and toward the ECP. Remove the loopback connection by using RST:ECP a, DL b or RMV:ECP a, DL b. Puts the specied link node data link controller in the echo mode. All data received from the data facility are echoed back. Use this mode when external test equipment requires a loopback mode. Remove the echo mode by restoring the data link.
ECHO
LOCALLB Performs near-end data facility loopback test. The test automatically places the near-end data facility in the near-end loopback mode. Only applicable with an RS-449 interface. LOOPBACK Performs data facility loopback test from the linknode. This test requires a manually placed loopback in the data facility. REMOTELB Performs far-end data facility loopback test. This automatically places the far-end data facility in the far-end loopback mode. Only applicable with an RS-449 interface. ERR d UCL = Dumps the protocol error registers at the conclusion of the loopback test. Valid only if c = LOOPBACK, LOCALLB or REMOTELB. = Number of times the diagnostic is to be repeated. (1-256). = Unconditionally executes the diagnostic with no early termination and prints all failures. Normal mode stops on rst failure. NOTE: The UCL mode can ood the Teletypewriter (TTY) with output messages. e = Overriding message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:ECP-DL-1
401-610-055 DGN ECP DL
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = = In Progress. Request has been accepted. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped inter-ECP data link) were not met.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RMV:ECP-DL RST:ECP-DL Output Messages DGN-ECP-DL STOP-DGN-CELL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:ECP-DL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN HSDC
ID ............. DGN:HSDC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied High-Speed Synchronous Data Link Controller (HSDC). NOTE: The Input/Output Processor (IOP) must be in service before the HSDC can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:HSDC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP][,CONT]]!

NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow demand exercise phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs Demand Exercise (DEX) phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases that require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Species the rst phase to be executed. = Species the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters cannot be used together because additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing. CONT = Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:HSDC-1
401-610-055 DGN HSDC
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages RMV:HSDC RST:HSDC RST:IOP = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-HSDC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:HSDC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN HSDC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-HSDC RST-IOP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:HSDC-3
401-610-055 DGN HSDC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:HSDC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN IOP
ID ............. DGN:IOP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Input/Output Processor (IOP). NOTE: The peripheral controllers cannot be diagnosed if the IOP is not in service. Therefore, an IOP and its associated peripheral controllers cannot be diagnosed with one input message. 2. FORMAT
DGN:IOP a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,CONT][,TLP] [,CU e]]!

NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. REX = Runs routine exercise phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow demand exercise phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs demand exercise phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases that require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = The number of the rst phase to be executed. = The number of the last phase to be executed. = Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. Default is diagnose IOP variable a only. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d CONT TLP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:IOP-1
401-610-055 DGN IOP
= Member number of the Control Unit (CU) helper unit (0-1). When a helper unit is not required, the specied helper unit is not used. When a helper unit is required but the specied helper unit is inappropriate or unavailable, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. The off-line CU is required as a helper unit when demand phase 15 is executed.
NOTE: The helper CU must be Out Of Service (OOS) and must be diagnosed as All Tests Passed (ATP) before it is used as a helper unit. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-IOP output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:IOP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN IOP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:IOP RST:IOP STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-IOP OP-DMQ
Other References: Display/Menu Page Name: COMMON PROCESSOR DISPLAY
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:IOP-3
401-610-055 DGN IOP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:IOP-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN LN
ID ............. DGN:LN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Link Node (LN). Options RPT and UCL can be used to change the systems usual method of running a diagnostic, which is running the diagnostic once and adhering to early termination instructions in the diagnostic. An early termination instruction in a diagnostic causes the diagnostic to terminate when a test within the diagnostic phase fails. Option RPT requests the repetition of diagnostics. Option UCL requests that early termination instructions in a diagnostic be overridden and the diagnostic be allowed to continue when a test within the diagnostic phase fails. There are two kinds of early termination instructions that may be contained in a diagnostic. One kind of early termination instruction is overridden when the DGN:LN input command includes the UCL option. The other kind of early termination instruction is a "forced" early termination. The failure of a test that includes a "forced" early termination instruction is considered a signicant enough failure that the early termination cannot be overridden by the UCL option. An early termination instruction can be identied in a diagnostic listing .l le by searching for erlytrm. A "forced" early termination instruction can be identied by checking for force as a part of the erlytrm instruction. 2. FORMAT
DGN:LNa b [;[RPT c] [,RAW] [,UCL]] [:PH d [,TLP :TLP]]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15). = Number of repetitions desired. Maximum = 256. Default = 1. NOTE: This option does not override early termination. If it is desired to override early termination, the UCL option should also be specied. The UCL option, however will not override forced early termination. RAW UCL = Print the diagnostic results of every phase. Default = Print the rst ve failures of each phase. = Unconditional execution - overrides early terminations, but not forced early terminations. NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:LN-1
401-610-055 DGN LN
= Species the phase or phases to be executed. It may be a single decimal number or a range (for example, to execute phases 10 through 13, enter 10-13). Default = All automatic phases. = Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This generates a list of suspected faulty equipment. NOTE: The UCL and TLP must not be used together.
TLP
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE Four sequential system actions are performed in response to this input command. 1. The LN is removed from service following the rules for the RMV:LN input message. 2. If the resultant LN major state is any of OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV, an attempt is made to isolate the LN (for other major states, the diagnostic is aborted by Diagnostic Monitor [DIAMON]).
3. The specied (or default) diagnostic phases are run. 4. If the LN was in the active ring prior to the start of the diagnostics and was successfully isolated (in 2 above), then at the conclusion of the diagnostic execution an attempt is made to include the LN back into the active ring. Otherwise, the node is left in its original ring conguration state. NOTE: The LN remains in the OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV state. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CHG:SLK Output Messages DGN-AUDIT DGN-LN RMV-LN
Other References: 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 254-303-111 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Output Messages Manual 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Ring and Ring Node Maintenance Procedures Section, - Diagnostic Users Guide Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:LN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MHD
ID ............. DGN:MHD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Moving Head Disk (MHD). NOTE: The Disk File Controller (DFC) must be in service before the MHD can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:MHD a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP][,CONT]]!

NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow demand exercise phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs Demand Exercise (DEX) phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases which require craft interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Number of the rst phase to be executed. = Number of the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters cannot be used together because additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MHD-1
401-610-055 DGN MHD
CONT
= Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:MHD RST:MHD STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-MHD output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MHD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MHD
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MHD OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MHD-3
401-610-055 DGN MHD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MHD-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MT
ID ............. DGN:MT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Magnetic Tape (MT). NOTE: The Disk File Controller (DFC) must be in service before the MT can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:MT a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]] [:[PH c [-d]] [,TLP] [,CONT]]!

= Prints the diagnostic results of every phase. The default is the rst ve failures of each failing phase. = Unconditional (UCL) execution.
NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow Demand Exercise (DEX) phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs DEX phases in addition to REX and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special DEX phases which require user interaction to run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Number of the rst phase to be executed. = Number of the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MT-1
401-610-055 DGN MT
CONT
= Includes only the specied unit Controller (CONT). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:MT RST:MT Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MT OP-DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-MT output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MT-3
401-610-055 DGN MT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MT-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MTC
ID ............. DGN:MTC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Magnetic Tape Controller (MTC). NOTE: The Input/Output Processor (IOP) must be in service before the MTC can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:MTC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP] [,CONT][,MT e]]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number (0-255). = Number of times the diagnostic is to be repeated. The maximum is 256. The default is one. UCL should also be
NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow Demand Exercise (DEX) phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs DEX phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases which require craft interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Species the number of the rst phase to be executed. = Species the last phase to be executed.
DEX
c d
NOTE: Before phase 5 is executed, a diagnostic test tape with a write ring must be mounted on the specied Magnetic Tape (MT).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MTC-1
401-610-055 DGN MTC
TLP
= Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
NOTE: It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together since it may produce an improper TLP listing. CONT = Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored. = Member number of the magnetic tape device that is to be used as a helper unit (0-255). When a helper unit is not required, the specied helper unit is ignored. When a helper unit is required but the specied helper unit is inappropriate or unavailable, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. Member number of the MT device helper unit is required when demand phase 5 is executed.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA-KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-MTC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MTC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MTC
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:MTC RST:MTC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MTC OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MTC-3
401-610-055 DGN MTC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MTC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MTTYC
ID ............. DGN:MTTYC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller (MTTYC). NOTE: The Input/Output Processor (IOP) must be in service before the MTTYC can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:MTTYC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP][,CONT]]!

NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow Demand Exercise (DEX) phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs DEX phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases which require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Species the rst phase to be executed. = Species the last phase to be entered. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MTTYC-1
401-610-055 DGN MTTYC
CONT
= Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:MTTYC RST:MTTYC STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-MTTYC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MTTYC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN MTTYC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MTTYC OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:MTTYC-3
401-610-055 DGN MTTYC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:MTTYC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN RPCN
ID ............. DGN:RPCN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Ring Peripheral Controller Node (RPCN). Options RPT and UCL can be used to change the systems usual method of running a diagnostic, which is running the diagnostic once and adhering to early termination instructions in the diagnostic. An early termination instruction in a diagnostic causes the diagnostic to terminate when a test within the diagnostic phase fails. Option RPT requests the repetition of diagnostics. Option UCL requests that early termination instructions in a diagnostic be overridden and the diagnostic be allowed to continue when a test within the diagnostic phase fails. There are two kinds of early termination instructions that may be contained in a diagnostic. One kind of early termination instruction is overridden when the DGN:RPCN input command includes the UCL option. The other kind of early termination instruction is a "forced" early termination. The failure of a test that includes a "forced" early termination instruction is considered a signicant enough failure that the early termination cannot be overridden by the UCL option. An early termination instruction can be identied in a diagnostic listing .l le by searching for erlytrm. A "forced" early termination instruction can be identied by checking for force as a part of the erlytrm instruction. 2. FORMAT
DGN:RPCNa 0[;[RPT b] [,RAW] [,UCL]] [:PH c [,CU d] [,TLP]:TLP]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = A Ring Node (RN) group number (00-63) with explicit leading zero for group numbers less than 10. = Number of repetitions desired. Maximum = 256. Default = 1. NOTE: This option does not override early termination. If it is desired to override early termination, the UCL option should also be specied. The UCL option, however, will not override forced early termination. RAW UCL = Print the diagnostic results of every phase. Default = Print the rst ve failures of each phase. = Unconditional execution - overrides early terminations, but not forced early terminations. NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:RPCN-1
401-610-055 DGN RPCN
= Species the phase or phases to be executed. It may be a single decimal number or a range (for example, to execute phases 10 through 13, enter 10-13). Default = All automatic phases. = Helper Control Unit number (0-1). Off-line CU required as a helper unit when demand phase 14 is specied. Default = All automatic phases. NOTE: The helper CU must be out of service and All Tests Passed (ATP) before it can be used as a helper.
TLP
= Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment. NOTE: The UCL and TLP must not be used together.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE Four sequential system actions are performed in response to this input command. 1. The RPCN is removed from service following the rules for the RMV:RPCN input message. 2. If the resultant RPCN major state is any of OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV, an attempt is made to isolate the RPCN (for other major states, the diagnostic is aborted by Diagnostic Monitor [DIAMON]).
3. The specied (or default) diagnostic phases are run. 4. If the RPCN was in the active ring prior to the start of the diagnostics and has been successfully isolated (in 2 above), an attempt is made to include the RPCN back into the active ring at the conclusion of the diagnostic execution. Otherwise, the node is left in its original ring conguration state. NOTE: The RPCN remains in the OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV state. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-AUDIT DGN-RPCN RMV-RPCN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:RPCN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN RPCN
Other References: 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 254-303-111 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Output Messages Manual 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Diagnostic Users Guide Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:RPCN-3
401-610-055 DGN RPCN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:RPCN-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN SCSDC
ID ............. DGN:SCSDC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Scanner Signal Distributor Controller (SCSDC). NOTE: The Input/Output Processor (IOP) must be in service before the SCSDC can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:SCSDC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]] [,TLP][,CONT]]!

NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow Demand Exercise (DEX) phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs DEX phases in addition to REX and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases that require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Species the rst phase to be executed. = Species the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters cannot be used together because additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing. CONT = Diagnoses only the specied controller. Units attached to the specied controller will not be diagnosed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:SCSDC-1
401-610-055 DGN SCSDC
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:SCSDC RST:IOP RST:SCSDC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-SCSDC OP-DMQ RST-IOP = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-SCSDC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:SCSDC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN SCSDC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:SCSDC-3
401-610-055 DGN SCSDC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:SCSDC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN SDLC
ID ............. DGN:SDLC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Synchronous Data Link Controller (SDLC). NOTE: The Input/Output Processor (IOP) must be in service before the SDLC can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:SDLC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP] [,CONT]]!

NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow Demand Exercise (DEX) phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs DEX phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases which require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Species the rst phase to be executed. = Species the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters cannot be used together because additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing. CONT = Diagnoses only the specied controller. Units attached to the specied controller will not be diagnosed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:SDLC-1
401-610-055 DGN SDLC
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:SDLC RST:IOP RST:SDLC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-SDLC OP-DMQ RST-IOP = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-SDLC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:SDLC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN SDLC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:SDLC-3
401-610-055 DGN SDLC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:SDLC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN TTYC
ID ............. DGN:TTYC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Diagnoses the specied Teletypewriter Controller (TTYC). NOTE: The Input/Output Processor (IOP) must be in service before the TTYC can be diagnosed. 2. FORMAT
DGN:TTYC a[;[RPT b][,RAW][,UCL][,REX,DEX]][:[PH c[-d]][,TLP][,CONT]]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number (0-255). = Number of times the diagnostic is to be repeated. The maximum is 256. The default is one. UCL should also be
NOTE: This option does not override a forced early termination. REX = Runs Routine Exercise (REX) phases in addition to the normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow Demand Exercise (DEX) phases to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Runs DEX phases in addition to routine exercise and normal (automatic) phases. This option will not allow special demand exercise phases that require user interaction to be run even if the range of phases specied includes such a phase. = Species the rst phase to be executed. = Species the last phase to be executed. = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
DEX
c d TLP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:TTYC-1
401-610-055 DGN TTYC
CONT
1 Includes only the specied unit (controller). Units attached to the specied unit will not be included. If the specied unit has no attached units, CONT is ignored.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INCONSISTENT KEYWORD The combination of keywords is not a valid combination. INVALID DATA Not a valid value for the phase option. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:DMQ RMV:TTYC RST:TTYC STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by a DGN-TTYC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:TTYC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DGN TTYC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-TTYC OP-DMQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DGN:TTYC-3
401-610-055 DGN TTYC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DGN:TTYC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DNLD CELL
ID ............. DNLD:CELL RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update of the specied unit(s) at the specied cell(s). NOTE: Supported in Series II only. 2. FORMAT
DNLD:CELL a, b [ ;c ] [ CLASS d ]!

A single cell site. A range (with maximum in range being 32 cells). A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses (maximum 32).
= Downloadable Series II Cell Site (SII-CS) software/rmware unit types: BBA { y z } BCR-BIU-ACU units (CDMA only) CAT { w } Clock and tone board CCC { y z } Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) cluster controller (CDMA only) CRTU Radio test unit (CDMA) CSC x, CPI Communications processor board CSC x, CPU Cell site controller core board LC { y z } Locate radio LC y ORIG Original locate radio (before Automatic Radio Reconguration [ARR]) RA { y z } Voice radio RA y ORIG Original voice radio (before ARR) RCU [ z ] All locate, setup and voice radios RTU Radio test unit (AMPS) RUPART Partial radio units RUREST Remaining radio units SU { y z } Setup radio SU y ORIG Original setup radio (before ARR) TRTU Radio test unit (TDMA) Key: w = Depends on the technology: 0-11 For CDMA radios in 13.1 CDMA PCS minicell with growth frame 5 frame technology. 0-9 For CDMA radios in 13.1 CDMA PCS minicell with growth frame 4 frame technology.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DNLD:CELL-1
401-610-055 DNLD CELL
0-7 For CDMA radios in 12.1 CDMA PCS minicell with growth frame 3 frame technology. 0-5 For CDMA radios, At most 6 can be specied for CDMA radios. 0-3 For non-CDMA radios. At most 4 can be specied for nonCDMA radios. x = 0-1. y = A single radio or a range or a list of radios. (At most 8 can be specied.) y must be a single radio if one of the following is specied: ORIG, ALLALT or ALLOFC. z = One of the following: ALL All radios of that type at a cell site. ALLAMPS All AMPS radios of that type at a cell site. ALLCDMA Meaning all CDMA units of that type at a cell site. ALLCDMA is only valid when b is BBA or CCC. If b is CCC and the cell is on APXD14.0 or later, then c may be CCCOFC, CCCALT, CCUOFC, CCUALT, or omitted which defaults to ALLOFC. If b is BBA, then c does not apply. ALLTDMA All Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) radios of that type at a cell site. CDMAREST Used to update and restore the rest of the CDMA units (BBAs or CCCs) of that type with the correct NVM version. CDMAREST is valid for all values of c when: b is BBA or CCC, and c is ALLOFC or ALLALT The CDMAREST option is only valid on R15.0 cells and beyond. CAUTION: CCC CDMAREST must be used following the downloading of one or more CCC(s) to complete downloading the rest of the CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) maintenance units with the new NVM image. 1. The combination of SU ALLTDMA is invalid. 2. RUPART is used to update some of the idle radios before doing switch and boot on the mate Cell Site Controller (CSC) in a Cell Software Update procedure. 3. RUREST is used to update and restore the rest of the radio and radio test units with the new NVM after doing switch and boot on the mate CSC in a Cell Software Update procedure.
NOTES:
CAUTION: RUREST must be used following RUPART to complete downloading the rest of the radio and radio test units with the new NVM after doing switch and boot on the mate CSC in a Cell Software Update procedure.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DNLD:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DNLD CELL
= Firmware specications for Radio Channel Unit (RCU), Radio Test Unit (RTU)/ TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU)/ CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU), and CCC units: ALLALT Updates the given CCC and all its associated CDMA Channel Unit (CCU)/ Channel Elements (CEs) with alternate version CDMA only. Updates the given CCC and all its associated CCU/CEs with ofcial version - CDMA only. Both main controller and decoder alternate rmware. Updates CCC with alternate version. - CDMA only. Updates CCC with ofcial version. - CDMA only. Updates CCU image with alternate version. - CDMA only. Updates CCU image with ofcial version. - CDMA only. Decoder alternate rmware. Decoder ofcial rmware. Main controller alternate rmware. Main controller ofcial rmware. Both main controller and decoder ofcial rmware. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ALT, MAINALT, and DCODALT are invalid for RTU and TRTU units. DCODALT, DCODOFC, MAINALT and MAINOFC are invalid for CRTU units. DCODOFC and DCODALT are invalid for TDMA units. The combination of SU ALLTDMA is invalid. ALLCDMA is only valid when: b is BBA or CCC, and c is CCCOFC, CCCALT, CCUOFC, CCUALT or ALLCDMA. The ALLCDMA option is only valid on R14.0 cells and beyond. If you specify either ALLALT or ALLOFC, you must have specied a single CCC at variable b.
ALLOFC ALT CCCALT CCCOFC CCUALT CCUOFC DCODALT DCODOFC MAINALT MAINOFC OFC NOTES:
6. d
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Cell is doing either an NVM update or Random Access Memory (RAM) download. Wait until the cell is done with either activity before issuing command again. If multiple cells are requested, the entire command fails if any of the specied cells are downloading. No Good. The technology of some unit does not match the technology requested.
NG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DNLD:CELL-3
401-610-055 DNLD CELL
PF RL
= =
Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. Retry Later Too many NVM update commands have been entered simultaneously. Wait until an NVM update completes before entering the NVM update command again.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INH:CELL INIT:CELL RMV:CELL Output Messages REPT-CELL-NVM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DNLD:CELL-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DNLD CELL DLOPTS
ID ............. DNLD:CELL-DLOPTS RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update of the Data Link (DL) optioning elds at the specied cell. The request works for an ofine cell site controller only. NOTE: You must enter all 7 parameters in the given order. 2. FORMAT
DNLD:CELL a, DLOPTS b c d e f g h!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Cell site number (1-600). = Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1)/ DL conguration: 0 = 2 DS1 boards and 2 datalinks 1 = 1 DS1 board and 2 datalinks 2 = 1 DS1 board and 1 datalink = Data rate: 0 = 9.6 Kbps 1 = 56 Kbps = Framing mode: 0 = D4 frame (applies to T1 signaling type only) 1 = Extended super frame (applies to T1 signaling type only) 2 = Conference on European Postal and Telecommunications Administrations (CEPT) with CRC4 framing (applies to all E1 signaling options) 3 = CEPT without CRC4 framing (applies to all E1 signaling options) NOTE: The meanings of these values may not correspond to the meanings of the Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) ceqcom2 Form framing mode values. Refer to the 401-610-036 Database Update Manual for information on ceqcom2 Form framing mode values. e = Type of zero suppression: 0 = Zero Code Suppression (ZCS) (applies to T1 signaling type only) 1 = Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS) (applies to T1 signaling type only) 2 = High Density Bipolar (HDB3) (applies to all E1 signaling options) 3 = Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) (applies to all E1 signaling options) NOTE: The meanings of these values may not correspond to the meanings of the RC/V ceqcom2 Form code suppression method values. Refer to the 401-610-036 Database Update Manual for information on ceqcom2 Form code suppression method values.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DNLD:CELL-DLOPTS-1
401-610-055 DNLD CELL DLOPTS
= Line length compensation: 0 = 0 - 133 feet. 1 = 134 - 266 feet. 2 = 267 - 399 feet. 3 = 400 - 533 feet. 4 = 534 - 655 feet. = Signaling type: 0 = T1 signaling. 1 = E1/CEPT channel associated signaling. 2 = E1/CEPT common channel signaling. = Cell type: 0 = 0 - Series II cell site. 2 = Series IIe basic station. 3 = Series IIe growth station. 4 = Series IIm cell site. 5 = Series IImm cell site.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. Cell is doing either NVM update or Random Access Memory (RAM) download. Wait until the cell is done with either activity before issuing command again. If multiple cells are requested, the entire command fails if any of the specied cells are downloading. Printout Follows. Command was accepted. Retry Later. Too many NVM update commands have been entered simultaneously. Wait until an NVM update completes before entering NVM update command again.
PF RL
= =
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DNLD-CELL-DLOPTS
Other References: 401-610-036 Database Update Manual
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DNLD:CELL-DLOPTS-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP ADDR
ID ............. DUMP:ADDR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of a specied range of virtual addresses in the computer main memory as an action associated with a breakpoint. The range is specied by two addresses or an address and a length. The length defaults to a value of one. If only one address is given, indirect addressing may be specied. In this case, the rst offset listed is added to the contents of the given address and the result is interpreted as a virtual address. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of dump locations. For example, a single offset with value zero uses the virtual address found in the location specied in the DUMP:ADDR input message for the dump location. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:ADDR {a-b a [,OFF c] [,L ,NL d]} [;WORD] /

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c L d = Starting virtual address of the dump in decimal, binary, octal, or hexadecimal notation. Assumed to be a byte address unless the WORD option is used. = Ending virtual address of dump. Assumed to be a byte address unless the WORD option is used. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is used. = The length of the dump, assumed to be in bytes unless the WORD option is used. Maximum 128 bytes or 32 words. Default is one, unless a range is explicitly specied. The actual range of addresses dumped will be rounded out to word address boundaries. = Indicator that the operation should use the locations beginning d lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitation are the same as for the L option. = Indicates that all addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted as words, including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted, they are assumed to be byte values. = Dump direction: L Indicator that the operation should add the length d to the starting address to calculate the ending address. NL Indicator that the operation should use the locations beginning d lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitation are the same as for the L option.
NL d
WORD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:ADDR-1
401-610-055 DUMP ADDR
= Addressing increment: WORD - Indicates that all addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted in terms of words, including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted, they are assumed to be byte values.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, or one of the following errors: INCONSISTENT DATA (ADDR) Address range must be in ascending order. INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. MISSING KEYWORD PID or UID must be specied except in a WHEN action list. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long or zero. IP RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:PID DUMP:PMEM DUMP:REG DUMP:UID WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages DUMP-ADDR = In Progress. The input message has been added to the WHEN action list. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:ADDR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP BKTAPE
ID ............. DUMP:BKTAPE RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Displays the contents of the multi-volume Digital Audio Tape (DAT) logical volume headers and optionally provides an estimate of how full the tape is. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:BKTAPE;TD "a" [,TPSIZE b]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Device lename of the DAT drive. See the User Guidelines in this manual for denitions and examples of tape device names. = Length in meters of the DAT mounted on the specied drive. The length is used to estimate how full the tape is. Valid lengths are 30-150 meters.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages COPY:BKDISK COPY:BKTAPE Output Messages DUMP-BKTAPE = Printout Follows. Followed by a DUMP-BKTAPE output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:BKTAPE-1
401-610-055 DUMP BKTAPE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:BKTAPE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CACHE
ID ............. DUMP:CACHE RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of the ofine cache into computer processor main memory. The portions of cache dumped are the ones which map to the kernel and interrupt stacks. The command will not be accepted if the other Control Unit (CU) is in the standby state. The cache (1K bytes) is placed at virtual address 0x80000 for the interrupt stack portion and at virtual address 0x6a0000 for the kernel stack. In the case of the kernel stack, the address dumped to will not correspond to the actual start of the kernel stack. This offset is necessary to preserve the portions of the kernel stack which are not resident in the cache but which do map to the address range used for the cache kernel stack. Whether a particular stack entry is in cache or main memory is dependent upon whether the hardware is present and enabled, and the state of the ISTK bit in the PSW of the running process. The reconstruction of the kernel stack (both cache and main memory) is left to the user. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:CACHE!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DUMP-CACHE = No Good. Could not access or reserve the Unit Control Block (UCB) record of the mate CU, or the mate CU was not out of service. = Printout Follows. Followed by a DUMP-CACHE output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:CACHE-1
401-610-055 DUMP CACHE
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CACHE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
ID ............. DUMP:CELL RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dump a block of text or data memory from a cell. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:CELL a, b; ADRS c [, L d] [ CLASS e]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600):

A single cell site A range (maximum number of cells in range is 32) A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
If b is RA, LC, CCC, CRTU, or SU, a must be a single cell site number. b = Cell site unit (Series II only): CCC x Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) cluster controller, x = (1-42). CCC x, CCU y[,CE z] CDMA cluster controller, x = (1-42), y = CCU unit number (CDMA only), z = CE subunit number (CDMA only). CSC x Cell site controller, x = (0-1). CSC x, CPI Cell site controller, communications processor interface. x = (0-1). LC x Location radio, x = (0-39). RA x Radio for Series II (SII) cells only, x = (0-191). SU x Setup radio, x = (0-7 or 0-35 with Directional Setup). RTU Radio test unit (AMPS). TRTU Radio test unit (TDMA).
= One-to-eight digit memory address in hexadecimal. For each hardware unit, valid ranges are represented below, a valid address would be any address within the represented range of values. For informational purposes only the invalid ranges and the function in that range are also specied for the CCC and CCU units. These ranges represent invalid ranges and cannot be dumped.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:CELL-1
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
CDMA Cluster Controller Third Generation (CCC-3G) Valid dumpable range: (X30000000 (X40000001 (X4020001D (X60100001 (X60200001 (X60300001 (X80000000 (X80000800 (XC001FFFA (XC0020000 (XC003FFFA (XC0040000 (XC005FFFA (XC0060000 (XC007FFFA (XC0080000 X3FFFFFFF) X401FFFFF) X600FFFFF) X601FFFFF) X602FFFFF) X6FFFFFFF) X800007FE) XC001FFF7) XC001FFFB) XC003FFF7) XC003FFFB) XC005FFF7) XC005FFFB) XC007FFF7) XC007FFFB) XE003FFFF)
The following represents the ranges associated with the CCC functions. NOTE - These ranges are not dumpable: Angel interrupt (X800007FF - X800007FF) DUSART 0 (X40000000 - X4000001C) DUSART 1 (X40200000 - X4020001C) ECU 1 DPR left and right Port Mailbox (XC001FFFC - XC001FFFF) ECU 1 bypass Enable Interrupt Reset (XC001FFF8 - XC001FFF9) ECU 2 DPR left and right Port Mailbox (XC003FFFC - XC003FFFF) ECU 2 bypass Enable Interrupt Reset (XC003FFF8 - XC003FFF9) ECU 3 DPR left and right Port Mailbox (XC005FFFC - XC005FFFF) ECU 3 bypass Enable Interrupt Reset (XC005FFF8 - XC005FFF9) ECU 4 DPR left and right Port Mailbox (XC007FFFC - XC007FFFF) ECU 4 bypass Enable Interrupt Reset (XC007FFF8 - XC007FFF9) Empty region after EPROM (XE0040000 - XFFFFFFF) Hardware reset strobe (X70000000 - X7FFFFFFF) Internal cache, bad access int CLR, series port 0 (X00000000 - X2FFFFFFF) SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CELL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
SPYDER-T interrupt clear (X60100000 - X60100000) Timer0clr (X60300000 - X60300000) Write violation interrupt clear (X60200000 - X60200000) CDMA Channel Unit Third Generation (CCU-3G). Valid address range: (XF0000100 (XF1C00000 (XF2000000 (XF2400000 (XF2C00000 (XF4000000 (XF4020000 (XF5100220 (XF5110010 (XF5110220 (XF5120220 (XF5130220 (XF5140000 (XF5140004 (XF5140200 (XF5140220 (XF5150220 (XF5160004 (XF5160220 (XF5170009 (XF5170048 (XF5170220 (XF5171100 (XF5172000 (XF51D0020 (XF5800000 (XF6400028 (XF6400040 XF000012F) XF1C0012F) XF200026F) XF28001FF) XF2C0001F) XF401FFFB) XF510020B) XF5110007) XF5110207) XF5120207) XF5130207) XF5132FFF) XF513FFFF) XF514014F) XF514020B) XF5150207) XF515FFFF) XF5160207) XF5170007) XF517003F) XF5170207) XF5170FFB) XF5171DFF) XF51D0017) XF51D003B) XF6400023) XF640002B) XF640007F)
CDMA Channel Unit Third Generation (CCU-3G). Invalid address range: EXTIF_STATUS Host CSM0 only (XF51D0018 - XF51D001F) EXT_INT_CLEAR Host CSM0 addresses to the CSM1 end (XF51D003C - XF57FFFFF) Jupiter register reserved (XF6400024 - XF6400027) Jupiter registers which clears on read (XF640002C - XF640003F) Jupiter registers reserved (XF6400080 - XF67FFFFF) Last 4 bytes of DPRAM (XF401FFFC - XF401FFFF) Saturn registers not supported (XF0000080 - XF00000FF) Saturn registers not supported (XF0000130 - XF1BFFFFF)
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
Saturn UART registers (XF1C00130 - XF1FFFFFF) Saturn registers not supported (XF2000270 - XF23FFFFF) Saturn registers not supported (XF2800200 - XF2BFFFFF) Saturn registers not supported (XF2C00020 - XF3FFFFFF) Unreadable PNGEN CSM0 only (XF510020C - XF510021F) Unreadable AIRAM CSM0 only (XF5110008 - XF511000F) Unreadable AIRAM CSM0 only (XF5110208 - XF511021F) Unreadable SEARCHER CSM0 only (XF5120208 - XF512021F) Unreadable DEMOD CSM0 only (XF5130208 - XF513021F) Unreadable DEMOD CSM0 only (XF5133000 - XF513FFFF) FRAME_STATUS_BUFFER CSM0 only (XF5140000 - XF5140003) Unreadable DEINT CSM0 only (XF5140150 - XF51401FF) Unreadable DEINT CSM0 only (XF514020C - XF514021F) Unreadable VD CSM0 only (XF5150208 - XF515021F) Unreadable TD registers CSM0 only (XF5160000 - XF5160003) Unreadable TD registers CSM0 only (XF5160208 - XF516021F) Unreadable TX_FIFO_RESET CSM0 (XF5170008 - XF5170008) Unreadable TX_PARITY_STATUS CSM0 only (XF5170040 - XF5170047) Unreadable TX registers CSM0 only (XF5170208 - XF517021F) Unreadable TX_FRAME_CNTL/DATA CSM0 (XF5170FFC - XF51710FF) Unreadable TX registers CSM0 only (XF5171E00 - XF5171FFF) CDMA Cluster Controller Second Generation (CCC-2G) Valid address range: Angel interrupt (X800007FF - X800007FF) DUSART 0 (X40000000 - X4000001C) DUSART 1 (X40200000 - X4020001C) Empty region after EPROM (XE0040000 - XFFFFFFFF) Hardware reset strobe (X70000000 - X7FFFFFFF)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CELL-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
HCU 1 DPRAM (XC0017FFE - XC0017FFF) HCU 1 bypass enable interrupt reset (XC0018003 - XC0018004) HCU 2 DPRAM (XC0027FFE - XC0027FFF) HCU 2 bypass enable interrupt reset (XC0028003 - XC0028004) HCU 3 DPRAM (XC0037FFE - XC0037FFF) HCU 3 bypass enable interrupt reset (XC0038003 - XC0038004) HCU 4 DPRAM (XC0047FFE - XC0047FFF) HCU 4 bypass enable interrupt reset (XC0048003 - XC0048004) HCU 5 DPRAM (XC0057FFE - XC0057FFF) HCU 5 bypass enable interrupt reset (XC0058003 - XC0058004) HCU 6 DPRAM (XC0067FFE - XC0067FFF) HCU 6 bypass enable interrupt reset (XC0068003 - XC0068004) HCU 7 DPRAM (XC0077FFE - XC0077FFF) HCU 7 bypass enable interrupt reset (XC0078003 - XC0078004) Internal cache, bad access interrupt CLR, series port 0 (X00000000 - X2FFFFFFF) SPYDER-T interrupt clear (X60100000 - X60100000) Timer0clr (X60300000 - X60300000) Write violation interrupt clear (X60200000 - X60200000) CDMA Channel Unit Second Generation (CCU-2G) Valid address range: CCU x DPRAM (XE0007FFE - XE0007FFF) EPROM (XF0000000 - XFFFFFFFF) Internal cache (X00000000 - X000003FF) Series II only. Valid address range: Cell Site Controller (CSC) CSC Core Board Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) (X0 - X1FFFF) CSC Core Board Random Access (X4000000 - X5FFFFFF) Memory (RAM)
CSC Core Board Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) (XFFE00000 - XFFFFFFFF)
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
Communications Processor (X0 - X1FFFF)
Interface
(CPI)
NVM
Communications Processor (CP) SRAM (X40000 - X7FFFF) CPI Dual Port RAM (X80000 - X81FF7) Locate Radio (X0 - XFFFF) Setup Radio (X0 - XFFFF) AMPS Radio Channel Unit (RCU) or Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Digital Radio Unit (DRU) (X0 - XFFFF) TDMA Enhanced Digital Radio (X4000000 - X41FFFFF) Unit (EDRU)
AMPS Test Unit (X0 - XFFFF) TDMA Test Unit (X0 - XFFFF) d = Number of bytes (Length [L]) (1-160) of data to be dumped. The default is 1. If a Series II LC, SU, RA, RTU, or TRTU is involved, the maximum number of bytes is 64. If a Series II CCC or CE is involved, the maximum number of bytes is 160. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = = Printout Follows. Request has been executed; output message(s) will follow. Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None.
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
Output Messages DUMP-CELL-EVENT
401-610-055 DUMP CELL
401-610-055 DUMP CELL AUTH FAIL
ID ............. DUMP:CELL-AUTH-FAIL RELEASE ....... 25.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Request the Backhaul Connection Server (BHCS) to generate a list of the Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) that have failed authentication. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:CELL,AUTH,FAIL
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Request could not be granted; explanation follows. = Printout Follows. Message was received. A DUMP-CELL-AUTH-FAIL output message will follow with a list of the BTSs which have failed authentication.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DUMP-CELL-AUTH-FAIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:CELL-AUTH-FAIL-1
401-610-055 DUMP CELL AUTH FAIL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CELL-AUTH-FAIL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CELL MRA
ID ............. DUMP:CELL-MRA RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Determines which input actions (if any) are waiting in Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) at a cell. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:CELL a:MRA [CLASS b]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Cell site number (1-600). = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site; output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been executed; output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DUMP-CELL-MRA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:CELL-MRA-1
401-610-055 DUMP CELL MRA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CELL-MRA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CELL MRAQ
ID ............. DUMP:CELL-MRAQ RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Determines which devices (if any) are being diagnosed at a cell, and which devices (if any) are waiting to be diagnosed in the high- and low-priority test equipment queues. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:CELL a:MRAQ [ CLASS b]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600). A single cell site. A range (1-32). A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site; output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been executed; output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages DUMP-CELL-MRAQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:CELL-MRAQ-1
401-610-055 DUMP CELL MRAQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CELL-MRAQ-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CELL PLM
ID ............. DUMP:CELL-PLM RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps a Power Level Measurement (PLM) for a cell. The rst format is for Series II, Flexent Modular Cells and Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) Cells, and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. The second format is for Flexent Microcells. NOTE: This command only applies to cells with CDMA equipment. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
DUMP:CELL a; PLM b; CARRIER c, SECTOR d! DUMP:CELL a, MICRO e; PLM b; CARRIER c!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600): A single cell site. A range (maximum number of cells in range is 32). A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses. = Power Level Measurement (PLM) mode: 9 Total Output Power on Forward Link. 10 Noise Rise (Median and Delta Rise) = Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) cell carrier number: 1-10 for pre-R22.0 cells. 1-18 for R22.0 and later cells. d e = CDMA sector number (0-6). = Flexent Microcell number (1-6).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E IP NG = Error. = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site; output message(s) will follow. = No Good. May be the following reason: The CDMA FER/PLM Feature is not active 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages VER:PLM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:CELL-PLM-1
401-610-055 DUMP CELL PLM
Output Messages DUMP-CELL-PLM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CELL-PLM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP CELL SG
ID ............. DUMP:CELL-SG RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests an aggregate service measurement count for each voice radio of appropriate technology type on the specied cell, server group, and antenna face. NOTE: This input command works for Series II cell sites only. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:CELL a,SG b,ANT c;d [ CLASS e]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = A single cell site number (1-600). = Server group number (0-1). = Antenna face number (0-6), specied in one of the following ways: A single antenna face number. A hyphen-separated range with a starting antenna face number and an ending antenna face number (example: 2-5). 0 = Omni 1 = Alpha 2 = Beta 3 = Gamma 4 = Delta 5 = Epsilon 6 = Zeta = Type of service measurement count to be requested: HOBIT Hand-off Based on Interference (HOBIT) for Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA). This option applies only to TDMA radios. INLA Interference Look Ahead. This option applies to AMPS and TDMA radios. e = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. Request has been accepted. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Specied parameters are out of range or other necessary conditions for message execution were not met.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:CELL-SG-1
401-610-055 DUMP CELL SG
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages REPT-CELL-SG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:CELL-SG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP FILE ALL
ID ............. DUMP:FILE-ALL RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of an ASCII le. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:FILE:ALL, FN "a" [,OPL b]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Pathname of the le. See User Guidelines for denitions of pathname and le.
NOTE: Dumps of directories and/or non-ASCII les may produce unpredictable output. b = Number of segments output, specied in decimal. Default is 10 segments. Maximum number of segments is 999. Each segment has a maximum size of 1000 bytes or 20 lines.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:FILE-DATA DUMP:FILE-PARTL Output Messages DUMP-FILE-ALL DUMP-FILE-PARTL = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-FILE-ALL output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:FILE-ALL-1
401-610-055 DUMP FILE ALL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:FILE-ALL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP FILE DATA
ID ............. DUMP:FILE-DATA RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of a le in the specied format. If no format is given, the dump is printed in octal. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:FILE:DATA, FN "a" [,b] [,OPL c]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Pathname of the le. The pathname is a list of the names of each directory leading to the le, and ends with the name of the specic le. Each name begins with a slash, and the entire pathname is enclosed in quotation marks. For example, /usr/a1/ssw/test means that /usr/a1/ssw represents the list of directory names and /test represents the le name. = Species the output format (default = octal): C D O X c Interprets bytes in ASCII notation. Interprets words in decimal notation. Interprets words in octal notation. Interprets words in hexadecimal notation.
= Number of segments to be output: specied in decimal. Default is 10 segments. Maximum number is 999. Each segment has a maximum size of 1000 bytes or 20 lines.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:FILE-ALL DUMP:FILE-PARTL Output Messages DUMP-FILE-ALL DUMP-FILE-PARTL = Printout Follows. Followed by DUMP-FILE-PARTL output message.
Other References: 254-341-100 SPCS File System Software Subsystem Description 3B20D Computer
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:FILE-DATA-1
401-610-055 DUMP FILE DATA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:FILE-DATA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP FILE FORMAT
ID ............. DUMP:FILE-FORMAT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of a le in the specied format. If no format is given, the dump is printed in octal. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:FILE:FORMAT, FN "a" [,b] [,OPL c]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Pathname of the le. The pathname is a list of the names of each directory leading to the le, and ends with the name of the specic le. Each name begins with a slash, and the entire pathname is enclosed in quotation marks. For example, usr/a1/ssw/test means that /usr/a1/ssw/ represents the list of directory names and /test represents the le name. = Species the output format (default = octal): C D O X c - Interprets bytes in ASCII notation. - Interprets words in decimal notation. - Interprets words in octal notation. - Interprets words in hexadecimal notation.
= Number of segments output: specied in decimal. Default is 10 segments. Maximum is 999. Each segment has a maximum size of 1000 bytes or 20 lines.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:FILE-ALL DUMP:FILE-PARTL Output Messages DUMP-FILE-ALL DUMP-FILE-FORMAT DUMP-FILE-PARTL = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-FILE-FORMAT output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:FILE-FORMAT-1
401-610-055 DUMP FILE FORMAT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:FILE-FORMAT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP FILE PARTL
ID ............. DUMP:FILE-PARTL RELEASE ....... 13.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Prints one or more lines of an ASCII le. NOTE: 2. FORMAT Specifying a non-ASCII le may produce unpredictable output.
DUMP:FILE:PARTL, FN "a", LINE b[-c][,OPL=d]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Pathname of the le. See User Guidelines for the denition of a pathname. = Line number to be printed or rst line of a range, specied in decimal. If the line number specied (limited to 1 through 131072 inclusive) is larger than the number of lines in the le, the last line of the le is assumed. = Last line number of a range (limited to 1 through 131072 inclusive). If larger then the number of lines in the le, the last line of the le is assumed. = Output is printed in segments to prevent a large dump from dominating the ROP. The OPL option species the decimal number of segments to output (1-999) with the default at 10 segments. Each printed segment will contain up to 800 bytes, which includes formatting space and line numbering.
c d
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:FILE-ALL DUMP:FILE-DATA Output Messages DUMP-FILE-ALL DUMP-FILE-FORMAT DUMP-FILE-PARTL = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-FILE-PARTL output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:FILE-PARTL-1
401-610-055 DUMP FILE PARTL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:FILE-PARTL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP ISR
ID ............. DUMP:ISR RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dump the contents of the ISDN User Part (ISUP) Register (ISR) associated with the input ISR index and Call Processing/Database Node (CDN). The contents of the specied ISR will be output without disturbing any active calls even if the ISR is actually involved in an active call. This message is useful to technical support in the resolution of anomalous call scenarios. Note that this input command only applies when an ISUP call is being serviced by a Traditional/Reduced Footprint Digital Cellular Switch (DCS); it does not apply to the 5ESS DCS. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:ISR a,CDN b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Single index number of the ISR to be dumped (0-1299). = Single CDN number of the ISR to be dumped (1-24).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Request could not be granted; explanation follows. = Printout Follows. Message was received; dump output for the ISR specied follows.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INIT:ISR-CDN Output Messages AUD-CDN-OSDS-N-E-N
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:ISR-1
401-610-055 DUMP ISR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:ISR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP KERN
ID ............. DUMP:KERN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of a specied range of virtual addresses in computer kernel as an immediate action. The range is specied by two addresses or an address and a length. The length defaults to a value of 1. If only one address is given, indirect addressing may be specied. In this case, the rst offset listed is added to the content of the given address and the result is interpreted as a virtual address. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of dump locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the location specied in the DUMP:KERN input message for the dump location. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:KERN {a-b a [,OFF c][, {L NL} d]}!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c L d = Starting virtual byte address of the dump, in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal. = Ending virtual byte address of the dump. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. = The length of the dump, assumed to be in bytes. The maximum is 128 bytes. The default is 1, unless a range is explicitly specied. The actual range of addresses to be dumped will be rounded out to word address boundaries. = Indicator that the operation should use the locations beginning d lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitations are the same as for the L option.
NL d
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, or one of the following errors: INCONSISTENT DATA (ADDR) Address range must be in ascending order. INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. MISSING KEYWORD PID or UID must be specied except in a WHEN action list. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long or zero.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:KERN-1
401-610-055 DUMP KERN
IP PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = Printout Follows. Followed by a WHEN output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:PID DUMP:PMEM DUMP:REG DUMP:UID WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages DUMP-ADDR WHEN-PID WHEN-UID
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:KERN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP MCR
ID ............. DUMP:MCR RELEASE ....... 17.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of the Mobile Call Register (MCR) associated with the input MCR number, also known as the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Call Identication (ECID), and Call Processing/Database Node (CDN). The contents of the specied MCR will be output, whether or not the MCR is actually involved in an active call, without disturbing any active calls. If the specied MCR is linked to other MCRs as part of an active call, those linked MCRs will also be output. The data will be output via a CPHISTORY formatted MCR dump, (which is a special case use of the CDN audit error message) with an "ERROR" number of "99". This message is useful to technical support in the resolution of anomalous call scenarios. NOTE: A CP 977 assert occurs as a result of using this command. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:MCR a,CDN b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Single ECID number of the MCR to be dumped (0-65535). = Single CDN number of the MCR to be dumped (1-24).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG PF = No Good. Request could not be granted; explanation follows. = Printout Follows. Message was received; CPHISTORY output for the MCR specied follows.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages INIT:MCR-CDN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:MCR-1
401-610-055 DUMP MCR
Output Messages REPT-CDN-OSDS-AUD REPT-CDN-OSDS-DATA REPT-CDN-OSDS-NAME
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:MCR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP MHD BLOCK
ID ............. DUMP:MHD-BLOCK RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Do not input this request at the same time as another request for the same MHD, because errors due to resource limitations may occur.
1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of a specied single disk block or a range of blocks, in hexadecimal. One disk block contains 512 bytes. The Moving Head Disk (MHD) does not have to be in the active state for this command to work. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:MHD a;BLOCK b[-c][:DEST {ROP"d"}]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number (0-255). = Disk block offset from the start of the disk, specied in decimal (0-2147483646). May be the rst block of a range of blocks. Block 0 is the rst block of a disk. = Last block of a range of blocks (0-2147483646). = Destination of the output. Default is the inputing Teletypewriter (TTY). = Read Only Printer (ROP). A maximum of ve disk blocks can be directed to the ROP by a single input command. = Pathname of a le to receive the data. See User Guidelines for the denition of pathname. There is no limit on the number of disk blocks that can be directed to a le by a single input command.
c DEST ROP d
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-MHD-BLOCK output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:MHD-BLOCK-1
401-610-055 DUMP MHD BLOCK
Output Messages DUMP-MHD-BLOCK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:MHD-BLOCK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP MHD DEFECT
ID ............. DUMP:MHD-DEFECT RELEASE ....... 13.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dump defect management information for a Moving Head Disk (MHD). This command is used to read the defect tables from an MHD. The tables specify the location of media defects. This information is used by the MHDs controller to map around defective areas on the media. This command should only be used for disk drives that support defect management; otherwise, the command will abort. The MHD does not have to be in the active state to execute this command. If no options are specied, the COMB (combined) defect table will be output. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:MHD a;DEFECT [ ;FN "b" { : [ [COMB] [,MFGR] ] ALL } ]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE MHD a FN = Identies the MHD used in the message. = MHD member number (0-255). = Indicates the user is specifying a le to which the MFGR defect table will be written. For Storage Module Device (SMD) MHD, the le is formatted in a way that can be used as input to the LOAD:MHD command. For Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) MHD, the contents of the le is purely informational and cannot be used as input to the LOAD:MHD command. b COMB = Full pathname that species the le to be written. = Requests the combined defect table. For SMD MHD, this table represents the defect list currently being used by the MHDs controller to map around defects. The COMB defect table can be updated by using the INIT:MHD command with the NEW option. The update copies the current MFGR defect table to the COMB defect table. For SCSI MHD, this table represents the GROWN defect list and contains only those defects added by the user. This list, in conjunction with the PRIMARY defect list (see MFGR option below), is used by the MHDs controller to map around media defects.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:MHD-DEFECT-1
401-610-055 DUMP MHD DEFECT
MFGR
= Requests the manufacturers defect table. For SMD MHD, this table represents the original defects supplied by the disk drive vendor and defects added by the user. This table is used to update the COMB defect table. For SCSI MHD, this table represents the PRIMARY defect list and contains only those defects supplied by the disk drive vendor. This list, in conjunction with the GROWN defect list (see COMB option above), is used by the MHDs controller to map around media defects.
ALL
= Requests both defect tables: COMB and MFGR.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages LOAD:MHD-DEFECT INIT:MHD Output Messages DUMP-MHD-DEFECT = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-MHD-DEF output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:MHD-DEFECT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP MHD VTOC
ID ............. DUMP:MHD-VTOC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Do not input this request at the same time as another DUMP:MHD or VFY:MHD request, because errors may occur.
1. PURPOSE Formats and prints the contents of a disk packs Volume Table Of Contents (VTOC). The Moving Head Disk (MHD) does not have to be in the active state for this command to work. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:MHD a; VTOC [:SORT {B P}]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a SORT = Member number (0-255). = Species the sort algorithm to be used in formatting the output data. B Sort by ascending disk block addresses (default). P Sort by ascending logical partition numbers. NOTE: Disk packs used in the UNIX RTR operating system must have a VTOC starting at block number zero. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages VFY:MHD Output Messages DUMP-MHD-VTOC = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-MHD-VTOC output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:MHD-VTOC-1
401-610-055 DUMP MHD VTOC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:MHD-VTOC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP PID
ID ............. DUMP:PID RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of the specied range of virtual addresses in computer main memory in the address space of the process with the specied process identier. This message cannot be used as an action associated with a breakpoint. The range is specied by two addresses or as one address and a length. The length defaults to a value of 1. If only one address is given, indirect addressing may be specied. In this case, the rst offset listed is added to the value of the given address and the result is interpreted as another address. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of dump locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the location specied in the DUMP:PID input message for the dump location. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:PID a, ADDR {b-c b [, OFF d][, {L NL} e]} [; WORD] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d L e = Process ID of the target process. = Starting virtual address of the dump in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. Assumed to be a byte address unless the WORD option is used. = Ending virtual address of the dump. Assumed to be a byte address unless the WORD option is used. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is used. = The length of the dump, assumed to be in bytes unless the WORD option is used. Maximum 128 bytes or 32 words. Default=1, unless a range is explicitly specied. The actual range of addresses to be dumped will be rounded out to word address boundaries. = Used to indicate that the operation should use the locations beginning e lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitations are the same as for the L option. = Indicates that all addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted in terms of words including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted, they are assumed to be byte values.
NL e
WORD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:PID-1
401-610-055 DUMP PID
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?A = Action eld contains an error. INVALID KEYWORD Command not allowed in a WHEN action list. ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, or one of the following errors: INCONSISTENT DATA (ADDR) Address range must be in ascending order. INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. MISSING KEYWORD PID or UID must be specied except in a WHEN action list. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long or zero. NG PF RL = No Good. The PID is for a process for which dumps are not permitted. = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-PID output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:ADDR DUMP:PMEM DUMP:REG DUMP:UID OP:ST-PROCESS OP:UMEM Output Messages DUMP-PID
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:PID-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP PMEM
ID ............. DUMP:PMEM RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of a specied range of physical addresses in computer main memory. The range is specied by two addresses or by one address and an optional byte length count. The default length is 4 bytes. The output will contain formatted fullwords. If the addresses specied did not describe a set of fullwords, the addresses will be rounded out to fullword boundaries. For example, physical memory addresses X4041-X405D (in hexadecimal) would be treated as hexadecimal numbers X4040-X405F. This message may be used either as an immediate command or in the action list of a WHEN. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:PMEM {a-b a [,{L NL} c]} {/ !}

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Starting (if L is used) or ending (if NL is used) physical address dump in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. Value will be rounded down to a fullword address. = Ending physical address for dump in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation. Value will be rounded up to the next fullword boundary. = Indicator that the ending address should be calculated by adding the byte length c to the starting address a and then rounding up to the next fullword boundary. = Byte length used to calculate the starting address. The byte length c is subtracted from the ending address a and then rounded down to a fullword boundary. The address a is rounded up to the next fullword boundary and is used as the ending address.
b L c
NL c
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, or: RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long or zero. IP PF RL = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-PMEM output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:PMEM-1
401-610-055 DUMP PMEM
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:PID DUMP:UID WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages DUMP-PMEM
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:PMEM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP REG
ID ............. DUMP:REG RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of one or more registers, either as an immediate action, or as an action associated with a breakpoint. This message can also be used to dump an address range in main memory (by specifying a single register and offsets), but only if the message is part of an action list for a WHEN message. If offsets are specied, the rst offset is added to the contents of the specied register and the result is interpreted as a virtual address. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of dump locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the register for the memory dump location. NOTE: Offsets can only be used if the DUMP:REG message is used as an action associated with a breakpoint, since that denes a process address space for memory addressing. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:REG a [,OFF b] [,{L NL} c] [;WORD] {/ !}

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Single register name or a list of registers to be dumped. See User Guidelines for instructions on entering a list of names. A maximum of ve registers may be listed. The following is a list of acceptable register names: AP, ATBBGR, ATBPSW, ATBQ, ATBSAR, ATBSCR, ATBSDR, BGR, CDR, DSTBUS, ER, FP, HG, HM, HSR, IB, IM, IS, ONES, PA, PPR, PSW, R0, R1, R10, R11, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, RTC, SAR, SBR0, SBR1, SBR2, SBR3, SBR4, SBR5, SBR6, SBR7, SCR, SCRATCH0, SCRATCH1, SDR, SIR, SM, SP, SRCBUS, SSR, SYSBASE, T0, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, TIMERS, TOPIS, UINT0, UINT1, UINT2, UINT3, UINTER. b = Offset. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are only allowed if one register is specied. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is used. = The length of the dump, in bytes unless the WORD option is used. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words for memory dumps and 4 bytes for register dumps. The default is 1 unless a range is explicitly specied. The actual range of addresses to be dumped will be rounded out to word address boundaries.
L c
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:REG-1
401-610-055 DUMP REG
NL c
= Indicator that the operation should use the locations beginning c lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitations are the same as for the L option. = Indicates that all addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted in terms of words, including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted they are assumed to be byte values.
WORD
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, or one of the following errors: EXTRA KEYWORD Indirection not allowed except as an action of a WHEN. INCONSISTENT DATA (REG LIST + OFF) No indirection permitted with more than one register listed. INCONSISTENT KEYWORDS (NL-OFF) Negative length not allowed without OFF. INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. INPUT ERROR (REG COUNT) Too many registers listed. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long or zero. IP NG = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = No Good. BAD REG NAME PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-REG output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:ADDR DUMP:PID DUMP:PMEM DUMP:UID OP:UMEM WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages DUMP-REG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:REG-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP REG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:REG-3
401-610-055 DUMP REG
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:REG-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP RUTIL
ID ............. DUMP:RUTIL RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of memory at the given node. Format 1: memory at the address range given at the specied node. Format 2: memory from the given address for the specied length. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
DUMP:RUTIL(a, b), {APNP}; ADDR (Xc, Xd) ! DUMP:RUTIL(a, b), {APNP}; ADDR Xc, { L NL } e [;WORD] !
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Group number (0-63). = Member number (1-15). = Start address of the dump in hexadecimal. If L is given, then c is taken to be the beginning address to dump. If NL is given, then c is the end address of the dump; the start address is calculated by end address minus total number of bytes to dump. d e = End address of the dump in hexadecimal. = Length of the dump in decimal; if WORD is given, then e is the number of four-byte words to dump, otherwise e is the number of bytes to dump.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE An attempt will be made to dump the contents of the specied address at the given node. Currently a maximum length of 468 bytes is allowed for a single dump operation. All addresses are to be provided in hexadecimal, for example, XFE3402. All lengths are to be provided in decimal, for example, 75. A formatted output of the nodes memory contents will be printed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:RUTIL-1
401-610-055 DUMP RUTIL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages LOAD:RUTIL Output Messages DUMP-RUTIL
Other References: 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:RUTIL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP SMEAS
ID ............. DUMP:SMEAS RELEASE ....... 15.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps signaling system measurements from measurement history les in a nonpaged format. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:SMEAS (a [, a]); HIST b; {SLK (c, d [, e, f]) NODE (c, d [, e, f]) CHN g[-g] LS h[-h] CLUSTER i[-i]} [: DEST j]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Measurement identication in at most 12 characters. = Name of the history le. The history le name must agree with one of the names in the HFDT table: C30M Current 30 minute data le. CDAY Current day data le. CHRM Current hour data le. L15M Last 15 minute data le. L30M Last 30 minute data le. LDAY Last day data le. LHRM Last hour data le. LPM Last period measurement structure. c d e f g h i j = Group number (0-63), starting group number. = Member number (1-15), starting member number. = Group number (0-63), ending group number. = Member number (1-15), ending member number. = Starting and ending channel number. = Starting and ending link set number. = Starting and ending cluster number. = Destination class.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE User may specify as many measurement names as the command will allow. In addition to those measurement names listed in the References section, these values will also be permitted: ALL7LINK, ALLCHANNEL, ALLCLUSTER ALLIUN, ALLLINKSET, ALLOFFICE, ALLRPC, and FACPERF. If ALLOFFICE is specied, then all of the nonzero ofce measurements will be output.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:SMEAS-1
If ALL7LINK is specied, all of the nonzero link measurements for the CCS7 link(s) specied will be output. ALLIUN, ALLRPC, ALLCHANNEL, ALLLINKSET, and ALLCLUSTER will be handled similarly. If FACPERF is specied, then the following nonzero CCS7 link facility related measurements will be output: CRCER, ERSEC, NCCLALOC, NCCMXOSY, NCCTOTR NCCTOTRT RABTER, and SEVERSEC. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:OUTCLS Output Messages DUMP-SMEAS Output Appendices Appendix 10
Other References: None
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:SMEAS-2 Issue 28
MEASUREMENTS RECOGNIZED BY THE COMMAND IMS/CNI OFFICE MEASUREMENTS - DO NOT REQUIRE OPTIONS (SLK, ...) ABOFL BLKG1 CINIT4 CINIT4T COFFDIF GTTUNNT INIT1A INIT2 INIT3T MRRING NOCMGT RGCNFG SCR SCRGTR SCSRTX SPISPT SPIAPO TRMSUOCT ABOFS CINIT0 CINIT0T CLFA CUTOCUWDS GTTUNBT INIT1AT INIT3 INIT4T MRSBCO7 ORMSUOCT RGCNFGT SCRERPRO SCRLNN SCSSTR SPISPPO SPIAPOT TSMSUOCT ALSRO CINIT1 CINIT1T CLFAT CUTOCUMSG IMOFFDI INIT1B INIT4 MRBADRTG MRSNTO7 ORIGMSUS RNIMN SCRERUA SCRLSS SCSSTX SPISPPOT SRNIAU TRMDMSUS ALSROT CINIT2 CINIT2T CLFSP GTTPERFD INITBT INIT1BT INIT0T MRNIAU MSINVSIO RDWN RNIMNT SCRERUATY SCRNATL SCUDSX SPIA SRNIAUT BLKG0 CINIT3 CINIT3T CLFSPT GTTUNBC INITBTT INIT0 INIT2T MRNIAUT NOCMG RDWNT RTGAUDFL SCRERUNE SCSRTR SPISP SPIAT THRSWMSU
MEASUREMENTS THAT REQUIRE NODE OPTION ARRATT BUFSW DMAFLT ILLEGAL IPSM0 MINTRA MXRG0 OOSAU PIOFLT RCOPTER1 RIPTER0 RRBOVFLW2 RSTTRMT SFPTER1 WRRGQ1 WXRG0 ARRFLR CONFG DMAMISS IMNPDIF IPSM1 MRINTCH MXRG1 OOSAUT PTERTE RDFMTER0 RIPTER1 RRBOVFLW3 RTMSGSRC TDPRCNG0 WSMER0 WXRG1 ARREXR CONFGT IDLE INBOF IUNOVLD0 MRNRING NPPTER OOSMN RACER0 RDFMTER1 RPCBOF RRBOVFLW1T RTOCUWDS TDPRCNG1 WSMER1 BLK0 CUTORWDS IFBPTER0 IPFMTER0 IUNOVLD1 MRRGQ0 OOSCFG OOSMNT RACER1 RDINHER0 RRBOVFLW0 RRBOVFLW2T RTOCUMSG TDPRCNG2 WTFMTER0 BLK1 CUTORMSG IFBPTER1 IPFMTER1 IUNOVLD2 MRRGQ1 OOSCFGT PANICS RCOPTER0 RDINHER1 RRBOVFLW1 RRBOVFLW3T SFPTER0 WRRGQ0 WTFMTER1
MEASUREMENTS THAT REQUIRE CHN OPTION RBOF WBOFO RBOFBLK RINTCH WBOFN WBOFNL
MEASUREMENTS THAT REQUIRE LS OPTION ALSR LSMSURECD ALSRT LSOCTRECD CLF LSOCTRETRN CLFT LSOCTTRAN LSMSUTRAN
MEASUREMENTS THAT REQUIRE CLUSTER OPTION RTESETUN RTESETUNT
CCS7 MEASUREMENTS THAT REQUIRE SLK OPTION BYMSUX BYSX L6MGRV0 L6MGXV3 L6MGRV5 L6SUPRV0 L6SUPRV5 L6SUPXV2 L6SUPXV7 L7AFLT L7EMRPO L7FLDT L7LCDIS2XT L7LCON1XT L7MFLT MGANSRV0 MGANSRV5 MGANSXV2 MGANSXV7 MGIAMRV4 MGIAMXV1 MGIAMXV6 NACRTE BYMSUR BYX L6MGXV1 L6MGRV3 L6MGXV6 L6SUPRV1 L6SUPRV6 L6SUPXV3 L7ACO L7BOLR L7EMRPOT L7LCDIS1X L7LCDIS3XT L7LCON2XT L7MGSX MGANSRV1 MGANSRV6 MGANSXV3 MGIAMRV0 MGIAMRV5 MGIAMXV2 MGIAMXV7 SPI BYRX CRCER L6MGRV1 L6MGXV4 L6MGRV6 L6SUPRV2 L6SUPRV7 L6SUPXV4 L7ACOFE L7BOLRT L7EMRT L7LCDIS2X L7LCON1X L7LCON3XT L7MGSR MGANSRV2 MGANSRV7 MGANSXV4 MGIAMRV1 MGIAMRV6 MGIAMXV3 MGMSUX SPIPOC BYR ERSEC L6MGXV2 L6MGRV4 L6MGXV7 L6SUPRV3 L6SUPXV0 L6SUPXV5 L7ACONE L7DIF L7FLALIGN L7LCDIS3X L7LCON2X L7MCOFE L7POR MGANSRV3 MGANSXV0 MGANSXV5 MGIAMRV2 MGIAMRV7 MGIAMXV4 MGMSUR SPIPOT BYSR L6MGXV0 L6MGRV2 L6MGXV5 L6MGRV7 L6SUPRV4 L6SUPXV1 L6SUPXV6 L7ACOTE L7EMR L7FLD L7LCDIS1XT L7LCON3X L7MCONE L7PORT MGANSRV4 MGANSXV1 MGANSXV6 MGIAMRV3 MGIAMXV0 MGIAMXV5 NACR SPIT
CCS7 MEASUREMENTS THAT REQUIRE SLK OPTION (Contd) BYRXTE DCFLHWPT DCFLXDC DRPEMSG1 DRP7MSG3 L7BADRTG L7MRPNT L7POXT L7TRMSUOCT MSUDISC0 NCCLALOC RABT SC7SEGSCSFL SC7RERUNE SC7UDSX ZPEAKOCC CRCERTE DCFLSWP DCFLXDCT DRPEMSG2 ERSECTE L7BOFRT L7MSINVSIO L7RBFOC L7TSMSUOCT MSUDISC1 NCCMXOSY RABTER SC7R SC7RGTR SEVERSEC DCFLABN DCFLSWPT DCFLXER DRPEMSG3 FORRX L7BYTO3B L7ORIGMSUS L7RTGAUD L7XBFLOOK MSUDISC2 NCCTOTR SC7REASATT SC7RERPRO SC7RLNN SQL DCFLABNT DCFLXDA DCFLXERT DRP7MSG1 FORRXBY L7LNKACTT L7ORMSUOCT L7THRSWMSU L7XBFOC MSUSAMPL NCCTOTRT SC7REASSCSFL SC7RERUA SC7RLSS TPROCOTG DCFLHWP DCFLXDAT DRBSYLNK DRP7MSG2 LINKDLAY L7MRPBC L7POX L7TRMDMSUS MSG7LOOP NBSYLINK OCCUPMSU SC7SEGATT SC7RERUATY SC7RNATL UNVL
401-610-055 DUMP TRK DATA
ID ............. DUMP:TRK-DATA RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests logged trunk test data. The data will appear in tabular form on the Read Only Printer (ROP) with explanatory headers. Test result data will be tabulated from the time specied to the present. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:TRK;DATA {XMITMISC}:a ,b [ CLASS c] [;UCL] [;DCS d] [;DCS d,TRKGRP e]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE XMIT MISC a b UCL c DCS d TRKGRP e = This log contains transmission test data for completed but failing trunk tests. = This log contains data concerning trunk tests that terminated abnormally. = Month (01-12). = Day (01-31). = Retrieve data from the specic date requested. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported. = Search for a specic Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) number. DCS must be used in conjunction with a TRKGRP number. = DCS number (01-16). = Search for a specic trunk group within a specied DCS. Must be preceded by the DCS option. = Trunk group number: 1-2000 for 5ESS DCS. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG = In Progress. Request has been received by UNIX -level process TMlog for handling. Output message will follow. = No Good. Necessary condition for execution of request not met.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:TRK-DATA-1
401-610-055 DUMP TRK DATA
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:TRK-DATA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP UID
ID ............. DUMP:UID RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of a specied range of virtual addresses in computer main memory in the address space of the process with the specied utility identier. This message cannot be used as an action associated with a breakpoint. The range is specied by two addresses or by one address and a length. The length defaults to a value of 1. If only one address is given, indirect addressing may be specied. In this case, the rst offset is added to the value of the given address and the result is interpreted as a virtual address. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of dump locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the location specied in the DUMP:UID message for the dump location. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:UID a, ADDR {b-c b [,OFF d] [,{L NL} e]} [;WORD] !

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d L e = Utility ID number of the target process. = Starting virtual address of the dump in decimal, binary, octal, or hexadecimal notation. Assumed to be a byte address unless the WORD option is used. = Ending virtual address of dump. Assumed to be a byte address unless the WORD option is used. = Offset. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is used. = The length of the dump, in bytes unless the WORD option is used. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words. The default is 1, unless a range is explicitly specied. The actual range of addresses to be dumped will be rounded out to word address boundaries. = Indicator that the operation should use the locations beginning e lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitations are the same as for the L option. = Indicates that all addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted in terms of words including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted they are assumed to be byte values.
NL e
WORD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:UID-1
401-610-055 DUMP UID
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?A = Action eld contains an error. One of these messages may follow: INVALID KEYWORD Message not allowed in a WHEN action list. ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, or one of the following errors: EXTRA KEYWORD (UID) UID is not valid in a WHEN action list. INCONSISTENT DATA (ADDR) Address range must be in ascending order. INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. RANGE ERROR (L or NL) Length specied is too long or zero. RANGE ERROR (UID) Utility ID is out of range. NG PF RL = No Good. The UID is for a process for which dumps are not permitted. = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-UID output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:ADDR DUMP:PID DUMP:PMEM DUMP:REG OP:UMEM Output Messages DUMP-UID
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:UID-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 DUMP UVAR
ID ............. DUMP:UVAR RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Dumps the contents of one or more computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) utility variables either as an immediate message or as an action associated with a breakpoint. Utility variables are used to store data temporarily. This message can also be used to dump an address range in main memory (by specifying a single utility variable and offsets) but only if the message is part of the action list for a WHEN message. If offsets are specied, the rst offset is added to the value of the contents of the utility variable and the result is interpreted as a virtual address. The number of offsets specied denes the length of the chain of virtual addresses to be accessed in this way before accessing the desired range of dump locations. For example, a single offset with value 0 uses the virtual address found in the utility variable for the dump location. NOTE: Offsets can only be used if the DUMP:UVAR message is used as an action associated with a breakpoint, since that denes a process address space for memory addressing. 2. FORMAT
DUMP:UVAR a [,OFF b][,{LNL}c][;WORD]{/!}

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Utility variable(s) (1-50) to be dumped. See User Guidelines for instructions on entering a list of variable numbers. A maximum of ve utility variables may be listed. = A single offset or list of up to ve offsets. Omission of the keyword implies no indirect addressing. Offsets are in bytes unless the WORD option is used. = The length of the dump, assumed to be in bytes unless the WORD option is used. The maximum is 128 bytes or 32 words for memory dumps, 4 bytes or 1 word for utility variable dumps. The default is 1 unless a range is explicitly specied. The actual range of addresses to be dumped is rounded out to word address boundaries. = Used to indicate that the operation should use the locations beginning c lower than the calculated address and ending at the address. The locations are used in ascending order. Usage and limitations are the same as for the L option. = Indicates that all addresses, offsets, and lengths are to be interpreted as words including addresses derived in address chains. If this option is omitted they are assumed to be byte values.
b L c
NL c
WORD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 DUMP:UVAR-1
401-610-055 DUMP UVAR
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, or one of the following errors: EXTRA KEYWORD (OFF) Indirection not allowed except as action of a WHEN. INCONSISTENT DATA (UVAR LIST + OFF) No indirection permitted with more than one utility variable listed. INCONSISTENT KEYWORDS (NL-OFF) Negative length not allowed without OFF. INPUT ERROR (OFF COUNT) Too many offsets listed. INPUT ERROR (UVAR COUNT) Too many utility variables listed. RANGE ERROR (L OR NL) Length specied too long or zero. RANGE ERROR (UVAR) Invalid utility variable number was specied. IP PF RL = In Progress. The message has been added to the WHEN action list. = Printout Follows. Followed by the DUMP-UVAR output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DUMP:ADDR DUMP:PID DUMP:PMEM DUMP:REG DUMP:UID OP:UMEM WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages DUMP-UVAR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE DUMP:UVAR-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 END WHEN
ID ............. END:WHEN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Marks the end of a list of computer Generic Access Package (GRASP) messages to be performed when a specied breakpoint condition exists. 2. FORMAT
END:WHEN!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?A ?I = Action eld contains an error. Only allowed in a WHEN action list. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error or: PUNCTUATION ERROR Exclamation point was expected. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by a WHEN output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition, or wait for previous OP:UMEM or OP:UMEM;MCH to complete.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:UMEM WHEN:PID WHEN:UID Output Messages WHEN-PID WHEN-UID
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 END:WHEN-1
401-610-055 END WHEN
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE END:WHEN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX CU
ID ............. EX:CU RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests that a computer Control Unit (CU) be exercised in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2, but also prints the command buffer contents being passed to the diagnostic driver. Format 5: Can only be used with main store diagnostic phase 95 or 96. It executes the main store diagnostic phase with user-supplied address range, refresh rate, number of failures to be collected, data pattern (phase 95), words per array to copy (phase 96), and refresh parity check time. Format 6: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 6, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
EX:CU a,CH=b[;[RAW][,UCL]]:PH c[,TLP][,{DFCIOP} d]! EX:PAUSE;CU a,CH=b:ST e! EX:LOOP;CU a,CH=b:ST f-g! EX:STEP;CU a:ST e ! EX:LDPARM;CU a,MASC a[:[SA h][,EA i][,REF j][,FNUM k][,PAT l] [,WPA m][,TIME n]]! EX:STOP;CU a,b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Member number (0-1). = Unit type and member number of the subunit beneath the CU. Valid subunit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:CU-1
401-610-055 EX CU
RAW UCL
= Print all the diagnostic failures. Default is to print the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally. NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations.
= Execute the specied phase NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent commands from Formats 2 through 5 are input.
TLP
= Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment. NOTE: It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing.
= Member number of the DFC (0-7), IOP (0-15) or Ring Peripheral Controller Node (RPCN) to be used as a helper unit. When a helper unit is not required, the specied helper unit is ignored. When a helper unit is required but the specied helper unit is inappropriate or not available, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Starting address for the MAS exercise, in hexadecimal notation. Default is 0. = End address for the MAS exercise, in hexadecimal notation. Default is all equipped memory in controller under test. = Memory refresh rate in decimal. For 3B21D default is 16 ms. Possible values are 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30 ms. = Number of failures for which data is to be collected. Default is 100. = 32-bit data pattern used in the MAS exercise (phase 95), in hexadecimal notation. Default is Oxffffffff. = Number of words per memory array to copy from the online CU, in hexadecimal notation (phase 96). Default is all words in each array. = Duration of time, in seconds, for which refresh data parity checks should be run to scan for errors in the MASC under test (phase 96). Default = 34 seconds for TN14 MASAs, 68 seconds for TN28, TN56, TN2012 MASAs, 136 seconds for TN56 MASAs with either an extended main memory or very large main memory features, 136 seconds for TN2012 MASAs with an extended main memory feature, or 272 seconds for TN2012 MASAs with a very large main memory feature. This parameter is not used for 3B21D.
e f g h i j
k l m n
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:CU-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX CU
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:CU EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX CU output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:CU-3
401-610-055 EX CU
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-CU EX-CU Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-D
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:CU-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX DCI
ID ............. EX:DCI RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Dual Serial Channel/Computer Interconnect (DCI) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:DCI a [;[RAW] [,UCL]]: PH b [,TLP] ! EX:PAUSE; DCI a: EX:LOOP; DCI a: EX:STEP; DCI a: EX:STOP; DCI a ! ST d ! ST e-f ! ST d !
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-255). = Prints all the diagnostic failures. Default is the rst ve failures. = Executes unconditionally.
NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. PH b = Executes the specied phase. = Number of the phase to be executed.
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:DCI-1
401-610-055 EX DCI
TLP
NOTE: It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing. d e f = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:DCI EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-DCI output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:DCI-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX DCI
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-DCI EX-DCI
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:DCI-3
401-610-055 EX DCI
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:DCI-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX DFC
ID ............. EX:DFC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Disk File Controller (DFC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:DFC a [;[RAW] [,UCL]]: PH b [,TLP] [,CU c]! EX:PAUSE; DFC a: ST d ! EX:LOOP; DFC a: ST e-f ! EX:STEP; DFC a: ST d ! EX:STOP;DFC a !
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-7). = Prints all the diagnostic failures. Default is to print the rst ve failures. = Executes unconditionally.
NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. b = Executes the specied phase.
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. TLP = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:DFC-1
401-610-055 EX DFC
NOTE: c
It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together as it may produce an improper TLP listing.
= (0 or 1) Member number of the CU helper unit. When a helper unit is not required, the specied helper unit is not used. When a helper unit is required but the specied helper unit is inappropriate or unavailable, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. The off-line CU is required as a helper unit when demand phase 15 is executed.
NOTE: The helper CU must be Out Of Service (OOS) and must be diagnosed as All Tests Passed (ATP) before it is used as a helper unit. d e f = Statement number that is target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-DFC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:DFC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX DFC
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:DFC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-DFC EX-DFC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:DFC-3
401-610-055 EX DFC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:DFC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX DUIC
ID ............. EX:DUIC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Direct User Interface Controller (DUIC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:DUIC a [;[RAW] [,UCL]]: PH b [,TLP] [,CONT]! EX:PAUSE; DUIC a: ST c! EX:LOOP; DUIC a: ST d-e! EX:STEP; DUIC a: ST c! EX:STOP; DUIC a!
NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. b = Number of the phase to be executed.
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. TLP = Executes the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment. It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing.
NOTE:
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:DUIC-1
401-610-055 EX DUIC
c d e
= Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:DUIC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-DUIC EX-DUIC = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-DUIC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:DUIC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX DUIC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:DUIC-3
401-610-055 EX DUIC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:DUIC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX HSDC
ID ............. EX:HSDC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a High-Speed Synchronous Data Link Controller (HSDC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:HSDC a [;[RAW] [,UCL]]: PH b [,TLP]! EX:PAUSE; HSDC a: ST c! EX:LOOP; HSDC a: ST d-e! EX:STEP; HSDC a: ST c! EX:STOP; HSDC a!
NOTE:
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:HSDC-1
401-610-055 EX HSDC
c d e
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:HSDC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-HSDC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:HSDC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX HSDC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-HSDC EX-HSDC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:HSDC-3
401-610-055 EX HSDC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:HSDC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX IOP
ID ............. EX:IOP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises an Input/Output Processor (IOP) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:IOP a [;[RAW] [,UCL]]: PH b [,TLP] [,CU c]! EX:PAUSE; IOP a: EX:LOOP; IOP a: EX:STEP; IOP a: EX:STOP; IOP a ! ST d ! ST e-f ! ST d !
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-15). Number (0-1). = Prints all the diagnostic failures. Default is the rst ve failures. = Executes unconditionally.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:IOP-1
401-610-055 EX IOP
TLP
NOTE: It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing. c = Member number of the CU helper unit (0-1). When a helper unit is not required, the specied helper unit is not used. When a helper unit is required but the specied unit is inappropriate or unavailable, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. The off-line CU is required as a helper unit when demand phase 15 is executed.
NOTE: The helper CU must be Out Of Service (OOS) and must be diagnosed as All Tests Passed (ATP) before it is used as a helper unit. d e f = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-IOP output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:IOP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX IOP
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:IOP EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-IOP EX-IOP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:IOP-3
401-610-055 EX IOP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:IOP-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX LDPARM
ID ............. EX:LDPARM RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Inputs user-supplied parameters to main store phases 95 and 96. NOTE: To use this input command, rst invoke the interactive diagnostics. For example:
EX:CU a,MASC b:ph c! This format can only be used with main store diagnostic phase 95 or 96. It executes the Main Store (MAS) diagnostic phase with user-supplied address range, refresh rate, number of failures to be collated, data pattern (phase 95), words per array to copy (phase 96), and refresh parity check time (phase 96). 2. FORMAT
EX:LDPARM;CU a,MASC b[:[SA h][,EA i][,REF j][,FNUM k] [,PAT l][,WPA m][,TIME n]]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c h i j = Member number (0-1). = Member number of the Main Store Controller (MASC) beneath the CU (0-1). = Executes the specied phase. = Starting address for the MAS exercise, in hexadecimal notation. Default is 0. = End address for the MAS exercise, in hexadecimal notation. Default is all equipped memory in controller under test. = Memory refresh rate used in the MAS exercise, in decimal. Default is 4 ms. Possible values are 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, or 60 ms. Memory devices are guaranteed to work at a refresh rate of 4 ms or less when the memory device case temperature is between 0C and 85C. = Number of failures for which data is to be collected. Default is 100. = 32-bit data pattern used in the MAS exercise (phase 95), in hexadecimal notation. Default is 0xffffffff. = Number of words per memory array to copy from the on-line CU, in hexadecimal notation (phase 96). Default is all words in each array. = Duration of time, in seconds, for which refresh data parity checks should be run to scan for errors in the MASC under test (phase 96). Default is 34 seconds for TN14 MASAs, 68 seconds for TN28, TN56, TN2012 MASAs, 136 seconds for TN56 MASAs with either extended main memory or very large main memory features, 136 seconds for TN2012 MASAs with extended main memory feature, or 272 seconds for TN2012 MASAs with very large main memory feature.
k l m n
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:LDPARM-1
401-610-055 EX LDPARM
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:CU EX:CU STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-CU EX-CU EX-LDPARM = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-LDPARM output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:LDPARM-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX LN
ID ............. EX:LN RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Link Node (LN) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by the EX:LOOP input command. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:LNx y :PH a! EX:PAUSE;LNx y :ST b! EX:LOOP;LNx y :ST c-d! EX:STEP;LNx y :ST b! EX:STOP;LNx y!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE x y a = A Ring Node (RN) group number (00-63) with explicit leading zero for group numbers less than 10. = The nodes position in the RN group (1-15). = Species the number of the phase to be executed. NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent commands from Formats 2-5 are input. b c-d = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Statement boundaries for the loop command.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE Two sequential system actions are performed in response to the input command of Format 1. 1. The LN is removed from service following the rules for the RMV:LN input message. 2. If the resultant LN major state is either OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV, an attempt is made to isolate the LN (for other major states, the diagnostic is aborted by DIAMON). When SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:LN-1
401-610-055 EX LN
the system is ready to accept subsequent interactive commands of Formats 2-5, it responds with an "EX: STARTED AT STATEMENT 1" output message. Additional sequential system actions are then performed in response to the input commands of Formats 2-5. 3. The specied diagnostic phase is run. 4. If the LN was in the active ring prior to the start of the diagnostics and was successfully isolated (in 2 above), an attempt is made to include the LN back into the active ring at the conclusion of the diagnostic execution. Otherwise, the node is left in its original ring conguration state. NOTE: The LN remains in the OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV state. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:LN STOP:DMQ Output Messages DGN-LN EX-LN
Other References: 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Diagnostics Users Guide Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:LN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX LOOP
ID ............. EX:LOOP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Performs a specied group of diagnostic tasks repeatedly. NOTE: To use this input command, rst invoke the interactive diagnostics. For example:
EX:a,[,b];ph c! This format puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. 2. FORMAT
EX:LOOP;a[,b]:ST f-g!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Unit type and member number of the unit on which interactive diagnostics was started. Valid unit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C. = Unit type and member number of the subunit, if any. Valid subunit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D. = Executes the specied phase. = Statement lower boundary of an exercise loop. = Statement upper boundary of an exercise loop.
c f g
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E = Error. Input error of undetermined type.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:LOOP-1
401-610-055 EX LOOP
?I
= Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input.
PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-LOOP output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
IM/OM References: Input Messages EX:CU EX:DCI EX:DFC EX:DUIC EX:HSDC EX:IOP EX:MHD EX:MTC EX:MTTYC EX:PAUSE EX:SCSDC EX:SDLC EX:STEP EX:STOP EX:TTYC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE EX-LOOP Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-C APP:MEM-NUM-D
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:LOOP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MHD
ID ............. EX:MHD RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Moving Head Disk (MHD) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: 2. FORMAT To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:MHD a[;[RAW][,UCL]]:PH b[,TLP]! EX:PAUSE;MHD a:ST c! EX:LOOP;MHD a:ST d-e! EX:STEP;MHD a:ST c! EX:STOP;MHD a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-255). = Print all the diagnostic failures. Default is the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally.
NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. b = Execute the specied phase.
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. TLP = Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment. It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing
NOTE:
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:MHD-1
401-610-055 EX MHD
c d e
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:MHD EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-MHD output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MHD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MHD
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MHD EX-MHD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:MHD-3
401-610-055 EX MHD
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MHD-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MT
ID ............. EX:MT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Magnetic Tape (MT) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: 2. FORMAT To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:MT a[;[RAW][,UCL]]:Ph b[,TLP]! EX:PAUSE;MT a:ST c! EX:LOOP;MT a:ST d-e! EX:STEP;MT a:ST c! EX:STOP;MT a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-255). = Print all diagnostic failures. Default is the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally.
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. TLP = Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment. It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, because it may produce an improper TLP listing.
NOTE: c
= Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE
Issue 28
EX:MT-1
401-610-055 EX MT
d e
= Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for a keyword in the stated parameter block was not found. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. RANGE ERROR Input is out of the valid range. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. Unit to diagnose must be specied. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:MT EX:LOOP Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MT EX-MT = Printout Follows. Followed by EX-MT output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:MT-3
401-610-055 EX MT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MT-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MTC
ID ............. EX:MTC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Magnetic Tape Controller (MTC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: 2. FORMAT To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:MTC a [;[RAW] [,UCL]]:PH b[,TLP][,MT c]! EX:PAUSE;MTC a:ST d! EX:LOOP;MTC a:ST e-f! EX:STEP;MTC a:ST e! EX:STOP;MTC a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Member number (0-255).
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. RAW UCL = Print all the diagnostic failures. Default is to print the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally.
NOTE: This option does not override forced early terminations. b = Number of the phase to be executed.
NOTE:
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:MTC-1
401-610-055 EX MTC
= Member number of the magnetic tape device that is to be used as a helper unit (0-255). When a helper unit is not required, the specied helper unit is ignored. When a helper unit is required but the specied helper unit is inappropriate or unavailable, the helper unit dependent tests are skipped. = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop.
d e f
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:MTC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-MTC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MTC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MTC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MTC EX-MTC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:MTC-3
401-610-055 EX MTC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MTC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MTTYC
ID ............. EX:MTTYC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Maintenance Teletypewriter Controller (MTTYC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:MTTYC a[;[RAW][,UCL]]:PH b[,TLP]! EX:PAUSE;MTTYC a:ST c! EX:LOOP;MTTYC a:ST d-e! EX:STEP;MTTYC a:ST c! EX:STOP;MTTYC a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL b = Member number (0-255). = Print all the diagnostic failures. The default is to print the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally. = Executes the specied phase. 1. This option does not override forced early terminations. 2. The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. TLP = Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
NOTES:
NOTE: The TLP and UCL parameters should not be used together, as additional test results may adversely affect the TLP listing.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:MTTYC-1
401-610-055 EX MTTYC
c d e
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:MTTYC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-MTTYC EX-MTTYC = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-MTTYC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MTTYC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX MTTYC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:MTTYC-3
401-610-055 EX MTTYC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:MTTYC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX PAUSE
ID ............. EX:PAUSE RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Runs to a specied point in a diagnostic command, and then stops. NOTE: To use this input command, rst invoke the interactive diagnostics. For example:
EX:a,[,b];ph c! This format pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. 2. FORMAT
EX:PAUSE;a[,b]:ST e!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Unit type and member number of the unit on which interactive diagnostics was started. Valid unit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C. = Unit type and member number of the subunit, if any. Valid subunit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D. = Executes the specied phase. = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed.
c e
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:PAUSE-1
401-610-055 EX PAUSE
?I
PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-PAUSE output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
IM/OM References: Input Messages EX:CU EX:DCI EX:DFC EX:DUIC EX:HSDC EX:IOP EX:MHD EX:MTC EX:MTTYC EX:SCSDC EX:SDLC EX:STEP EX:TTYC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE EX-PAUSE Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-C APP:MEM-NUM-D
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:PAUSE-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX RPCN
ID ............. EX:RPCN RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Ring Peripheral Controller Node (RPCN) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2 but also dumps the command buffer contents being passed to the IMS driver. The contents are sent to the teletypewriter. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:RPCNx 0:PH a [,b]! EX:PAUSE;RPCNx 0:ST c! EX:LOOP;RPCNx 0:ST d-e! EX:STEP;RPCNx 0:ST c! EX:STOP;RPCNx 0!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE x a = A Ring Node (RN) group number (00-63) with explicit leading zero for group numbers less than 10. = Species the number of the phase to be executed. NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent commands from Formats 2 through 5 are input. b c d-e = Helper unit to be used with this diagnostic request. = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Statement boundaries for the loop command.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE Two sequential system actions are performed in response to the input command of Format 1. 1. The RPCN is removed from service following the rules for the RMV:RPCN input message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:RPCN-1
401-610-055 EX RPCN
2.
If the resultant RPCN major state is any of OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV, an attempt is made to isolate the RPCN (for other major states, the diagnostic is aborted by DIAMON). When the system is ready to accept subsequent interactive commands of Formats 2 through 5, it responds with an "EX: STARTED AT STATEMENT 1" output message.
Additional sequential system actions are then performed in response to the input commands of Formats 2 through 5. 1. The specied diagnostic phase is run. 2. If the RPCN was in the active ring prior to the start of the diagnostics and was successfully isolated (in 2 above), an attempt is made to include the RPCN back into the active ring at the conclusion of the diagnostic execution. Otherwise, the node is left in its original ring conguration state. NOTE: The RPCN remains in the OOS, GROW, OFL, or UNAV state. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:RPCN STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-RPCN EX-RPCN
Other References: 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Diagnostics Users Guide Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:RPCN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX SCSDC
ID ............. EX:SCSDC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Scanner Signal Distributor Controller (SCSDC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. This format is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:SCSDC a[;[RAW][UCL]]:PH b[,TLP]! EX:PAUSE;SCSDC a:ST c! EX:LOOP;SCSDC a:ST d-e! EX:STEP;SCSDC a:ST c! EX:STOP;SCSDC a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-255). = Print all the diagnostic failures. Default is the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally.
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. TLP = Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
NOTE: It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:SCSDC-1
401-610-055 EX SCSDC
c d e
= Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Statement lower boundary of an exercise loop. = Statement upper boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E ?I = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:SCSDC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-SCSDC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:SCSDC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX SCSDC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-SCSDC EX-SCSDC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:SCSDC-3
401-610-055 EX SCSDC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:SCSDC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX SDLC
ID ............. EX:SDLC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Synchronous Data Link Controller (SDLC) in an interactive diagnostic mode. Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. This format is similar to Format 2 but also prints the message buffer contents being passed to the diagnostic driver. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. This format is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:SDLC a[;[RAW][,UCL]]:PH b[,TLP]! EX:PAUSE;SDLC a:ST c! EX:LOOP;SDLC a:ST d-e! EX:STEP;SDLC a:ST c! EX:STOP;SDLC a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-255). = Print all the diagnostic failures. Default is to print the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:SDLC-1
401-610-055 EX SDLC
TLP
= Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
NOTE: It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing. c d e = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. = Statement lower boundary of an exercise loop. = Statement upper boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:SDLC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-SDLC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:SDLC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX SDLC
Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-SDLC EX-SDLC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:SDLC-3
401-610-055 EX SDLC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:SDLC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX STEP
ID ............. EX:STEP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This command steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to the EX:PAUSE input command, but in the case of a CU diagnostic, it will also print the command buffer contents being passed to the diagnostic driver. NOTE: To use this input command, rst invoke the interactive diagnostics. For example:
EX:a[,b];ph c! 2. FORMAT
EX:STEP;a[,b]:ST e!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Unit type and member number of the unit on which interactive diagnostics was started. Valid unit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C. = Unit type and member number of the subunit, if any. Valid subunit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D. = Executes the specied phase. = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed.
c e
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD 1 Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD 1 The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA 1 Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD 1 A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR 1 Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E = Error. Input error of undetermined type.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:STEP-1
401-610-055 EX STEP
?I
= Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD 1 Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD 1 The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD 1 A required keyword is missing from the input.
PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= Printout Follows. Followed by an EX-STEP output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
IM/OM References: Input Messages EX:CU EX:DCI EX:DFC EX:DUIC EX:HSDC EX:IOP EX:MHD EX:MTC EX:MTTYC EX:PAUSE EX:SCSDC EX:SDLC EX:TTYC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE EX-STEP Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-C APP:MEM-NUM-D
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:STEP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX STOP
ID ............. EX:STOP RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exits from the interactive diagnostics mode. This command stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. This input message only stops the EX:LOOP command. NOTE: To use this input command, rst invoke the interactive diagnostics and the EX:LOOP command. For example: EX:a[,b];ph c! EX:LOOP;a[,b]:st f-g! 2. FORMAT
EX:STOP;a[,b]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Unit type and member number of the unit on which interactive diagnostics was started. Valid unit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-C, Table C. = Unit type and member number of the subunit, if any. Valid subunit names and member numbers are listed in the Member Numbers Appendix, APP:MEM-NUM-D, Table D. = Executes the specied phase. = Statement lower boundary of an exercise loop. = Statement upper boundary of an exercise loop.
c f g
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:STOP-1
401-610-055 EX STOP
?I
PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= Printout Follows. Followed by an EX-STEP output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
IM/OM References: Input Messages EX:CU EX:DCI EX:DFC EX:DUIC EX:HSDC EX:IOP EX:LOOP EX:MHD EX:MTC EX:MTTYC EX:SCSDC EX:SDLC EX:TTYC STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE EX-STEP Input Appendices APP:MEM-NUM-C APP:MEM-NUM-D
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:STOP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX TTYC
ID ............. EX:TTYC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Exercises a Teletypewriter Controller (TTYC). Format 1: Starts the interactive diagnostic mode. Format 2: Pauses or suspends the diagnostic execution at a specied statement number within a diagnostic phase. Format 3: Puts the diagnostic in a loop between the specied statement numbers. Format 4: Steps the diagnostic and suspends at the specied statement number. It is similar to Format 2. Format 5: Stops the looping started by EX:LOOP. NOTE: To use Formats 2 through 5, rst execute Format 1. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EX:TTYC a[;[RAW][,UCL]]:PH b[,TLP]! EX:PAUSE;TTYC a:ST c! EX:LOOP;TTYC a:ST d-e! EX:STEP;TTYC a:ST c! EX:STOP;TTYC a!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a RAW UCL = Member number (0-255). = Print all the diagnostic failures. Default is to print the rst ve failures. = Execute unconditionally.
NOTE: The phase will not be executed until subsequent messages from Formats 2 through 5 are input. TLP = Execute the Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) at the conclusion of the diagnostic. This process generates a list of suspected faulty equipment.
NOTE: It is not recommended that the TLP and UCL parameters be specied together, as it may produce an improper TLP listing. c = Statement number that is the target of the action. This statement is not executed. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:TTYC-1
401-610-055 EX TTYC
d e
= Lower statement boundary of an exercise loop. = Upper statement boundary of an exercise loop.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?I = Identication Field contains an error. General syntax error, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. ?D = Data eld contains an error. General syntax error in the data eld, followed by the parameter position and one of the following reasons: EXTRA KEYWORD Duplicate or extraneous keywords were input. INVALID KEYWORD The keyword in the stated parameter position is not a valid keyword. MISSING DATA Data required for the statement keyword was not found on the input line. MISSING KEYWORD A required keyword is missing from the input. RANGE ERROR Not a valid value for the statement parameter. ?E PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:TTYC EX:LOOP STOP:DMQ Output Messages ANALY-TLPFILE DGN-TTYC EX-TTYC = Error. Input error of undetermined type. = Printout Follows. Followed by the EX-TTYC output message. = Retry Later. The system is in an overload condition.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:TTYC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EX TTYC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EX:TTYC-3
401-610-055 EX TTYC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EX:TTYC-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC CELL CDM DS1
ID ............. EXC:CELL-CDM-DS1 RELEASE ....... 24.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Format 1: Obtain the performance measurement data collected by base-station, for each T1 equipped. Format 2: Clear the performance measurement data collected by base-station, for each T1 equipped. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
EXC:CELL a, CDM b, DS1 c, REPORT d [,HOUR e] EXC:CELL a, CDM b, DS1 c, CLEAR
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c d = Cell site number (1-600). A single cell site number is allowed. = CDM number (1-16). A single CDM number is allowed. = Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) number (1-8). Universal Radio Controller 2 (URC2) can have up to 8. = Report number: 1 Include only the current 15 minute, number of seconds into current interval, and 24 hour aggregate data. 2 Include only the specied number-of-hour-shift in the past, in 15 minute increments. 3 Include only the 24 hour data in 15 minute increments and 24 hour aggregate data. The number of seconds into current 15 minute interval shall also be specied. 4 Current measured signal level, alarm, loop mode, state, substate, mode, framing, line coding, signaling, line build out, options, chain, clock source, clock priority. e = Hour number for REPORT 2 (1-24).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG RL VERR = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met. = Retry Later. Data links to the cell site are down. = Validation Error. Input command has incorrect syntax or range.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:CELL-CDM-DS1-1
401-610-055 EXC CELL CDM DS1
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages EXC-CDM-CELL-DS1
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:CELL-CDM-DS1-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC CELL FT
ID ............. EXC:CELL-FT RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Begins execution of a functional test at a cell site. Format 1: All functional tests except single channel functional test. This format is valid for CDMA Series II, Flexent Modular Cell, Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, and Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame. For Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame, if the CDMA Test Radio Module (CTRM) is equipped all functional tests for this format are applicable; without CTRM equipped only the antenna function test is applicable. Format 2: All functional tests except single channel functional test. This format is valid for Flexent Microcell. Format 3: Single channel functional test only. This format is valid for Series II, Flexent Modular Cell, and Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame when the CTRM is equipped. Format 4: Single channel functional test only. This format is valid for CDMA Flexent Microcell.
Format 5: Receive Gain (RXGAIN) functional test only. This format is valid for CDMA Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EXC:CELL a, FT c [ CLASS j ]! EXC:CELL a [, MICRO b ], FT c [, CARRIER e ] [ CLASS j ]! EXC:CELL a, FT SC d, f, CCU g, CE h [, VORATE i ]! EXC:CELL a, MICRO b, FT SC, CCU g, CE h [, VORATE i ]! EXC:CELL a, CDM k, CBR l, FT RXGAIN
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600): A single cell site. A range (maximum number of cells in range is 32). A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses. For Format 3 and 4 only a single cell site number is allowed. b = Flexent Microcell number (1-6): A single microcell. A range (For TDMA microcells only). For Format 4, only a single microcell number is allowed.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:CELL-FT-1
401-610-055 EXC CELL FT
NOTE: c
If not specied, test will be executed on entire range of microcells (For TDMA microcells only).
= Functional test to be run: TDMA Series II: ANT [ d ] Antenna functional test. DCCH [ l ] Digital control channel radio functional test. l = Radio 0-191 (Single only). TDMA Flexent Microcell: ANT [ k ] Antenna functional test. DCCH [ k ] Digital Control Channel (DCCH) functional test. LC [ k ] Locate Channel (LC) functional test. LMT [ l ] Lightguide Microcell/Modular Cell Transceiver (LMT) functional test. NOTE: The Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) level is checked when the LMT functional test is executed. SU [ k ] Setup (SU) channel functional test. k = Digital Radio Module Number (1-5):

A single value. A range of values, if b is single value and e is not specied. If this eld is not specied then the functional test will attempt to execute on the entire range of microcells specied by b.
l = 0-20 (Single only). CDMA Series II: ANT [ d ] Antenna functional test. OC [ d ] Overhead Channel functional test. PL [ d ] Pilot Level functional test. TP [ d ] Trafc Path functional test. Generation CDMA (3G) boards. CDMA Flexent Microcell: ANT Antenna functional test. OC Overhead Channel functional test.
Not valid for Third
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:CELL-FT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC CELL FT
PL Pilot Level functional test. TP Trafc Path functional test. Not valid for 3G boards. CDMA Flexent Modular Cell and Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame: ANT [ d ] Antenna functional test. NOTE: If sector [ d ] is not specied, the test will be run on all sectors.
OC [ d ] Overhead Channel functional test. PL [ d ] Pilot Level functional test. TP [ d ] Trafc Path functional test. Not valid for 3G boards. Flexent Modular Cell 4.0: ANT [ d ] Antenna functional test. NOTE: If sector [ d ] is not specied, the test will be run on all sectors.
d e f
= Sector number (0-6). Single value, or range if used with Format 1 or 2 Functional Test (FT) option. = Carrier number (1-2). This option is valid only if option b is specied and single value of LC or SU is specied. = Flexent identier: CCC x where x = 1 - 42. CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) is applicable to Series II cells. CDM x where x = 1 - 16. CDMA Digital Module (CDM) is applicable to Flexent Modular Cells and Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame when the CTRM is equipped.
= The CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) number:

(1-7) for Series II. (1-2) for Flexent Microcell. (1-6) for Flexent Modular Cell and Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame.
= The CDMA Channel Element (CE) number: For 2G cells:

(0-9) for Series II. (0-19) for Flexent Microcell and Modular Cell.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:CELL-FT-3
401-610-055 EXC CELL FT
For 3G cells:

(0-31) for Series II. (0-63) for Flexent Microcell, Flexent Modular cell, and Flexent / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0.
i j k l
= Optional Vocoder rate (8 or 13, default is 13). = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported. = CDMA Digital Module (CDM) number (1-16). = Code Division Multiple Access Baseband Radio (CBR) number (1-6).
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages EXC-CELL EXC-CELL-ANT-TEST
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:CELL-FT-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC CELL ODPC
ID ............. EXC:CELL-ODPC RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Starts an On-Demand Pilot Strength Measurement Message Collection (ODPC) session. Please note that in order to start an ODPC session all of the targeted cells need to be online. This "starting" request will be rejected if and only if one or more cells are out-ofservice. Furthermore, if at least one cell is going through an initialization the ODPC session will not be started at the cell level, only at the Operations Maintenance Platform (OMP) level. Therefore, no data will be collected if this happens. 2. FORMAT
EXC:CELL {aa-a(a,a,...)(a,a,...,a-a)}, ODPC[, DUR b, PINT c]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600): A single cell site. A range, with a maximum number of cells in the range of 20. A list of up to 20 cells. A list and range combination, totaling no more than 20 cells. = The duration of Pilot Strength Measurement Message (PSMM) collection session. It needs to be selectable within a range of 5 to 120 minutes. The default value of the duration shall be 30 minutes if none is specied. The duration shall be selectable in 5 minute increments. = The mobile polling interval for the session. The polling interval, which is the time between pilot measurement requests to mobiles needs to be selectable within a range of 1 to 15 minutes. The default value of the polling interval will be 5 minutes if none is specied. The polling interval shall be selectable in 1 minute increments.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NA - TIME OUT = No acknowledgement. The Operations Maintenance Platform (OMP) is not responding. Possibly the On-Demand Pilot Strength Measurement Message Collection Daemon (ODPCD) is not active on the OMP. OK = Good. Request has been received by the Cell(s). Output message will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages OP:ODPC STOP:EXC-ODPC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:CELL-ODPC-1
401-610-055 EXC CELL ODPC
Output Messages EXC-CELL-ODPC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:CELL-ODPC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC CELL RTDIAG
ID ............. EXC:CELL-RTDIAG RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Executes a routine diagnostic sequence at a cell site. Format 1: For Series II cells only. Format 2: For Flexent Microcell cells only. Format 3: For Flexent Modular Cells, Flexent Modular Cell 4.0, Flexent Modular Cell 3.0 / Flexent Modular Cell 4.0 Mixed Frame, and Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) cells. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2] [3]
EXC:CELL a, RTDIAG [ b ] [; RAW ] [ CLASS e ]! EXC:CELL a, c, RTDIAG [, d ] [; RAW ] [ CLASS e ]! EXC:CELL a, c, RTDIAG [ CLASS e ]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Cell site number (1-600): A single cell site A range (maximum number of cells in range is 32) A list of cell sites separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses. = Devices to be diagnosed. The default is all devices. Series II cell only: A decimal number or a range is valid in this eld. The default is all devices. To help in diagnosing a range of equipment, the starting and ending number for each range is shown in the following table. For example, to diagnose all Voice Radios, enter 136-327. To diagnose all Setup Radios (assuming there are two sets of Setup Radios in the conguration) and Voice Radios, enter 100-327. For Series II cell with growth frame before Growth Frame 3 (G3): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cell Site Controller (CSC) 0, standby side. CSC 1, active side. Clock and Tone (CAT)/ Synchronous Clock and Tone (SCT) 0 CAT/SCT 1 CAT/SCT 2 CAT/SCT 3 CAT/SCT 4 CAT/SCT 5
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:CELL-RTDIAG-1
9 10 11 12
41 42
81 82
89 90
117 118
309 310 311
316
519 520
549
Radio Test Unit (RTU) 0. RTU 1. RTU 2. CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) 1. CCC 30. Locate radio 0. Locate radio 39. Setup radio 0. Setup radio 7. Setup radio 8 for Directional Setup only Setup radio 35 for Directional Setup only Voice radio 0. Voice radio 191. CCC 1, CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) 1. CCC 1, CCU 2. CCC 1, CCU 7. CCC 30, CCU 7. Combination of Bus Interface Unit [BIU]-Baseband Combiner/Radio [BCR]-Analog Conversion Unit [ACU] (BBA) 1. BBA 30.
For Series II cell with growth frame G3 or Rack Mount Growth Frame (Half): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CSC 0, standby side. CSC 1, active side. CAT/SCT 0 CAT/SCT 1 CAT/SCT 2 CAT/SCT 3 CAT/SCT 4 CAT/SCT 5 CAT/SCT 6 CAT/SCT 7 RTU 0.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:CELL-RTDIAG-2 Issue 28
12 RTU 1. 13 RTU 2. 14 CCC 1. 43 CCC 30. 44 Locate radio 0. 83 Locate radio 39. 84 Setup radio 0. 91 Setup radio 7. 92 Setup radio 8 for Directional Setup only 119 Setup radio 35 for Directional Setup only 120 Voice radio 0. 311 Voice radio 191. 312 CCC 1, CCU 1. 313 CCC 1, CCU 2. 318 CCC 1, CCU 7. 521 CCC 30, CCU 7. 522 BBA 1. 551 BBA 30. For Series II cell with Growth Frame 4 (G4) or Rack Mount Growth Frame (Full): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CSC 0, standby side. CSC 1, active side. CAT/SCT 0 CAT/SCT 1 CAT/SCT 2 CAT/SCT 3 CAT/SCT 4 CAT/SCT 5 CAT/SCT 6 CAT/SCT 7 CAT/SCT 8 CAT/SCT 9
13 14 15 16
51 52
91 92
99 100
127 128
319 320 321
326
571 572
607
RTU 0. RTU 1. RTU 2. CCC 1. CCC 36. Locate radio 0. Locate radio 39. Setup radio 0. Setup radio 7. Setup radio 8 for Directional Setup only Setup radio 35 for Directional Setup only Voice radio 0. Voice radio 191. CCC 1, CCU 1. CCC 1, CCU 2. CCC 1, CCU 7. CCC 36, CCU 7. BBA 1. BBA 36.
For Series II cell with Growth Frame 5 (G5) or Double Density Frame: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CSC 0, standby side. CSC 1, active side. CAT/SCT 0 CAT/SCT 1 CAT/SCT 2 CAT/SCT 3 CAT/SCT 4 CAT/SCT 5 CAT/SCT 6 CAT/SCT 7 CAT/SCT 8 CAT/SCT 9
13 14 15 16 17 18
59 60
99 100
107 108
135 136
327 328 329
334
621 622
663 c
CAT/SCT 10 CAT/SCT 11 RTU 0. RTU 1. RTU 2. CCC 1. CCC 42. Locate radio 0. Locate radio 39. Setup radio 0. Setup radio 7. Setup radio 8 for Directional Setup only Setup radio 35 for Directional Setup only Voice radio 0. Voice radio 191. CCC 1, CCU 1. CCC 1, CCU 2. CCC 1, CCU 7. CCC 42, CCU 7. BBA 1. BBA 42.

= Flexent identier: BBU x CDM x MICRO x where x = 1 - 3. Baseband Unit (BBU) is applicable to Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (CDBS) cells.
where x = 1 - 16. CDMA Digital Module (CDM) is applicable to Flexent Modular cells and Flexent Modular Cell 4.0. where x = 1 - 6. MICRO is applicable to Flexent Microcells. x can be a range if d is not specied.
= Cell site unit. If cell unit is not specied than all of the microcell units will be diagnosed. NOTE: More than one Radio (RA) can be specied. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE
Issue 28
EXC:CELL-RTDIAG-5
TDMA Flexent Microcell units only: AMP Amplier. RA x RA, Range of radios or single value, x = (1-5).
TRC TDMA radio controller. NOTE: For Series II/TDMA: MLAC devices cannot be specied.
NOTE: For Series II/CDMA PCS Minicells, all devices: Only Active or Standby devices in the range specied will be restored. All others will be ignored (skipped). NOTE: For Series II/CDMA PCS Minicells, duplexed devices: For all duplexed devices (those that have an ACT/STBY conguration), the restoral will be rejected if the devices mate is not either active or standby (to avoid outages). The request will be rejected if it is for the active unit of the pair. NOTE: For Series II/CDMA PCS Minicell all CATs Devices: Active CATs will be requested, but the restoral will always be rejected if the CAT is providing CDMA timing, to avoid disrupting CDMA calls. The request will be rejected if it is for the active unit of the pair. NOTE: For Series II/CDMA PCS Minicell, all CCCs Devices: First, CCCs in the specied range that are not supporting special purpose channels will be restored. The CCCs will be restored in increasing numerical order (that is, from smaller numbers up to larger numbers). Then, CCCs in the specied range that are supporting special purpose channels will be restored. These CCCs will be restored in decreasing numerical order (that is, from larger numbers down to smaller ones). Two passes are used to minimize special purpose channel migration. NOTE: For Series II CDMA PCS Minicell, all CCCs Devices: The order in which the CCUs in the specied range are restored is designed to minimize special purpose channel migration. The order is calculated algorithmically at execution time and, therefore, the order may appear random. RAW e = Include raw data in any diagnostic failure messages (RST-CELL) that may be printed. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF RL = Printout Follows. Request has been executed. Output message(s) will follow. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down.
Other responses have their standard meanings. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages EXC-CELL RST-CELL
401-610-055 EXC CELL TRKGRP LPBK
ID ............. EXC:CELL-TRKGRP-LPBK RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Begins a cell initiated trunk group loopback test on an Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) packet pipe. 2. FORMAT
EXC:CELL a, TRKGRPb, MEMBER c;LOOPBACK [,ENH]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Cell site number (1-600): A single cell site. = Trunk group number: 1-2000 for 5ESS DCS. c = Trunk member number: 1-1951 for 5ESS DCS. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE IP NG RL VERR 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages EXC-CELL-TRKGRP-LPBK = In Progress. Request has been sent to the cell site. Output message(s) will follow. = No Good. Necessary conditions for message execution (including a possibly unequipped cell site) were not met. = Retry Later. Data links to cell site are down. = Validation error. Input command has incorrect syntax or range.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:CELL-TRKGRP-LPBK-1
401-610-055 EXC CELL TRKGRP LPBK
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:CELL-TRKGRP-LPBK-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC ENVIR PROC
ID ............. EXC:ENVIR-PROC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this message can cause unpredictable system damage or degradation. It should not be used without expert technical assistance unless it is part of a prescribed procedure.
1. PURPOSE Executes a task as either a kernel or supervisor process. Although this command can execute user processes, EXC:ENVIR:UPROC. 2. FORMAT
EXC:ENVIR:PROC,FN "a"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = Pathname of the le to be executed. See User Guidelines for a description of pathname.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages EXC:ENVIR-UPROC OP:ST-PROCESS Output Messages EXC-ENVIR-PROC REPT-PMGR-ERROR = Printout Follows. Followed by the EXC-ENVIR-PROC output message.
Other References: 254-341-110 3B20D Computer Kernel and Basic Services Software Subsystem Description Display/Menu Page Name: CRAFT FM 01
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:ENVIR-PROC-1
401-610-055 EXC ENVIR PROC
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:ENVIR-PROC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC ENVIR UPROC
ID ............. EXC:ENVIR-UPROC RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this message can cause unpredictable system damage or degradation. It should not be used without expert technical assistance unless it is part of a prescribed procedure.
1. PURPOSE Executes a task as a user process. 2. FORMAT
EXC:ENVIR:UPROC,FN "a"[,ARGS b][,BKG][,OPL c]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Full pathname of the le to be executed. See the User Guidelines for a description of pathnames. = A single argument or a list of up to six arguments for the user process. See the User Guidelines for instructions on entering a list of arguments. Any argument containing lowercase letters or special characters must be enclosed in quotation marks. = Run the process in the background, freeing the terminal for further input messages. The default is foreground execution. = Number of segments to be output; specied in decimal. The default is 10 segments; maximum is 999. Each segment has a maximum size of 1000 bytes or 20 lines.
BKG c
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages EXC:ENVIR-PROC OP:ST-PROCESS Output Messages EXC-ENVIR-UPROC = Printout Follows. Followed by the EXC-ENVIR-UPROC output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:ENVIR-UPROC-1
401-610-055 EXC ENVIR UPROC
Other References: 254-341-110 3B20D Computer Kernel and Basic Services Software Subsystem Description Display/Menu Page Name: CRAFT FM 01
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:ENVIR-UPROC-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC KILLCALL
ID ............. EXC:KILLCALL RELEASE ....... 14.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Request that calls for a particular mobile be killed using the Enhanced Kill Call Capability (EKILLCALL) optional feature. The subscriber units Mobile Identication Number (MIN) or International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI) must be entered as a string of digits within double quotes. The command must be entered as a numeric value without quotes. For example the MIN 3125551234, the command would be entered as: EXC:KILLCALL;MIN "3125551234";CMD 1! The IMSI feature must be active in order to use Format 2. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
EXC:KILLCALL;MIN "a";CMD c! EXC:KILLCALL;IMSI "b";CMD c!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = 10-digit Mobile Identication Number (MIN). = 8- to 15-digit International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI). = The Enhanced Kill Call command. All of the commands will send a message to the Read Only Printer (ROP). See the EXC-KILLCALL output message. Legal values and there meanings: 1 Kill Call Without Automatic Message Accounting (AMA). Attempts to tear down calls for the given MIN and if successful will generate a Security AMA record for the call. 2 Kill Call With AMA. Attempts to tear down calls for the given MIN and if successful will generate a billable AMA record for the call. 3 Alert Only. Will not attempt to tear down calls for the given MIN. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E NG PF = Error. Error in format of MIN or IMSI or CMD value. = No Good. = Printout Follows. Followed by a EXC-KILLCALL output message.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:KILLCALL-1
401-610-055 EXC KILLCALL
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages EXC-KILLCALL REPT-KILLCALL
Other References: 401-612-146 Enhanced Kill Call Capability (EKCC)
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:KILLCALL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC LAESREQ
ID ............. EXC:LAESREQ RELEASE ....... 13.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Request that an Lawfully Authorized Electronic Surveillance (LAES) action request message be sent to the LAES delivery function. The maximum length of the command line arguments is 60 characters, for example: the combined length of (a + b + c <= 60). No argument can exceed 32 characters in length. If an argument exceeds 32 characters in length, an error message is returned. Digit string arguments must be entered within double quotes. For example, the string 1234567890 would be entered as: EXC:LAESREQ "1234567890"! 2. FORMAT
EXC:LAESREQ [a b c]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Alphanumeric argument. = Alphanumeric argument. = Alphanumeric argument.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E PF 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages REPT-LAESREQ = Error. Argument(s) exceeded maximum number of characters allowed per argument/ command line. = Printout Follows. See output message REPT-LAESREQ.
Other References: 401-612-209 Lawfully Authorized Electronic Surveillance
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:LAESREQ-1
401-610-055 EXC LAESREQ
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:LAESREQ-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC MRVT
ID ............. EXC:MRVT RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Initiates the Message Routing Verication Test (MRVT). The requested test is run, and the report is written to the maintenance class and/or the standard output. Format 1: ANSI Standard. NOTE: Non-local network point codes always use ANSI standard format. Format 2: Lucent Technologies. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
EXC:MRVT;PC aaabbbccc [,STPS d] [,TRACE]! EXC:MRVT;PC aaaeefccc [,STPS d] [,TRACE]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE aaabbbccc = Point code of the terminating node for the test for the ANSI Standard. aaaeefccc = Point code of the terminating node for the test for the Lucent Technologies Standard. aaa bbb ccc d ee f TRACE = Network identier. = Cluster identier. = Member identier. = Maximum number of Signal Transfer Points (STPs) the MRVT is allowed to cross (0-15). Default is 2. = Region identier. = Cluster identier. = Traces of STPs crossed during the test will be included in the output if the test was a success or partial success. If a failure occurs, and this keyword is present the TRACE will not appear; however, some error messages do contain a listing of point codes which is similar to the TRACE.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?D ?I = Data Field contains an error. Questionable Data. = Identication Field contains an error. Questionable Identier (Keyword).
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:MRVT-1
401-610-055 EXC MRVT
PF RL 5. REFERENCES
= Printout Follows. = Retry Later.
IM/OM References: Input Messages CHG:MRVT Output Messages CHG-MRVT EXC-MRVT REPT-MRVR
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:MRVT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC OFLBOOT
ID ............. EXC:OFLBOOT RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** Incorrect use of this command may interrupt operations of the system, or degrade its performance or availability. Offline boot requires a logical split of the system during which one CU and all its subunits will not be available. Note that the boot signal generated in the offline side will result in the yellow CRITICAL alarm indicator being lit. This is the expected behavior of the indicator in all bootstraps (including ofine boot). The indicator will be cleared automatically within 30 seconds.
1. PURPOSE Initiates the off-line boot procedure. This may be used to verify the integrity of boot les and data, or as the prelude for the side switch. There are some restrictions the user must follow for this input message to execute successfully:

The primary or secondary disk must be selected manually. Both Input/Output Processors (IOPs) 0 and 1 cannot be selected for the off-line side. There should be no RCV activities running. There should be no diagnostic activities running. The MTTY and ROP port selector switches must be in the AUTO position and the portswitch controller must be powered on.
2. FORMAT
EXC:OFLBOOT: [, TTY a][, APARM b][, INITLVL c][, IOPx [MAX]] [, HDWCHK][, SFTCHK][, ERRINT][, BROOT][, MINCONFIG] [, UCL d][, MONITOR][, RETROFIT][, OOS][, TRACE]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = The TTY a option is used as a pseudo Read Only Printer (ROP) on the off-line side. All of the off-line side output directed to the ROP is sent to this TTY. The valid range is 0 to 254. If the selected TTY is a UNIX system TTY, the output sent to it may be unformatted until someone logs in. The default is no TTY; the off-line ROP output will not be sent to any output device.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:OFLBOOT-1
CAUTION: By selecting the Teletypewriter (TTY) option, the Input/Output Processor (IOP) associated with it is implicitly assigned to the off-line side. b = The APARM b option is used as an application parameter for the off-line side. The range is a single alphanumeric character. This is equivalent to the function of poke 42 on the EAI page during normal boot. The default is no APARM option set for off-line side. c = The INITLVL c option is used as the UNIX RTR operating system bootstrap initialization level for the off-line side. 2 The initial CU system conguration must be ACT or STBY. The OOS option will not override this requirement. 3 Boot and load new ECD. 4 (default) Boot and load new ECD and clear Protected Application Segment (PAS). CAUTION: These levels apply to RTR initialization. Different applications may or may not support all of them. IOPx = The IOP will be removed from service in the on-line side and remain on the original off-line side until OFLBOOT is stopped. Side switching does not affect this assignment. The range (x) can be 0 through 7. If MAX is specied, all of the devices under this IOP will be equipped and made available to the off-line side except the ROP, Maintenance Teletypewriter (MTTY), and Switching Control Center (SCC). The ROP, MTTY, and SCC will be unequipped on the off-line side. CAUTION: Even with the SCC unequipped, it may perform a link switch. In this case, all EAI capabilities are functional. If MAX is not specied, only peripheral controllers under this IOP will be equipped. Peripheral units under this IOP will not be equipped. If the default option and TTY a option are selected, only TTY a will be equipped under this IOP in addition to the peripheral controllers. If oboot is a prelude to the software release transition procedure, x has to be either 0 or 1. The default is IOPx without MAX. HDWCHK SFTCHK ERRINT BROOT = Hardware checks will be inhibited for the off-line side. The default is allowed. = Software checks will be inhibited for the off-line side. The default is allowed. = Error interrupts will be inhibited for the off-line side. The default is allowed. = Backup partitions will be used for the off-line side. The default is the primary partitions. CAUTION: If a side switch is done and then the oboot procedure stopped, the system will be running on the backup partitions. A boot will be needed afterward to return to the primary (root) partition. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:OFLBOOT-2 Issue 28
MINCONFIG = Minimum conguration database will be used for the off-line side. Any subsequent side switch will not be allowed. The default is the full conguration database. d = By selecting the UCL option some application prechecks will be overridden. The default enforces all prechecks. CAUTION: Application initiated aborts will be ignored. Because the UCL option inhibits system recovery actions, it should be used only in a software release transition procedure under technical guidance. Misuse can cause call processing downtime. NOTE: Using the UCL option requires a password (d); to obtain it, seek technical assistance. The value d will change every time the UCL option is entered; thus, using the UCL option always requires contacting technical assistance. MONITOR = All off-line Processor Recovery Messages (PRMs) will be directed to the online ROP. The default case will have only off-line PRMs up to Step 4 (KBOOT) directed to the on-line ROP. RETROFIT = Recovery strategy will be modied to accommodate the software release transition. The default is normal recovery strategy. CAUTION: The RETROFIT option should be used only during a manual software release transition scenario. It has a strong impact during the side switch: allows the side switch to occur even if the switch precheck fails. This can result in a level 3 boot depending on the nature of switch precheck failure. Misuse of this option can cause call processing downtime. OOS TRACE = If specied, units selected for the off-line side may be initially Out Of Service (OOS). The default requires those units to be ACT or STBY. = This option should be used by authorized technical personnel only. It is for trouble shooting purposes, and will generate a signicant amount of undocumented trace messages. The default is no trace message generated. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?A ?D ?E ?I IP NG RL = Action eld contains an error. = Data eld contains an error. = Error. = Identication Field contains an error. = In Progress. = No Good. = Retry Later. Some activity is running, that is incompatible with EXC:OFLBOOT; for example, rcvecd. SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:OFLBOOT-3
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages STOP:OFLBOOT SW:OFLBOOT Output Messages EXC-OFLBOOT REPT-OFLBOOT STOP-OFLBOOT SW-OFLBOOT
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:OFLBOOT-4 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC SRVT
ID ............. EXC:SRVT RELEASE ....... 7.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests initiation of the Signaling Connection Control Part (SCCP) Routing Verication Test (SRVT). The requested test will be run, and the report written to the maintenance class and/or the standard output. Format 1: ANSI Standard. Format 2: Lucent Technologies Standard. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
EXC:SRVT;TYPE a,DIGITS b[,TPC cccdddeee][,NTSP f][,TRACE]! EXC:SRVT;TYPE a,DIGITS b[,TPC cccggheee][,NTSP f][,TRACE]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = Translation type (0-254). = Digits in the global title, limited to 3, 6, 9, 10, or 12 digits. (for example, an 800 number).
cccdddeee = ANSI Standard Translation Point Code (TPC) to which the initiator should address and send an SRVT message. If not included, the default is chosen by Common Network Interface (CNI) based on the translation type. CNI will send more than one SRVT message if more than one unique TPC is returned. cccggheee = Lucent Technologies Standard TPC to which the initiator should address and send an SRVT message. If not included, the default is chosen by CNI based on the translation type. CNI will send more than one SRVT message if more than one unique TPC is returned. ccc ddd eee f gg h = Network identier = Cluster identier = Member identier = Maximum number of Translation Signaling Points (TSPs) allowed to be crossed (1-15, default 1). = Region identier = Cluster identier
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:SRVT-1
401-610-055 EXC SRVT
TRACE
= If this keyword is present, a list of TSPs crossed during the test will be included in the output. If this keyword is not present, a list of TSPs crossed will be included only when an error occurs and one or more TSPs had been crossed when the error occurred. No TRACE word will appear if not requested.
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE PF RL 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages CHG:SRVT OP:TPC Output Messages CHG-SRVT EXC-SRVT OP-TPC = Printout Follows. = Retry Later.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:SRVT-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC SSDUPD
ID ............. EXC:SSDUPD RELEASE ....... 14.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a Shared Secret Data (SSD) update of a particular mobile for the Authentication Capability. The Mobile Identication Number (MIN) or International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI) must be entered as a string of digits within double quotes. For example, for a MIN of 3125551234, the command would be entered as: EXC:SSDUPD;MIN "3125551234"! The IMSI feature must be active in order to use Format 2. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
EXC:SSDUPD;MIN "a"! EXC:SSDUPD;IMSI "b"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = 10-digit Mobile Identication Number (MIN). = 8- to 15-digit International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E IP NG = Error. Error in format of Mobile number. = In Progress. See output message REPT-SSDUPD. = No Good. May be one of the following: AUDB entry (AUTH form) not found for this MSID Another Authentication for MSID in progress Authentication inactive; check FAF MSID not found in SUB form Max. No. of Authentication requests in progress Mobile handed off to another MSC Mobile in state not allowed for Auth. Operation Mobile on cell incapable of Authentication Mobile on MSC incapable of Authentication xxx Resource shortage xxx is the resource in question.) = Retry Later. May be one of the following: AUDB entry (AUTH form) not found for this MSID Another Authentication for MSID in progress Authentication inactive; check FAF MSID not found in SUB form Max. No. of Authentication requests in progress Mobile handed off to another MSC Mobile in state not allowed for Auth. Operation
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:SSDUPD-1
401-610-055 EXC SSDUPD
Mobile on cell incapable of Authentication Mobile on MSC incapable of Authentication xxx Resource shortage xxx is the resource in question. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages REPT-SSDUPD
Other References: 401-612-041 Authentication
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:SSDUPD-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC UCHALL
ID ............. EXC:UCHALL RELEASE ....... 14.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Requests a Unique Challenge of a particular mobile for the Authentication Capability. The Mobile Identication Number (MIN) or International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI) must be entered as a string of digits within double quotes. For example, for a MIN of 3125551234, the command would be entered as: EXC:UCHALL;MIN "3125551234"! The IMSI feature must be active in order use Format 2. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
EXC:UCHALL;MIN "a"! EXC:UCHALL;IMSI "b"!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = 10-digit Mobile Identication Number (MIN). = 8- to 15-digit International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E IP NG = Error. Error in format of Mobile number. = In Progress. See output message REPT-SSDUPD. = No Good. May be one of the following: AUDB entry (AUTH form) not found for this MSID Another Authentication for MSID in progress Authentication inactive; check FAF IMSI inactive;check FAF MSID not found in SUB or VLR form Max. No. of Authentication requests in progress Mobile handed off to another MSC Mobile in state not allowed for Auth. Operation Mobile on cell incapable of Authentication Mobile on MSC incapable of Authentication xxx Resource shortage xxx is the resource in question.) SSD not shared for this MSID; cannot perform UC = Retry Later. May be one of the following: AUDB entry (AUTH form) not found for this MSID Another Authentication for MSID in progress Authentication inactive; check FAF IMSI inactive;check FAF MSID not found in SUB or VLR form Max. No. of Authentication requests in progress
RL
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:UCHALL-1
401-610-055 EXC UCHALL
5. REFERENCES
Mobile handed off to another MSC Mobile in state not allowed for Auth. Operation Mobile on cell incapable of Authentication Mobile on MSC incapable of Authentication xxx Resource shortage xxx is the resource in question.) SSD not shared for this MSID; cannot perform UC
IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages REPT-UCHALL
Other References: 401-612-041 Authentication
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:UCHALL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 EXC UCL
ID ............. EXC:UCL RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Causes the user shell to accept an input message that it previously rejected because it was not represented in the input message catalog database. When operating in the full capability mode, the user shell will reject any input message that is not represented in the Input Message (IM) catalog database, with an error acknowledgement. Consequently, a missing or erroneous entry in the IM catalog will cause the user shell to reject the associated input message, even if it is typed correctly. If this should occur, the user can force the user shell to accept the message and attempt to execute it by entering the EXC:UCL command immediately following the error acknowledgement. This command affects only the message immediately preceding the rejected input message. It will not cause the user shell to re-execute a successful message or a message with a syntax error, and it has no effect on any subsequent message. If it is used to force the user shell to execute an invalid input message, the invalid message will be rejected by the program that processes it. This command may be used only when the shell is operating in the full capability mode. It will be rejected if the shell is operating in the partial capability mode or limp mode. 2. FORMAT
EXC:UCL!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE See Purpose. 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG = No Good. The command has been rejected for one of the following reasons: OK EXC:UCL INVALID IN PART MODE CFTSHL CANNOT EXECUTE EXC:UCL ITSELF NO PREVIOUS COMMAND AVAILABLE PREVIOUS COMMAND HAD A SYNTAX ERROR
= Good. Followed by the command to be executed, its acknowledgement, and any resulting output messages. Refer to the manual page for the previous command.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 EXC:UCL-1
401-610-055 EXC UCL
Output Messages None.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE EXC:UCL-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 FRCHO CELL RA
ID ............. FRCHO:CELL-RA RELEASE ....... 22.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE This message is only valid for Radio Cluster Server (RCS) cells. Force a call handoff to another free voice radio on the same logical cell face or to a specic voice radio located either on the same cell or a different cell on the same Digital Cellular Switch (DCS). This message can free up a specic voice radio to perform diagnostics or to move a call onto a voice radio which is suspected of being bad. NOTE: This message is valid for a trunk group and member that is vocoder relocated (Vocoder is In the Switch [VIS]). You must use this message rather than the FRCHO:DCS-TRKGRP command. This message moves a call which is active on a particular cell and voice radio (source radio) to any other free radio on the same logical cell face or to a specic radio (destination radio) on the same cell or a different cell on the same DCS. The UCL option can be allow or deny subsequent handoff requests. If the destination radio is not specied, the call will be handed off to any other free radio on the same face. If the destination radio is specied and that radio is idle, the call will be handed off to that radio. The handoff will be denied if: 1. No destination radio is given and all of the radios on the same logical face as the source radio are busy.
2. The destination radio specied is not idle. 3. The source radio is already in the progress of performing a handoff or is any other state in which a handoff is normally not allowed. 2. FORMAT
FRCHO:CELL a[, MICRO b], RA c, CARRIER d [,UC e] [; CELL f[, MICRO g], RA h, CARRIER i [,UC j] [;UCL]] [ CLASS k]!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b c = Source cell site number (1-600). = Source microcell number (1-6). = Source cell site radio number: 1-192 for Series II (SII) cells. 1-5 for Radio Cluster Server (RCS) cells. = Source RCS cell site carrier number (1-2). = Source cell site user channel number (1-3). This option is required if c is a digital radio. This option is not allowed if c is an analog radio.
d e
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 FRCHO:CELL-RA-1
401-610-055 FRCHO CELL RA
f g h
= Destination cell site number (1-600). = Destination RCS microcell number (1-6). = Destination cell site radio number: 1-192 for SII cells. 1-5 for RCS cells. = Destination RCS cell site carrier number (1-2). = Destination cell site user channel number (1-3). This option is required if h is a digital radio. This option is not allowed if h is an analog radio. = Deny all handoff requests until another forced handoff request without the UCL option is issued. UCL must be used with a destination argument. = Overriding output message class (151-213). This option may be used only if the Virtual System Output Message Routing feature is supported.
i j UCL k
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E NG = Error. Necessary condition for execution of request not met. DCS or trunk identication likely not valid. = No Good. May be one of the following reasons: Invalid input. Feature not active. Requested trunk not in use. Destination Trunk is not idle. Call is in an invalid state for handoff. NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF = Printout Follows. Request has been acknowledged. Output message will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages FRCHO-CELL-RA
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE FRCHO:CELL-RA-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 FRCHO DCS TRKGRP
ID ............. FRCHO:DCS-TRKGRP RELEASE ....... 14.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Force a call handoff to another free voice radio on the same logical cell face or to a specic voice radio located either on the same cell or a different cell on the same Digital Cellular Switch (DCS). This message can free up a specic voice radio to perform diagnostics or to move a call onto a voice radio which is suspected of being bad. NOTE: This message is not valid for a trunk group and member that is vocoder relocated (Vocoder is In the Switch [VIS]). You must use the FRCHO:CELL-RA command. This message moves a call which is active on a particular cell and voice radio (source radio) to any other free radio on the same logical cell face or to a specic radio (destination radio) on the same cell or a different cell on the same DCS. The UCL option can be allow or deny subsequent handoff requests. If the destination radio is not specied, the call will be handed off to any other free radio on the same face. If the destination radio is specied and that radio is idle, the call will be handed off to that radio. The handoff will be denied if: 1. No destination radio is given and all of the radios on the same logical face as the source radio are busy.
2. The destination radio specied is not idle. 3. The source radio is already in the progress of performing a handoff or is any other state in which a handoff is normally not allowed. 2. FORMAT
FRCHO:DCS a, TRKGRP b, MEMBER c[[; TRKGRP d, MEMBER e][;UCL]] [ CLASS f]!

3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = DCS number (1-16). = Source cell site trunk group number: 1-2000 for 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS). c d = Source cell site trunk member number (1-192). = Destination cell site trunk group number: 1-2000 for 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS). e UCL = Destination cell site trunk member number (1-192). = Deny all handoff requests until another forced handoff request without the UCL option is issued. UCL must be used with a destination argument.

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 FRCHO:DCS-TRKGRP-1
401-610-055 FRCHO DCS TRKGRP
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE ?E NG = Error. Necessary condition for execution of request not met. DCS or trunk identication likely not valid. = No Good. May be one of the following reasons: Invalid input. Feature not active. Requested trunk not in use. Destination Trunk is not idle. Call is in an invalid state for handoff. NG - VIRTUAL SYSTEM OUTPUT MESSAGE ROUTING FEATURE NOT ACTIVE = No Good. The CLASS option was used but its Virtual System Output Message Routing feature had not been turned on. PF = Printout Follows. Request has been acknowledged. Output message will follow.
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None. Output Messages FRCHO-DCS-SRC-TRKGRP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE FRCHO:DCS-TRKGRP-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 FRMV LN
ID ............. FRMV:LN RELEASE ....... 8.0 and later TYPE .......... Input
**WARNING** This command can cause signaling point isolation, isolating the ofce and interrupting Common Channel Signaling (CCS) message processing, by removing the last Link Node (LN) of a set. Use it only when it is necessary to override the safety checks of the RMV:LN command.
1. PURPOSE Forces removal of the specied node from service, regardless of the state of the link, mate, or of other nodes.
If the node (except Ring Peripheral Controller [RPC]) major state is ACT, the node (except RPC) is in the active ring segment, and the Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) subsystem is not initializing at a level higher than 1A, then an attempt is made to remove the node (except RPC) from service. If successful, the LN major state is changed to OOS and the node itself is placed in the quarantine state. When a node is manually removed, it becomes the responsibility of the craft to restore the node to service. This command does not use the Maintenance Input Request Administrator (MIRA) queue, so the OP:DMQ and STOP:DMQ commands do not apply to it and it may be executed ahead of previously entered commands in the MIRA queue. Due to the nature of this command, Network Services Division (NSD) ofces are required to conrm command execution. NSD ofces will be prompted with an "ARE YOU SURE <Y/N>?" query. If an afrmative response ("Y" or "y") is entered within 10 seconds, then the command will be executed; otherwise, the command will not be executed. 2. FORMAT
FRMV:LNa b!
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a b = A Ring Node (RN) group number (00-63) with explicit leading zero for group numbers less than 10. = The nodes position in the RN group (1-15).
4. SYSTEM RESPONSE NG RL = No Good. The request was not accepted; the reason will follow. = Retry Later. The FRMV:LN command cannot execute at this time; the reason will follow.
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 FRMV:LN-1
401-610-055 FRMV LN
5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages DGN:LN RMV:LN RST:LN Output Messages DGN-LN FRMV-LN RMV-LN RST-LN
Other References: 254-303-110 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Input Messages Manual 254-303-111 3B20D and 3B21D PDS Output Messages Manual 401-661-045 Common Network Interface (CNI) Ring Maintenance - Diagnostic Users Guide Section
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE FRMV:LN-2 Issue 28
401-610-055 HELP
ID ............. HELP RELEASE ....... 23.0 and later TYPE .......... Input 1. PURPOSE Displays list of all the commands that are valid on Technician Interface Command Line Interface (TICLI), with some syntax information. This command will either display a list of all the commands or a set of commands, based on the option specied with the command. 2. FORMAT
[1] [2]
HELP ALL HELP a
3. EXPLANATION OF MESSAGE a = One of following command verbs: ABT ALW AUD BKUP CFR CLR COMMIT COPY CREATE DEL DELETE DGN DNLD DUMP EXC FRCHO INH INIT LABLE LOAD MON MOVE OCNS OP RESET RESTART RMV RST SELECT SEND SET STOP
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 HELP-1
401-610-055 HELP
SW SWITCHBACK SWITCHOVER UPD VER WRITE 4. SYSTEM RESPONSE List of all commands or a list of commands for a specic verb. 5. REFERENCES IM/OM References: Input Messages None Output Messages None
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE HELP-2 Issue 28

401 610 055v1

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

401 610 055v1

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) Release 25.

0 Input Messages Volume 1 ABTHELP

Copyright 2005 Lucent Technologies

Mandatory Customer Information

Lucent TechnologiesProprietary See notice on rst page

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 TABLE OF CONTENTS

ID ............. TABLE-OF-CONTENTS TYPE .......... Input

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 TABLE-OF-CONTENTS-1

401-610-055 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE TABLE-OF-CONTENTS-ii Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

1.3 Documentation on the Web . 1.4 1.5 1.6

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-i

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

This page intentionally left blank.

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-ii Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

ID ............. ABOUT-THISDOCUMENT TYPE .......... Input

Chapter 1 About This Document

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-2 Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-3

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-4 Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-5

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-6 Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-7

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-8 Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-9

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

This page intentionally left blank.

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-10 Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

ABT:AMATAPE-ECP ABT:ECP-AUD ABT:VCA-AUD ALW:AMA-AUTOST ALW:AMA-AUTOST-ECP ALW:AMA-SESSION ALW:AMA-SESSION-ECP ALW:CELL

ALW:CELL-MLG ALW:ECP-AUD ALW:LSLTRC ALW:RCMS ALW:RNC-ABREVC ALW:VCA-AUD AUD:CELL

AUD:ECP-NAME AUD:VCA-NAME BKUP:DATABASE CFR:CELL CLEAR:RNC-GICC COPY:AMATAPE COPY:AMATAPE-ECP COPY:DB

COPY:RNCDB CREATE:RCS DELETE:RCS DUMP:CELL-AUTH-FAIL EXC:CELL-RTDIAG FLUS:CELL GET:RNC-ABREVC

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE Issue 28 ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-11

401-610-055 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE ABOUT-THIS-DOCUMENT-12 Issue 28

Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks August 2005